Look Inside. Jack Andraka - Vidéo - INTEL
Look Inside. Jack Andraka - Vidéo - Manuels - INTEL
INTEL sur FNAC.COM
- Revenir à l'accueil
VIDEO
Ajoutée le 16 janv. 2014
L'histoire de Jack Andraka (15 ans) qui, après avoir vu son oncle son oncle perdre la vie au cancer du pancréas, a inventé une méthode pour détecter ce cancer à ses débuts, un accomplissement qui lui a remporté le Grand Prix au Salon International de Science et L'Ingénierie (ISEF) en 2012.
Voir également :
Brochure_journées_ré..> 18-Dec-2011 08:50 1.8M
INTEL-All-Wi-Fi-is-N..> 01-Apr-2015 14:58 2.5M
INTEL-Aspera-FASP-Sp..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 641K
INTEL-CLC-Genomics-W..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 644K
INTEL-Education.htm 23-Mar-2015 18:56 646K
INTEL-Fiche-produit-..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 1.9M
INTEL-Find-the-Best-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 560K
INTEL-Finding-an-app..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 2.0M
INTEL-Glossaire.htm 24-Mar-2015 05:59 923K
INTEL-Intel-Code-of-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 629K
INTEL-Intel-Edison-G..> 01-Apr-2015 14:57 2.5M
INTEL-Intel-Educatio..> 01-Apr-2015 15:02 2.0M
INTEL-Intel-Xeon-Pro..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 640K
INTEL-LSI-incorpore-..> 01-Apr-2015 15:01 2.0M
INTEL-Linux-Tutorial..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.5M
INTEL-Look-Inside-In..> 01-Apr-2015 14:57 2.5M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.6M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.5M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:59 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-Insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-Manuel-d-insta..> 01-Apr-2015 14:59 2.3M
INTEL-Pentium-Proces..> 01-Apr-2015 15:04 1.9M
INTEL-Processeur-Int..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 628K
INTEL-Processeurs-ov..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 670K
INTEL-Processeurs-ov..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 679K
INTEL-Release_Notes_..> 01-Apr-2015 15:02 2.0M
INTEL-Ressources-tec..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 628K
INTEL-Salesforce-Dis..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 641K
INTEL-Telemedicine-S..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 560K
INTEL-Texas-Advanced..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 641K
INTEL-University-of-..> 23-Mar-2015 18:57 641K
INTEL-Videos-Tech-10..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 712K
INTEL-Videos-Tech-10..> 23-Mar-2015 18:55 722K
INTEL-Xeon-Processor..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 641K
INTEL-download.intel..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 679K
INTEL-download.intel..> 23-Mar-2015 18:56 712K
INTEL-download.intel..> 01-Apr-2015 15:04 1.9M
INTEL-intelbxrts2011..> 01-Apr-2015 14:58 2.5M
INTEL-intelthermalso..> 01-Apr-2015 15:00 2.3M
INTEL-motherboards-s..> 01-Apr-2015 15:01 2.2M
INTEL-rts2011ac_ther..> 01-Apr-2015 14:56 2.6M
INTEL-x25e_high_perf..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 1.9M
INTEL-x25e_high_perf..> 01-Apr-2015 15:03 2.0M
INTELdocumentation.htm 26-Jan-2012 18:19 7.3M
getting_started_ampl..> 18-Dec-2011 08:49 2.1M
getting_started_c.pdf 18-Dec-2011 08:50 85K
mklman.pdf 18-Dec-2011 08:55 18M
Recherche par catégories :
Imprimantes Téléphones
GSM Informatique
Ordinateurs Galaxy
Photo TV
Electroménager
Vidéos :
Samsung Mobile :
SAMSUNG MEMORY - MEMOIRE :
Tutoriels :
Samsung, vidéos en français :
Intel® Server Raid Controller
RAID Configuration Utility (RCU)
Revision 1.1
July 2000
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 2 of 2
Revision History
Date Rev Modifications
02/13/00 1.0 Initial Release
07/20/00 1.1 Update to include general instructions current RAID product.
Intel Corporation 2000
Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel products. No license, express or implied, by
estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in
Intel's Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel
disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or
warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or
other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, or life sustaining
applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice.
The server product may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to
deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Xeon, Celeron and MMX are trademarks of Intel
Corporation.
* Third-party brands and names are the property of their respective owners
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 3 of 3
RAID Configuration Utility
The Raid Configuration Utility (RCU) is a BIOS based utility used to configure a RAID
volume prior to OS installation. The RAID Configuration Utility is designed to allow
you to easily create the most fault tolerant volume upon which to install the operating
system. The RCU is designed to create one volume for the host operating system, and
therefore contains only a subset of the RAID configuration features. The RCU is limited
to the creation of one RAID volume across all available drives. It can also be used to
mark drives that will not be used in the RAID volume as pass-through. These drives can
later be changed to be non-pass-through drives after the volume has been created. Full
RAID configuration is available from the following two utilities.
• The Storage Console application is the primary management tool and provides all
RAID configuration options (including creation of more that one RAID volume).
It is installed following OS installation and is HTML based. For instructions on
using Storage Console, please refer to the appropriate chapter in the User’s
Manual for the RAID product being installed.
• The RAID Recovery / Update Utility can also be used to create and manage
arrays. It is accessed from a floppy disk that is created using the CD that shipped
with the RAID controller product. The CD is bootable and will boot to a menu
with a “Make Diskettes” option, or diskettes can be made using Microsoft*
Windows’ autorun feature. Additional information is available in the User’s
Manual for the RAID product being installed.
Use the RAID Configuration Utility to:
• Create and configure a RAID Volume.
• Display Volume information.
• Delete a RAID Volume.
• Reset an Entire RAID configuration.
• Display Help Text.
• Format disks.
• Pass-through disks to the OS.
• Select a boot device.
The RAID Configuration Utility.
Volume Reset
If drives have previously been used as part of a RAID array, it may be necessary to reset
the volume information prior to the creation of an array or pass through configuration.
This task can be accomplished from within the RAID Configuration Utility (RCU). The
following steps describe the volume reset process.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 4 of 4
1. During the system boot-up the message “Press Ctrl C to run the RAID
Configuration Utility” appears in the display. New or previously used drives are
scanned for previous installations; it can take up to 5 minutes for this message to
appear. Press Ctrl-C when this message appears. A screen similar to the following
will display.
Figure 1 RCU Main Menu
2. If the drives attached to the RAID controller have previously been used, you may
wish to reset the entire configuration. This will result in all volumes and spares
on all disks to be lost, any previously installed OS or data will be removed.
Choose delete RAID volume, a screen similar to the following will display.
Figure 2 Reset Entire Configuration
3. Choose reset entire configuration. Confirm with a yes when prompted. You will be
prompted a second time to confirm the operation, choose yes. You will be notified
when the operation is complete.
Pass Through Disk Creation
Pass-through refers to a drive that is not controlled by the RAID firmware and thus
cannot be a part of a RAID volume even though it is physically attached to the SRCU21.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 5 of 5
The drive is available to the operating system as an individual disk. Use this option only
if you have drives attached to the RAID controller that you do not wish to include as part
of a RAID array. Follow the steps below for pass through drive creation.
1. Access to the RCU can be obtained by pressing CNTL-C as prompted during POST
display. The main menu depicted in Figure 3 will display.
Figure 3 Custom Configuration Menu
2. Select “Custom Configuration” and press the Enter key. A screen similar to figure 4
below will be displayed.
Figure 4 Pass Through Main Menu
3. Choose “Define Pass Through Disks” and press the Enter key. A screen similar to
figure 5 will display.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 6 of 6
Figure 5 Select Pass Through Disk
4. Highlight the disk to be configured as a pass-through drive and press Enter.
5. An X will appear next to the drive selected as depicted in figure 6.
Figure 6 Pass Through Drive Selection
6. Highlight the Submit option and press Enter. The confirmation screen will be
displayed as shown in figure 7.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 7 of 7
Figure 7 Pass Through Confimation
7. Highlight Yes and press Enter to confirm the selection. A screen similar to the
following is displayed with the message “Disk Pass Through in progress. Please
Wait”.
Figure 8 Pass Through Progress
8. After completion, the message screen appears similar to figure 9.
Figure 9 Pass Through Complete
9. Press any key. Press enter to return to the Main Menu. The Main Menu will now
show the configuration of a pass through disk and drives available for inclusion in
an array as depicted in Figure 10.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 8 of 8
Figure 10 Main Menu
With the pass-through drive(s) defined, you are ready to proceed with Volume and Array
configuration.
Volume Creation.
Volume creation automatically assigns available drives to an array and then creates a
volume on that array with the appropriate RAID level. The number of drives present in
your system determines the RAID options that are allowed. The following list highlights
the RAID options and required number of drives.
• One allows creation of RAID 0 (Striping) Volumes.
• Two drives allows creation of RAID 0 or RAID 1 (Mirroring) Volumes
• Three drives allows creation of RAID 0, RAID 1, or RAID 5 (Striping with
Parity) Volumes
• Four or more drives allows creation of RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10
(Mirrored and Striped) volumes, and the creation of global hot spares.
The RCU is designed for configuration of the first drive array on the system. It includes
a standard configuration option as well as an option for custom configuration. For more
information on RAID configuration options, refer to the RAID product User’s Manual.
Steps to configure a standard RAID volume are listed below.
1. Enter the RAID Configuration Utility by simultaneously pressing the CNTL-C keys.
The main menu will be displayed as shown below.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 9 of 9
Figure 11 RCU Main Menu
2. Choose “Create RAID Volume” and press the Enter key. The menu in figure 12
will be displayed.
Figure 12 Volume Creation
3. If only two drives were available, the only options available would be for RAID 0
and RAID 1. Since three drives are available we can create a RAID 5 Volume by
pressing enter on the RAID 5 option above. A screen similar to the following with
then be displayed.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 10 of 10
Figure 13 Creation Options
4. You may now name the volume by overtyping in the space containing the label
“volume1”. The name you choose must be 15 characters or less.
5. In addition, you may choose the volume size; the system will default to the largest
size. Remember that parity storage takes space. You will lose the space equivalent
to one drive. In the example above, we have three - 2GB drives but space available
is 4GB due to parity.
6. If you have more than three drives you can specify one as a hot spare. This option
will be displayed on the menu when a drive is available. Designation of a hot spare
provides an empty drive to automatically replace a drive that has failed.
7. You can also designate the volume as a boot device.
8. Choose submit and press enter. You will be presented with a confirmation screen as
in figure 5.
Figure 14 Confirm Volume Creation
9. Choose “Yes” and press the Enter key. The volume will then begin the initialization
process as indicated on the graphic below.
Intel RAID Controllers RAID Configuration Utility (RCU) July 2000
Page 11 of 11
Figure 15 Initialization Progress
10. At the initialization progress screen, you can choose to allow the initialization to
continue or choose to exit. Although it is advisable to complete the initialization
prior to installation of the OS, you can choose to exit. Initialization will continue in
the background, even if the system is rebooted.
11. Additional RAID volumes can be configured from the OS using Storage Console, or
from the Advanced Configuration Utility available on the CD that shipped with the
RAID Controller.
With drives attached to the RAID controller configured as part of an array, or set as pass
through, you are now ready to begin the OS installation. Refer to the Quick Start Guide
or Product User’s Manual for more information on OS installation.
http://download.intel.com/support/network/sb/intel_ethernet_10gbaset.pdf
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
Intel® Ethernet Server Adapters deliver excellent results for SANs, without proprietary components
Overview
Data-driven business operations and regulatory data-retention requirements have
driven up data-storage needs among businesses of all sizes, making SANs a standard
component of IT infrastructures. In particular, virtualized servers benefit dramatically
from SAN functionality, in areas such as virtual machine (VM) storage and live migration.
Alongside traditional Fibre Channel networks, a growing proportion of SAN adopters
find iSCSI connectivity compelling, particularly because it uses Ethernet, which is a
standardized, widely deployed, and well-understood technology. Using iSCSI to transmit
block-level storage commands over Ethernet networks adds benefits in terms of cost
and simplicity, and Intel is committed to providing the most advanced solutions in the
industry for iSCSI and other unified networking technologies.
Intel is the industry’s leading supplier of Ethernet adapters, and the broad product line
of Intel Ethernet Server Adapters provides the state of the art in simple, reliable, costeffective
iSCSI connectivity. Optimizations for the native iSCSI support provided by the
OS help ensure stability and simplicity by eliminating the need for proprietary hardware
and software. At the same time, hardware-based acceleration features speed iSCSI
traffic, and assists in the Ethernet controller increase throughput in virtualized servers.
Simplify iSCSI Connectivity
The broad range of Intel® Ethernet
Server Adapters provides the easiest
and most cost-effective way to
connect servers to iSCSI SANs.
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters
use the native iSCSI initiators
integrated in the operating system,
are optimized for virtualized
environments, and include
hardware acceleration features
across the entire product line.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Intel® Ethernet Server Adapters offer compelling value to IT organizations because they
are designed to meet the growing requirements for server connectivity to storage area
networks (SANs). This paper examines some of the trends that have led to that growth
of Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) SANs and the standards-based
technologies that make Intel Ethernet Server Adapters ideally suited to connect
servers to them.
Next, the paper demonstrates key performance-oriented features of Intel Ethernet
Server Adapters, such as the use of operating system (OS)-native iSCSI initiators and
hardware-based acceleration. It then introduces optimizations throughout the hardware
and software virtualization stack that complete the picture of Intel® Ethernet as the
iSCSI connectivity solution-of-choice for IT.
Finally, the paper introduces the outstanding throughput that Intel has achieved using
this hardware without the expense and complexity of proprietary iSCSI offloads. In sum,
the paper demonstrates how using Intel Ethernet Server Adapters for iSCSI presents a
superior solution over proprietary solutions.
January 2010
Version 1.0
WHITE PAPER
Intel® Ethernet Server Adapters
SANs and Virtualization
Intel® Ethernet Server Adapters:
Ideal for iSCSI
The ubiquity of Ethernet in the data
center means that no new topology
needs to be added to the environment to
support iSCSI. The network connectivity
to support iSCSI SANs can share existing
server adapters, use dedicated adapters
identical to the ones already in use for
local area network (LAN) traffic, or a
combination of both. Likewise, adding
iSCSI to existing switching infrastructures
does not require the addition of new
types of equipment. The technologies
used for the associated networking, such
as IP address configuration and routing,
are well understood by administrators.
IT organizations broadly prefer Gigabit
Ethernet (GbE) and 10GbE Intel Ethernet
Server Adapters for iSCSI because of the
advantages they offer:
•Native OS support for dependable
simplicity and lower costs. Avoiding
proprietary initiators, TCP/IP stacks, and
management tools reduces the number
of vendors involved in iSCSI solutions,
lowering complexity to help alleviate the
possibility of human error and decrease
operational overhead.
•Consistent, reliable performance.
Using Intel Ethernet Server Adapters
in iSCSI solutions combines high
throughput, intelligent hardware-based
offloads with native iSCSI initiators,
and stable hardware while leaving
processor cycles available for
application workloads.
•Next-generation virtualization
support. Intel Ethernet Server Adapters
implement the hardware assists in
Intel® Virtualization Technology for
Connectivity (Intel® VT-c) to accelerate
I/O in virtualized servers.
Intel provides all of this functionality
across its Ethernet adapter product
line and at a lower cost than dedicated,
proprietary iSCSI Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs). Using Intel Ethernet Server
Adapters for iSCSI SAN traffic offers
mature, standards-based technology
instead of unpredictable, proprietary
alternatives.
Native OS Support for Dependable
Simplicity and Lower Costs
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters are
engineered to use the native iSCSI
initiators, TCP/IP, and network stacks built
into OSs, including Microsoft Windows*,
Linux*, and VMware ESX*. Intel works
with OS providers to ensure robust
optimized support and ease of use. These
native initiators are broadly tested using
multiple generations of OSs, storage
disk systems, OS configuration tools, and
other applications to ensure reliability.
That design precept removes the need for
proprietary, special-purpose hardware or
software that would add complexity to
the environment and potentially interfere
with management tools and other
applications.
Standardizing on Intel Ethernet Server
Adapters for iSCSI allows IT to use a
single initiator, TCP/IP stack, and set of
management tools and IT policies. Easier
server provisioning, lower likelihood of
human error, and simpler management
enable lower capital and operational
expenditures. That standardization also
allows IT to avoid the disparate sets
of tools that result from assembling
solutions from a variety of vendors.
In addition, the native OS initiators, such
as the Microsoft iSCSI initiator, have
consistently delivered advanced features
that either are not available from or
have limited functionality in proprietary
initiators. Examples include multipathing
solutions (MPIO), the ability to establish
multiple connections per session (MCS),
and IPsec. Moreover, native OS initiator
support for the CRC-32 Digest instruction
set included in the Intel® Xeon® processor
5500 series (discussed later) avoids the
transmission of data in a vulnerable state
to a proprietary iSCSI offload adapter.
Table of Contents
Executive Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Intel® Ethernet Server Adapters:
Ideal for iSCSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Native OS Support for Dependable
Simplicity and Lower Costs. . . . . . . . 2
Extending the Value of Centralized
Data Storage with Remote Boot. . . . 3
Consistent, Reliable Performance
across the Product Family. . . . . . . . . 3
Hardware-based Native iSCSI
Initiator Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Optimizations for
Multicore Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Platform Advancements. . . . . . . . . . . 4
Advanced Support
for Virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Performance Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Conclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
2
The majority of server iSCSI connections
today use the integrated native OS
initiators, and the integration of the
initiator with the OS greatly simplifies
the establishment of an iSCSI connection.
For example, these are the simple setup
steps required to use iSCSI connections in
Microsoft Windows Server* 2008:
1. Install Windows Server 2008.
2. Set up your target(s).
3. From Control Panel, launch the iSCSI
Initiator utility.
4. From the Discovery tab, add your target.
5. From the Targets tab, select the target,
and then click Log On.
6. After logging on, from the Bound
Volumes/Devices tab, bind all volumes.
7. Partition or format the disk as needed.
8. Start using your new networkconnected
iSCSI volume.
In contrast to that simplicity, offload
engines and other proprietary solutions
force SAN administrators to rely on
hardware vendors to provide specialpurpose
iSCSI initiators. Many of these
unproven initiators require frequent
firmware updates and reboots, have
unpredictable compatibility across
different applications, and are supported
on only a limited number of adapter types.
Moreover, most HBAs force the SAN
administrator to rely on a proprietary
TCP/IP stack, the critical link between the
host server and the network. OS vendors
have hardened and ensured the standards
compliance of their native TCP/IP stacks
over many years, making them robust
and dependable. As a result, most SAN
administrators are rightly reluctant to
take the unnecessary risk of moving from
trusted, OS-provided TCP/IP stacks to
unfamiliar, proprietary ones.
Many management applications are also
designed to use the native TCP/IP stack in
Windows or Linux. Therefore, offloading
to a proprietary stack can defeat certain
optimizations that have been made to
those management applications or even
limit their reach in terms of their ability
to manage particular systems. More
specifically, issues may arise with adapter
teaming, as well as security or monitoring
applications. Not surprisingly, support
for proprietary software stacks by open
source OSs and hypervisors can be
particularly limited.
A later section shows how Intel Ethernet
Server Adapters use this native OS
support and intelligent hardware offloads
to deliver outstanding iSCSI performance.
Extending the Value of Centralized
Data Storage with Remote Boot
Using Intel® iSCSI Remote Boot, an IT
administrator can build an OS image and
start the server from a disk maintained on
the remote storage array instead of from
a locally attached hard disk. Maintaining
OS images on the SAN with Intel iSCSI
Remote Boot enhances many of the
benefits of the SAN, including greater
centralized data storage and efficiency,
as well as improved backup and disk
utilization.
In the past, a network boot or pre-boot
execution environment (PXE) server was
required to manage the remote boot
process. Intel Ethernet Server Adapters
store boot code in their local memory
and work with native boot support in the
OS to attach directly to the target SAN
storage unit during the power on and
boot stage. After boot, the adapter passes
control, authentication, and security
credentials to the native OS iSCSI initiator.
This process can be accomplished without
requiring additional management servers,
further simplifying the topology. This
approach is in contrast to that of some
iSCSI offload vendors that provide a
proprietary boot feature, which requires
administrators to accommodate a
specialized, proprietary process that is
likely not as mature as the native iSCSI
boot provided by most OSs.
Decoupling the OS image from the
physical server with Intel iSCSI Remote
Boot enables a consolidated virtualized
environment that can be centrally
managed with the following benefits:
•More efficient provisioning and
maintenance. Managing OS images from
a centralized console is more efficient
than doing so on distributed servers.
•Reduced hardware and associated
power requirements. Decoupling
storage from the physical server
eliminates the need for RAID cards and
local storage.
•Improved disaster recovery.
Virtual disks can be replicated to
another physical location, removing
the dependence on systems at the
primary site.
Intel has worked with major OS vendors
to provide remote boot capabilities with
native OS iSCSI initiators. Intel iSCSI
Remote Boot is designed to work with
most major OSs, including Microsoft
Windows Server and most Linux
distributions.
Consistent, Reliable Performance
across the Product Family
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters provide
enterprise-class drivers that work
together with the native iSCSI initiators
to deliver consistent, outstanding iSCSI
performance while reducing processor
utilization across GbE and 10GbE products.
The breadth of Intel’s offerings enables
IT organizations to increase performance
and lower costs by tailoring the network
connectivity solution to their specific
needs, assisted by advanced technologies.
3
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
3
Optimizations for Multicore Servers
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters are designed to seamlessly scale workloads across multicore systems, whereas offload engine-based
HBAs are constrained by the limited headroom of the offload engine itself. With the current very fast rate of growth in multicore
processor performance, servers have much greater headroom to support the application over the life of the server.
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters also feature key capabilities to load-balance and distribute packet processing across multiple execution cores:
Hardware-based Native iSCSI Initiator Acceleration
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters include a number of hardware features that accelerate iSCSI traffic and improve data processing
on multicore processor-based servers. Intelligent hardware offloads deliver iSCSI performance that exceeds the performance
demonstrated by leading iSCSI HBAs that offload iSCSI processing to a proprietary engine.
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters deliver specific benefits for processing iSCSI traffic, as summarized in the following table:
Features Benefits
Receive-side coalescing aggregates packets on incoming traffic flows to reduce processor interrupts
and direct memory access (DMA) memory copies Reduces processor utilization
TCP segmentation offload breaks up chunks of data to be sent on the network in a hardware-based
process instead of in software
Increases throughput and lowers
processor utilization
Checksum offload receives the segmented packets from the TCP offload block and calculates
the checksum
Increases throughput and lowers
processor utilization
Direct memory access enables data copy by the chipset instead of the processor Moves data more efficiently through
the server, improving throughput
Direct cache access allows the Ethernet controller to place data directly into processor cache, reducing
cache misses Improves application response times
Data center bridging enables better traffic prioritization over a single interface, as well as advanced
means for shaping traffic on the network to decrease congestion.
Provides the no-drop Ethernet fabric needed
for storage traffic
Features Benefits
Receive-and-transmit queues in the controllers allow network traffic streams to be distributed into
queues associated with specific processor cores Improves processor efficiency
Receive-side scaling directs packets to different queues in the adapter without the need for reordering
and selects a processor to handle packet flow Improves processor efficiency
Extended Message-Signaled Interrupts (MSI-X) allow multiple interrupts to be handled simultaneously
and load-balanced across multiple processor cores Improves processor efficiency, reduces latency
Interrupt moderation reduces the number of interrupts the processor needs to handle, primarily through
adapter support for Large Send Offload and Large Receive Offload Improves processor efficiency, reduces latency
4
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
4
512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1M
0
200,000
400,000
600,000
800,000
1,000,000
IOPS
I/O Size (Bytes)
Intel® 82599 10 Gigabit Ethernet Controller Single Port Read/Write IOPS Performance
One Million IOPS
Figure 1. iSCSI read/write performance on the Intel® 82599 10 Gigabit Ethernet Controller, expressed in terms of IOPS (I/O operations per second).1
Platform Advancements
10GbE Intel Ethernet Server Adapters
support data center bridging (DCB) in
hardware to provide the lossless or nodrop
Ethernet fabric needed for storage
traffic. This set of standards enables
better traffic prioritization over a single
interface as well as an advanced means
for shaping traffic on the network to
decrease congestion.
iSCSI traffic also benefits from the
CRC32-C instructions supported in the
Intel Xeon processor 5500 series and
the upcoming next-generation Intel
Xeon processor-based server platform
for the expandable server segments.
Data integrity checking with CRC32 has
historically been very processor-intensive,
and many IT organizations chose not to
use it. Because CRC32-C can be enabled
without undue burden on the processor,
SAN administrators can use it to improve
data integrity while accelerating
processing, relative to prior generations.
Both Windows Server 2008 and ESX 3.0
and later include support for this feature.
Architectural enhancements on these
new Intel® server platforms, including
PCI Express* Gen 2, an integrated
memory controller, and Intel® QuickPath
Interconnect, greatly increase the
scalability of 10GbE. Previous-generation
platforms did not scale beyond
approximately 17 Gbps because of
architectural limitations. Conversely, the
architecture of the Intel Xeon 5500 series
processor-based server allows it to scale
up to nearly 50 Gbps or four GbE ports.
This level of throughput scalability will
be put to good use by today’s evolving
dynamic, virtualized data centers.
Advanced Support for Virtualization
Virtualization drives the need for added
SAN connectivity to allow the advantages
that originate from remote boot, live
migration, and related virtualized usage
models. Intel Ethernet Server Adapters
offer virtualization optimizations that
directly benefit iSCSI implementations.
In conventional virtualization
implementations, the hypervisor abstracts
the I/O devices and shares those
hardware resources among multiple VMs.
To route traffic coming from a shared I/O
device, a virtual switch (vSwitch) within
the hypervisor sorts incoming packets
based on the destination VM and then
delivers them accordingly. This sorting and
grouping done in the hypervisor consumes
processor cycles, negatively impacting
overall network I/O.
Virtual Machine Device Queues (VMDq)
technology, a component of Intel VT-c,
relieves the hypervisor of this overhead
and accelerates I/O traffic in virtualized
servers by performing data sorting in the
Ethernet controller. VMDq technology
makes use of multiple queues in the
network device. With VMDq, data packets
are sorted as they enter the network
adapter, and packets going to the same
destination VM are grouped together in
the same queue. The packets are then
sent to the vSwitch, which directs them
to their respective destinations. VMDq is
supported in VMware ESX and Microsoft
Hyper-V*.
Performance Results: 1 Million IOPS
Testing in Intel labs achieved one million
bi-directional average transmit-andreceive
I/O operations per second (IOPS)
at block sizes of 512 bytes,1 without
proprietary iSCSI offloads. Shown in
Figure 1, this result using 10GbE Intel
Ethernet Server Adapters and Intel
Xeon processor 5500 series-based
servers represents new levels of iSCSI
performance.
This level of performance, attained using
the native iSCSI initiator in Windows
Server 2008 R2, is approximately twice
that achieved using previous-generation
solutions.2
5
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
5
In real-world implementations, typical
IOPS performance is much lower than
these benchmarks and is limited by a
number of factors, including application
threading, as well as storage target
processor and disk speeds. At these
lower IOPS levels, processor utilization
is typically quite low, thanks in part
to recent increases in processor
performance.
In addition, Intel Ethernet Server Adapter
assists such as receive-side coalescing and
TCP segmentation offload help reduce
processor utilization. Platform features
including receive-side scaling and MSI-X
help accelerate throughput.
By contrast, solutions based on
proprietary offload engines may show
little if any improvement in IOPS on
new hardware platforms (although
processor utilization may improve).
This characteristic reflects the inherent
limitations to throughput placed on
the overall solution by proprietary
offload engines.
In addition to the outstanding IOPS results
shown in Figure 1, the results in Figure
2 show full 10GbE line-rate throughput
at I/O sizes of 8 KB to 64 KB, which
correspond to the most prevalent realworld
cases.1 At these I/O sizes, processor
utilization falls to relatively low levels.
Figure 2. iSCSI read/write performance on the Intel® 82599 10 Gigabit Ethernet Controller, expressed in terms of throughput.1
512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1M
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Throughput (Gbps)
I/O Size (Bytes)
Intel® 82599 10 Gigabit Ethernet Controller Single Port Read/Write Throughput Performance
6
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
6
Learn more: www.intel.com/go/ethernet
Contact your Intel reseller to buy: premierlocator.intel.com
Conclusion
Intel remains committed to providing
industry-leading support for unified
networking. With its support for native
initiators, hardware acceleration features,
and optimizations for virtualized I/O,
Intel Ethernet Server Adapters are the
most reliable, cost-effective, and easyto-use
solutions for iSCSI connectivity.
These features enable Intel Ethernet
Server Adapters to achieve new levels of
iSCSI performance without the need for
complicated, proprietary offloads. Intel
Ethernet solutions are fully optimized
through all layers of the solution stack,
from the processor silicon out, including
servers and server adapters. Together
with Intel’s industry-leading spirit of
collaboration with both commercial and
open source software providers, the Intel
Ethernet Server Adapter product family is
broad and deep enough to meet all your
connectivity needs.
7
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
7
Simple, Reliable Performance for iSCSI Connectivity
1 Test Configuration: Iometer v. 2006.7.27, number of managers = 10 (1/VM), number of workers/manager = 5, (total number of workers) = 50, number of LUNs/worker = 1, number of
outstanding I/Os = 90, IO size = 512B-1MB, MTU = 1500.
SUT: Intel® Shadycove, Intel® Xeon® processor W5580 (8 M Cache, 3.20 GHz, 6.40 GT/s Intel® QPI), Memory - 24 GB DDR3, BIOS - S5500.86B.01.10.0038, Windows Server* 2008 R2
x64, 10 VMs with 2 GB allocated RAM.
Network Configuration: Cisco Nexus* 5020, Niantic 82599EB Connected @ 10 Gbps.
Storage: Starwind 4.0 iSCSI Soft Target connected @ 10 Gbps.
2 Test Configuration: Iometer 2004.07.30, number of managers = 1, total number of workers = 12, number of LUNs/worker = 1, number of outstanding I/Os = 4, IO size = 512B-64K, MTU = 1500.
SUT: Intel® Xeon® processor 5300 series (8 M Cache, 3.0 GHz), Memory – 8 GB 667MHz, Windows Server* 2008 x64.
Network Configuration: Cisco Catalyst* 6509, Intel 82598 10 Gigabit Controller Connected @ 10 Gbps.
Storage: Wintarget* iSCSI Soft Target connected @ 10 Gbps.
INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE,
TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH
PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL
PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT,
COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED NOR
INTENDED FOR ANY APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR.
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions
marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them.
The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this information. The products described in this document may contain design defects or errors
known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request. Contact your local Intel sales office or your
distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel
literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or by visiting Intel’s Web Site http://www.intel.com/.
Copyright © 2009 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel, the Intel logo, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Printed in USA 0110/BY/MESH/PDF Please Recycle 322580-001US
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4
Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10
Gigabit Server Adapters
• Excessive complexity. Large numbers
of server adapters and the attendant
cabling make administration less efficient
and increase the likelihood of connection
and configuration errors.
• High equipment costs. Using many GbE
network adapters requires the purchase
of the actual adapters, as well as the use
of large numbers of motherboard slots,
switch ports, cables, and so on.
• Increased energy use. Powering many
individual GbE server adapters and
switch ports directly increases power
usage and raises server-room cooling
requirements.
OVERVIEW
Advances in Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit (10GbE) Server Adapters and VMware vSphere* 4
enable migration away from legacy Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) networking. As the industry
move toward 10GbE becomes more mainstream, IT organizations are considering
its use for initiatives such as LAN/SAN consolidation and unification. Many of these
organizations have found success with the practical first step of converging multiple
LAN connections using 10GbE. This transition lowers the number of physical connections
required, thus reducing overall complexity and cost, while providing advanced security
and traffic segmentation.
Networking virtualized hosts with GbE is typically based on relatively large numbers of
dedicated physical connections, which are used both to segregate different types of
traffic and to provide sufficient bandwidth. Using 10GbE connectivity can help overcome
shortcomings of this approach, including the following:
This paper provides network architects
and decision makers with guidance for
moving from GbE to 10GbE networking
in their virtualized data centers. It begins
with a review of the current state of
the typical virtualized data center and
discusses some of the challenges and
opportunities associated with maximizing
the value of virtualization. Next, it
explores the factors that underlie the
excessive complexity associated with GbE
networking and describes how 10GbE
can address that complexity. It then
provides some best practices for achieving
optimal networking results in virtual
infrastructures. Finally, it addresses some
concerns decision makers might have with
regard to security and performance.
February 2010
Version 1.0
Today’s Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit
Server Adapters can greatly
reduce the level of networking
complexity in VMware vSphere* 4
environments, relative to Gigabit
Ethernet implementations.
Advances in both Intel Ethernet
and vSphere allow dramatic
simplification of the environment
without compromising areas
such as security and traffic
segmentation.
WHITE PAPER
Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit
Server Adapters
VMware vSphere* 4
The Benefits of Virtualization
Come with Limitations
The original value proposition embraced
by many organizations when they first
considered virtualizing their data centers
still holds. By consolidating servers, they
sought to take optimal advantage of the
growing headroom from increasingly
powerful servers while also reducing
infrastructure requirements. The key
benefits these organizations sought to
derive included the following:
• Efficiency and simplicity. Having fewer
physical hosts in the data center creates
a simpler topology that can be more
effectively managed.
• Lower capital costs. Buying smaller
numbers of servers and cutting the
requirements for the supporting
infrastructure, such as switches,
racks, and cables, potentially delivers
very large capital savings.
• Reduced operating expenses.
Lower power consumption and cooling
requirements combined with greater
agility from simplified provisioning and
novel usage models such as automated
load balancing can cut day-to-day costs.
Unfortunately, the success achieved by
many organizations in attaining these
benefits is limited by the complexity that
has arisen from networking virtualized
servers with GbE.
Today’s Reality: Undue Complexity
from Gigabit Ethernet Solutions
The common practice when deploying
virtualized hosts has been to segregate
network functions onto dedicated GbE
ports, adding additional ports as demand
for bandwidth increases. These ports
are often installed in pairs to provide
network failover, doubling the number of
ports required per host. As a result, the
number of network ports has a tendency
to become bloated, leading to excessive
complexity.
This practice came about in large part
because many administrators did not
fully understand or have experience with
server virtualization. The following factors
also played a role:
• Physical server network connection
paradigms were extended to virtual
infrastructures, leading to the use
of separate physical connections to
segment traffic and provide required
bandwidth.
• Previous VMware versions required
a dedicated connection for virtual
machines (VMs) and for each of multiple
traffic types, such as VM traffic, service
console connections, IP storage, VMware
VMotion*, and so on.
• Security procedures have often led
network administrators to physically
segregate traffic onto separate ports
since 802.1Q trunking to the host was
not allowed and was reserved for switchto-switch
traffic.
Table of Contents
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The Benefits of Virtualization
Come with Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Today’s Reality: Undue
Complexity from Gigabit Ethernet
Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Solution: Refresh
Infrastructure with 10 Gigabit
Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Best Practices to Achieve
Near-Native Performance. . . . . . . . . . 4
Best Practice 1: Use Virtual
Distributed Switches to
Maximum Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Best Practice 2: Streamline
Configuration Using Port Groups. . . 5
Best Practice 3: Use VLANs with
VLAN Trunking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Best Practice 4: Use Dynamic
Logical Segmentation Across
Two 10GbE Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Best Practice 5: Proactively
VMotion VMs Away from
Network Hardware Failures. . . . . . . . 5
Customer Concerns: Security, Traffic
Segmentation, and Bandwidth. . . . . 6
Conclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
VMware
VMotion*
VMware vNetwork
Distributed Switch
Port #1 vSSO
10Gb
Port #2
10Gb
1Gb 1Gb
APP
OS
APP
OS
APP
OS
Service
Console
APP
OS
Virtual Switch
Virtual NICs
Physical NICs
Port
Groups
APP
OS
APP
OS
APP
OS
VMware
VMotion*
Service
Console
APP
OS
1Gb 1Gb 1Gb 1Gb 1Gb 1Gb 1Gb 1Gb
Figure 1. Virtual switch with multiple physical GbE server adapters.
In many cases, hosts must have as
many as eight or more GbE network
ports to satisfy these requirements. As
shown in Figure 1, several port groups
are configured to support the various
networking functions and application
groupings, and in turn each port group
is supplied with one or more physical
connections. Virtual LAN (VLAN) tags may be
implemented on these port groups as well.
This topology raises the following issues:
• Complexity and inefficiency. Many
physical ports and cables make the
environment very complex, and the large
number of server adapters consumes a
great deal of power.
• Difficult network management.
The presence of eight to 12 ports per
server makes the environment difficult
to manage and maintain, and multiple
connections increase the likelihood of
misconfiguration.
•Increased risk of failure. The presence
of multiple physical devices and cable
connections increases the points of
potential failure and overall risk.
• Bandwidth limitations. Static
bandwidth allocation and physical
reconnections are required to add more
bandwidth to the GbE network.
The practice of using large numbers
of GbE connections has persisted even
though 10GbE networking provides the
ability to consolidate multiple functions
onto a single network connection, greatly
simplifying the network infrastructure
required to support the host.
Part of this continuing adherence
to a legacy approach is due to the
outdated understandings of security
and networking. For example, some
administrators believe that dedicated
VMotion connections must be physically
separated because they mistrust
VLAN security and question bandwidth
allocation requirements. Others assume
that discrete network connections are
required to avoid interference between
network functions.
Although these types of concerns may
have been well founded in the past,
modern switching equipment and server
adapters have addressed them. Now is the
time to take advantage of Intel Ethernet
10GbE Server Adapters.
The Solution: Refresh Infrastructure
with 10 Gigabit Ethernet
The complexity issue and other limitations
associated with GbE described above can
be addressed by consolidating all types of
traffic onto 10GbE connections.
With the advent of dynamic server
consolidation and increasingly powerful
servers such as those based on Intel’s
Nehalem architecture, more workloads
and applications than ever before are
being consolidated per physical host. As a
result, the need is even greater for highbandwidth
10GbE solutions. Moreover,
Figure 2. VMware vNetwork Distributed Switch with 10GbE server adapters for network traffic
and GbE server adapters for service console traffic.
features that provide high performance
with multicore servers, optimizations for
virtualization, and unified networking with
Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and
iSCSI make 10GbE the clear connectivity
medium of choice for the data center.
Moving from multiple GbE to fewer
10GbE connections will enable a
flexible, dynamic, and scalable network
infrastructure that reduces complexity
and management overhead, and provides
high availability and redundancy. Figure
2 shows an installation analogous to that
in Figure 1, but using 10GbE connectivity
and two GbE ports for the service
console. This installation makes use of
the VMware vNetwork Distributed Switch
(vDS) feature (see Best Practice 1). Using
vDS provides the same basic functions
as standard virtual switches, but they
exist across two or more clustered ESX
3
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
or ESXi hosts. Using a hybrid model of
standard virtual switches and vDS allows
for management of the vDS if the switch
fails and keeps service console traffic on
a physically separate network connection.
Figure 3 takes the topology shown in
Figure 2 one step further and shows the
installation with only 10GbE connections.
The obvious advantage of the
10GbE solution is that it reduces the
overall physical connection count,
simplifying infrastructure management
considerations and the cable plant. Moving
to a smaller number of physical ports
reduces the wiring complexity and the
risk of driver incompatibility, which can
help to enhance reliability. For additional
reliability, customers may choose to
use ports on separate physical server
adapters. The new topology has the
following characteristics:
• Two 10GbE ports for network traffic,
using NIC teaming for aggregation or
redundancy
• One to two GbE ports for a dedicated
service console connection on a
standard virtual switch (optional)
• SAN converged on 10GbE, using iSCSI
• Bandwidth allocation controlled by
VMware ESX*
This approach increases operational agility
and flexibility by allowing the bandwidth
to the host and its associated VMs to
be monitored and dynamically allocated
as needed. In addition to reducing the
number of GbE connections, the move
from a dedicated host bus adapter to Intel
Ethernet Server Adapters with support
for iSCSI and FCoE can take advantage of
10GbE connections.
Best Practices to Achieve
Near-Native Performance
The methods and techniques in this
section provide guidance during network
design that help engineers achieve high
performance. The diagram in Figure 4
summarizes these best practices.
Best Practice 1: Use Virtual Distributed
Switches to Maximum Effect
The VMware vDS feature manages traffic
within the virtual network, providing
robust functionality that simplifies the
establishment of VLANs for the functional
separation of network traffic. This virtual
switch capability represents a substantial
step forward from predecessor
technologies, providing the following
significant benefits to administrators:
• Robust central management removes
the need to touch every physical host for
many configuration tasks, reducing the
chance of misconfiguration and improving
the efficiency of administration.
• Bandwidth aggregation enables
administrators to combine throughput
from multiple physical server adapters
into a single virtual connection
VMware
VMotion*
Port #1
10Gb
Port #2
10Gb
APP
OS
APP
OS
APP
OS
Service
Console
APP
OS
VMware vNetwork
Distributed Switch
Figure 3. VMware vNetwork Distributed Switch with 10GbE server adapters for both network
and service console traffic.
VMware
VMotion*
VMware vNetwork
Distributed Switch
Primary Traffic:
Virtual Machines (VMs)
Secondary Traffic:
VMKernel
VLAN Trunk Traffic:
A, B, C, D, E
Primary Traffic:
VMKernel
Secondary Traffic:
Virtual Machines (VMs)
VLAN Trunk Traffic:
A, B, C, D, E
VM Traffic
VLAN-A
VMKernel
VM Traffic
VLAN-B
VMKernel
VMware
VMotion*
VLAN-D
VMKernel
Serivce Console
VLAN-E
VM Traffic #2
VLAN-C
Port #1
10Gb
Port #2
10Gb
Port
Groups
APP
OS
APP
OS
APP
OS
Service
Console
APP
OS
Figure 4. Summary of best practices for network design using VMware vSphere* 4 and Intel®
Ethernet 10GbE Server Adapters.
4
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
•Network failover allows one physical
server adapter to provide redundancy for
another while dramatically reducing the
number of physical switch ports required.
• Network VMotion allows the tracking of
the VM’s networking state (for example,
counters and port statistics) as the VM
moves from host to host.
Placing the service console network
separate from the vDS can help avoid
a race condition and provides additional
levels of redundancy and security.
For a deeper discussion around best
practices for the use of virtual switches,
see the following resources:
• Ken Cline’s blog entries on The Great
vSwitch Debate1
• The VMware white paper, “What’s New in
VMware vSphere™ 4: Virtual Networking”2
Best Practice 2: Streamline
Configuration Using Port Groups
Port groups provide the means to apply
configuration policies to multiple virtual
switch ports as a group. For example, a
bi-directional traffic-shaping policy in a
vDS can be applied to this logical grouping
of virtual ports with a single action by
the administrator. If changes need to be
made in response to a security event or
a change in business requirements, this
capability enables faster response, and in
normal day-to-day operations it enables
greater efficiency by augmenting physical
resources with more sophisticated virtual
ones.
Best Practice 3: Use VLANs with
VLAN Trunking
The use of VLANs allows network traffic
to be segmented without dedicating
physical ports to each segment, reducing
the number of physical ports needed
to isolate traffic types. As stated in
VMware’s paper “vSphere Hardening
Guide: ESX and Virtual Networking”3
(rev B: public draft January 2010): “In
general, VMware believes that VLAN
technology is mature enough that it can
be considered a viable option for providing
network isolation.”
The following traffic should be configured
on dedicated VLANs:
• Service console should be on a
dedicated port group with its own
dedicated VLAN ID; use port 2. An option
to connect to a dedicated management
network that is not part of a vDS can
provide additional benefits but does
add additional network connections and
network complexity.
• VMotion should be on its own dedicated
port group with its own dedicated VLAN
ID; use port 2 in a two-port configuration.
• IP-based storage traffic (iSCSI,
NFS) should be on its own port group
in the vDS; use port 2 in a two-port
configuration.
• VM traffic can use one or more VLANs,
depending on the level of separation that
is needed between the VMs. The VMs
should not share the service console,
VMotion, or IP-based storage traffic
VLAN IDs and should use port 1 in a
two-port configuration.
802.1Q VLAN trunking provides the
ability to combine multiple VLANs onto
a single wire. This capability makes the
administration of VLANs more efficient
because the grouping can be managed as
a unit over one physical wire and broken
into dedicated networks at the switch
level instead of at each host.
Best Practice 4: Use Dynamic Logical
Segmentation Across Two 10GbE Ports
If two physical 10GbE ports are used, as
shown in Figure 3, place administrative,
live migration, and other back-end
traffic onto one physical connection and
VM traffic onto the other. To provide
redundancy between the two links,
configure the network so that the traffic
from each link fails over to the other if
a link path failure with a NIC, cable, or
switch occurs.
This approach provides redundancy,
increases bandwidth because both
ports are being utilized, and can provide
additional security through physical
isolation in a non-failed mode. While the
use of two 10GbE ports helps to reduce
solution cost, some organizations may
prefer the use of four 10GbE ports to
provide additional bandwidth, additional
redundancy, or simply to interface with
existing network infrastructure.
Best Practice 5: Proactively
VMotion VMs Away from Network
Hardware Failures
Install 10GbE ports in pairs so they can
be configured in a redundant manner to
enhance reliability. If two 10GbE ports
are used, then run VM traffic primarily
on port 1 and all other traffic on port 2.
This design uses the bandwidth of both
10GbE ports and can be configured in a
redundant manner for network failover.
Note that, in the event of a failover, all
traffic would be travelling over the same
wire. Because the duration of that status
should be as short as possible, the host
and management software should be
reconfigured to migrate all VMs off the
host with VMotion as quickly as possible,
to maintain redundancy and help ensure
reliability.
Using live migration in conjunction with
network monitoring software helps to
ensure uninterrupted operation of the
VM(s) while minimizing the amount of
time that they operate on a physical host
where redundancy has been compromised.
5
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
To enhance redundancy further, a second
option is to move to a four 10GbE port
configuration that provides the two
primary ports a dedicated backup or
redundant port on separate adapters.
The same practice of immediately moving
VMs to a new host in case of failure
(and lost redundancy) should be used.
This configuration can provide greater
bandwidth to the VMs and the VMKernel
traffic types or physical separation of
traffic types if required.
Customer Concerns: Security, Traffic
Segmentation, and Bandwidth
Concerns reported by customers
regarding consolidation of connections
onto 10GbE include security and traffic
segregation with dedicated bandwidth for
critical networking functions.
When GbE server connections are
consolidated, a way to isolate connections
in the absence of dedicated physical
connections is still necessary. This
requirement reflects the need for
security between different types and
classes of traffic, as well as the ability to
ensure adequate bandwidth for specific
applications within the shared connection.
Security Considerations: Isolating Data
among Traffic Streams
In our 10GbE model, VLANS provide
some of the basic security features
required in the installation. Security of
VLANs has been debated, tested, and
written about extensively. A review of
the documentation suggests strongly
that when properly implemented, VLANs
provide a viable option for network
isolation. For further inquiry on this
subject, see the VLAN Security White
Paper4 from Cisco Systems or vSphere
Hardening Guide: ESX and Virtual
Networking5 from VMware. In particular,
note the following safeguards that help to
protect data:
group, additional server adapters must
be added (assuming additional PCI* slots
are available). Additionally, the bandwidth
allocated in the example cannot be used
by any other traffic; it simply goes to waste.
On the other hand, handling the port
group with bandwidth from a shared
10GbE server adapter allows additional
bandwidth to be allocated for traffic
spikes more seamlessly. Furthermore,
multiple port groups can share the
bandwidth headroom provided by the
server adapter. The resource can be
automatically and dynamically reallocated
as various port groups are accessed
by their associated VMs. Dedicated
bandwidth is not needed for any one
port group as long as the host network
connection never reaches saturation. This
method is very similar to how VMware
shares processor resources, allowing VMs
to burst processor utilization as needed
due to the likelihood that many VMs won’t
burst at the same time.
The Intel Networking Test lab confirms
the viability of replacing multiple GbE
ports with a pair of 10GbE ports in the
configuration mentioned in this paper. A
number of VMs were installed on each of
two hosts, and the process of migrating
all of the VMs on one host to the other
and back again was timed. This testing
was done with no other work or traffic
flows on the systems. As a point of
comparison, network traffic flows were
started to all of the VMs on each host,
and the migration exercise was run again.
The result was that the time required
to migrate the VMs was only minimally
affected.1
• Logical partitioning protects individual
traffic flows. VMware vSphere can
control the effects from any individual
VM on the traffic flows of other VMs that
share the same physical connection.
• Internal and external traffic do not
need to share a physical connection.
DMZs can be configured on different
network adapters to isolate internal
traffic from external traffic as security
needs dictate.
• Back-end services are handled by
VMware ESX. Administrative traffic and
other back-end services are handled by a
separate networking stack managed by
the VMkernel, providing further isolation
from VM traffic, even on the same
physical connection.
Traffic Segmentation and
Ensuring Bandwidth
10GbE provides enough bandwidth for
multiple traffic types to coexist on a single
port, and in fact, in many cases Quality of
Service (QoS) requirements can be met
simply by the availability of large amounts
of bandwidth. The presence of sufficient
bandwidth can also dramatically improve
the speed of live VM migration using
VMotion, removing potential bottlenecks
for greater overall performance. Beyond
the general availability of significant
bandwidth, however, traffic segmentation
can provide dedicated bandwidth for each
class of network traffic.
While segmenting traffic flows onto
discreet GbE connections is also a viable
means of providing dedicated bandwidth
to a specific traffic type or function, doing
so has distinct shortcomings. For example,
allocating two GbE connections to a VM
traffic port group provides a potential
of 2 Gbps of dedicated bandwidth, but
if additional bandwidth is needed for
sporadic traffic spikes from that port
6
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
Virtual Machine Device Queues (VMDq)
VMDq offloads data-packet sorting from the virtual switch
in the virtual machine monitor (VMM) vmkernel onto the
network adapter, which reduces processor overhead and
improves overall efficiency. Data packets are sorted based on
their MAC addresses, queued up based on destination virtual
machine (VM), and then routed to the appropriate VMs by
the VMM vmkernel virtual switch. A line rate throughput of
9.3 Gbps was seen on a virtualized server as compared to
4.2 Gbps without VMDq.10 For more information, see Intel’s
VMDq Web page.
6
Single Root I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV)
The latest Intel® Ethernet server controllers support SR-IOV, a
standard created by the PCI* Special Interest Group (PCI-SIG*).
Intel played a key role in defining this specification. Using SRIOV
functionality, Intel Ethernet Server Adapters can partition
a physical port into multiple virtual I/O ports called Virtual
Functions (VFs). Using this mechanism, each virtual I/O port or
VF can behave as a single dedicated port directly assigned to
a VM. For more information, see Intel’s PCI-SIG SR-IOV Primer.
7
Data Center Bridging (DCB)
DCB enables better traffic prioritization over a single
interface, as well as an advanced means for shaping traffic
on the network to decrease congestion. 10GbE with DCB can
also help some low-latency workloads, avoiding the need
to upgrade to a special purpose network to meet latency
requirements, thereby reducing total cost of ownership.
For more information, see Intel’s DCB Web page.
8
Intel® Virtualization Technology for Directed
I/O (Intel® VT-d)
Intel VT-d enables the VMM to control how direct memory
remapping (DMA) is processed by I/O devices, so that it can
assign an I/O resource to a specific VM, giving unmodified
guest OSs direct, exclusive access to that resource without
the need for the VMM to emulate device drivers. For more
information, see the Intel® Virtualization Technology for
Directed I/O Architecture Specification.
9
Intel Technologies that Enable Near-Native Performance
In a virtualized environment, realizing the performance benefits of 10GbE requires the means to mitigate software
overhead. To that end, features of Intel® Virtualization Technology improve networking performance.
7
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
For more information about Intel® Ethernet 10GbE Server Adapters, see
www.intel.com/go/10GbE
For more information about VMware vSphere* 4, see
www.vmware.com/products/vsphere
For more information about virtual networking, see
www.intel.com/network/connectivity/solutions/virtualization.htm
Conclusion
Using Intel Ethernet 10GbE Server Adapters in virtualized environments based on VMware vSphere allows enterprises to reduce the
complexity and cost of network infrastructure. Advanced hardware and software technologies work together to ensure that security
and performance requirements can be met without the large numbers of physical server connections required in GbE legacy networks.
Additionally, more sophisticated management functionality is possible using 10GbE and VMware functionality features to replace
methods that depend on physical separation with updated approaches that use logical separation.
Because migration to 10GbE can
dramatically reduce the number of
physical server adapters needed for a
given configuration, organizations can
realize a variety of cost advantages:
• Decreasing the number of physical server
adapters, switch ports, and support
infrastructure components required
can potentially reduce capital costs.
• Providing a physically simpler
environment where misconfigurations
are more easily avoided can also help
to decrease support costs, as well as
enable greater automation through
the extensive use of virtualization.
• Reducing the number of server adapters
and switch ports being powered in data
centers can help to create substantial
energy savings.
In addition, the ability to dynamically
allocate bandwidth on demand increases
flexibility and enables organizations to
get maximum value from their network
hardware. Therefore, 10GbE is superior
to GbE as a connectivity technology
for virtualized networks, and as future
generations of data centers continue
to increase the demands placed on
the infrastructure, the level of that
superiority is expected to increase.
Simplify VMware vSphere* 4 Networking with Intel® Ethernet 10 Gigabit Server Adapters
1 http://kensvirtualreality.wordpress.com/2009/03/29/the-great-vswitch-debate-part-1/
2
http://www.vmware.com/files/pdf/VMW_09Q1_WP_vSphereNetworking_P8_R1.pdf
3
http://communities.vmware.com/servlet/JiveServlet/downloadBody/11846-102-1-11684/vSphere%20Hardening%20Guide%20--%20%20vNetwork%20Rev%20B.pdf;jsessionid=849963B4EE5C82C85473272DCE9F0DF0
4
http://cio.cisco.com/warp/public/cc/pd/si/casi/ca6000/prodlit/vlnwp_wp.htm
5
http://communities.vmware.com/servlet/JiveServlet/downloadBody/11846-102-1-11684/vSphere%20Hardening%20Guide%20--%20%20vNetwork%20Rev%20B.pdf;jsessionid=849963B4EE5C82C85473272DCE9F0DF0
6
http://www.intel.com/network/connectivity/vtc_vmdq.htm
7
http://download.intel.com/design/network/applnots/321211.pdf
8 http://www.intel.com/technology/eedc/index.htm
9
http://download.intel.com/technology/computing/vptech/Intel(r)_VT_for_Direct_IO.pdf
10 Source: Internal testing by Intel.
INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE,
TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH
PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL
PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT,
COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED NOR
INTENDED FOR ANY APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR.
Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions
marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to
them. The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this information.
The products described in this document may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current
characterized errata are available on request. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies
of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or by visiting Intel’s Web site
at www.intel.com.
Copyright © 2010 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel, and the Intel logo, are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Printed in USA 0210/BY/MESH/PDF Please Recycle 323336-002US
Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on the World Wide Web. Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili su World Wide Web. Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind. Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web. Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web. http://support.intel.com/support/processors 1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment manufacturer. Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al zócalo del procesador. Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso ao soquete do processador. 2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information. Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore. Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações. Open (O) Locked (L) 478-pin micro-FCPGA To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator. Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis. Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite. Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung geöffnet werden. Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador. Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete. 3. Figure A Pin A1 Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor drops completely in. En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement. Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa, girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito. 4. Figure B NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M. Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher in der Fassung sitzt. Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado. Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o processador entre completamente. 5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see http://support.intel.com/support/processors Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador (Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. 6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings. Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects. Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden. Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales. Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes corretos. Notes www.intel.com support.intel.com 1-916-377-7000 07:00-17:00 U.S. Pacific Time Monday–Friday To obtain warranty service in the U.S. and Canada 1-800-628-8686 América Latina 916-377-0114 (en Español) Brazil 916-377-0180 (en Portuguese) Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00 For English and European customers not listed below +44 (0) 870 607 2439 Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29 Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099 Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276 Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET For the latest support offerings, please see support.intel.com Asia-Pacific/English Support Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415 Hours: 0900-1400 India** 000-6517, 830-3634 Hours: 0900-1500 Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Thailand 1-800-6310003 Hours 09:00-1600 Hong Kong 852-2844-4456 Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117 Singapore 65-831-1311 Malaysia 1-800-80-1390 Hours: 0900-1700 Australia 1-800-649-931 Hours: 1000-1700 New Zealand 0-800-444-365 Hours: 1100-1700 Asia-Pacific/Korean Support Korea 822-7672-595 Hours: 0900-1700 Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support PRC 800-820-1100 Taiwan 2-718-9915 Hours: 0900-1700 Japan support.intel.co.jp 0120-868686 Hours: 0900-1700 *IDD Long Distance into the Philippines **Manual toll-free. When dialing from India need to use phone with IDD facility. Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries. Order Number A82732-001 Printed in USA Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on the World Wide Web. Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili su World Wide Web. Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind. Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web. Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web. http://support.intel.com/support/processors 1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment manufacturer. Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al zócalo del procesador. Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso ao soquete do processador. 2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information. Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore. Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações. Open (O) Locked (L) 478-pin micro-FCPGA To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator. Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis. Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite. Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung geöffnet werden. Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador. Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete. 3. Figure A Pin A1 Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor drops completely in. En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement. Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa, girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito. 4. Figure B NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M. Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher in der Fassung sitzt. Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado. Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o processador entre completamente. 5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see http://support.intel.com/support/processors Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador (Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. 6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings. Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects. Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden. Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales. Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes corretos. Notes www.intel.com support.intel.com 1-916-377-7000 07:00-17:00 U.S. Pacific Time Monday–Friday To obtain warranty service in the U.S. and Canada 1-800-628-8686 América Latina 916-377-0114 (en Español) Brazil 916-377-0180 (en Portuguese) Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00 For English and European customers not listed below +44 (0) 870 607 2439 Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29 Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099 Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276 Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET For the latest support offerings, please see support.intel.com Asia-Pacific/English Support Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415 Hours: 0900-1400 India** 000-6517, 830-3634 Hours: 0900-1500 Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Thailand 1-800-6310003 Hours 09:00-1600 Hong Kong 852-2844-4456 Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117 Singapore 65-831-1311 Malaysia 1-800-80-1390 Hours: 0900-1700 Australia 1-800-649-931 Hours: 1000-1700 New Zealand 0-800-444-365 Hours: 1100-1700 Asia-Pacific/Korean Support Korea 822-7672-595 Hours: 0900-1700 Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support PRC 800-820-1100 Taiwan 2-718-9915 Hours: 0900-1700 Japan support.intel.co.jp 0120-868686 Hours: 0900-1700 *IDD Long Distance into the Philippines **Manual toll-free. When dialing from India need to use phone with IDD facility. Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries. Order Number A82732-001 Printed in USA Reference Number: 454301, Revision: 1.0 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Software User’s Guide June 2012 Document Number: 327602-001US Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 2 INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, or life sustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Intel, Intel® Matrix Storage Manager, Intel® Matrix Storage Technology, Intel® Rapid Recover Technology, and the Intel logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012, Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 3 Contents 1 Introduction .....................................................................................................7 1.1 Terminology ..........................................................................................8 1.2 Reference Documents ...........................................................................10 2 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features ............................................................11 2.1 Feature Overview .................................................................................11 2.2 RAID 0 (Striping) .................................................................................11 2.3 RAID 1 (Mirroring) ................................................................................12 2.4 RAID 5 (Striping with Parity) ..................................................................13 2.5 RAID 10 ..............................................................................................14 2.6 Matrix RAID .........................................................................................15 2.7 Advanced Host Controller Interface .........................................................16 2.7.1 Native Command Queuing ........................................................16 2.7.2 Hot-Plug ................................................................................16 2.8 SAS Controller Unit ...............................................................................17 2.8.1 SCU OEM Parameters ...............................................................17 2.8.2 Linux libsas Sysfs Components ..................................................18 3 RAID BIOS / EFI Configuration ..........................................................................25 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................25 3.2 Enabling RAID in BIOS ..........................................................................25 4 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM........................................................26 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................26 4.2 User Interface ......................................................................................26 4.3 Version Identification ............................................................................26 4.4 RAID Volume Creation ..........................................................................27 5 Volume Creation .............................................................................................32 5.1 RAID Volume Creation ..........................................................................32 5.2 Filesystem Creation on RAID Volume .......................................................33 5.3 RAID Volume Creation Examples ............................................................33 5.4 Adding a Spare Disk .............................................................................34 5.5 Creating RAID Configuration File .............................................................34 5.6 RAID Volume Initialization / Resync ........................................................34 6 Volume Operations ..........................................................................................35 6.1 Erasing RAID Metadata .........................................................................35 6.2 Volume Assemble .................................................................................35 6.3 Stopping the Volumes ...........................................................................36 6.4 Reporting RAID Information ...................................................................36 6.5 To Fail an Active Drive ..........................................................................41 6.6 Remove a Failed Drive ..........................................................................41 6.7 Report RAID Details from BIOS ..............................................................41 6.8 Logging ..............................................................................................42 6.9 Raid Level Migration .............................................................................43 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 4 6.10 Freezing Reshape .................................................................................46 7 Online Capacity Expansion ...............................................................................47 8 RAID Monitoring .............................................................................................48 8.1 mdmon ...............................................................................................48 8.2 Monitoring Using mdadm .......................................................................49 8.3 Configuration File for Monitoring .............................................................51 8.4 Examples of monitored events in syslog ...................................................52 9 Recovery of RAID Volumes ...............................................................................53 9.1 Removing Failed Disk(s) ........................................................................53 9.2 Rebuilding ...........................................................................................54 9.3 Auto Rebuild ........................................................................................55 10 SGPIO ...........................................................................................................60 10.1 SGPIO Utility .......................................................................................60 10.2 Ledctl Utility ........................................................................................61 10.3 Ledmon Service ...................................................................................63 11 SAS Management Protocol Utilities ....................................................................64 11.1 smp_discover ......................................................................................64 11.1.1 Examples ...............................................................................64 11.2 smp_phy_control .................................................................................68 11.2.1 Examples ...............................................................................68 11.3 smp_rep_manufacturer .........................................................................68 11.3.1 Examples ...............................................................................68 11.4 smp_rep_general .................................................................................69 11.4.1 Examples ...............................................................................69 12 MDRAID Sysfs Components ..............................................................................70 June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 5 Figures Figure 1. Matrix RAID ......................................................................................15 Figure 2. User Prompt ......................................................................................26 Tables Table 1. RAID 0 Overview ................................................................................11 Table 2. RAID 1 Overview ................................................................................12 Table 3. RAID 5 Overview ................................................................................13 Table 4. RAID 10 Overview ...............................................................................14 Table 5 mdadm monitor Parameters ..................................................................49 Table 6 Monitoring Events ................................................................................50 Table 7 SGPIO Utility Options ...........................................................................60 Table 8 ledctl options ......................................................................................61 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 6 Revision History Document Number Revision Number Description Revision Date 327602 001 Initial Developer Release. June 2012 § Introduction June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 7 1 Introduction The purpose of this document is to enable a user to properly set up and configure a system using the Linux MDADM application for Intel Matrix Storage. It provides steps for set up and configuration, as well as a brief overview on Linux MDADM features. Note: The information in this document is only relevant on systems with a supported Intel chipset that include a supported Intel chipset, with a supported operating system. Supported Intel chipsets - http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020644.htm Supported operating systems - http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020648.htm Note: The majority of the information in this document is related to either software configuration or hardware integration. Intel is not responsible for the software written by third party vendors or the implementation of Intel components in the products of third party manufacturers. Customers should always contact the place of purchase or system/software manufacturer with support questions about their specific hardware or software configuration. Introduction Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 8 1.1 Terminology Term Description AHCI Advanced Host Controller Interface: an interface specification that allows the storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features such as Native Command Queuing, native hot plug, and power management. Continuous Update Policy When a recovery volume is using this policy, data on the master drive is copied to the recovery drive automatically as long as both drives are connected to the system. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM A code module built into the system BIOS that provides boot support for RAID volumes as well as a user interface for configuring and managing RAID volumes. Master Drive The hard drive that is the designated source drive in a recovery volume. Matrix RAID Two independent RAID volumes within a single RAID array. Member A hard drive used within a RAID array. Hot- Plug* The unannounced removal and insertion of a Serial ATA hard drive while the system is powered on. NCQ Native Command Queuing: a command protocol in Serial ATA that allows multiple commands to be outstanding within a hard drive at the same time. The commands are dynamically reordered to increase hard drive performance. On Request Update Policy When a recovery volume is using this policy, data on the master drive is copied to the recovery drive when you request it. Only changes since the last update process are copied. OS Operating System Port0 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port0. Port1 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port1. Port2 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port2. Port3 A serial ATA port (connector) on a motherboard identified as Port3. POST Power-On Self Test SAS Serial Attached SCSI SCU SAS Controller Unit Introduction June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 9 Term Description RAID Redundant Array of Independent Drives: allows data to be distributed across multiple hard drives to provide data redundancy or to enhance data storage performance. RAID 0 (striping) The data in the RAID volume is striped across the array's members. Striping divides data into units and distributes those units across the members without creating data redundancy, but improving read/write performance. RAID 1 (mirroring) The data in the RAID volume is mirrored across the RAID array's members. Mirroring is the term used to describe the key feature of RAID 1, which writes duplicate data to each member; therefore, creating data redundancy and increasing fault tolerance. RAID 5 (striping with parity) The data in the RAID volume and parity are striped across the array's members. Parity information is written with the data in a rotating sequence across the members of the array. This RAID level is a preferred configuration for efficiency, fault-tolerance, and performance. RAID 10 (striping and mirroring) The RAID level where information is striped across a two disk array for system performance. Each of the drives in the array has a mirror for fault tolerance. RAID 10 provides the performance benefits of RAID 0 and the redundancy of RAID 1. However, it requires four hard drives. RAID Array A logical grouping of physical hard drives. RAID Volume A fixed amount of space across a RAID array that appears as a single physical hard drive to the operating system. Each RAID volume is created with a specific RAID level to provide data redundancy or to enhance data storage performance. Recovery Drive The hard drive that is the designated target drive in a recovery volume. Recovery Volume A volume utilizing Intel(R) Rapid Recover Technology. Kilobyte Unit mount for 1024 bytes or 210 bytes Megabyte Unit amount for 220 bytes mdadm mdadm is a Linux utility created by Neil Brown to manage software RAID devices on Linux. It is available under the GPL license version 2 or later. Introduction Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 10 1.2 Reference Documents Document Document No./Location mdadm manpages Linux manpages Ledmon manpages Linux manpages SMP Utils manpages Linux manpages Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 11 2 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features 2.1 Feature Overview The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager software package provides high-performance Serial ATA and Serial ATA RAID capabilities for supported operating systems. Supported operating systems - http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020648.htm The key features of the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager are as follows: RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 5 RAID 10 Matrix RAID Intel® Rapid Recover Technology Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) support SAS Controller Unit (SCU) support 2.2 RAID 0 (Striping) RAID 0 uses the read/write capabilities of two or more hard drives working in parallel to maximize the storage performance of a computer system. Table 1 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided, and the typical usage of RAID 0. Table 1. RAID 0 Overview Hard Drives Required: 2-6 Advantage: Highest transfer rates Faulttolerance: None – if one disk fails all data will be lost Application: Typically used in desktops and workstations for maximum performance for temporary data and high I/O rate. 2-drive RAID 0 available in specific mobile configurations. Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 0: http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/iaa_raid/sb/CS-009337.htm Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 12 2.3 RAID 1 (Mirroring) A RAID 1 array contains two hard drives where the data between the two is mirrored in real time to provide good data reliability in the case of a single disk failure; when one disk drive fails, all data is immediately available on the other without any impact to the integrity of the data. Table 2 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided, and the typical usage of RAID 1. Table 2. RAID 1 Overview Hard Drives Required: 2 Advantage: 100% redundancy of data. One disk may fail, but data will continue to be accessible. A rebuild to a new disk is recommended to maintain data redundancy. Faulttolerance: Excellent – disk mirroring means that all data on one disk is duplicated on another disk. Application: Typically used for smaller systems where capacity of one disk is sufficient and for any application(s) requiring very high availability. Available in specific mobile configurations. Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 1: http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/iaa_raid/sb/CS-009338.htm Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 13 2.4 RAID 5 (Striping with Parity) A RAID 5 array contains three or more hard drives where the data and parity are striped across all the hard drives in the array. Parity is a mathematical method for recreating data that was lost from a single drive, which increases fault-tolerance. If there are N disks in the RAID 5 volume, the capacity for data would be N – 1 disks. For example, if the RAID 5 volume has 5 disks, the data capacity for this RAID volume consists of four disks. Linux MDRAID supports four types of parity layout. However, Intel IMSM only supports the left-asymmetric parity layout. Table 3 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided, and the typical usage of RAID 5. Table 3. RAID 5 Overview Hard Drives Required: 3-6 Advantage: Higher percentage of usable capacity and high read performance as well as fault-tolerance. Faulttolerance: Excellent - parity information allows data to be rebuilt after replacing a failed hard drive with a new drive. Application: Storage of large amounts of critical data. Not available in mobile configurations. Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 5: http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020653.htm Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 14 2.5 RAID 10 A RAID 10 array uses four hard drives to create a combination of RAID levels 0 and 1. It is a striped set whose members are each a mirrored set. Table 4 provides an overview of the advantages, the level of fault-tolerance provided, and the typical usage of RAID 10. Table 4. RAID 10 Overview Hard Drives Required: 4 Advantage: Combines the read performance of RAID 0 with the fault-tolerance of RAID 1. Faulttolerance: Excellent – disk mirroring means that all data on one disk is duplicated on another disk. Application: High-performance applications requiring data protection, such as video editing. Not available in mobile configurations. Refer to the following web site for more information on RAID 10: http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020655.htm Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 15 2.6 Matrix RAID Matrix RAID allows you to create two RAID volumes on a single RAID array. As an example, on a system with an Intel® 82801GR I/O controller hub (ICH7R), Intel® Matrix Storage Manager allows you to create both a RAID 0 volume as well as a RAID 5 volume across four Serial ATA hard drives. An important requirement the Matrix RAID has is that in a Matrix RAID container, the volumes inside the container must span the same set of member disks. Refer to Figure 1. Figure 1. Matrix RAID Refer to the following web site for more information on matrix RAID: http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/IMSM/sb/CS-020681.htm Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 16 2.7 Advanced Host Controller Interface Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) is an interface specification that allows the storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features such as Native Command Queuing and Native Hot-Plug. Intel chipsets that support AHCI: http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm 2.7.1 Native Command Queuing Native Command Queuing (NCQ) is a feature supported by AHCI that allows Serial ATA hard drives to accept more than one command at a time. NCQ, when used in conjunction with one or more hard drives that support NCQ, increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. Note: To take advantage of NCQ, you need the following: Chipset that supports AHCI Intel® Matrix Storage Manager One or more Serial ATA (SATA) hard drives that support NCQ 2.7.2 Hot-Plug Hot-Plug, also referred to as hot swap, is a feature supported by AHCI that allows Serial ATA hard drives to be removed or inserted while the system is powered on and running. As an example, Hot-Plug may be used to replace a failed hard drive that is in an externally-accessible drive enclosure. Note: To take advantage of Hot-Plug, you need the following: Chipset that supports AHCI Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Hot-Plug capability correctly enabled in the system BIOS by the OEM/motherboard manufacturer Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 17 2.8 SAS Controller Unit SCU is the Intel® Serial Attached SCSI Controller Unit that is part of the C600 family Platform Controller Hub. The Linux SCU driver (isci) has been upstreamed to the Linux kernel since kernel version v3.0. However, the latest Linux kernel is always recommended to get the latest bug fixes and features. 2.8.1 SCU OEM Parameters The SCU driver requires proper OEM parameters to be loaded in order to set the correct PHY settings. The appropriate OEM parameters shall be loaded from the platform either from the OROM region if booting legacy or via EFI variable mechanism if booting EFI. Below is an example of what you may see from the isci driver load. The correct driver message displayed should be that the OEM parameter is loaded from “platform”. This indicates the driver has found good OEM parameter from the OROM or EFI. isci: Intel(R) C600 SAS Controller Driver - version 1.1.0 isci 0000:03:00.0: driver configured for rev: 5 silicon isci 0000:03:00.0: OEM parameter table found in OROM isci 0000:03:00.0: OEM SAS parameters (version: 1.1) loaded (platform) isci 0000:03:00.0: SCU controller 0: phy 3-0 cables: {short, short, short, short} scsi6 : isci isci 0000:03:00.0: SCU controller 1: phy 3-0 cables: {short, short, short, short} scsi7 : isci isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 110 for MSI/MSI-X isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 111 for MSI/MSI-X isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 112 for MSI/MSI-X isci 0000:03:00.0: irq 113 for MSI/MSI-X Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 18 2.8.2 Linux libsas Sysfs Components Linux provides driver information through sysfs, a virtual file system. The example below provides some information on some of the libsas related components that can be useful or informational. The sas related entries can be found in /sys/class sysfs directory. ls -1 /sys/class/ | grep sas sas_device sas_end_device sas_expander sas_host sas_phy sas_port The sas_host directory contains all HBA attached to the computer system: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/ total 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 13:45 host6 -> ../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho st6/sas_host/host6 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 13:45 host7 -> ../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho st7/sas_host/host7 Generally the /sys/class/sas_* directories contain symbolic links. Due to those symbolic links can be quite long, in the follow on examples they will be omitted and only link names will be shown. ls -1 /sys/class/sas_expander/ expander-6:0 expander-7:0 In the expander-6:0 directory, 12 disks are shown to be attached. This can be validated by looking into sas_end_device directory where all SAS end devices are listed. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 19 Below shows the devices attached to expander-6:0: ls -1 /sys/class/sas_end_device/ | grep end_device-6 end_device-6:0:10 end_device-6:0:11 end_device-6:0:12 end_device-6:0:13 end_device-6:0:14 end_device-6:0:15 end_device-6:0:24 end_device-6:0:4 end_device-6:0:5 end_device-6:0:6 end_device-6:0:7 end_device-6:0:8 end_device-6:0:9 The example above shows that the first four PHYs in the expander are missing , and 24th phy is an extra virtual phy that is used by the expander internally. The sas_phy directory contains all phys in the system, and the sas_port contains all ports in the system. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 20 To see the connection between components, it is better to transverse from the sas_host directory. What is connected to host 6 can be seen here: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/ total 0 drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 bsg drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:1 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:2 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:3 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:37 power drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_host drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 scsi_host lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:27 subsystem -> ../../../../../../../bus/scsi -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent And more: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/ total 0 drwxr-xr-x 45 root root 0 May 18 09:27 expander-6:0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:0 -> ../phy-6:0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:1 -> ../phy-6:1 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:2 -> ../phy-6:2 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:36 phy-6:3 -> ../phy-6:3 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:36 power drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_port -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent Host 6 has 4 phys that are configured as a wide port, and this wide port is a connection between the host and the expander (expander-6:0). Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 21 Below are the contents of the expander-6:0 directory: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/expander-6\:0/ total 0 drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 bsg drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:0 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:1 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:10 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:11 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:12 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:13 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:14 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:15 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:16 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:17 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:18 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:19 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:2 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:20 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:21 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:22 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:23 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:24 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:3 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:4 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:5 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:6 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:7 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:8 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 22 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 phy-6:0:9 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:10 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:11 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:12 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:13 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:14 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:15 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:16 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:24 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:4 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:5 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:6 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:7 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:8 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:27 port-6:0:9 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:37 power drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_device drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_expander -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent The expander has 24 phys and 12 narrow ports. The contents of port-6:0:4 reveals that some end devices are connected to that port/phy: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/expander-6\:0/port- 6\:0\:4 total 0 drwxr-xr-x 7 root root 0 May 18 09:27 end_device-6:0:4 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 14:51 phy-6:0:4 -> ../phy-6:0:4 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 14:51 power drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sas_port -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:27 uevent Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 23 The Linux disk name can be found a few levels deeper: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/port-6\:0/expander-6\:0/port- 6\:0\:4/end_device-6\:0\:4/target6\:0\:0/6\:0\:0\:0/block/ total 0 drwxr-xr-x 7 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sdb It can also be found in a different sysfs location: ls -l /sys/block/ | grep port-6:0:4 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:27 sdb -> ../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host 6/port-6:0/expander-6:0/port-6:0:4/end_device-6:0:4/target6:0:0/6:0:0:0/block/sdb This is an Expander Attached (EA) configuration. In a Direct Attached (DA) configuration the contents of host6 may look like: ls -l /sys/class/sas_host/host6/device/ total 0 drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:39 bsg drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:0 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:1 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:2 drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 May 18 09:17 phy-6:3 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:06 port-6:0 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:02 port-6:1 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:08 port-6:2 drwxr-xr-x 5 root root 0 May 18 09:02 port-6:3 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 09:39 power drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:39 sas_host drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 18 09:39 scsi_host lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 subsystem -> ../../../../../../../bus/scsi -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 09:09 uevent Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Features Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 24 There are 4 phys and 4 narrow ports, and this means the 4 end devices are connected directly to the HBA. This can be shown: ls -l /sys/class/sas_end_device/ | grep end_device-6 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:0 -> ../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho st6/port-6:0/end_device-6:0/sas_end_device/end_device-6:0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:1 -> ../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho st6/port-6:1/end_device-6:1/sas_end_device/end_device-6:1 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:2 -> ../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho st6/port-6:2/end_device-6:2/sas_end_device/end_device-6:2 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:16 end_device-6:3 -> ../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/ho st6/port-6:3/end_device-6:3/sas_end_device/end_device-6:3 Or by: ls -l /sys/block/ | grep end_device-6 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sdb -> ../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host 6/port-6:0/end_device-6:0/target6:0:4/6:0:4:0/block/sdb lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sdc -> ../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host 6/port-6:1/end_device-6:1/target6:0:1/6:0:1:0/block/sdc lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sdd -> ../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host 6/port-6:2/end_device-6:2/target6:0:5/6:0:5:0/block/sdd lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 18 09:09 sde -> ../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:01.0/0000:01:00.0/0000:02:08.0/0000:03:00.0/host 6/port-6:3/end_device-6:3/target6:0:3/6:0:3:0/block/sde The structure of the sysfs filesystem is quite complex and full of links pointing to links. Full description of sysfs is outside of the scope of this manual. This chapter discussed only very briefly some major sysfs directories related to the SCU driver. RAID BIOS / EFI Configuration June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 25 3 RAID BIOS / EFI Configuration 3.1 Overview To install the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager, the system BIOS must include the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager option ROM or EFI driver. The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager option ROM / EFI driver is tied to the controller hub. For detailed documentation please see the Intel® Rapid Storage Technology Enterprise (Intel® RSTe) Software User’s Guide. 3.2 Enabling RAID in BIOS To enable RAID in the system BIOS, refer to the motherboard or system documentation or contact the motherboard or system manufacturer or place of purchase for specific instructions. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 26 4 Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM 4.1 Overview The Intel® Matrix Storage Manager optional ROM is a PnP option ROM that provides a pre-operating system user interface for RAID configurations. It also provides BIOS and DOS disk services (Int13h). 4.2 User Interface To enter the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager optional ROM user interface, press the and keys simultaneously when prompted during the Power-On Self Test (POST). Refer to Figure 2. Figure 2. User Prompt NOTE: The hard drive(s) and hard drive information listed for your system can differ from the following example. 4.3 Version Identification To identify the specific version of the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager option ROM integrated into the system BIOS, enter the option ROM user interface. The version number is located in the top right corner with the following format: vX.Y.W.XXXX, where X and Y are the major and minor version numbers. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 27 4.4 RAID Volume Creation Use the following steps to create a RAID volume using the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager user interface: Note: The following procedure should only be used with a newly-built system or if you are reinstalling your operating system. The following procedure should not be used to migrate an existing system to RAID 0. If you wish to create matrix RAID volumes after the operating system software is loaded, they should be created using the MDADM tool in the Linux distribution. 1. Press the and keys simultaneously when the following window appears during POST: 2. Select option 1. Create RAID Volume and press the key. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 28 3. Type in a volume name and press the key, or press the key to accept the default name. 4. Select the RAID level by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the available values, then press the key. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 29 5. Press the key to select the physical disks. A dialog similar to the following will appear: 6. Select the appropriate number of hard drives by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the list of available hard drives. .Press the key to select a drive. When you have finished selecting hard drives, press the key. Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 30 7. Unless you have selected RAID 1, select the strip size by using the <> or <> keys to scroll through the available values, then press the key. 8. Select the volume capacity and press the key. The default value indicates the maximum volume capacity using the selected disks. If less than the maximum volume capacity is chosen, creation of a second volume is needed to utilize the remaining space (i.e. a matrix RAID configuration). Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 31 9. At the Create Volume prompt, press the key to create the volume. The following prompt will appear: 10. Press the key to confirm volume creation. 11. To exit the option ROM user interface, select option 5. Exit and press the key. 12. Press the key again to confirm exit. Note: To change any of the information before the volume creation has been confirmed, you must exit the Create Volume process and restart it. Press the key to exit the Create Volume process. Volume Creation Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 32 5 Volume Creation RAID volumes can be created using the mdadm command line utility. Mdadm supports the Intel Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM) meta data format when specified with the IMSM meta data option. 5.1 RAID Volume Creation Warning: Creating a RAID volume will permanently delete any existing data on the selected hard drives. Back up all important data before beginning these steps. Below is an example to create a RAID5 volume with 6 disks: 1. First a container of Intel IMSM metadata must be created. mdadm -C /dev/md0 /dev/sd[b-g] –n 6 –e imsm Continue creating array? y mdadm: container /dev/md0 prepared. The command creates a RAID container with Intel® Matrix Storage Manager metadata format. The device node for the container will be /dev/md0. In this example disks sdb, sdc, sdd, sde, sdf, and sdg are used for this RAID set, and the total number of disks is 6. The wildcard expression /dev/sd[b-g] can be used to specify the range of disks. Although individual disks can be used to list out all the disks. i.e. /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd /dev/sde /dev/sdf /dev/sdg 2. Next a RAID 5 volume is created. mdadm -C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 6 –l 5 The command creates a RAID 5 volume /dev/md/Volume0 within the /dev/md0 container. The following command parameters may also be used in conjunction to give finer control for the creation of the RAID volume. -n : Number of active RAID devices to be used in the volume. -x : Specifies the number of spare devices in the initial array. -c : Specifies the chunk (stripe) size in Kilobytes. The default is 512KiB. -l : Specifies the RAID level. The options are 0, 1, 5, 10. -z : Specifies the size (in Kilobytes) of space dedicated on each disk to the RAID volume. This must be a multiple of the chunk size. For example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 3 –l 5 –z $((100*1024*1024)) The command above creates a RAID volume inside the /dev/md0 container with 100GB of disk space used on each disk member. Volume Creation June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 33 5.2 Filesystem Creation on RAID Volume After the RAID volume has been created, a filesystem can be created in order to allow the mounting of the RAID volume. mkfs.ext4 /dev/md/Volume0 Once the filesystem has been created, it can be mounted: mount /dev/md/Volume0 /mnt/myraidvolume 5.3 RAID Volume Creation Examples To create a RAID 0 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 2 –l 0 To create a RAID 1 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 2 –l 1 To create a RAID 5 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 3 –l 5 To create a RAID 10 volume, use the following example: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md0 –n 4 –l 10 Note: To create multiple RAID volumes in the same container, they MUST span equal number of disks. For example, in order to have a RAID 0 volume and a RAID 5 volume in the same container, four disks must be used for both volumes. Volume Creation Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 34 5.4 Adding a Spare Disk Adding a spare disk allows immediate reconstruction of the RAID volume when a device failure is detected. Mdraid will mark the failed device as “bad” and start reconstruction with the first available spare disk. The spare disk can also be used to grow the RAID volume. The spare disks sit idle during normal operations. When using mdadm with IMSM meta data, the spare disk added to a container is dedicated to that specific container. The following command adds a spare disk to the designated container. mdadm -a /dev/md0 /dev/sde 5.5 Creating RAID Configuration File A configuration file can be created to record the existing RAID volumes. The information can be extracted from the existing RAID setup. The configuration file is typically stored at the default location of /etc/mdadm.conf. This allows a consistent assemble of the appropriate RAID volumes. mdadm -E –s –-config=mdadm.conf > /etc/mdadm.conf 5.6 RAID Volume Initialization / Resync Immediately after a RAID volume has been created, initialization (or resync) commences if the RAID level is 1, 10, or 5. During this time, any data stored on RAID level 5 volumes are not guaranteed to be safe if failure occurs. If a disk failure happens during the initialization time, recovery will not be possible. This scenario is also true during RAID volume rebuilds. Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 35 6 Volume Operations mdadm provides various options to assemble, monitor, examine, or stop RAID volumes. 6.1 Erasing RAID Metadata Having incorrect and bad RAID metadata can cause RAID volumes to be assembled incorrectly. The metadata can be erased with the following command to make sure the disk is clean. This operation does not attempt to wipe existing user data. mdadm --zero-superblock /dev/sdb Multiple disks can be specified to clear the superblock at the same time. 6.2 Volume Assemble RAID volumes can be created via OROM user interface or mdadm. Inactive RAID volumes that are created can be activated using the assemble option with mdadm. The following command scans for the mdadm configuration file at /etc/mdadm.conf in order to assemble the RAID volumes. If the configuration file is not found, it scans all available disks for RAID member disks and assembles all the RAID volumes: mdadm –A –s To manually assemble and activate RAID volumes without the configuration file, the following example can be used: mdadm –A /dev/md0 –e imsm /dev/sda /dev/sdb /dev/sdc /dev/sdd mdadm –I /dev/md0 The first command assembles the container with the name /dev/md0 using the provided list of disks. The second command assembles and activates appropriate volumes with the device nodes. Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 36 6.3 Stopping the Volumes To stop all active RAID volumes, the following command can be used. Mdadm will scan for and stop all running RAID volumes and containers. mdadm –S –s However, RAID volume names can be specified to stop the volume directly. mdadm –S /dev/md/Volume0 And to stop a container, the following command can be used. mdadm –S /dev/md0 6.4 Reporting RAID Information Use the following command, to print out details about a RAID container or volume: mdadm –D /dev/md0 /dev/md0: Version : imsm Raid Level : container Total Devices : 5 Working Devices : 5 UUID : b559b502:b199f86f:ee9fbd40:cd10e91d Member Arrays : Number Major Minor RaidDevice 0 8 32 - /dev/sdc 1 8 48 - /dev/sdd 2 8 80 - /dev/sdf 3 8 96 - /dev/sdg 4 8 16 - /dev/sdb Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 37 To display details about a RAID volume: mdadm –D /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/md/Volume0: Container : /dev/md0, member 0 Raid Level : raid5 Array Size : 39999488 (38.15 GiB 40.96 GB) Used Dev Size : 9999872 (9.54 GiB 10.24 GB) Raid Devices : 5 Total Devices : 5 Update Time : Thu Jun 17 07:40:23 2010 State : clean Active Devices : 5 Working Devices : 5 Failed Devices : 0 Spare Devices : 0 Layout : left-asymmetric Chunk Size : 128K UUID : 084d2b20:09897744:36757c5b:77e0e945 Number Major Minor RaidDevice State 4 8 96 0 active sync /dev/sdg 3 8 48 1 active sync /dev/sdd 2 8 32 2 active sync /dev/sdc 1 8 16 3 active sync /dev/sdb 0 8 80 4 active sync /dev/sdf Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 38 To print out RAID details about a member disk: mdadm –E /dev/sdb /dev/sdb: Magic : Intel Raid ISM Cfg Sig. Version : 1.2.04 Orig Family : e0935e91 Family : a830104b Generation : 00000037 UUID : b559b502:b199f86f:ee9fbd40:cd10e91d Checksum : 3ba66395 correct MPB Sectors : 2 Disks : 5 RAID Devices : 1 Disk02 Serial : 9QMCLMDM State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) [vol0]: UUID : 084d2b20:09897744:36757c5b:77e0e945 RAID Level : 5 Members : 5 Slots : [UUUUU] This Slot : 3 Array Size : 79998976 (38.15 GiB 40.96 GB) Per Dev Size : 19999744 (9.54 GiB 10.24 GB) Sector Offset : 0 Num Stripes : 19531 Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 39 Chunk Size : 128 KiB Reserved : 0 Migrate State : idle Map State : normal Dirty State : clean Disk00 Serial : 9QMCLYES State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Disk01 Serial : 9QMCLYB9 State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Disk03 Serial : 9QMCM7XY State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Disk04 Serial : 9QMCF38Z State : active Id : 00000000 Usable Size : 976768654 (465.76 GiB 500.11 GB) Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 40 To get the most current status on all RAID volumes, the file /proc/mdstat can be examined. This file is a special file that is updated continuously to show the status of all the containers, and RAID volumes. In the example below, the status shows that currently available RAID supports are level 4, 5, and 6. md126 is the active RAID volume with RAID level 5 and 128k stripe size. The RAID volume contains 5 disks that are all in normal (UP) status. md127 is the IMSM container for the RAID volume. cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdg[4] sdd[3] sdc[2] sdb[1] sdf[0] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/5] [UUUUU] md0 : inactive sdb[4](S) sdg[3](S) sdf[2](S) sdd[1](S) sdc[0](S) 11285 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Note: When creating containers and volumes, one will notice that in /proc/mdstat the device names will not match up. For example, when /dev/md/Volume0 is created, md127 will be shown in /proc/mdstat and other detail output as well. The /dev/md/Volume0 is created as an alias of /dev/md127 device node. Looking in the /dev/md directory, one will notice that /dev/md/Volume0 is a soft link to /dev/md127. Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 41 6.5 To Fail an Active Drive In order to mark an active drive as a failed drive (or set as faulty) manually, the following command can to be issued: mdadm –f /dev/md/Volume0 /dev/sdb 6.6 Remove a Failed Drive To remove a failed drive, the following command needs to be executed. This only works on a container based RAID volume. mdadm –r /dev/md0 /dev/sdb 6.7 Report RAID Details from BIOS To see what Intel® RAID support is provided by the BIOS issue the command: mdadm -–detail-platform Platform : Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Version : 8.9.0.1023 RAID Levels : raid0 raid1 raid10 raid5 Chunk Sizes : 4k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k Max Disks : 6 Max Volumes : 2 I/O Controller : /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1f.2 Port0 : /dev/sda (3MT0585Z) Port1 : - non-disk device (ATAPI DVD D DH16D4S) - Port2 : /dev/sdb (WD-WCANK2850263) Port3 : /dev/sdc (3MT005ML) Port4 : /dev/sdd (WD-WCANK2850441) Port5 : /dev/sde (WD-WCANK2852905) Port6 : - no device attached – Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 42 6.8 Logging Various messages coming from MDRAID subsystem in the kernel are logged. Typically the messages are stored in the log file /var/log/messages in popular Linux distributions with other kernel status, warning, and error outputs. Below is an example snippet of what the log may look like: Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: raid5: allocated 5334kB for md126 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 0: w=1 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 1: w=2 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 2: w=3 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 3: w=4 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: 4: w=5 pa=0 pr=5 m=1 a=0 r=5 op1=0 op2=0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: raid5: raid level 5 set md126 active with 5 out of 5 devices, algorithm 0 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: RAID5 conf printout: Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: --- rd:5 wd:5 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 0, o:1, dev:sdg Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 1, o:1, dev:sdd Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 2, o:1, dev:sdc Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 3, o:1, dev:sdb Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: disk 4, o:1, dev:sdf Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md127: detected capacity change from 0 to 40959475712 Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md127: unknown partition table Jun 17 06:20:04 testbox kernel: md: md127 switched to read-write mode. Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 43 6.9 Raid Level Migration The RAID level migration feature allows changing of the RAID volume level without loss of data stored on the volume. It does not require re-installation of the operating system. All applications and data remain intact. The following table shows the available migration support with Intel© IMSM metadata. You must have the number of drives necessary for the level you’re converting to as spare drives. Migration capabilities with IMSM Destination Source level RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10 RAID 5 RAID 0 N/A No Yes Yes RAID 1 Yes N/A No *Yes RAID 10 Yes No N/A *Yes RAID 5 No No No N/A *Migrations from RAID 1 to RAID 5 or from RAID 10 to RAID 5 must be done in two steps. A conversion to RAID 0 first is necessary before converting to RAID 5. During the second step (migration from RAID 0 to RAID 5) the addition of spare drive(s) may be needed. There is an example of migration from RAID 1 to RAID 5 below: 1) A RAID 1 is shown below: cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 102400 blocks super external:/md0/0 [2/2] [UU] md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 44 2) First step is to migrate from RAID 1 to RAID 0 mdadm –G /dev/md127 –l 0 cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid0 sdb[1] 102400 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: 3) Use Online Capacity Expansion to go from 1-disk RAID 0 to 2-disk RAID 0: # mdadm -G /dev/md0 -n 2 # cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid0 sda[2] sdb[1] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks md0 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: 4) Adding a spare disk to the container: mdadm -a /dev/md0 /dev/sdc cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid0 sda[2] sdb[1] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 64k chunks md0 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Volume Operations June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 45 5) Migrating from RAID 0 to RAID 5: mdadm -G /dev/md127 -l 5 --layout=left-asymmetric cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] [raid0] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdc[3] sda[2] sdb[1] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 64k chunk, algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU] md0 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: ***NOTE: IMSM metadata supports only the left-asymmetric layout of RAID 5. The default layout is left-symmetric, so during migrations the layout for IMSM metadata has to be specified explicitly. Volume Operations Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 46 6.10 Freezing Reshape If a RAID volume is in the process of reshape, the reshape process should be frozen during the initramfs booting phase and resumed when the system is fully up. Starting with mdadm 3.2.5 these features are supported. Distributions from the Operating System Vendors should have taken cared of this in their init script setup utilities, but details are described below for customers that are building their own distribution. The parameters --freeze-reshape is used to pause the reshape operation during system start up initramfs phase. For example: mdadm –As --freeze-reshape When reshape is frozen, the status provided by /proc/mdstat will denote the state with a hypen such as “super external:-md127/0” instead of “super external:/md127/0”: Personalities : [raid5] md127 : active raid5 sda[2] sdb[1] sdc[0] 10485760 blocks super external:-md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU] [>....................] reshape = 2.2% (116736/5242880) finish=501934.9min speed=0K/sec md0 : inactive sda[2](S) sdb[1](S) sdc[0](S) 9459 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Once the system is up, the following example with the parameter --continue can be used to resume the reshape process: mdadm –G /dev/md0 --continue or with a volume: mdadm –G /dev/md/Volume0 --continue Online Capacity Expansion June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 47 7 Online Capacity Expansion The Online Capacity Expansion (OLCE) feature allows the capacity expansion of the RAID volumes. With the “online” feature, the operation can be performed while a filesystem is mounted on top of the RAID volume. This allows avoiding having down time from taking the RAID volume offline for service or loss of data. The size of a RAID volume can be increased by adding additional disks to the RAID container or (only if it is the last volume in the container) by expanding it on existing unused disk space available to the RAID volume. In the first case if two volumes exist in the same container, OLCE is performed automatically on both volumes (one by one) because of the requirement that all volumes must span the same set of disks for IMSM. The following commands can be issued to grow the RAID volume. The first assumes that it is the last volume in the container and we have additional room to grow, and the second assumes that an additional disk has been added to the IMSM container. 1) If there is additional room in the last volume of the container, the volume can be grown to the maximum available capacity. This feature is only available starting with mdadm v3.2.5: mdadm –G /dev/md/Volume0 –-size=max 2) The example below adds a single disk to the RAID container and then grows the volume(s). Because IMSM volumes inside a container must span the same number of disks, all volumes are expanded. A backup file that MDRAID will store the backup superblock is specified. This file must not reside on any of the active RAID volumes that are being worked on. mdadm –a /dev/md0 /dev/sde mdadm –G /dev/md0 –n 4 --backup-file=/tmp/backup RAID Monitoring Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 48 8 RAID Monitoring There are two components within the mdadm tools to monitor events for the RAID volumes. Mdadm can be used to monitor general RAID events, and mdmon provides the ability to monitor “metadata event” occurrences such as disk failures, clean-todirty transitions, and etc for external metadata based RAID volumes. The kernel provides the ability to report such actions to the userspace via sysfs, and mdmon takes action accordingly with the monitoring capability. The mdmon polls the sysfs looking for changes in the entries array_state, sync_action, and per disk state attribute files. 8.1 mdmon The mdadm monitor, mdmon, is automatically started when MDRAID volumes are activated by mdadm through creation or assemble. However, the daemon can be started manually: mdmon /dev/md0 The --all parameter can be used in place of the container name to star monitors for all active containers. Mdmon must be started in the initramfs in order to support an external metadata RAID array as the root filesystem. Mdmon needs to be restarted in the new namespace once the final root filesystem has been mounted. mdmon --takeover --all RAID Monitoring June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 49 8.2 Monitoring Using mdadm Mdadm monitoring can be started with the following command line: mdadm --monitor –-scan --daemonise –-syslog The command above runs mdadm as a daemon to monitor all md devices. All events will be reported to syslog. The user can monitor the syslog and filter for specific mdadm events generated. There are additional command line parameters that can be passed to mdmon at startup. Table 5 mdadm monitor Parameters Long form Short form Description --mail -m Provide mail address to email alerts or failures to. --program or --alert -p Provide program to run when an event is detected. --delay -d Seconds of delay between polling state. Default is 60s. --config -c Specify a different config file. --scan -s Find mail-address/program settings in config file. --oneshot -1 Check for degraded arrays and then exit. --test -t Generate a TestMessage event against each array at startup. --syslog -y Cause all events to be reported through ’syslog’. The messages have facility of ’daemon’ and varying priorities. --increment -r Give a percentage increment. mdadm will generate RebuildNN events with the given percentage increment. --daemonise -f Run as background daemon if monitoring. --pid-file -i Write the pid of the daemon process to specified file. --no-sharing N/A This inhibits the functionality for moving spares between arrays. RAID Monitoring Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 50 The following table presents all the events that are reported by mdadm monitor: Table 6 Monitoring Events Event Name Description DeviceDisappeared An MD array previously configured no longer exists. RebuildStarted An MD array started reconstruction. RebuildNN NN is a 2 digit number that indicates rebuild has passed that many percent of the total. For example, Rebuild50 will trigger an event when 50% of rebuild has completed. RebuildFinished An MD array has completed rebuild. Fail1 An active component of an array has been marked faulty. FailSpare1 A spare device that was being rebuilt to replace a faulty device has failed. SpareActive A spare device that was being rebuilt to replace a fault device is rebuilt and active. NewArrary A new MD array has been detected in /proc/mdstat. DegradedArray1 A newly discovered array appears to be degraded. MoveSpare A spare drive has been moved from one array in a spare group to another array to replace a failed disk. Both arrays are labeled with the same spare group. SparesMissing1 The spare device(s) does not exist in comparison to the config file when the MD array is first discovered. TestMessage1 Discovered new array while --test flag was used. 1: The events indicated cause email to be sent. RAID Monitoring June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 51 8.3 Configuration File for Monitoring Mdadm will check the mdadm.conf config file to extract the appropriate entries for monitoring. The following entries we can set to pass to mdmon: MAILADDR: This config entry allows an E-mail address to be used for alerts. Only one email address should be used. MAILFROM: This config entry sets the email address to appear from the alert emails. The default from would be the “root” user with no domain. This entry overrides the default. PROGRAM: This config entry sets the program to run when mdmon detects potentially interesting events on any of the arrays it is monitoring. There can be only one PROGRAM line in the config file. RAID Monitoring Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 52 8.4 Examples of monitored events in syslog In this example we have a RAID5 volume: Personalities : [raid5] md127 : active raid5 sdd[2] sdc[1] sdb[0] 204800 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 128k chunk, algorithm 0 [3/3] [UUU] md0 : inactive sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: In order to monitor all RAID containers a mdadm daemon can be started using the following command: mdadm --monitor --scan --daemonise --syslog All events now will be written to syslog. After a mdadm daemon has been started the following messages can be found in /var/log/messages or the corresponding syslog file the distribution has designated: May 15 09:58:40 myhost mdadm[9863]: NewArray event detected on md device /dev/md127 May 15 09:58:40 myhost mdadm[9863]: NewArray event detected on md device /dev/md0 When a spare disk has been added: May 15 09:59:07 myhost mdadm[9863]: SpareActive event detected on md device /dev/md127, component device /dev/sde When an OLCE command is finished: May 15 09:59:16 myhost mdadm[9863]: RebuildFinished event detected on md device /dev/md127 When a disk fails: May 15 10:01:04 myhost mdadm[9863]: Fail event detected on md device /dev/md127, component device /dev/sdb When a rebuild finishes: May 15 10:02:22 myhost mdadm[9863]: RebuildFinished event detected on md device /dev/md127 May 15 10:02:22 myhost mdadm[9863]: SpareActive event detected on md device /dev/md127 When all MD devices are stopped: May 15 10:03:27 myhost mdadm[9863]: DeviceDisappeared event detected on md device /dev/md127 May 15 10:03:27 myhost mdadm[9863]: DeviceDisappeared event detected on md device /dev/md0 Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 53 9 Recovery of RAID Volumes Recovery is one of the most important aspects of using RAID. It allows rebuilding of RAID volumes on a system when disk failure occurs without the loss of any data. Recovery is only possible in the case of following RAID levels: 1, 5, and 10. General recovery is possible if no more than one disk fails. However in the case of RAID 10, recovery may be possible even if two out of four disks fail if the two failed disks are members of two different RAID 1S. If both disks of one of the RAID 1 fails, recovery is not possible. 9.1 Removing Failed Disk(s) Below is the output of /proc/mdstat with an active RAID5 volume with IMSM metadata where md127 is the IMSM container and md126 is the RAID 5 volume. The RAID 5 volume contains disks /dev/sdb, /dev/sdc, /dev/sdd, /dev/sde, /dev/sdf. Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active (read-only) raid5 sde[4] sdd[3] sdc[2] sdb[1] sdf[0] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/5] [UUUUU] md0 : inactive sdb[4](S) sdf[3](S) sde[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdd[0](S) 11285 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: When a disk fails, in this instance /dev/sde, the following is displayed in /proc/mdstat: Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdf[4] sdb[3] sdc[2] sdd[1] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/4] [_UUUU] md0 : inactive sdf[4](S) sde[3](S) sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 1045 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: The failed disk can be removed from the RAID volume by the following command: mdadm /dev/md/Volume0 --fail detached --remove detached or from the container by the following command: mdadm --remove /dev/md0 /dev/sde Recovery of RAID Volumes Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 54 9.2 Rebuilding At this point, this RAID volume is running in degraded mode. However, it is still operational. If there are spares disks available in the container, rebuild of the RAID volume would automatically commence. A spare can also be manually added to start the rebuild process: mdadm –add /dev/md0 /dev/sdg Personalities : [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] md127 : active raid5 sdg[5] sdf[4] sdb[3] sdc[2] sdd[1] 39999488 blocks super external:/md0/0 level 5, 512k chunk, algorithm 0 [5/4] [_UUUU] [==>..................] recovery = 11.5% (1154588/9999872) finish=2.6min speed=54980K/sec md0 : inactive sdg[5](S) sdf[4](S) sde[3](S) sdd[2](S) sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 1254 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 55 9.3 Auto Rebuild Auto-rebuild allows a RAID volume to be automatically rebuilt when a disk fails. There are 3 different scenarios this can happen: 1. There is a rebuild capable RAID volume with no spare disk in the container. If one of the disks in the volume fails it enters degraded mode. When a spare disk is added manually to the container, rebuild starts automatically (as referenced in section 9.2 Rebuilding). 2. There is a rebuild capable RAID volume with at least one spare disk in the container. If one of the disks in the volume fails, the spare disk is automatically pulled in, and the rebuild starts. 3. There are two containers . One container has a spare disk and the other one does not. If mdadm is running in monitor mode, and the appropriate policy is configured in the mdadm.conf file, a spare disk will be moved automatically from one container to the other if there’s a RAID volume failure that requires a spare disk for rebuild. For scenario number three, an example is presented below: 1. Create container ”md1” with 3 disks: mdadm –C /dev/md1 –e imsm –n3 /dev/sda /dev/sdb /dev/sdc 2. Create RAID1 volume “Volume1” in container”md1”, disk /dev/sdc remains a spare disk: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume1 –l1 –n2 /dev/sda /dev/sdb 3. Create container “md2” with 2 disks: mdadm –C /dev/md2 –e imsm –n2 /dev/sdd /dev/sde Recovery of RAID Volumes Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 56 4. Create RAID1 volume “Volume2” in container ”md2”, with no spare disks: mdadm –C /dev/md/Volume2 –l1 –n2 /dev/sdd /dev/sde Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0] md126: active raid1 sde[1] sdd[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/2] [UU] md2 : inactive sde[1](S) sdd[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU] md1 : inactive sdc[2](S) sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 3315 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 57 5. Save configuration file: mdadm –Ebs > /etc/mdadm.conf 6. Add the policy with the same domain and the same action for all disks to the configuration file, which allows the spare to move from one container to another for rebuild: echo "POLICY domain=DOMAIN path=* metadata=imsm action=spare-sameslot" >> /etc/mdadm.conf The configuration file in /etc/mdadm.conf may look like below: ARRAY metadata=imsm UUID=67563d6a:3d253ad0:6e649d99:01794f88 spares=1 ARRAY /dev/md/Volume2 container=67563d6a:3d253ad0:6e649d99:01794f88 member=0 UUID=76e507f1:fadb9a42:da46d784:2e2166e8 ARRAY metadata=imsm UUID=267445e7:458c89eb:bd5176ce:c37281b7 ARRAY /dev/md/Volume1 container=267445e7:458c89eb:bd5176ce:c37281b7 member=0 UUID=25025077:fba9cfab:e4ad212d:3e5fce11 POLICY domain=DOMAIN path=* metadata=imsms action=spare-same-slot 7. Make sure mdadm is in monitor mode: mdadm --monitor --scan –daemonise Recovery of RAID Volumes Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 58 8. Fail one of the disks in volume “Volume2”, the volume without a spare: mdadm --fail /dev/md/Volume2 /dev/sdd The spare disk /dev/sdc should automatically moves from the container “md1” to the container “md2” and the rebuild of “Volume2” starts automatically: Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0] md126: active raid1 sdc[2] sde[1] 1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/1] [_U] [========>............] recovery = 41.2% (432896/1048576) finish=0.0min speed=144298K/sec md2 : inactive sdc[2](S) sde[1](S) sdd[0](S) 5363 blocks super external:imsm md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU] md1 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Recovery of RAID Volumes June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 59 When the rebuild has completed: Personalities : [raid5] [raid1] [raid0] md126: active raid1 sdc[2] sde[1] 1048576 blocks super external:/md2/0 [2/2] [UU] md2 : inactive sdc[2](S) sde[1](S) sdd[0](S) 5363 blocks super external:imsm md127: active raid1 sdb[1] sda[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md1/0 [2/2] [UU] md1 : inactive sdb[1](S) sda[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: SGPIO Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 60 10 SGPIO Serial General Purpose Input/Output (SGPIO) is a four signal bus used between a storage controller and a backplane. The official name designated to SGPIO is SFF-8485 by the Small Form Factor (SFF) Committee. SGPIO provides the capability of blinking LEDs on disk arrays and storage backplanes to indicate statuses. 10.1 SGPIO Utility Linux uses the utility SGPIO to control the LEDs on a hard disk drive bay enclosure. The following table describes the options the SGPIO utility provides: Table 7 SGPIO Utility Options -h, --help Displays the help text -V, --version Displays the utility version and AHCI SGPIO specification version -d, --disk Disk name of LED location. i.e. sda, sdb, sdc. Can be comma delimited list -p, --port SATA port number of LED location. Can be used when a disk name is no longer valid. i.e. 0, 1, 2, 4. Can be comma delimited list -s, --status The LED status to set to: locate, fault, rebuild, off -f, --freq The frequency of the LED blinking in Hz between 1 and 10. For example, the following command sets sda, sdb, and sdc LEDs to fault with a frequency of 3Hz Flash rate: sgpio –d sda,sdb,sdc –s fault –f 3 SGPIO June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 61 10.2 Ledctl Utility The LEDs can also be manipulated via the ledctl utility. The ledctl utility has been verified to work with Intel® storage controllers such as the AHCI and SCU. Below are some examples on using the ledctl utility: To locate a single block device: ledctl locate=/dev/sda To locate a RAID device ledctl locate=/dev/md127 To set a rebuild pattern for 4 block devices in a RAID: ledctl rebuild={/sys/block/sd[a-d]} To turn off status and failure LED for a given device: ledctl off=/dev/sda,/dev/sdb The ledctl utility has the command format of: ledctl [OPTIONS] pattern_name=list_of_devices The table below shows all the options: Table 8 ledctl options Parameter Usage -c or --config= Specify path to a configuration file or override the global or default config file. (Although the utility currently does not use a config file). -l or --log= Sets the path to a user specified log file. If this option is specified the global log file /var/log/ledctl.log is not used. -h or --help= Prints out help text and exits. --quiet Suppress messages to stdout and stderr, but does not prevent log to file. -v or –version Prints out version and license information and exits. SGPIO Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 62 The table below shows all the “patterns” that can be specified: Pattern Name Usage locate Turns locate LED on for given device(s) or associated empty slot(s). locate_off Turns locate LEDs off. normal Turns status, failure, and locate LEDs off. off Turns status and failure LEDs off. ica or degraded Display “in a critical array” pattern. rebuild or rebuild_p Display “rebuild” pattern. ifa or failed_array Display “in a failed array” pattern. hotspare Display “hotspare” pattern. pfa Display “predicted failure analysis” pattern. failure or disk_failed Display “failure” pattern. SGPIO June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 63 10.3 Ledmon Service Ledmon is a daemon service that monitors the state of MDRAID devices or a block device. The service monitors all RAID volumes. There is no method to specify individual volumes to monitor. Like ledctl, ledmon has only been verified with Intel® storage controllers. Ledmon can be run with the following options listed below: Option Usage -c or --configpath= Sets the configuration file path. This overrides any other configuration files. (Although the utility currently does not use a config file). -l or --log-path Sets the path to a log file. This overrides /var/log/ledmon.log. -t or --interval= Sets the time interval in seconds between scans of the sysfs. A minimum of 5 seconds is set. --quiet, --error, - --warning, --info, --debug, --all Specifies verbosity level of the log - 'quiet' means no logging at all, and 'all' means to log everything. The levels are given in order. If user specifies more than one verbose option the last option comes into effect. -h or --help Prints help text and exits. -v or --version Prints version and license information, then exits. SAS Management Protocol Utilities Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 64 11 SAS Management Protocol Utilities smp_utils is a set of command line utilities that are used to invoke SAS Management Protocol (SMP) functions to monitor and manage SAS expanders. More information about smp_utils, package contents and usage examples can be found at: http://sg.danny.cz/sg/smp_utils.html Below are some helpful commands that are described together with usage examples. 11.1 smp_discover smp_discover utility sends the SMP DISCOVER Request to a SMP Target. It may be used to check what devices are attached to the HBA or an expander. 11.1.1 Examples Finding an HBA: ls -l /dev/bsg/sas_host* crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 1 May 16 16:32 /dev/bsg/sas_host6 crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 2 May 16 16:32 /dev/bsg/sas_host7 In this example 2 SAS Hosts were found. Numbers in sas_host* will change for instance when unloading and loading driver module. SAS Management Protocol Utilities June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 65 To see what is connected to the sas_host6: smp_discover /dev/bsg/sas_host6 Discover response: phy identifier: 0 attached device type: expander device negotiated logical link rate: phy enabled; 3 Gbps attached initiator: ssp=0 stp=0 smp=1 sata_host=0 attached sata port selector: 0 attached target: ssp=0 stp=0 smp=1 sata_device=0 SAS address: 0x5001e6734b8d2000 attached SAS address: 0x50000d166a80e87f attached phy identifier: 0 programmed minimum physical link rate: not programmable hardware minimum physical link rate: not programmable programmed maximum physical link rate: not programmable hardware maximum physical link rate: not programmable phy change count: 0 virtual phy: 0 partial pathway timeout value: 0 us routing attribute: direct SAS Management Protocol Utilities Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 66 To probe the PHYs attached to the host controller: smp_discover -m /dev/bsg/sas_host6 Device <5001e6734b8d2000>, expander: phy 0:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 1:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 2:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 3:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87f:00 exp i(SMP) t(SMP)] 3 Gbps In this example sas_host6 is connected to an expander device with all 4 phys. Such configuration creates a wide port. To see what expander is connected to sas_host6, a simple check in sysfs can be performed: ls /sys/class/bsg/sas_host6/device/port-6:0/ expander-6:0 phy-6:0 phy-6:1 phy-6:2 phy-6:3 power sas_port uevent SAS Management Protocol Utilities June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 67 To see what is connected to the expander-6:0: smp_discover -m /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 Device <50000d166a80e87f>, expander: phy 0:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 1:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 2:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 3:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 4:T:attached:[5000c50017ae9815:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 5:T:attached:[5000c5000051fe39:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 6:T:attached:[5000c50005f437a9:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 7:T:attached:[5000c50005f4373d:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 8:T:attached:[5000c50001cd61d1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 9:T:attached:[5000c50023c799a1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 10:T:attached:[5000c50001ab182d:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 11:T:attached:[5000c50005fba135:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 12:T:attached:[5000c5000490c705:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 13:T:attached:[5000c5000051fca9:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 14:T:attached:[5000c500076a4ab5:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 15:T:attached:[5000c50005fd6cb1:00 t(SSP)] 3 Gbps phy 16:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:02 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 17:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:03 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 18:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:00 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 19:S:attached:[5001e6734b8d2000:01 i(SSP+STP+SMP)] 3 Gbps phy 20:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 21:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 22:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 23:T:attached:[0000000000000000:00] phy 24:D:attached:[50000d166a80e87e:24 V i(SSP) t(SSP)] 3 Gbps In this example to the expander 12 SAS disks are connected (phy4-15). Phys 16-19 are occupied by wide port (connection to HBA) and Phy24 is a virtual phy. More information about this utility can be found in the smp_discover(8) man page. SAS Management Protocol Utilities Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 68 11.2 smp_phy_control smp_phy_control utility sends the PHY CONTROL request to a SMP Target. Using this utility administrator can for instance disable the phy. 11.2.1 Examples To disable phy: smp_phy_control --phy=4 --op=di /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 To enable it again: smp_phy_control --phy=4 --op=lr /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 More information about this utility can be found in the smp_phy_control(8) man page. 11.3 smp_rep_manufacturer smp_rep_manufacturer utility sends the REPORT MANUFACTURER INFORMATION request to a SMP Target. 11.3.1 Examples smp_rep_manufacturer -vvvv /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 smp_initiator_open: interface not recognized Report manufacturer information request: 40 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 send_req_sgv4: fd=3, subvalue=0 send_req_sgv4: driver_status=0, transport_status=0 device_status=0, duration=0, info=0 din_resid=0, dout_resid=0 Report manufacturer response: Expander change count: 0 SAS-1.1 format: 0 vendor identification: PMCSIERA product identification: SXP 36x3G product revision level: REVA More information about this utility can be found in the smp_rep_manufacturer(8) man page. SAS Management Protocol Utilities June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 69 11.4 smp_rep_general smp_rep_general utility sends the REPORT GENERAL request to a SMP Target. 11.4.1 Examples mp_rep_general -vvvv /dev/bsg/expander-6\:0 Report general request: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 send_req_sgv4: fd=3, subvalue=0 send_req_sgv4: driver_status=0, transport_status=0 device_status=0, duration=0, info=0 din_resid=0, dout_resid=0 Report general response: expander change count: 547 expander route indexes: 1024 long response: 0 number of phys: 25 table to table supported: 0 zone configuring: 0 self configuring: 0 STP continue AWT: 0 open reject retry supported: 0 configures others: 0 configuring: 0 externally configurable route table: 0 enclosure logical identifier More information about this utility can be found in the smp_rep_general(8) man page. MDRAID Sysfs Components Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 70 12 MDRAID Sysfs Components Just like the isci driver and libsas, the MDRAID subsystem also has sysfs components that provides information or can be used to tweak behavior and performance. All MDRAID devices present in the system are shown in: /sys/block/ Example: ls -l /sys/block/md* lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 /sys/block/md126 -> ../devices/virtual/block/md126 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 /sys/block/md127 -> ../devices/virtual/block/md127 Mapping between a device number and its name can be found: ls -l /dev/md/ total 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 8 May 17 13:26 imsm0 -> ../md127 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 8 May 17 13:26 raid1 -> ../md126 md127 is imsm0 and md126 is raid1. MDRAID Sysfs Components June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 71 Md devices in /sys/block are symbolic links pointing to the /sys/devices/virtual/block. All MD Devices are in the ‘md’ subdirectory in /sys/devices/virtual/block/mdXYZ directory. In the md directory the following contents can be found: ls -l /sys/devices/virtual/block/md127/md total 0 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 array_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_state drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 13:18 bitmap -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 chunk_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 component_size drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdb drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdc -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 layout -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 level -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 max_read_errors -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 metadata_version --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 new_dev -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 raid_disks -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 reshape_position -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 resync_start -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:18 safe_mode_delay Since the MD device is a container, the metadata_version file will show: cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md127/md/metadata_version external:imsm The directory contains subdirectories dev-sdb and dev-sdc specifying the disks that the container is assembled from. MDRAID Sysfs Components Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 72 The MD Volume contents look like below: ls -l /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/ total 0 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 array_state drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 18 13:10 bitmap --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 bitmap_set_bits -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 chunk_size -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 component_size -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 degraded drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdb drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 17 13:26 dev-sdc -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 layout -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 level -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 max_read_errors -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 metadata_version -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 mismatch_cnt --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 new_dev -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 raid_disks lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 rd0 -> dev-sdb lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 0 May 17 13:26 rd1 -> dev-sdc -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 reshape_position -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 resync_start -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 safe_mode_delay -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 suspend_hi -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 suspend_lo -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_action -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_completed MDRAID Sysfs Components June 2012 Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS Document Number: 327602-001US Software User’s Manual 73 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_force_parallel -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_max -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_min -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 17 13:26 sync_speed -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_speed_max -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 18 13:10 sync_speed_min MDRAID Sysfs Components Intel® Rapid Storage Technology enterprise (Intel® RSTe) for Linux OS June 2012 Software User’s Manual Document Number: 327602-001US 74 Several new files are present, and they are related to the RAID Volume properties. Base information can be read from files: Array size cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/array_size 1048576 Array state cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/array_state clean Raid level cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/level raid1 Strip size cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/chunk_size 65536 Metadata cat /sys/devices/virtual/block/md126/md/metadata_version external:/md127/0 And this is what is shown in mdstat for the example RAID information: cat /proc/mdstat Personalities : [raid1] md127 : active raid1 sdc[1] sdb[0] 1048576 blocks super external:/md127/0 [2/2] [UU] md0 : inactive sdc[1](S) sdb[0](S) 2210 blocks super external:imsm unused devices: Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty Installation Notes for the Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main board manufacturer to get a replacement. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP, NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT, den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten. WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja. Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal para obter uma reposição. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato. Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una sostituzione. IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić. WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora, płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora. Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support. intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности внешний вид компонента может отличаться. ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке. Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. 安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel. com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣 式可能有所不同。 重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」 (UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP， 「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換 主機板。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示 意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。 重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前， 此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。 如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的 主板制造商联系，以进行调换。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel. com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해 보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제 구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에 부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되 며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는 경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드 제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。 重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの 下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに 取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元 に交換を依頼してください。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 Installation Instructions for the Intel® TS13A Thermal Solution Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหตุ: คู่มือการติดตั้งไม่ได้เป็นส่วนหนึ่งของการรับประกันแบบจํากัดระยะสามปี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. http://www.intel.com/go/integration http://www.intel.com/go/integration http://www.intel.com/go/integration http://www.intel.com/go/integration Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronic Information Products (China RoHS declaration) ӗ૱ѝᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘Ⲵ〠৺ਜ਼䟿 Hazardous Substances Table 䜘Ԧ〠 Component Name ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘ᡆݳ㍐ Hazardous Substance 䫵 Pb ⊎ Hg 䭹 Cd 䬜ԧޝ Cr (VI) ཊⓤ㚄㤟 PBB ཊⓤҼ㤟䟊 PBDE ᮓ✝⡷ Thermal Solution ; ƻƻ ƻ ƻ ƻ 䲔䶎ਖཆ⢩࡛Ⲵḷ⌘↔ḷᘇѪ䪸ሩᡰ⎹৺ӗ૱Ⲵ⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ḷᘇ ḀӋਟᴤᦒⲴ䴦 䜘Ԧਟ㜭Պᴹањн਼Ⲵ⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀 ֻྲ⭥⊐অݳ⁑ඇ ↔⧟؍֯⭘ᵏ䲀ਚ䘲⭘Ҿӗ૱൘ӗ૱ѝᡰ㿴ᇊⲴᶑԦлᐕ The Environment-Friendly Use Period (EFUP) for all enclosed products and their parts are per the symbol shown here, unless otherwise marked. Certain field-replaceable parts may have a different EFUP (for example, battery modules) number. The Environment-Friendly Use Period is valid only when the product is operated under the conditions defined in the product manual. ƻ˖Indicates that this hazardous substance contained in all homogeneous materials of such component is within the limits specified in SJ/T 11363-2006 (now replaced by GB/T 26572). h˖ Indicates that the content of such hazardous substance in at least a homogeneous material of such component exceeds the limits specified in SJ/T 11363-2006 (now replaced by GB/T 26572). . This table shows where these substances may be found in the supply chain of our electronic information products, as of the date of sale of the enclosed product. Note that some of the component types listed above may or may not be a part of the enclosed product. ƻ˖㺘⽪䈕ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘൘䈕䜘Ԧᡰᴹ൷䍘ᶀᯉѝⲴਜ਼䟿൷൘ ⧠⭡ ਆԓ ḷ߶㿴ᇊⲴ䲀䟿㾱≲ԕлDŽ h˖㺘⽪䈕ᴹ∂ᴹᇣ⢙䍘㠣ቁ൘䈕䜘ԦⲴḀа൷䍘ᶀᯉѝⲴਜ਼䟿䎵ࠪ ⧠⭡ ਆԓ ḷ߶㿴ᇊⲴ䲀䟿㾱≲DŽ ሩ䬰ѻᰕⲴᡰӗ૱ᵜ㺘ᱮ⽪ᡁޜਨᓄ䬮Ⲵ⭥ᆀؑӗ૱ਟ㜭वਜ਼䘉Ӌ⢙䍘DŽ⌘ ˖൘ᡰӗ૱ѝਟ㜭Պҏਟ㜭нՊਜ਼ᴹᡰᴹᡰࡇⲴ䜘ԦDŽ SJ/T 11363-2006 GB/T 26572 SJ/T 11363-2006 GB/T 26572 LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifikationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especificaciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fin determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EX- CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especificações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fim em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifica della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine. Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. H29943-004 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA Marvell. Moving Forward Faster. December 6, 2006 User Guide Marvell RAID Utility For Samsung Use Only No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Marvell. Marvell retains the right to make changes to this document at any time, without notice. Marvell makes no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, with regard to any information contained in this document, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Marvell does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, or other items contained within this document. Marvell products are not designed for use in life-support equipment or applications that would cause a life-threatening situation if any such products failed. Do not use Marvell products in these types of equipment or applications. With respect to the products described herein, the user or recipient, in the absence of appropriate U.S. government authorization, agrees: 1) Not to re-export or release any such information consisting of technology, software or source code controlled for national security reasons by the U.S. Export Control Regulations ("EAR"), to a national of EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2; 2) Not to export the direct product of such technology or such software, to EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2, if such technology or software and direct products thereof are controlled for national security reasons by the EAR; and, 3) In the case of technology controlled for national security reasons under the EAR where the direct product of the technology is a complete plant or component of a plant, not to export to EAR Country Groups D:1 or E:2 the direct product of the plant or major component thereof, if such direct product is controlled for national security reasons by the EAR, or is subject to controls under the U.S. Munitions List ("USML"). At all times hereunder, the recipient of any such information agrees that they shall be deemed to have manually signed this document in connection with their receipt of any such information. Copyright © 2006. Marvell International Ltd. All rights reserved. Marvell, the Marvell logo, Moving Forward Faster, Alaska, Fastwriter, Datacom Systems on Silicon, Libertas, Link Street, NetGX, PHYAdvantage, Prestera, Raising The Technology Bar, The Technology Within, Virtual Cable Tester, and Yukon are registered trademarks of Marvell. Ants, AnyVoltage, Discovery, DSP Switcher, Feroceon, GalNet, GalTis, Horizon, Marvell Makes It All Possible, RADLAN, UniMAC, and VCT are trademarks of Marvell. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ii Marvell RAID Utility User Guide For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide iii CONTENTS 1 GETTING STARTED .................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 System Requirements ....................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.2 Software Components ....................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Supported RAID Levels ..................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 SETTING UP THE SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Installing the Disk Drives ................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.2 Verifying Driver Installation ............................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.3 Installing the Software ....................................................................................................... 1-5 2 USING THE SOFTWARE .......................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.1 GUI OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.1.1 Logical Drives .................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.1.2 Physical Drives .................................................................................................................. 2-12 2.1.3 Adapters ............................................................................................................................ 2-15 2.1.4 System .............................................................................................................................. 2-16 2.2 VIEWING AND CREATING A LOGICAL DRIVE ......................................................................................... 2-17 2.3 MODIFYING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................. 2-21 2.4 DELETING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................... 2-22 2.5 REBUILDING A LOGICAL DRIVE ........................................................................................................... 2-23 2.5.1 Auto-Rebuild ..................................................................................................................... 2-23 2.5.2 Manual Rebuild ................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.6 INITIALIZING A LOGICAL DRIVE ............................................................................................................ 2-24 2.7 CHECKING THE INTEGRITY OF A LOGICAL DRIVE .................................................................................. 2-25 3 CONFIGURING RAID USING THE BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM (BIOS) ........................................ 3-27 3.1 ACCESSING THE BIOS ....................................................................................................................... 3-28 3.2 USING THE BIOS ............................................................................................................................... 3-30 3.2.1 Adapter .............................................................................................................................. 3-30 3.2.2 Create ............................................................................................................................... 3-30 3.2.3 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 3-33 4 SELECTING A RAID LEVEL ..................................................................................................................... 4-35 4.1 RAID 0 (STRIPING) ............................................................................................................................ 4-36 4.2 RAID 1 (MIRRORING) ........................................................................................................................ 4-37 4.3 RAID 10 (MIRRORING AND STRIPING) ................................................................................................ 4-38 4.4 COMPARING RAID LEVELS ................................................................................................................. 4-39 4.4.1 RAID 0 (striping) ................................................................................................................ 4-39 4.4.2 RAID 1 (mirroring) ............................................................................................................. 4-39 4.4.3 RAID 10 (mirroring and striping) ....................................................................................... 4-39 4.4.4 Overview of RAID Levels .................................................................................................. 4-39 For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide iv THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 1-1 1 GETTING STARTED This chapter describes how to get started with the Marvell Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) Utility, including how to access and install this utility. The topics included in this chapter are: Product Overview Setting Up the Software For Samsung Use Only 1-2 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 1.1 Product Overview The Marvell RAID Utility (MRU) software is a web-based graphical user interface (GUI) tool for the Marvell RAID adapter. The MRU GUI enables you to create and manage logical drives from the physical disk drives installed in your computer. RAID technology allows you to create logical drives based on one or more physical disk drives in combination for fault tolerance and improved performance. For more information about RAID technology and how to determine a RAID level for your logical drive, see Chapter 4, Selecting a RAID Level. Note: The terms adapter and controller are used interchangeably for the purpose of this document. 1.1.1 System Requirements Before you begin, ensure that your computer meets the following requirements: Operating systems: Microsoft Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005, Windows XP Professional, Windows 2003, and Windows 2000. Hardware: The Marvell RAID Adapter supports one PATA and a maximum of four SATA disk drives. Ensure the SATA and PATA drives are appropriately connected. For instructions on how to connect the SATA and the PATA drives, see Installing the Disk Drives on page 1-4. RAID adapter/controller driver Web service 1.1.2 Software Components During a full installation, all of the following components, except the CLI, are automatically installed on your computer. A custom installation requires you to select individual components. The MRU software CD includes the following items: Driver. The driver is automatically installed on your system during MRU installation. Web service. The Apache server is automatically installed on your system during MRU installation. Marvell Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI, for only Linux users, is available with custom installation of the software. Note: The Linux operating system will be supported in a future release of the MRU. Marvell RAID Utility software. Note: The Marvell BIOS Configuration, a built-in component of the Marvell RAID controller, can create, initialize, and delete the logical drives. For instructions about using the Marvell BIOS Configuration, see Chapter 3, Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS). For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Getting Started 1-3 1.1.3 Supported RAID Levels The Marvell RAID controller supports the following RAID levels: RAID 0 (striping). In this RAID system, identical drives can read and write data in parallel to increase performance. RAID 1 (mirroring). In this RAID system, mirroring increases read performance through load balancing and elevator sorting while creating a complete real-time backup of your files. RAID 10 (mirroring/striping). In this nested RAID system, combining mirroring with striping offers both high read/write performance and fault-tolerance. For more information about RAID levels, see Comparing RAID Levels on page 4-39. For Samsung Use Only 1-4 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 1.2 Setting Up the Software This section describes how to install the disk drives and the MRU. The topics included in this section are: Installing the Disk Drives Verifying Driver Installation Installing the Software 1.2.1 Installing the Disk Drives Before installing the MRU, ensure that you have the required number of SATA and PATA disk drives connected to the appropriate ports on your computer’s motherboard. We recommend installing SATA and PATA drives of similar capacity, which enhance performance. To install the SATA and PATA disks 1. Connect one end of each data cable to the individual disk drives and connect the other end of each data cable to the connectors either on the motherboard or on the adapter. 2. Connect power to each of the disk drives. Note: To create the logical drives, use only drives connected to a single adapter. The following table lists the minimum number of drives required for each RAID level. 1.2.2 Verifying Driver Installation To run the MRU, install the driver specific to your operating system. The driver file is automatically installed on your computer during MRU installation. To verify the driver installation 1. On the Desktop, right-click My Computer, and then select Manage. The Computer Management window appears. 2. In the left pane, double-click System Tools, and then double-click Device Manager. The left pane displays a list of devices for your computer. If the driver properly installed during the MRU installation, the right pane displays the Marvell RAID adapter under SCSI and RAID Controllers. RAID Level Number of Drives Required RAID 0 Any number RAID 1 2 only RAID 10 4 only For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Getting Started 1-5 1.2.3 Installing the Software This sections describes the MRU Setup Wizard windows. The recommended screen resolution for the MRU GUI is 1024 × 768 pixels. To install the MRU software 1. Insert the MRU CD into your computer’s CD drive. The MRU Setup Wizard starts. Figure 1-1 MRU Setup Wizard: Main Window 2. Click NEXT. The Choose Components window appears, as shown in Figure 1-2, with the Full install option pre-selected. For Samsung Use Only 1-6 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 1-2 MRU Setup Wizard: Choose Components 3. Select the options you want for custom installation. Web Service is preselected for both Full and Custom installation. If you deselect this option, the Apache server is not installed if the Web Service is unavailable on your computer. Web Service is required to run the MRU software. 4. Click NEXT. The Choose Install Location window appears, as shown in Figure 1-3, with the default location displayed in the Destination Folder field. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Getting Started 1-7 Figure 1-3 MRU Setup Wizard: Choose Install Location 5. Click Browse, and then select the installation location. 6. Click Install. The installation window appears for a few seconds, indicating that installation is in progress. Afterwards, the installation wizard appears, indicating that the software installation is now complete, as shown in Figure 1-4. For Samsung Use Only 1-8 Getting Started Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 1-4 MRU Installation Wizard: Last Window 7. Click Finish. A shortcut to the MRU software appears on the Desktop. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2-9 2 USING THE SOFTWARE The Marvell RAID Utility (MRU) creates and manages logical drives on your computer by using RAID technology. RAID allows multiple physical drives to be combined together to create a logical drive. Logical drives can continuously protect critical data and improve performance depending on which RAID level you choose. For more information, see Comparing RAID Levels on page 4-39. Although most functions pertaining to creating and managing logical drives can be performed using the Marvell BIOS Configuration or the Marvell CLI, the MRU GUI offers additional capabilities. The GUI is an easy-to-use customization tool for managing logical drives. This chapter describes the options available in the MRU for creating and managing logical drives. The topics included in this chapter are: GUI Overview Viewing and Creating a Logical Drive Modifying a Logical Drive Deleting a Logical Drive Rebuilding a Logical Drive Initializing a Logical Drive Checking the Integrity of a Logical Drive For Samsung Use Only 2-10 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.1 GUI Overview The MRU GUI has a top and bottom pane, as shown in Figure 2-1. The top pane, with four tabs, is the interactive interface. The four tabs in this pane are Logical Drives, Physical Drives, Adapters, and System. Clicking on each tab brings up a window that lets you perform specific tasks and view configuration details specific to that tab. Figure 2-1 MRU Main Window For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-11 The bottom pane displays the status and severity of events in the RAID system. The following table describes the three kinds of events. The following sections describe the items in the top pane and the options available under each tab. 2.1.1 Logical Drives The Logical Drives window, shown in Figure 2-2, lets you perform the following tasks: View the existing logical drives and their configurations. Create a new RAID. View the properties for individual logical drives, as shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-2 MRU Logical Drives Symbol Name Description Info This is for information only. Warning This is to notify that the user may need to take an action. Major This is to notify that an action is urgently required. For Samsung Use Only 2-12 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 2-3 MRU Logical Drive Details The Logical Drive Details window performs the following tasks: Delete, Modify, Restore, Rebuild, Check integrity, and Initialize. 2.1.2 Physical Drives The Physical Drives window displays the SATA and PATA drives on your computer and indicates the status for each physical drive, as shown in Figure 2-4, Note: Click LEGEND at the bottom corner for a quick overview of the drive icons. Symbol Name Configured Unconfigured Spare drive For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-13 Figure 2-4 MRU All Physical Drives Click on an individual drive to view the Physical Drive Details window, as shown in Figure 2-5. For Samsung Use Only 2-14 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide The Physical Drive Details window displays the properties for the specific physical drive and the available resources for creating a logical drive. Figure 2-5 MRU Physical Drive Details You can perform the following tasks from this window: View the properties for each physical drive connected to the RAID controller. Set a physical drive as a spare drive for use while rebuilding a logical drive. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-15 2.1.3 Adapters The Adapters window, as shown in Figure 2-6, provides information about each adapter, including the Driver Version, Vendor Device ID, Sub Vendor Device ID, Port Count, Background Activity Rate, and Auto-Rebuild. Note: Your computer can have a maximum of two adapters. Figure 2-6 MRU Adapters You can perform the following tasks from this window: Turn the alarm on or off. Set Auto-Rebuild on or off. Cancel the changes and restore the configuration. For Samsung Use Only 2-16 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.1.4 System The System window, as shown in Figure 2-7, provides information about the system-level components of the MRU software. Figure 2-7 MRU System For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-17 2.2 Viewing and Creating a Logical Drive You can view details about an existing logical drive and create a new logical drive from the Logical Drives window of the MRU. To view the logical drive details 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, as shown in Figure 2-2, and then click the icon for the individual logical. The Logical Drive Details window appears, as shown in Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8 MRU Logical Drive Details You can determine the status of each logical drive by its icon, which are listed in the following table. Symbol Name Description Functional logical drive This logical drive operates at its optimal strength. Offline logical drive This logical drive is not functional, either due to a disk failure or a disk being unplugged. For Samsung Use Only 2-18 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Note: Click LEGEND at the bottom corner for a quick overview of the logical drive types. To create a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab. 3. At the upper right side of the screen, click Create New RAID. The Create Logical Drive window appears, as shown in Figure 2-9. This window displays the physical drives available for creating new logical drives. Figure 2-9 MRU Create Logical Drive Degraded logical drive This logical drive is no longer reliable. Therefore, you must either rebuild the drive or delete it. If you have a degraded logical drive, the alarm goes on. To turn off the alarm, click on the Adapters tab. Symbol Name Description For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-19 4. In the RAID Level box, select a level. Table 2-1 lists the minimum number of drives required for each RAID level. 5. In the Adapter box, select the appropriate adapter. 6. Click on the specific SATA and PATA drives to create the RAID of your choice. 7. Click NEXT. Note: If the combination of selected drives is not supported by the particular RAID level, an error message appears reminding you to select the appropriate number of drives. The second Create Logical Drive window appears, as shown in Figure 2-10, and for setting the properties. Table 2-1 Raid Level RAID Level Number of Drives Required RAID 0 Any number RAID 1 2 only RAID 10 4 only For Samsung Use Only 2-20 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Figure 2-10 MRU Create Logical Drive (second window) 8. Enter the desired value in each field, and then click SUBMIT at the bottom of the screen. Note: You have three options for initializing a logical drive: Quick, Full, and None. You can initialize the logical drive while creating it or afterwards. A window appears with a message about formatting the new logical drive. 9. Click OK. The All Logical Drives window appears, displaying the new logical drive. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-21 2.3 Modifying a Logical Drive You can change the configuration of an existing logical drive to enhance its performance. To modify a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. The Logical Drive Details window appears, as shown in Figure 2-11. Figure 2-11 MRU Logical Drive Details 3. Change the properties as needed, and then click MODIFY at the top of the screen. Note: To return the editable properties to their original values, click RESTORE. For Samsung Use Only 2-22 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.4 Deleting a Logical Drive If you want to change the size of a logical drive, you must delete that logical drive and create a new one with the desired configuration. To delete a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. The Logical Drive Details window appears. 3. Click Delete. A message appears confirming the deletion of the logical drive. 4. Click OK. After deleting the logical drive, the additional free space is shown in the space available on the physical drives. Any physical drive that is not used as part of a logical drive is available through the Windows Storage Manager. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-23 2.5 Rebuilding a Logical Drive The MRU can rebuild the logical drive by reconstructing data from a failed drive onto one of its spare physical drives. Rebuilding is available for logical drives created using RAID level 1 and 10, which have the capability of mirroring data. RAID 0 excludes rebuild capabilities. Therefore, the entire stripe is lost if one of the physical drive fails. When a logical drive fails and is degraded, you are notified in two ways: Triggering of the alarm. You can turned it off in the Adapters window. Displaying the logical drive red icon with a warning symbol next to it. You have the option to rebuild the logical drive either automatically or manually. To use the auto-rebuild process, there must be a spare drive available. Go to the Physical Drive Details window to set a physical drive as a spare. Any physical drive that is fully or partially configured cannot be set as a spare drive. 2.5.1 Auto-Rebuild If the Auto-Rebuild option is on when creating the logical drive, the rebuilding process begins automatically if there is a degraded drive. 2.5.2 Manual Rebuild Follow these steps to manually rebuild a logical drive: 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Physical Drives tab, and then select a physical drive as the target spare drive. 3. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then select the logical drive to rebuild. 4. Click REBUILD. The Event Log pane displays the rebuilding status. For Samsung Use Only 2-24 Using the Software Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2.6 Initializing a Logical Drive There are two methods for initializing a logical drive: Quick initialization. Use this method if the logical drive consists one or more disk drives. This method erases only the Master Boot Record (MBR) in all of the selected disk drives. Full Background initialization. In this method, data synchronization occurs in the background while the operating system continues to have access to the logical drive. Full initialization is available for RAID 1 and RAID 10 logical drives. Note: This option is not available in the Marvell RAID BIOS Configuration. To initialize a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. 3. In the Logical Drive Details window, click INITIALIZE. The Initialize window appears, as shown in Figure 2-12. Figure 2-12 MRU Initialize Window 4. In the Initialize Options box, select an initialization method. 5. Click SUBMIT. The Logical Drive Details window reappears and the Event Log pane displays the status of initialization. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Using the Software 2-25 2.7 Checking the Integrity of a Logical Drive This feature enables the software to check and fix the data parity in the logical drives using RAID levels 1 and 10. Checking the integrity of data on your logical drive is performed as a housekeeping function. Note: Perform this task when the logical drive you want to check is not performing RAID activities. To check integrity of a logical drive 1. Start the MRU. 2. Click the Logical Drives tab, and then click the icon for the logical drive. The Check Integrity window appears. 3. Click CHECK INTEGRITY. 4. Select one of the following options: Check. This option checks and reports data inconsistencies. Check and Fix. This option checks, reports, and resolves data inconsistencies. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 2-26 Using the Software THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3-27 3 CONFIGURING RAID USING THE BASIC INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM (BIOS) The Marvell RAID BIOS Configuration, which is built into the Marvell RAID controller, creates logical drives. Note: For extended capabilities in creating and managing logical drives, run the MRU. For information about using the MRU, see Chapter 2, Using the Software. The topics included in this chapter are: Accessing the BIOS Using the BIOS For Samsung Use Only 3-28 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3.1 Accessing the BIOS The main BIOS configuration screen displays three main functions, a set of keyboard commands, and configuration information about the physical disk drives and the logical drives, if any. The functions are: Adapter. Displays the physical drives installed on your computer. Create. Lets the user create logical drives. Delete. Lets the user delete an existing logical drive. The keyboard commands are: Arrow keys. Use the arrow keys to navigate the screens. ENTER/SPACE. Use these keys to select an item and execute a command. ESC. Use the escape key to go back one screen or exit the program. The configuration information for the physical and logical drives are: ID. This displays the identification number assigned to each logical drive by the BIOS. Level. This displays the RAID level configuration of the logical drive. Size. This displays the data capacity of the logical drive in Megabytes (MB). Members. This displays the disks that are included in a logical drive. Status. This displays one of the following logical drive conditions: Online: The logical drive is functioning at the optimal level. Degraded: The logical drive is functional but does not perform fault tolerance. For RAID levels 1 and 10, the logical drive contains a drive that has stopped functioning. If set to auto-rebuild, the logical drive rebuilds itself on the spare drive, if available on your computer. Identify and replace the failed disk drive. Offline: The logical drive is not functional and cannot be rebuilt. Therefore, replace the failed drive and create a new logical drive to copy over your data. To access the MRU through the BIOS 1. Reboot your computer. 2. Before Windows starts, press CTRL+M to enter the BIOS, as shown in Figure 3-1. For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-29 Figure 3-1 BIOS Main Screen Adapter 1 Arrays Information: No array is defined? Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 [Adapter] [Create] [Delete] :Navigate, ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit For Samsung Use Only 3-30 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3.2 Using the BIOS This section describes the menus and related screens for configuring the MRU through the BIOS. 3.2.1 Adapter Figure 3-1 shows the main BIOS menu screen, which displays the physical drives and related information installed on your computer. From the Adapter screen, you can navigate to the Create and Delete screens. 3.2.2 Create Follow these steps to create a logical drive: 1. Start the BIOS. See Accessing the BIOS on page 3-28. 2. At the top of the screen, select the Create tab, and then press ENTER. The Create screen appears. This screen lets you select the disk drives for the logical drive. Figure 3-2 Select Disks to Create, Screen 1 Select from disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 NEXT For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-31 3. Select a drive, and then press ENTER. An asterisk appears next to the selected drive. Figure 3-3 Select Disks to Create, Screen 2 4. Select NEXT, and then press ENTER. The Create Array screen appears, as shown in Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Create Array Screen 5. View the options available by clicking in each field. Select from disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 NEXT * * Create Array Raid level Array Name Disks ID Max Size(MB) Strip Size : : : : : : NEXT * : : Capacity(MB) Init Mode Cache Mode RAID0 1 5 9 13 17 18 987776 987776 64KB No Write Through For Samsung Use Only 3-32 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 6. Enter values for the following logical drive properties: RAID Level (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) Array Name Capacity Stripe Size (16K, 32K, 64K, 128K) Init Mode (Initialization: None or Quick) Cache Mode (Write Through or Write Back) 7. Select NEXT, and then press ENTER. The BIOS main screen appears and displays the new logical drive. Figure 3-5 Logical Drive Display Adapter 1 Arrays Information: Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed 1 5 9 13 17 18 2 1 3 4 5 5 SATA: SATA: SATA: SATA: PATA: PATA: Maxtor 6L200P0 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 HDT722516DLA380 ST3400832A SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 SATA 1 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 164.6GB 400GB 203.9GB UDMA-5 UDMA-6 [Adapter] [Create] [Delete] :Navigate, ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit ID 1 Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members New array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18 For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) 3-33 3.2.3 Delete Follow these steps to delete a logical drive: 1. Start the BIOS. See Accessing the BIOS on page 3-28. 2. At the top of the screen, select the Delete tab, and then press Enter. The Delete Array screen appears. Figure 3-6 BIOS Delete, Screen 1 3. Select the logical drive to delete. An asterisk appears next to the selected logical drive. Figure 3-7 BIOS Delete, Screen 2 4. Select NEXT, and the press ENTER. A message appears at the bottom of the BIOS screen about deleting the Master Boot Record (MBR). 5. Press Y to delete the MBR. The BIOS main screen appears and the deleted logical drive is no longer displayed. Delete array ID 1 Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members new array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18 NEXT Delete array ID 1 Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members new array 293.8GB RAID10 Online 64KB 1.5.9.13.17.18 NEXT * For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 3-34 Configuring RAID Using the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4-35 4 SELECTING A RAID LEVEL Redundant array of independent disks (RAID) is a storage technology consisting of one or more disks working in parallel. RAID technology allows an array of physical disks to be combined together to form a logical drive, which appears as a single storage device to the user. You can configure a RAID logical drive in several different ways, with each configuration offering its own benefits. The Marvell RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10. This chapter provides information about the properties of each RAID level and how to choose a suitable RAID level. The topics included in this chapter are: RAID 0 (Striping) RAID 1 (Mirroring) RAID 10 (Mirroring and Striping) Comparing RAID Levels For Samsung Use Only 4-36 Selecting a RAID Level Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4.1 RAID 0 (Striping) RAID 0 is known as striping because data stripes of equal size on the logical drive are divided among an even number of physical disks, as shown in Figure 4-1. Consequently, the speed at which data is read and written is increased because data stored on multiple drives can be read and written simultaneously. However, it is important to remember that data is divided between multiple disk drives, so data is not recoverable if one of the physical disks fails. Figure 4-1 RAID 0: Striping RAID 0 is ideally suited in situations where all of the physical disk drives have the same capacity. However, you can create a logical drive if the selected disk drives have different capacities, but it will have a maximum capacity equal to the size of the smallest disk multiplied by the total number of disks in the array. For example, a logical drive consisting of two disks, an 80 Gb physical disk and a 100 Gb physical disk, can only create a logical drive up to a maximum of 160 Gb (2 x 80 Gb). Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 6 Block 7 Block 8 Block 1 Block 3 Block 5 Block 7 Block 2 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 Logical Drive Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2 = Striping For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Selecting a RAID Level 4-37 4.2 RAID 1 (Mirroring) RAID1 is known as mirroring because the data on the logical drive is written to a pair of physical disks, which ensures that identical data appears on both of the physical disks. See Figure 4-2 for more detail. Figure 4-2 RAID 1: Mirroring RAID 1 can increase Read performance. Data is identical on both of the physical disks, so a read command can be sent to the disk that is not busy, rather than wait for the primary drive to finish an in-process read. However, RAID 1 does incur a slight drop in Write performance because both drives must be written to when sending data to the logical drive. RAID 1 also incorporates fault-tolerance, which allows access to the data even if one physical disk fails. In addition, if you replace the failed disk with a new physical disk, the rebuild begins recreating the mirror set of drives, which can be accomplished while the system continues to function normally. Note: Mirroring is a technique used for redundancy, so it is important to remember that, for example, two 80 Gb physical disks (a total of 160 Gb) would only store 80 Gb of original data because the remaining 80 Gb is required to mirror the original data. Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 6 Block 7 Block 8 Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Logical Drive Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2 = Mirroring For Samsung Use Only 4-38 Selecting a RAID Level Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4.3 RAID 10 (Mirroring and Striping) RAID 10 is a combination of the mirroring (RAID 1) and striping (RAID 0) techniques. At least four physical disks (two pairs) are needed to configure a RAID 10 logical drive. Both pairs of physical disks make separate RAID 0 stripes, and then the first RAID 0 drive is mirrored to the second RAID 0 drive. See Figure 4-3 for more detail. RAID 10 provides the read and write performance of RAID 0, while providing the redundancy protection of RAID 1. Also, in the event of a disk failure, the logical drive can rebuild itself while the system continues to function normally. Figure 4-3 RAID 10: Mirroring and Striping Note: Like RAID 1, RAID 10 uses the mirroring technique for redundancy, so it is important to remember that, for example, two 80 Gb physical disks (a total of 160 Gb) would only store 80 Gb of original data because the remaining 80 Gb is required to mirror the original data. Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 6 Block 7 Block 8 Block 1 Block 3 Block 5 Block 7 Block 2 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 Logical Drive Physical Disk 1 Physical Disk 2 Striping Block 1 Block 3 Block 5 Block 7 Block 2 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 Physical Disk 3 Physical Disk 4 Striping Mirroring = For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide Selecting a RAID Level 4-39 4.4 Comparing RAID Levels Each RAID level has features that may or may not be suitable in certain situations, so it is important to carefully consider which RAID level is best suited for a particular purpose. 4.4.1 RAID 0 (striping) RAID 0 is simple to implement and provides increased reading and writing speed by spreading the transfer of data across multiple channels and drives. However, RAID 0 does not provide fault-tolerance, so all of the data is lost if one or more physical disks fail. 4.4.2 RAID 1 (mirroring) RAID 1 is simple to implement and features automatic fault-tolerance. RAID 1 also provides increased read performance because data can be requested in parallel. However, write performance is decreased because two writes are required for each write command. Also, RAID 1 uses just 50 percent of the total disk capacity. 4.4.3 RAID 10 (mirroring and striping) RAID 10 features automatic fault-tolerance and provides increased reading and writing speed by spreading the transfer of data across multiple channels and drives. However, RAID 10 uses just 50 percent of the total disk space and scalability is limited at a high inherent cost. 4.4.4 Overview of RAID Levels Table 4-1 gives an overview of the features for each RAID level. Table 4-1 RAID Features Features RAID 0 RAID 1 RAID 10 Simple implementation √ √ Improved read speed √√√ Improved write speed √ √ Fault-tolerance √ √ Efficient use of disk capacity √ Scalable √ √ Automatic rebuild √ √ Minimum number of drives 2 2 4 For Samsung Use Only Marvell RAID Utility User Guide 4-40 Selecting a RAID Level THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Worldwide Corporate Offices Marvell Semiconductor, Inc. 5488 Marvell Lane Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA Tel: 1.408.222.2500 Fax: 1.408.752.9028 Marvell Asia Pte, Ltd. 151 Lorong Chuan, #02-05 New Tech Park, Singapore 556741 Tel: 65.6756.1600 Fax: 65.6756.7600 Marvell Japan K.K. Shinjuku Center Bldg. 44F 1-25-1, Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 163-0644, Japan Tel: 81.3.5324.0355 Fax: 81.3.5324.0354 Marvell Semiconductor Israel, Ltd. 6 Hamada Street Mordot HaCarmel Industrial Park Yokneam 20692, Israel Tel: 972.4.909.1500 Fax: 972.4.909.1501 Marvell Semiconductor Korea, Ltd. Rm. 1603, Korea Trade Center 159-1 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Ku Seoul, Korea 135-729 Tel: 82.2.551-6070-6079 Fax: 82.2.551.6080 Radlan Computer Communications, Ltd. Atidim Technological Park, Bldg. #4 P O Box 58179 Tel Aviv 61580, Israel Tel: 972.3.645.8555 Fax: 972.3.645.8544 Worldwide Sales Offices Western US Marvell 5488 Marvell Lane Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA Tel: 1.408.222.2500 Fax: 1.408.752.9028 Sales Fax: 1.408.752.9029 Central US Marvell 9600 North MoPac Drive, Suite #215 Austin, TX 78759, USA Tel: 1.512.343.0593 Fax: 1.512.340.9970 Eastern US/Canada Marvell Parlee Office Park 1 Meeting House Road, Suite 1 Chelmsford, MA 01824 , USA Tel: 1.978.250.0588 Fax: 1.978.250.0589 Europe Marvell c/o Harts CA 3 Churchgates Church Lane Berkhamsted Hertfordshire, HP4 2UB United Kingdom Tel: 44.1442.263341 Fax: 44.1442.211543 Israel Marvell 6 Hamada Street Mordot HaCarmel Industrial Park Yokneam 20692, Israel Tel: 972.4.909.1500 Fax: 972.4.909.1501 China Marvell 10J, No. 1800, Zhong Shan West Road Shanghai, PRC 200235 Tel: 86.21.6440.1350 Fax: 86.21.6440.1705 Marvell Rm. 1102/1103, Jintai Fudi Mansion #9 An Ning Zhuang West Rd. Qing He, Haidian District Beijing, PRC 100085 Tel: 86.10.8274.3831 Fax: 86.10.8274.3830 Japan Marvell Shinjuku Center Bldg. 44F 1-25-1, Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 163-0644, Japan Tel: 81.3.5324.0355 Fax: 81.3.5324.0354 Taiwan Marvell 2Fl., No.1, Alley 20, Lane 407, Sec. 2 Ti-Ding Blvd., Nei Hu District Taipei, Taiwan, 114, R.O.C Tel: 886.2.8177.7071 Fax: 886.2.8752.5707 Korea Marvell Rm. 1603, Korea Trade Center 159-1 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Ku Seoul, Korea 135-729 Tel: 82.2.551-6070-6079 Fax: 82.2.551.6080 Marvell Semiconductor, Inc. 5488 Marvell Lane Santa Clara, CA 95054, USA Tel: 1.408.222.2500 Fax: 1.408.752.9028 www.marvell.com For more information, visit our website at: www.marvell.com 英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器 用户指南 ii 修订记录 修订版 修订记录 日期 -001 《英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南》第一版 2006 年 5 月 如果台式机主板上贴有 FCC 合格声明标志，则适用以下声明： FCC 合格声明 本设备符合联邦规章法案 (FCC) 第 15 部分的要求。其操作符合以下两个条件：(1) 本设备不会产生有害干扰；而且， (2) 本设备必须承受任何接收到的干扰，包括可能引起不良操作的干扰。 若您对本产品的电磁兼容性性能有任何疑问，请联络： Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro, OR 97124 1-800-628-8686 本设备已经过测试，符合联邦规章法案 (FCC) 第 15 部分对 B 类数字设备的限制要求。这些限制旨在提供合理的保护措施， 以防止在居住区安装本设备时可能产生的有害干扰。本设备将产生、使用并可能辐射无线电射频能。如果未按说明安装和使用 本设备，可能会对无线电通信造成有害干扰。然而，在特定条件下的正确安装并不保证不会产生此类干扰。如果本设备确实对 无线电通信或电视接收产生了有害干扰（通过关闭和打开本设备可判定有无干扰产生），用户可采取以下一种或几种措施消除 干扰： • 改变接收天线的方向或位置。 • 增大本设备与接收设备之间的距离。 • 将本设备和接收设备分别连接到归属于不同电路的电源插座中。 • 咨询经销商或经验丰富的无线电／电视技术人员，以寻求帮助。 未经英特尔公司明确许可，若对本设备作出任何修改或改动，用户可能丧失操作本设备的权利。 本设备经测试，符合家用或商用环境下的 FCC 标准。 加拿大通信部 (Canadian Department of Communications) 符合标准声明 本数字设备未超过对无线电噪声辐射的 B 类限制，此限制是加拿大通信部颁布的《无线电干扰规则》(Radio Interference Regulations) 中对数字设备的限制性规定。 Le présent appareil numerique német pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada. iii 免责声明 本文档提供有关英特尔® 产品的信息。本文档并未授予任何知识产权的许可，并未以明示或暗示，或以禁止反言或其它方式 授予任何知识产权许可。除英特尔在其产品的销售条款和条件中声明的责任之外，英特尔概不承担任何其它责任。并且， 英特尔对英特尔产品的销售和／或使用不作任何明示或暗示的担保，包括对产品的特定用途适用性、适销性或对任何专利权、 版权或其它知识产权的侵权责任等，均不作担保。Intel 产品并非设计用于医疗、救生、维生、关键控制、安全系统或核能 设施等用途。英特尔可能随时对产品规格及产品描述作出修改，恕不另行通知。 本文档所含的所有信息和软件均以其“原始状况”向客户提供。英特尔公司对本文档的使用及其所含的软件和信息不承担任何 明示或暗示担保和责任，并且对本文档或软件可能含有的任何错误亦概不承担任何责任，与此同时，英特尔不承诺对本文档所 含的信息或软件进行更新。英特尔保留随时对本文档或软件进行修订的权利，恕不另行通知。有关特定 Linux* 版本的支持， 请与经销商联系、查询。 英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器随带的某些软件可能是由第三方提供的，而非英特尔（“第三方软件”）。您对第三方软件 的使用权受此类组件随供的许可协议的管辖。英特尔不以任何方式对此类第三方软件作任何担保，并且对您对第三方软件的 使用概不承担任何责任。有关特定支持，请与第三方软件经销商联系、查询。 本文档及其所述软件是经过许可而提供的，因此对它的使用或复制需满足相应的许可条件。本手册所含信息仅供参考，并随时 予以修订，恕不另行通知，因此不得认为是英特尔作出的承诺。英特尔公司对本文档或本文档提及的任何软件可能存在的任何 错误或不准确概不承担任何责任或义务。 除非此类许可允许，否则未经英特尔公司以书面形式表示明确同意，不得以任何方式或通过任何手段对本文档的任何部分进行 复制、在检索系统中存储或传送。 英特尔是英特尔公司或其子公司在美国及其它国家的商标或注册商标。 * 其它名称和品牌分别为其相应所有者的财产。 版权所有 © 2006 年，英特尔公司。保留所有权利。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 iv v 前言 本《用户指南》提供有关英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配器的安装、功能与特性、故障诊断与排除及规范要求 等信息。 文档结构 本《用户指南》包括以下各章内容： 1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡：提供有关安装本 PCI 电话适配卡的指导 2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器：提供有关如何安装本 PCI 电话适配软件的指导 3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话：提供有关使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话的指导 4 高级功能：描述 PCI 电话适配器的高级功能 5 故障诊断与排除：提供有关 PCI 电话适配器故障诊断与排除的信息 A 符合标准与规章：提供有关安全规范和 EMC 认证及产品认证等信息 体例 本文档采用如下体例： 注意 注意提醒用户如何避免损坏硬件或丢失数据。 注释 注释提示用户对重要信息引起重视。 术语 下表列出了本指南中常用的一些术语及其说明。 术语 说明 hook flash （转接） 短暂（一秒半）挂断电话的动作。此项操作通常用作执行服务的信号，如转接呼叫。 softphone 允许您从计算机或计算设备拨打互联网语音 (Voice over Internet Protocol, VoIP) 电话的程序。互联网电话服务提供商通常在其服务中提供 softphone 应用程序。 VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol（互联网语音）的首字母缩写，允许以数字方式在 互联网上发送语音信息。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 vi 系统要求 • 以下英特尔® 台式机主板之一： D945GNT/D945GCZ/D945GTP/D945GPM/D945GBO/D945PLNM/D915PDT/D101GGC/ D102GGC2/D865GSA • 以下操作系统之一： ⎯ Microsoft Windows* XP Professional ⎯ Microsoft Windows XP Home 包装盒内容 • 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 • Intel® Express Installer CD-ROM（英特尔® 快速安装程序光盘） • 半高 PCI 支架 • 注意事项标签 • 《参考指南》 vii 目录 1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 .............................................................. 9 电话适配器操作注意事项 ............................................................................................9 安装电话适配器硬件................................................................................................10 将电话适配器连接到电话机上 ....................................................................................11 2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 ........................................................... 13 在Microsoft Windows XP 环境中安装电话适配器 ..........................................................13 电话适配器国别／地区设置 .......................................................................................14 在 Windows* XP 环境中卸载电话适配器 .....................................................................16 卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序........................................................................................16 3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话....................................................................... 17 对于 Skype* 用户 .................................................................................................17 4 高级功能.................................................................................................. 19 呼叫方 ID 功能 .....................................................................................................19 按国家的呼叫等待和电话会议呼叫功能 .........................................................................19 5 故障诊断与排除 ......................................................................................... 21 电话适配器误插到了墙壁电话插座中 ............................................................................21 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）在挂起状态不工作 ...........................................21 拨打电话时听不到拨号音 ..........................................................................................21 与 Skype 相关的问题 .............................................................................................22 A 符合标准与规章 ......................................................................................... 25 欧盟符合标准声明 ..................................................................................................25 产品生态声明........................................................................................................26 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章...........................................................................................27 产品认证 .............................................................................................................28 表 1. 无铅卡标志 .....................................................................................................26 2. EMC（电磁兼容性）规章....................................................................................27 3. 产品认证标志 ..................................................................................................28 4. 服务提供商认证 ...............................................................................................29 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 viii 9 1 安装英特尔® 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 注意 静电放电 (ESD) 会损坏 PCI 电话适配卡组件。请在防静电工作台上安装本 PCI 卡。如果没有防静电工作台 可用，应佩戴防静电腕带或在对卡进行操作前触摸一下防静电包装袋。 电话适配器操作注意事项 本电话适配卡会因静电而被损坏。请遵守以下各项说明，以最大程度地减小电话适配器因静电放电而被损坏的 危险性。 1. 开始操作之前，首先将安装电话适配器所需的各种物品摆放在手边。在房间内来回走动取用工具会导致 静电累加。 2. 对电话适配器进行操作期间，应始终保持身体与计算机的金属部分或其电源系统相接触。触摸一下计算机 可放掉任何累加的静电。 3. 只准握持电话适配卡的顶部边缘和支架部分。切勿触及卡边缘上的连接器或裸露的线路。 4. 切勿将电话适配器放置在任何金属表面上。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 10 安装电话适配器硬件 要安装 PCI 电话适配卡，请： 1. 关闭计算机的电源并拔下交流电源电缆。拆下箱盖。 2. 找到某个尚未占用的 PCI 插槽的位置。 3. 如有必要，拆下该尚未占用插槽上的盖板。将螺丝存放好。 4. 将电话适配卡插入 PCI 插槽。插入卡期间您可能需要用力推压，以确保插接牢固。 5. 重新上好盖板螺丝。 OM19432 安装英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配卡 11 将电话适配器连接到电话机上 注意 切勿将英特尔 600SM 电话适配卡直接连接到墙壁电话插座中。当切断电话适配器与墙壁电话插座的连接且 计算机重新启动后，电话适配器方可正常工作。只当将电话适配器连接到模拟电话机上时，电话适配器方可 正常发挥作用。 OM19433 1. 将普通电话机连接到电话适配卡背面板上的 RJ-11 插孔中，如下图所示。 OM19434 RJ-11 2. 重新连接好计算机的交流电源电缆。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 12 13 2 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 在 Microsoft Windows XP 环境中安装电话适配器 要安装电话适配器驱动程序，请： 1. 打开计算机电源。 2. 当屏幕上出现 New Hardware Wizard（新硬件向导）窗口时，请单击 Cancel（取消）。 3. 将 Intel Express Installer CD（英特尔快速安装程序光盘）放入计算机的 CD-ROM 驱动器。 4. 当屏幕上出现 Intel Express Installer（英特尔快速安装程序）窗口时，请接受默认设置并单击 Install Now（立即开始安装）。 5. 按屏幕上显示的安装消息执行安装。 6. 当电话适配器驱动程序安装完毕后，计算机将自动重新启动。 7. 当成功完成该软件的安装后，主菜单将显示最终状态 注释 安装程序将自动将您当地的互联网语音 (Voice over Internet Protocol, VOIP) 服务提供商的图标安装到您的 计算机上。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 14 电话适配器国别／地区设置 要更改您的电话适配器的国别／地区设置，请按以下步骤操作： 1. 打开 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器），双击 Sound, video and game controllers（声音、视频和游戏控制器），然后双击 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter （Intel® 600SM PCI 电话适配器），进入 Properties（属性）对话框。 设置：英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器 15 2. 在 Properties（属性）对话框中，单击 Country/region（国别／地区）选项卡。该选项卡提供对可选 国家名称菜单的访问，此将指示驱动程序采用国家特定的信号规范。选择恰当的国别／地区，然后单击 OK（确定）。 欲获取使用 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 16 在 Windows* XP 环境中卸载电话适配器 要在 Windows XP 环境中卸载调制解调器，请： 1. 打开 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器），双击 Sound, video and game controllers（声音、视频和游戏控制器），右键单击 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter （Intel® 600SM PCI 电话适配器），然后选择 Uninstall（卸载）。 2. 按屏幕上显示的卸载说明操作。 欲获取使用 Windows Device Manager（Windows 设备管理器）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。 注释 不安装电话适配器驱动程序，电话适配器将不起作用。 卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序 要卸载 SoftPhone 代理程序，请： 1. 在 Windows Control Panel（控制面板）中，打开 Add or Remove Programs（添加或删除程序） 实用程序，选择 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序），然后单击 Change/Remove （更改／删除）。 2. 按屏幕上显示的卸载说明操作。 欲获取使用 Add or Remove Programs（添加或删除程序）的帮助，请参阅 Windows 的帮助系统。 17 3 使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话 要使用 PCI 电话适配器拨打电话，请： • 参阅您的 softphone 服务提供的说明。取决于您的 softphone 服务，使用电话适配器拨打电话的说明 可能有所不同。 • 确保您的 softphone 应用程序正处于运行状态。 注释 电话适配器不支持拨号调制解调器连接或传真传输。 对于 Skype* 用户 当您首次运行 Skype 时，屏幕上将出现一个请求允许电话适配器使用 Skype 的对话框。 重要说明！您必须 选择 “Allow this program to use Skype”（允许该程序使用 Skype），然后单击 OK（确定）， 以使用电话适配器通过 Skype 拨打电话。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 18 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）弹出菜单 当您完成电话适配器软件的安装后，系统任务栏上将显示如下 SoftPhone Agent （SoftPhone 代理程序）图标。 右键单击 softphone 代理程序图标，可查看显示 Skype 状态的弹出菜单，借此您可请求 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）是否在系统启动时运行，并允许您退出 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）。 注释 要使用 PCI 电话适配器通过 Skype 拨打电话，那么 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序） 则必须在系统任务栏上处于运行状态。 拨号说明 • 要在美国拨打本地或长途电话，请拨 1 + 区号 + 七位电话号码 + #。 • 要在美国以外的国家拨打本地或长途电话，请拨国家代码 + 区号 + 电话号码 + #。 • 要拨打国际电话，您必须按如下方法拨号：国家前缀 + 国家代码 + 区号 + 电话号码 + #。 要拨打 Skype 对 Skype 电话，只需为 Skype 联系人分配一个两位快速拨号，然后在连接到 PCI 电话适配器 的模拟电话机上拨打该号码即可。 注释 有关最新说明，请查阅 Skype 网站。 19 4 高级功能 英特尔® 600M PCI 电话适配器支持多项高级功能，如呼叫方 ID（I 类和 II 类）、呼叫等待和电话会议 呼叫等。 呼叫方 ID 功能 I 类呼叫方 ID 允许您在呼叫方 ID 屏幕上查看拨入呼叫的电话号码。而 II 类呼叫方 ID 则允许您在通话期间 查看拨入呼叫的电话号码。如果您已使用 softphone 应用程序创建了联系人名单，那么当您接到某个联系人 的呼叫时，您则可在呼叫方 ID 屏幕上查看该联系人的姓名。 按国家的呼叫等待和电话会议呼叫功能 注释 术语 “hook flash”（转接）是指通过按 “Flash”（闪挂）按钮或电话机的话筒挂叉而短暂（一秒半）挂断 电话。 对于除英国、法国和德国以外的所有国家 基本呼叫等待 要挂起当前的呼叫而接听拨入的呼叫，请： 1. 执行 hook flash（转接）操作。第一个呼叫则被挂起，进而接通第二个拨入呼叫。 2. 要重新接通第一个呼叫，请再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。 基本电话会议 要在三部和三部以上电话机间建立电话会议呼叫： 1. 请拨打会议的第一部电话。 2. 当接通第一部电话后，执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。 3. 请拨打会议的第二部电话。接通后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时，全部三部电话均已相互 接通。 4. 要添加下一部电话，请重复执行如上各步。 电话会议呼叫期间的呼叫等待 电话会议呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法与普通电话呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法相同。如果您处于电话会议 呼叫期间，当有呼叫拨入时，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，使电话会议呼叫挂起，而接通拨入的呼叫。 当完成拨入呼叫的通话后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作，则被重新接入原先的电话会议呼叫。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 20 英国、法国和德国 在英国、法国和德国使用高级呼叫功能的动作主要有三种。具体如下： 功能 操作 挂断通话 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 1 转至另一个呼叫 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 2 将呼叫接入会议 Hook flash（转接），然后按数字键 3 当使用这些功能时，您必须在执行 hook flash（转接）操作后等待拨号音。当听到拨号音后，您可按电话键盘 上相应的呼叫控制数字键。不按呼叫控制数字键将取消该过程。但在某些情况下，执行 hook flash（转接） 操作已足以对呼叫等待事件作出应答或开始一项新的呼叫。如果电话会议呼叫已建立完毕，那么“挂断通话” 和“转至另一个呼叫”功能只可用于其它拨入或拨出的呼叫。 基本呼叫等待 要挂起当前的呼叫而应答拨入的呼叫，请： 1. 执行 hook flash（转接）操作。第一个呼叫则被挂起，进而接通第二个拨入呼叫。 2. 要重新接通原来的电话呼叫，请首先执行 hook flash（转接）操作。然后，当听到拨号音时， 按数字键 2，此时您便重新接通了原来的电话呼叫。执行如上相同的步骤便可接回第二个呼叫方。 3. 要建立包含所有三方的电话会议呼叫，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音，然后按数字键 3。 4. 要挂断当前的通话并转至呼叫挂起状态，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音，然后 按数字键 1。 基本电话会议 要在三部和三部以上电话机间建立电话会议呼叫，请： 1. 拨打会议的第一部电话。 2. 当接通第一部电话后，执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。 3. 请拨打会议的第二部电话。接通后，再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作。此时您将听到拨号音。 按数字键 3 将第二部电话添加到会议中。此时，全部三部电话均已相互接通。 4. 要添加下一部电话，请重复执行如上各步。 电话会议呼叫期间的呼叫等待 电话会议呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法与普通单机电话呼叫期间呼叫等待的操作方法相同。如果您处于电话会 议呼叫期间，当有呼叫拨入时，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，使电话会议呼叫挂起，而接通拨入的呼叫。 一旦接通拨入呼叫，请再次执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。按数字键 2 便重新接通电话会议 呼叫，与此同时，拨入的呼叫则被置于挂起状态。如果您希望将该拨入呼叫添加到当前的会议中，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。然后按数字键 3，拨入的呼叫便被添加到会议中。如果您希望挂断 拨入呼叫，请执行 hook flash（转接）操作，等待拨号音。按数字键 1，拨入的呼叫便被挂断，且您将同时 重新接通电话会议呼叫。 21 5 故障诊断与排除 电话适配器误插到了墙壁电话插座中 如果您将电话适配器连接到了墙壁电话插座上，请执行如下各步： 1. 关闭计算机电源。 2. 从墙壁电话插座上拔下电话适配器并将其连接到普通电话机上（有关详细说明，请参阅第 11 页）。 3. 打开计算机电源。 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）在挂起状态不工作 如果在 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）运行期间试图将计算机置于挂起状态〈例如待机或 睡眠〉，或者如果计算机因不活动超时而进入挂起状态，那么将显示一条挂起将禁用 softphone 服务的 消息，然后问您是否继续。计算机处于挂起状态期间，您将无法使用电话适配器接听或拨打电话。 拨打电话时听不到拨号音 如果 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）未处于运行状态，或者如果 softphone 应用程序未与您的 VoIP 服务提供商建立有效连接，那么您的电话适配器则不生成拨号音。如果当您拿起话筒时听不到拨号音， 那么请尝试以下各项故障诊断步骤，期间每完成一步，请检查一次拨号音： 1. 确保 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）以及 softphone 应用程序均处于运行状态。 2. 确保 softphone 应用程序已与您的 VoIP 服务提供商建立有效连接。 3. 确保电话适配卡已连接到电话机上。 4. 拔下电话机和电话适配器的电话线，然后再重新插接一次。 5. 在电话适配器和电话机之间换用一条新的电话线（RJ-11 规格电话线）。 6. 检查并确保 PCI 电话适配卡已正确地连接到计算机上且连接牢固。否则，请重新插接 PCI 电话适配卡 （有关详细说明，请参阅第 9 页）。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 22 与 Skype 相关的问题 Skype 不允许 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）使用 Skype 如果出现如下弹出消息：“Request to access Skype was denied. Please check Skype Options and restart the SoftPhone Agent”（请求访问 Skype 被拒绝。请检查 Skype Options（Skype 选项） 并重新启动 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）），那么说明 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）已被 Skype 阻止。请执行如下各步，以从被阻止程序列表中删除 SoftPhone Agent（SoftPhone 代理程序）： 注释 取决于您所使用的 Skype，以下窗口可能有所不同。 1. 在 Skype 主菜单中，单击 Tools（工具），然后从下拉菜单中选择 Options（选项）。 2. 在 Options（选项）窗口中，单击 Manage other programs' access to Skype（管理其它 程序对 Skype 的访问）。 故障诊断与排除 23 3. 选择 IADAPT32.EXE（如下所示），单击 Change（更改），然后单击 OK（确定）。 4. 当下面的窗口出现时，选择 Allow this program to use Skype（允许本程序使用 Skype）， 然后单击 OK（确定）。 至此，您便可以通过您的电话适配器使用 Skype 了。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 24 25 A 符合标准与规章 本附录包括英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器符合的以下规范、规章和标准信息： • 欧盟符合标准声明 • 产品生态声明 • 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章 • 产品认证 欧盟符合标准声明 我们，即英特尔公司，基于独立承担责任的原则在此声明，本英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器产品符合 获得 CE 标志认证的所有适用标准和基本要求，并符合欧盟委员会规章 89/336/EEC（电磁兼容性规章） 和 73/23/EEC（安全／低电压规章）的要求。 本产品上贴有 CE 标志，表示符合欧盟所有成员国的规章要求，可不受任何限制地在欧盟各国销售。 本产品符合欧盟规章 89/336/EEC 和 73/23/EEC 的规定和要求。 This product follows the provisions of the European Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC. Čeština Tento výrobek odpovídá požadavkům evropských směrnic 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Dansk Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Dutch Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Eesti Antud toode vastab Euroopa direktiivides 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC kehtestatud nõuetele. Suomi Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC määräyksiä. Français Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Deutsch Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Ελληνικά Το παρόν προϊόν ακολουθεί τις διατάξεις των Ευρωπαϊκών Οδηγιών 89/336/ΕΟΚ και 73/23/ΕΟΚ. Magyar E termék megfelel a 89/336/EEC és 73/23/EEC Európai Irányelv előírásainak. Icelandic Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. Italiano Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Latviešu Šis produkts atbilst Eiropas Direktīvu 89/336/EEC un 73/23/EEC noteikumiem. Lietuvių Šis produktas atitinka Europos direktyvų 89/336/EEC ir 73/23/EEC nuostatas. Malti Dan il-prodott hu konformi mal-provvedimenti tad-Direttivi Ewropej 89/336/EEC u 73/23/EEC. Norsk Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 26 Polski Niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z postanowieniami Dyrektyw Unii Europejskiej 89/336/EWG i 73/23/EWG. Portuguese Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Español Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Slovensky Tento produkt je v súlade s ustanoveniami európskych direktív 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Slovenščina Izdelek je skladen z določbami evropskih direktiv 89/336/EGS in 73/23/EGS. Svenska Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Türkçe Bu ürün, Avrupa Birliği’nin 89/336/EEC ve 73/23/EEC yönergelerine uyar. 产品生态声明 无铅 PCI 卡 本 PCI 卡不含铅成分，而本卡上所采用的某些独立组件却含有少量的铅成分，但这些铅成分是确保组件发挥其 性能和／或可靠性所必需的。本 PCI 卡属于“无铅二级互连”(Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect) 产品。 本 PCI 卡的基层以及连接 PCI 卡和组件（二级连接）的焊料均不含铅成分。表 1 列出了贴于卡上的各种 “无铅二级互连”(Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect) 标志及其标识文字。 表 1. 无铅卡标志 说明 标志 无铅二级互连产品：此符号用于 标识 PCI 卡的基层以及连接 PCI 卡和组件（二级连接）的焊料中铅 (Pb) 含量水平不高于其重量的 0.1% (1000 ppm) 的电气和电子 组件及部件。 或 或 符合标准与规章 27 电磁兼容性 (EMC) 规章 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器若以正确方式安装于兼容的主机系统中，将符合表 2 所列的所有 EMC （电磁兼容性）规章。 表 2. EMC（电磁兼容性）规章 规章 标题 FCC B 类 Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15, Subpart B, Radio Frequency Devices（联邦规章法案第 47 条第 2 和第 15 部分的 B 子部分，射频设备）。（美国） ICES-003（B 类） Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus （可引起干扰的设备标准，数字设备）。（加拿大） EN55022: 1998 年 （B 类） Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment （对信息技术设备无线电干扰特性的限制和测量方法）。（欧盟） EN55024: 1998 年 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics Limits and methods of measurement（信息技术设备 – 抗扰性特性的 限制和测量方法）。（欧盟） AS/NZS CISPR22 （B 类） Australian Communications Authority, Standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility（澳大利亚通信管理局电磁兼容性标准）。 （澳大利亚和新西兰） CISPR 22，第 3 版 （B 类） Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment（对信息技术 设备无线电干扰特性的限制和测量方法）。（国际） CISPR 24: 1997 年 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics – Limits and Methods of Measurement（信息技术设备 – 抗扰性特性 – 限制和测量方法）。（国际） VCCI（B 类） Voluntary Control for Interference by Information Technology Equipment（信息技术设备民间干扰控制）。（日本） 日本声明的译文：依照信息技术设备民间干扰控制委员会 (VCCI) 标准，本设备属于 B 类产品。在居住 环境下，如果在无线电或电视接收机附近使用本设备，将可能产生无线电干扰。应按照产品手册中的说明 安装和使用本设备。 韩国 B 类设备声明译文：此设备属于家用设备，经验证符合 EMC（电磁兼容性）的有关要求。您可在居住 环境和其它非居住环境下使用本设备。 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 28 产品认证 台式机主板级认证标志 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器上贴有如下产品认证标志： 表 3. 产品认证标志 说明 标志 UL 美国／加拿大共同认可组件标志。包括英特尔台式机主板的相关 UL 文件号：E210882。 B 类设备 FCC 合格声明徽标；包括英特尔名称和 600SM 型号。 CE 标志。声明符合欧盟 (EU) EMC 规章 (89/336/EEC) 和低电压规章 (73/23/EEC)。 澳大利亚通信管理局 (ACA) C 勾号标志。包括与其相邻的英特尔供应商代码 N-232。 日本 VCCI（民间干扰控制委员会）合格标志。 韩国 MIC（信息和通信部）认证标志。包括与其相邻的 MIC 认证编号： CPU-600SM。 有关 MIC 认证的信息，请访问以下站点 http://support.intel.com/support/motherboards/desktop/600SM 台湾 BSMI（标准计量与检验局）标志。包括与其相邻的英特尔公司代号 D33025。 印刷电路板制造商认可标志。包括独特效果的 UL 认证制造商徽标和易燃性 等级号（位于焊接一侧）。 V-0 符合标准与规章 29 服务提供商认证 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器上贴有如下服务提供商认证标志： 表 4. 服务提供商认证 说明 标志 Skype 认证标志。 英特尔 600SM 电话适配器已取得 Skype 认证* *免责声明：本认证仅适用于英特尔 600SM PCI 电话 适配卡，因此不适用于系统或其它组件的认证。有关详情， 请查阅 http://www.skype.com/partners/hardware/ certified_guidelines.html 英特尔 600SM PCI 电话适配器用户指南 30 Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide Order Number: D61185-001US ii Revision History Revision Revision History Date -001 First release of the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide May 2006 If an FCC declaration of conformity marking is present on the board, the following statement applies: FCC Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions related to the EMC performance of this product, contact: Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro, OR 97124 1-800-628-8686 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit other than the one to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by Intel Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Tested to comply with FCC standards for home or office use. Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le présent appareil numerique német pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada. iii Disclaimer Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel® products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in Intel’s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. All information and software contained herein is provided "AS IS" to Intel customers. Intel Corporation disclaims all express or implied warranties and liabilities for the use of this document, the software and the information contained herein, and assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this document or the software, nor does Intel make a commitment to update the information or software contained herein. Intel reserves the right to make changes to this document or software at any time, without notice. Please contact the distribution vendor for specific Linux* version support. Some of the software included with the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter may be provided by third parties other than Intel (“Third Party Software”). Your rights to use the Third Party Software are governed by the license agreements that accompany such components. Intel does not warrant such Third Party Software in any way and assumes no liability for your use of the Third Party Software. Please contact the distribution vendor of the Third Party Software for specific support. This document as well as the software described in it are furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the license. The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Intel Corporation. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document or any software that may be provided in association with this document. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written consent of Intel Corporation. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2006. Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide iv v Preface This User’s Guide provides information about installation, features, troubleshooting, and regulatory requirements for the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter. Document Organization The chapters in this User’s Guide are arranged as follows: 1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card: instructions on how to install the PCI phone adapter card 2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter: instructions on how to install the PCI phone adapter software 3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter: instructions on how to make a call using the PCI phone adapter 4 Advanced Features: description of the advanced features of the PCI phone adapter 5 Troubleshooting: troubleshooting information for the PCI phone adapter A Regulatory Compliance: safety and EMC regulations, and product certification Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual: CAUTION Cautions warn the user about how to prevent damage to hardware or loss of data. NOTE Notes call attention to important information. Terminology The table below gives descriptions of some common terms used in this guide. Term Description hook flash The act of hanging up the telephone for a short period of time (one-half second). This operation is often used as a signal to perform services, such as transferring a call. softphone A program that allows you to make Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) telephone calls from your computer or computing device. Internet telephony providers typically include a softphone application along with their service. VoIP The acronym for Voice over Internet Protocol, which allows voice information to be sent digitally over the Internet. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide vi System Requirements • One of the following Intel® Desktop Boards: D945GNT/D945GCZ/D945GTP/D945GPM/D945GBO/D945PLNM/D915PDT/D101GGC/ D102GGC2/D865GSA • One of the following operating systems: ⎯ Microsoft Windows* XP Professional ⎯ Microsoft Windows XP Home Box Contents • Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card • Intel® Express Installer CD-ROM • Half-height PCI bracket • Caution label • Reference Guide vii Contents 1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card Phone Adapter Handling Precautions........................................................................9 Installing the Phone Adapter Hardware ..................................................................10 Connecting the Phone Adapter to the Telephone ..................................................... 11 2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Installing the Phone Adapter Drivers in Microsoft Windows XP...................................13 Phone Adapter Country/Region Settings .................................................................14 Uninstalling the Phone Adapter in Windows* XP ......................................................16 Uninstalling the SoftPhone Agent ..........................................................................16 3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter For Skype* Users ................................................................................................17 4 Advanced Features Caller ID Features ...............................................................................................19 Call Waiting and Conference Call Features by Locale ................................................19 5 Troubleshooting The phone adapter was plugged into a telephone wall jack by mistake....................... 21 SoftPhone Agent will not function in a suspend state ...............................................21 No dial tone heard when placing a call ...................................................................21 Skype-related Issues ...........................................................................................22 A Regulatory Compliance European Union Declaration of Conformity Statement ..............................................25 Product Ecology Statement...................................................................................26 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Regulations ....................................................27 Product Certifications...........................................................................................28 Tables 1. Lead-Free Board Markings ..............................................................................26 2. EMC Regulations............................................................................................27 3. Product Certification Markings .........................................................................28 4. Service Provider Certification ..........................................................................28 Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide viii 9 1 Installing the Intel® 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card CAUTION Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the PCI Phone Adapter Card components. Install the PCI card at an ESD-controlled workstation. If such a workstation is not available, wear an antistatic wrist strap or touch the surface of the antistatic package before handling the card. Phone Adapter Handling Precautions This phone adapter card can be damaged by static electricity. Follow these instructions to minimize the risk of damaging the phone adapter with electrostatic discharge: 1. Place everything you need to install the phone adapter close at hand before starting. Moving around the room to get tools causes static electricity to build up. 2. Stay in physical contact with a metal portion of the computer or the computer's power supply while handling the phone adapter. Touching the computer will discharge any built-up static electricity. 3. Handle the phone adapter card by its top edge and bracket only. Do not touch the edge connectors or the exposed circuitry. 4. Do not place the phone adapter on any metal surface. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 10 Installing the Phone Adapter Hardware To install the PCI Phone Adapter card: 1. Turn off the computer and unplug the AC power cord. Remove the cover. 2. Locate an unused PCI slot. 3. If necessary, remove the coverplate from the open slot. Save the screw. 4. Insert the phone adapter card into the PCI slot. You may have to push firmly to insert the card. 5. Replace the coverplate screw. OM19432 Installing the Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Card 11 Connecting the Phone Adapter to the Telephone CAUTION Do not directly connect the Intel 600SM Phone Adapter card to a telephone wall jack. The phone adapter will not function properly until it is disconnected from the telephone wall jack and the computer is rebooted. The phone adapter will only function properly when connected to an analog phone. OM19433 1. Connect a standard telephone to the RJ-11 jack on the back panel of the phone adapter card, as shown below. OM19434 RJ-11 2. Reconnect the computer’s AC power cord. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 12 13 2 Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter Installing the Phone Adapter Drivers in Microsoft Windows XP To install your phone adapter drivers: 1. Turn on the computer. 2. When the New Hardware Wizard appears, click Cancel. 3. Place the Intel Express Installer CD into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. 4. When the Intel Express Installer window appears, accept the default settings and click Install Now. 5. Follow the installation messages that appear. 6. The computer will automatically reboot after installing the phone adapter drivers. 7. After successful installation of the software, the main menu shows the final status. NOTE The installation procedure will automatically install icons on your computer for your regional Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) service providers. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 14 Phone Adapter Country/Region Settings To change the country/region settings for your phone adapter, do the following: 1. Open Windows Device Manager, double-click Sound, video and game controllers, and then right-click Intel(R) 600SM PCI Phone Adapter to access the Properties dialog box. Setup: Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter 15 2. From the Properties dialog box, click the Country/region tab. This tab provides access to a menu of selectable country names, which will indicate to the driver to use a country-specific signaling profile. Select the appropriate country/region and click OK. For help with using Windows Device Manager, refer to your Windows help system. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 16 Uninstalling the Phone Adapter in Windows* XP To uninstall the modem in Windows XP: 1. Open Windows Device Manager, double-click Sound, video and game controllers, rightclick Intel(R) 600SM PCI Phone Adapter, and then select Uninstall. 2. Follow the uninstall instructions that appear. For help with using Windows Device Manager, refer to your Windows help system. NOTE The phone adapter will not function without the phone adapter driver installed. Uninstalling the SoftPhone Agent To uninstall the SoftPhone Agent: 1. From the Windows Control Panel, open the Add or Remove Programs utility, select SoftPhone Agent, and then click Change/Remove. 2. Follow the uninstall instructions that appear. For help with using Add or Remove Programs, refer to your Windows help system. 17 3 Making a Call Using the PCI Phone Adapter To make a call using the PCI phone adapter: • Refer to the instructions provided by your softphone service. Instructions for making calls using the phone adapter may vary depending on your softphone service. • Make sure that your softphone application is running. NOTE The phone adapter does not support dialup modem connectivity or fax transmission. For Skype* Users When you first run Skype, a dialog box will appear asking permission to allow the phone adapter to use Skype. IMPORTANT! You MUST select “Allow this program to use Skype” and then click OK in order to make Skype calls using the phone adapter. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 18 The SoftPhone Agent Pop-up Menu Once you have installed the phone adapter software, the system tray will display the following icon for the SoftPhone Agent. Right-click the softphone agent icon to view a popup menu which displays the status of Skype, allows you to request whether the SoftPhone Agent will run at startup, and allows you to exit the SoftPhone Agent. NOTE The SoftPhone Agent must be running in the system tray in order make Skype phone calls using the PCI phone adapter. Dialing Instructions • To make a local or long-distance phone call in the U.S.A., dial 1 + area code + seven-digit phone number + #. • To make a local or long-distance phone call outside the U.S.A., dial country code + area code + phone number + #. • To make international phone calls, you must dial the number as follows: 011 or 00 + country code + area code + phone number + #. To make Skype-to-Skype calls, simply assign a two-digit speed-dial number to a Skype contact, and then dial that number on an analog phone connected to the PCI phone adapter. NOTE For the most current instructions, refer to the Skype website. 19 4 Advanced Features The Intel® 600M PCI Phone Adapter supports a number of advanced features including Caller ID (Type I and Type II), Call Waiting, and Conference Calling. Caller ID Features Type I Caller ID allows you to view the phone number of an incoming call on the Caller ID screen. Type II Caller ID allows you to view the phone number of an incoming call while you are on an existing call. If you have created a contact list using your softphone application and you receive a call from a contact, then you will be able to view the name of that contact on the Caller ID screen. Call Waiting and Conference Call Features by Locale NOTE The term “hook flash” means to hang up the phone briefly (one-half second) by pressing the “Flash” button or the hook of the phone. For all countries except the United Kingdom, France, and Germany Basic Call Waiting To answer an incoming call while keeping an existing call on hold: 1. Perform a hook flash. The first call will be placed on hold and you will be connected to the second incoming call. 2. To reconnect to the first call, perform another hook flash. Basic Call Conference To create a conference call between three or more phones: 1. Make a call to the first phone of the conference. 2. Once you are connected to the first phone, perform a hook flash. You will now hear a dial tone. 3. Dial the second phone of the conference. Once connected, perform another hook flash. At this point, all three phones will be in the call. 4. To add another phone to the call, perform the above steps again. Call Waiting while in a Conference Call Call waiting while in a conference call works the same way that it does in a regular phone call. When a call comes in while you are in a conference call, perform a hook flash to put the conference call on hold and connect the incoming call. Once the incoming call is complete, perform another hook flash to be reconnected to the conference call. The United Kingdom, France, and Germany In the United Kingdom, France, and Germany, there are three main actions used for advanced calling features. They are as follows: Feature Action Drop Active Call Hook flash, then press 1 Switch to another call Hook flash, then press 2 Connect calls to a conference Hook flash, then press 3 Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 20 When using these features, you must wait for a dial tone after performing a hook flash. Once you hear a dial tone, you may press the appropriate call control number on your phone keypad. Failure to press a call control number will cancel the process. In some cases, performing a hook flash will be enough to answer a call waiting event or to initiate a new call. If a conference call has been established, the "Drop Active Call" and "Switch to another call" features can only be used on additional incoming or outgoing calls. Basic Call Waiting To answer an incoming call, while keeping an existing call on hold: 1. Perform a hook flash. The first call will be placed on hold and you will be connected to the second incoming call. 2. To reconnect to the original phone call, first perform a hook flash. Then, once you hear a dial tone, press 2 and you will be reconnected to the original phone call. The same procedure can be used to switch back to the second caller. 3. To establish a conference call involving all three parties, perform a hook flash, wait for a dial tone, and then press 3. 4. To drop the current call and switch to the call on-hold, perform a hook flash, wait for a dial tone, and then press 1. Basic Call Conference To create a conference call between three or more phones: 1. Make a call to the first phone of the conference. 2. Once you’re connected to the first phone, perform a hook flash. You will now hear a dial tone. 3. Dial the second phone of the conference. Once connected, perform another hook flash. You will now hear a dial tone. Press 3 to add the second phone to the conference. At this point, all three phones will be in the call. 4. To add another phone to the call, perform the above steps again. Call Waiting while in a Conference Call Call waiting while in a conference works the same way that it does in a standard single phone call. When a call comes in while you are in a conference call, perform a hook flash to put the conference call on hold and connect the incoming call. Once connected to the incoming call, perform another hook flash, and listen for the dial tone. Press 2 to be reconnected to the conference call, with the incoming call put on hold. If you’d like to add the incoming call to the current conference, perform a hook flash and wait for a dial tone. Then press 3 and the incoming call will be added to the conference. If you’d like to drop the incoming call, perform a hook flash and wait for a dial tone. Press 1 and the incoming call will be dropped and you will be reconnected to the conference call. 21 5 Troubleshooting The phone adapter was plugged into a telephone wall jack by mistake If you connected the phone adapter to a telephone wall jack, do the following: 1. Turn off the computer. 2. Disconnect the phone adapter from the telephone wall jack and connect it to a standard telephone (for detailed instructions, see page 11). 3. Turn on the computer. SoftPhone Agent will not function in a suspend state If you attempt to place your computer into a suspend state, such as standby or hibernate, or if the computer attempts it via an inactivity timeout while the SoftPhone Agent is running, a message will appear indicating that suspending will disable your softphone service, and then ask if you want to continue. You will not be able to receive calls or dial out using your phone adapter while your computer is in a suspend state. No dial tone heard when placing a call If the SoftPhone Agent is not running, or if your softphone application does not have an active connection to your VoIP service provider, then your phone adapter will not generate a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone after picking up the phone, try the following troubleshooting steps, and recheck the dial tone after each step: 1. Ensure that the SoftPhone Agent and your softphone application are running. 2. Ensure that your softphone application has an active connection to your VoIP service provider. 3. Ensure that the phone adapter card is connected to the telephone. 4. Disconnect and reconnect the telephone line to the telephone and to the phone adapter. 5. Install a new telephone line (RJ-11 cable) between the phone adapter and the telephone. 6. Check to make sure the PCI phone adapter card is seated correctly in your computer. If not, reseat the PCI phone adapter card (for detailed instructions, see page 9). Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 22 Skype-related Issues Skype does not allow the SoftPhone Agent to use Skype If you see the following popup message, “Request to access Skype was denied. Please check Skype Options and restart the SoftPhone Agent” then the SoftPhone Agent has been blocked by Skype. Perform the following steps to remove the SoftPhone Agent from the list of blocked programs: NOTE The following windows may differ depending the version of Skype you are using. 1. From the Skype main menu, click Tools, and then select Options from the pull-down menu. 2. From the Options window, click Manage other programs' access to Skype. Troubleshooting 23 3. Select IADAPT32.EXE (as shown below), click Change, and then click OK. 4. When the following window appears, select Allow this program to use Skype, and then click OK. You will now be able to use Skype with your phone adapter. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 24 25 A Regulatory Compliance This appendix contains the following regulatory compliance information for Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter: • European Union Declaration of Conformity statement • Product Ecology statement • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations • Product certifications European Union Declaration of Conformity Statement We, Intel Corporation, declare under our sole responsibility that the product Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter is in conformity with all applicable essential requirements necessary for CE marking, following the provisions of the European Council Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive) and Council Directive 73/23/EEC (Safety/Low Voltage Directive). The product is properly CE marked demonstrating this conformity and is for distribution within all member states of the EU with no restrictions. This product follows the provisions of the European Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC. Čeština Tento výrobek odpovídá požadavkům evropských směrnic 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Dansk Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Dutch Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Eesti Antud toode vastab Euroopa direktiivides 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC kehtestatud nõuetele. Suomi Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC määräyksiä. Français Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Deutsch Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Ελληνικά Το παρόν προϊόν ακολουθεί τις διατάξεις των Ευρωπαϊκών Οδηγιών 89/336/ΕΟΚ και 73/23/ΕΟΚ. Magyar E termék megfelel a 89/336/EEC és 73/23/EEC Európai Irányelv előírásainak. Icelandic Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. Italiano Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Latviešu Šis produkts atbilst Eiropas Direktīvu 89/336/EEC un 73/23/EEC noteikumiem. Lietuvių Šis produktas atitinka Europos direktyvų 89/336/EEC ir 73/23/EEC nuostatas. Malti Dan il-prodott hu konformi mal-provvedimenti tad-Direttivi Ewropej 89/336/EEC u 73/23/EEC. Norsk Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 89/336/ EEC & 73/23/EEC. Polski Niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z postanowieniami Dyrektyw Unii Europejskiej 89/336/EWG i 73/23/EWG. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 26 Portuguese Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Español Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Slovensky Tento produkt je v súlade s ustanoveniami európskych direktív 89/336/EEC a 73/23/EEC. Slovenščina Izdelek je skladen z določbami evropskih direktiv 89/336/EGS in 73/23/EGS. Svenska Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 89/336/EEC & 73/23/EEC. Türkçe Bu ürün, Avrupa Birliği’nin 89/336/EEC ve 73/23/EEC yönergelerine uyar. Product Ecology Statement Lead-Free PCI Card This PCI card is lead-free although certain discrete components used on the board contain a small amount of lead which is necessary for component performance and/or reliability. This PCI card is referred to as “Lead-free second level interconnect.” The PCI card substrate and the solder connections from the PCI card to the components (second-level connections) are all leadfree. Table 1 shows the various forms of the “Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect” mark as it appears on the board and accompanying collateral. Table 1. Lead-Free Board Markings Description Mark Lead-Free 2nd Level Interconnect: This symbol is used to identify electrical and electronic assemblies and components in which the lead (Pb) concentration level in the PCI card substrate and the solder connections from the PCI card to the components (second-level interconnect) is not greater than 0.1% by weight (1000 ppm). or or Regulatory Compliance 27 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Regulations Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter complies with the EMC regulations stated in Table 2 when correctly installed in a compatible host system. Table 2. EMC Regulations Regulation Title FCC Class B Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 2 and 15, Subpart B, Radio Frequency Devices. (USA) ICES-003 (Class B) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus. (Canada) EN55022: 1998 (Class B) Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. (European Union) EN55024: 1998 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics Limits and methods of measurement. (European Union) AS/NZS CISPR22 (Class B) Australian Communications Authority, Standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility. (Australia and New Zealand) CISPR 22, 3rd Edition, (Class B) Limits and methods of measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. (International) CISPR 24: 1997 Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics – Limits and Methods of Measurement. (International) VCCI (Class B) Voluntary Control for Interference by Information Technology Equipment (Japan) Japanese Kanji statement translation: This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. Korean Class B statement translation: This is household equipment that is certified to comply with EMC requirements. You may use this equipment in residential environments and other non-residential environments. Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter User’s Guide 28 Product Certifications Board-Level Certification Markings Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter has the following product certification markings: Table 3. Product Certification Markings Description Mark UL joint US/Canada Recognized Component mark. Includes adjacent UL file number for Intel desktop boards: E210882. FCC Declaration of Conformity logo mark for Class B equipment. Includes Intel name and 600SM model designation. CE mark. Declaring compliance to European Union (EU) EMC directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage directive (73/23/EEC). Australian Communications Authority (ACA) C-tick mark. Includes adjacent Intel supplier code number, N-232. Japan VCCI (Voluntary Control Council for Interference) mark. S. Korea MIC (Ministry of Information and Communication) mark. Includes adjacent MIC certification number: CPU-600SM. For information about MIC certification, go to http://support.intel.com/support/motherboards/desktop/600SM Taiwan BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspections) mark. Includes adjacent Intel company number, D33025. Printed wiring board manufacturer’s recognition mark. Consists of a unique UL recognized manufacturer’s logo, along with a flammability rating (solder side). V-0 Service Provider Certification Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter has the following service provider certification: Table 4. Service Provider Certification Description Mark Skype certification mark. Intel 600SM Phone Adapter is Skype Certified* *Disclaimer: This certification applies only to the Intel 600SM PCI Phone Adapter card, and cannot be used to certify a system or other components. For more details, please see http://www.skype.com/partners/hardware/ certified_guidelines.html Boxed Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M Installation Notes Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on the World Wide Web. Avant d’effectuer l’installation du processeur, veuillez prendre en compte les indications d’installation explicitées dans les notes d’installation disponibles sur le Web Prima di installare il processore, prendere in considerazione i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili su World Wide Web. Vor der Installation des Prozessors sollten die Hinweise zur Integration beachtet werden, die im Installationshandbuch (im Internet verfügbar) zu finden sind. Antes de instalar el procesador, tenga en cuenta las consideraciones de integración que se encuentran en las notas de instalación disponibles en la World Wide Web. Antes de instalar o processador, leve em consideração os problemas de integração encontrados nas notas sobre a instalação, disponíveis na World Wide Web. http://support.intel.com/support/processors 1. Obtain access to your processor socket by using the documentation provided by your original equipment manufacturer. Accédez à la prise du processeur en suivant les instructions données dans la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Per accedere alla presa del processore, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Legen Sie die Fassung des Prozessors frei. Anleitungen dazu finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Con la ayuda de la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo, obtenga acceso al zócalo del procesador. Consulte a documentação fornecida pelo fabricante original do equipamento para saber como obter acesso ao soquete do processador. 2. Find and remove the cooling solution if it prevents you from accessing the processor socket. See the documentation provided by the original equipment manufacturer for more information. Repérez, puis retirez la solution de refroidissement si elle vous empêche d’atteindre la prise du processeur. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, référez-vous à la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Individuare e rimuovere la soluzione di raffreddamento qualora impedisca l’accesso alla presa del processore. Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Sollte die Kühlflüssigkeit den Zugriff zur Fassung des Prozessors verhindern, ist sie zu entfernen. Weitere Anleitungen finden Sie in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers. Si la solución refrigerante no le permite acceder al zócalo del procesador, sáquela. Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Encontre e remova o dispositivo de resfriamento se ele evitar o acesso ao soquete do processador. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para obter mais informações. Open (O) Locked (L) 478-pin micro-FCPGA To install the processor, use a screwdriver to disengage (open) the socket actuator. Pour installer le processeur, désenclenchez (ouvrez) l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis. Per installare il processore, staccare (aprire) il dispositivo di azionamento della presa utilizzando un cacciavite. Um den Prozessor installieren zu können, muß zuerst mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung geöffnet werden. Para instalar el procesador, desactive (abra) el disparador del zócalo con un destornillador. Para instalar o processador, utilize uma chave de fenda para desengatar (abrir) o atuador do soquete. 3. Figure A Pin A1 Using Figure B, place the processor into the socket. Align the processor’s pin A1 with the arrow on the microFCPGA socket. If the processor does not drop completely into the socket, turn the actuator until the processor drops completely in. En vous aidant de la figure B, mettez le processeur dans la prise. Placez la broche A1 du processeur dans le prolongement de la flèche de la prise micro-FCPGA. Si le processeur ne s’enfonce pas complètement dans la prise, tournez l’actionneur jusqu’à ce que le processeur s’enfonce complètement. Osservando la figura B, inserire il processore nella presa. Allineare il piedino del processore A1 con la freccia che si trova sulla presa micro-FCPGA. Se non si riesce ad inserire completamente il processore nella presa, girare il dispositivo di azionamento sino a quando il processore non viene completamente inserito. 4. Figure B NOTE: For installation only in systems supporting a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor - M. Den Prozessor in die Fassung einsetzen wie in Abbildung B veranschaulicht. Dabei sollte der Pin A1 des Prozessors mit dem auf der Mikro-FCPGA Fassung abgebildeten Pfeil ausgerichtet werden. Läßt sich der Prozessor nicht ganz in die Fassung einsetzen, die Spannvorrichtung solange drehen, bis der Prozessor sicher in der Fassung sitzt. Usando la Figura B como guía, coloque el procesador dentro del zócalo. Alinee el pin A1 del procesador con la flecha del zócalo del micro-FCPGA. Si el procesador no encaja perfectamente dentro del zócalo, gire el disparador hasta que el procesador quede bien colocado. Consultando a Figura B, coloque o processador no soquete. Alinhe o pino A1 do processador com a seta do micro-soquete FCPGA. Se o processador não entrar completamente no soquete, gire o atuador até que o processador entre completamente. 5. While gently holding the processor down with your finger, secure the processor in the socket by closing the socket actuator with a screwdriver (see figure A). For updated installation information, see http://support.intel.com/support/processors Tout en appuyant doucement sur le processeur avec votre doigt, assurez-vous qu’il est bien en place dans la prise en fermant l’actionneur de la prise à l’aide d’un tournevis (voir figure A). Pour obtenir des informations d’installation mises à jour, consultez : http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Mantenere fermo il processore esercitando una leggera pressione con il dito e nel frattempo fissare il processore nella presa chiudendo il dispositivo di azionamento della presa con un cacciavite (vedi fig. A). Per informazioni più aggiornate relative all’installazione, consultare il sito: http://support.intel.com/support Den Prozessor vorsichtig nach unten gedrückt halten und mit einem Schraubenzieher die Spannvorrichtung der Fassung festdrehen (siehe Abbildung A). Aktualisierte Informationen zur Installation finden Sie unter: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Sujetando el procesador con un dedo, fije el procesador en el zócalo cerrando el disparador con un destornillador (Figura A). Para obtener información de instalación actualizada, consulte: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Pressione levemente o processador para baixo com o dedo, ao mesmo tempo que afixa o processador no soquete fechando o atuador com uma chave de fenda (veja a Figura A). Para obter informações atualizadas sobre instalação, consulte a página: http://support.intel.com/support/processors. 6. Re-attach the cooling system and re-assemble the system per the installation manual provided by the original equipment manufacturer. Note: Your system may require special voltage and speed settings. Consult your original equipment manufacturer’s documentation to determine the correct settings. Remettez le système de refroidissement en place et rassemblez le système en suivant les instructions données dans le manuel d’installation fourni par le fabricant de votre équipement original. Remarque : Il se peut que votre système nécessite des réglages spéciaux de tension et de vitesse. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de votre équipement original pour déterminer les réglages corrects. Fissare nuovamente il sistema di raffreddamento e riassemblare il sistema per l’installazione manuale fornita dal fornitore dell’apparecchio. Nota: per il sistema in dotazione potrebbe essere necessario utilizzare una tensione speciale e particolari impostazioni di velocità. Per determinare le impostazioni corrette, consultare la documentazione fornita dal produttore originale dell’apparecchio. Das Kühlsystem wieder anbringen und gemäß den Anweisungen des vom Originalgerätehersteller mitgelieferten Installationshandbuchs wieder zusammensetzen. Hinweis: Ihr System erfordert unter Umständen spezielle Spannungs- und Geschwindigkeitseinstellungen. Angaben zur korrekten Einstellung dieser Größen sind in der Dokumentation des Originalgeräteherstellers zu finden. Vuelva a acoplar el sistema refrigerante y a armar el sistema según el manual de instrucciones suministrado por el fabricante original del equipo. Nota: Es posible que su sistema tenga requisitos de voltaje y velocidad especiales. Para determinar cuáles son los valores correctos, consulte la documentación suministrada por el fabricante original del equipo. Recoloque o dispositivo de resfriamento e monte o sistema de acordo com o manual de instalação fornecido pelo fabricante original do equipamento. Lembre-se: o sistema pode necessitar de ajustes específicos de voltagem e velocidade. Consulte a documentação do fabricante original do equipamento para determinar os ajustes corretos. Notes www.intel.com support.intel.com 1-916-377-7000 07:00-17:00 U.S. Pacific Time Monday–Friday To obtain warranty service in the U.S. and Canada 1-800-628-8686 América Latina 916-377-0114 (en Español) Brazil 916-377-0180 (en Portuguese) Monday–Friday 09:00-18:00 For English and European customers not listed below +44 (0) 870 607 2439 Francais +33 (0) 141 91 85 29 Deutsch +49 (0) 69 9509 6099 Italiano +39 (0) 2 696 33276 Monday–Friday 0830-16:00 CET For the latest support offerings, please see support.intel.com Asia-Pacific/English Support Pakistan* 63-2-636-8415 Hours: 0900-1400 India** 000-6517, 830-3634 Hours: 0900-1500 Vietnam* 63-2-636-8416 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Thailand 1-800-6310003 Hours 09:00-1600 Hong Kong 852-2844-4456 Philippines 1-800-1-651-0117 Singapore 65-831-1311 Malaysia 1-800-80-1390 Hours: 0900-1700 Australia 1-800-649-931 Hours: 1000-1700 New Zealand 0-800-444-365 Hours: 1100-1700 Asia-Pacific/Korean Support Korea 822-7672-595 Hours: 0900-1700 Asia-Pacific/Mandarin Support PRC 800-820-1100 Taiwan 2-718-9915 Hours: 0900-1700 Japan support.intel.co.jp 0120-868686 Hours: 0900-1700 *IDD Long Distance into the Philippines **Manual toll-free. When dialing from India need to use phone with IDD facility. Copyright © 2002 Intel Corporation * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other Countries. Order Number A82732-001 Printed in USA Windows XP Professional x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Home Edition* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional* al x64 Edition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Media Center Edition* dition*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition Windows XP Professional x64 Edition* on*, Windows Vista Starter, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 32-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Basic, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Home Premium, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Business, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Enterprise, 64-bit version*, Windows Vista Ultimate, 64-bit version*, Windows XP Starter Edition*, Windows XP 64-Bit Edition*, Windows XP Professional*, Windows XP Home Edition*, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition*, Windows XP Media Center Edition* Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 1 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 1 6/18/2012 1:08:08 PM /18/2012 1:08:08 PM G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 2 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 2 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM Installation Notes for the Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main board manufacturer to get a replacement. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP, NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 3 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 3 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten. WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja. Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal para obter uma reposição. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 4 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 4 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato. Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una sostituzione. IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić. WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora, płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora. Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support. intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности внешний вид компонента может отличаться. ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке. Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 5 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 5 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM 安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel. com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣 式可能有所不同。 重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」 (UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP， 「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換 主機板。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示 意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。 重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前， 此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。 如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的 主板制造商联系，以进行调换。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel. com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해 보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제 구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에 부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되 며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는 경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드 제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 6 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 6 6/18/2012 1:08:33 PM /18/2012 1:08:33 PM に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。 重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの 下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに 取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元 に交換を依頼してください。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 7 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 7 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM Installation Instructions for the Intel® RTS2011AC Thermal Solution Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 8 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 8 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 9 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 9 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 10 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 10 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 11 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 11 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 12 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 12 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 13 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 13 6/18/2012 1:08:34 PM /18/2012 1:08:34 PM LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 14 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 14 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 15 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 15 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 16 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 16 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 17 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 17 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 18 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 18 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 19 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 19 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 20 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 20 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 21 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 21 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 22 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 22 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 23 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 23 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 24 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 24 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 25 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 25 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 26 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 26 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 27 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 27 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 28 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 28 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fi m em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 29 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 29 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 30 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 30 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 31 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 31 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 32 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 32 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 33 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 33 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 34 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 34 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 35 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 35 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 36 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 36 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 37 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 37 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 38 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 38 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 39 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 39 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 40 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 40 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 41 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 41 6/18/2012 1:08:35 PM /18/2012 1:08:35 PM эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 42 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 42 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 43 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 43 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 44 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 44 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 45 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 45 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 46 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 46 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 47 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 47 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 48 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 48 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 49 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 49 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 50 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 50 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 51 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 51 6/18/2012 1:08:36 PM /18/2012 1:08:36 PM 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 52 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 52 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 53 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 53 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 54 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 54 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 55 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 55 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 56 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 56 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 57 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 57 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 58 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 58 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 59 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 59 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine. Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G33557-003 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA G33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 60 33557-003_RTS2011AC_TS_SNB-E.indd 60 6/18/2012 1:08:37 PM /18/2012 1:08:37 PM Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 1 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 1 6/18/2012 1:29:58 PM /18/2012 1:29:58 PM Installation Notes for the Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is attached under the main board prior to thermal solution mounting. The UBP will be provided with the main board and may be pre-attached. If your system is missing the UBP do not attempt to use the boxed processor thermal solution. Contact your main board manufacturer to get a replacement. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnées dans les notes d’installation et disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Les images présentes dans ce manuel ne servent qu’à des fi ns de représentations. L’apparence des composants réels peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être attachée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie avec la cartemère et peut être attachée au préalable. Si votre système n’est pas équipé de cette UBP, NE TENTEZ PAS d’utiliser la solution thermique du processeur. Contactez le fabricant de votre carte-mère afi n d’obtenir un remplacement. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor Installation des Boxed Kühlkörpers und Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor der Befestigung des Kühlkörpers unter der Hauptplatine angebracht wird. Die UBP ist im Lieferumfang der Hauptplatine enthalten und möglicherweise bereits angebracht. Wenn die UBP in Ihrem System fehlt, versuchen Sie NICHT, den Boxed Prozessorkühlkörper zu verwenden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller Ihrer Hauptplatine, um ein Ersatzprodukt zu erhalten. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 2 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 2 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar las soluciones térmicas y el procesador en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas de instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Las imágenes de este manual sólo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real de los componentes puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! La solución térmica del procesador requiere una Cubierta trasera unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes del montaje de la solución térmica. La UBP se suministra con la placa base y puede estar conectada previamente. Si su sistema carece de UBP, no intente utilizar la solución térmica del procesador en caja. Comuníquese con el fabricante de su placa base para obtener un reemplazo. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (UBP, Unifi ed Back Plate) seja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes da montagem da solução térmica. A UBP será fornecida junto com a placa principal e poderá ser previamente acoplada. Se não houver uma UBP em seu sistema, não tente usar a solução térmica do processador em caixa. Entre em contato com o fabricante da placa principal para obter uma reposição. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione disponibili all’indirizzo: http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! La soluzione termica del processore necessita della presenza di un Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) apposto sotto la scheda prima del montaggio della soluzione termica. L’elemento UBP verrà fornito con la scheda madre e potrebbe essere già applicato. Se il sistema in uso non dispone di UBP, non utilizzare la soluzione termica del processore “in box”, ma contattare il produttore della scheda madre per richiedere una sostituzione. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 3 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 3 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed przystąpieniem do instalacji pudełkowej wersji systemu chłodzenia oraz procesora, należy zapoznać się z informacjami dotyczącymi zgodności w uwagach dotyczących instalacji pod adresem http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Obrazy przedstawione w instrukcji mają jedynie charakter poglądowy. Rzeczywisty wygląd poszczególnych elementów może się różnić. WAŻNE! Przed instalacją systemu chłodzenia, pod płytą główną należy zamontować niezbędną do prawidłowej pracy systemu chłodzenia procesora, płytkę UBP (Unifi ed Back Plate ). Płytka UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z płytą główną i może być już fabrycznie zamontowana. W przypadku braku płytki UBP, nie należy stosować pudełkowego systemu chłodzenia procesora. Aby wymienić płytkę, należy skontaktować się z producentem płyty głównej. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой системы охлаждения и процессора, поставляемых в штучной упаковке, изучите, пожалуйста, вопросы, связанные со сборкой и приведенные в замечаниях по установке на странице http://support. intel.com/support/processors. Изображения в настоящем руководстве приводятся только в качестве иллюстрации. В действительности внешний вид компонента может отличаться. ВАЖНО! Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы до монтажа системы охлаждения под материнской платой была размещена унифицированная пластина крепления (Unifi ed Back Plate – UBP). UBP будет поставляться с материнской платой и может быть предварительно прикреплена. Если в системе нет UBP, НЕ пытайтесь использовать систему охлаждения процессора, поставляемого в штучной упаковке. Обратитесь к производителю материнской платы для получения замены. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. 安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器前，請先考慮安裝注意事項(http://support.intel. com/support/processors) 中的整合問題。手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際元件的樣 式可能有所不同。 重要！裝上處理器散熱解決方案前，需要一個附於主機板下方的「結合背板」 (UBP)。 UBP 會隨附於主機板中，也可能已經預先裝上。若您的系統沒有 UBP， G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 4 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 4 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM 「請勿」嘗試使用盒裝處理器散熱解決方案。請聯絡您的主機板製造商更換 主機板。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请考虑站点 http://support.intel.com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成事项。本手册所含各图仅用于示 意的目的。实际的组件外观可能有所不同。 重要！处理器散热解决方案要求使用统一背板 (UBP)，安装散热解决方案之前， 此背板附在主板的下面。此 UBP 将随主板一起提供，也可能以预装方式提供。 如果您的系统未随带 UBP，切勿尝试使用盒装处理器散热解决方案。请与您的 主板制造商联系，以进行调换。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 들어 있는 온도 솔루션 및 프로세서를 설치하기 전에 http://support.intel. com/support/processors의 설치 참고 사항에 나와 있는 통합 문제에 대해 고려해 보십시오. 이 매뉴얼에 나와 있는 이미지는 표시 목적으로만 제공됩니다. 실제 구성 요소는 이미지와 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 프로세서 온도 솔루션에는 온도 솔루션 탑재 전에 메인 보드 아래에 부착된 UBP(Unifi ed Back Plate)가 있어야 합니다. UBP는 메인 보드와 함께 제공되 며, 메인 보드에 미리 부착되어 있을 수 있습니다. 귀하의 시스템에 UBP가 없는 경우, 상자에 들어 있는 프로세서 온도 솔루션을 사용하지 마십시오. 메인 보드 제조업체에 연락하여 교체 제품을 받으십시오. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. ボックス版サーマル ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を考慮してください。 このマニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なもの に過ぎず、 実際のコンポーネントの外観は異なる場合があります。 重要! プロセッサー サーマル ソリューションは、マウントする前にメインボードの 下にUnifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付けることが必要です。 UBP は、メインボードに 取り付けた形で配布されています。 システムに UBP がない場合は、ボックス版プ ロセッサー サーマル ソリューションの使用を試みないで、 メイン ボードの製造元 に交換を依頼してください。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 5 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 5 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM Installation Instructions for the Intel® RTS2011LC Liquid Cooling Solution Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 6 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 6 6/18/2012 1:30:09 PM /18/2012 1:30:09 PM Instructions Video at: http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-032999.htm G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 7 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 7 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 8 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 8 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration LGA 2011 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 9 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 9 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 10 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 10 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 11 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 11 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 12 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 12 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 13 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 13 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 14 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 14 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 15 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 15 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 16 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 16 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 17 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 17 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 18 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 18 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration LGA 1155/56, LGA 1366 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 19 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 19 6/18/2012 1:30:10 PM /18/2012 1:30:10 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 20 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 20 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 21 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 21 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 22 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 22 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 23 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 23 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 24 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 24 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 25 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 25 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 26 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 26 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 27 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 27 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 28 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 28 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 29 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 29 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 30 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 30 6/18/2012 1:30:11 PM /18/2012 1:30:11 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 31 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 31 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 32 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 32 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 33 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 33 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 34 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 34 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration Fan Confi guration B G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 35 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 35 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM http://www.intel.com/go/integration G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 36 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 36 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 37 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 37 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 38 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 38 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel.To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 39 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 39 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 40 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 40 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 41 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 41 6/18/2012 1:30:12 PM /18/2012 1:30:12 PM ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 42 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 42 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 43 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 43 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 44 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 44 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 45 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 45 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 46 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 46 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 47 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 47 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 48 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 48 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 49 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 49 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 50 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 50 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 51 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 51 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 52 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 52 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fi m em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 53 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 53 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 54 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 54 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 55 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 55 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 56 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 56 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 57 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 57 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 58 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 58 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 59 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 59 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 60 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 60 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 61 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 61 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 62 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 62 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 63 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 63 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 64 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 64 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 65 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 65 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 66 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 66 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 67 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 67 6/18/2012 1:30:13 PM /18/2012 1:30:13 PM ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 68 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 68 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 69 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 69 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 70 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 70 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 71 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 71 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 72 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 72 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 73 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 73 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 74 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 74 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 75 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 75 6/18/2012 1:30:14 PM /18/2012 1:30:14 PM 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 76 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 76 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 77 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 77 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 78 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 78 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 79 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 79 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 80 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 80 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 81 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 81 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 82 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 82 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 83 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 83 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM Intel, the Intel logo, Intel Core and Core Inside are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G33559-004 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA G33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 84 33559-004_Liquid_Cooled_SNB-E.indd 84 6/18/2012 1:30:15 PM /18/2012 1:30:15 PM Boxed Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor Installation Notes Before installing the processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available on the World Wide Web. The heatsink may have thermal interface material attached to the bottom as shown in Fig. 1. (Be careful not to damage the thermal interface material.) If not, use the enclosed syringe and apply all of the thermal interface material to the top of the processor as shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 1 mPGA478B Fig. 2 Install the processor retention mechanism (A) following the motherboard manufacturer’s installation instructions. Open the socket handle (B). Install the processor by carefully aligning the pins to the socket (C). Close the socket handle (D). B A C D Connect the processor fan cable connector (H) to the motherboard header. H Align the heatsink and clip assembly with the retention mechanism and place it on the processor. The heatsink is symmetrical. With the clip levers in the up position (E), push down on all four clip frame corners to secure to the retention mechanism hooks (F). Close the clip levers (G) (levers require force to be completely closed). G 1 2 E F Copyright Intel Corporation 2001 Part Number A66630-001 First Edition August 2001 Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP • Installation Instructions • Three Year Limited Warranty G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 1 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 1 6/18/2012 2:53:47 PM /18/2012 2:53:47 PM G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 2 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 2 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP Installation Notes Before installing the boxed thermal solution and processor, please consider integration issues found in the installation notes available at http://support.intel.com/support/ processors. The processor thermal solution requires a Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) that is to be attached under the main board prior to installing the motherboard inside the chassis. This UBP will be provided in the box with the thermal solution. Images in this manual are only intended as representations. The actual component appearance may vary. IMPORTANT! Do not fully tighten any heat sink retention screw until all screws are partially engaged. Avant d’installer le processeur et la solution thermique contenus dans la boîte, veuillez tenir compte des problèmes d’intégration mentionnés dans les notes d’installation disponibles à l’adresse http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Une Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) doit être fi xée sous la carte-mère avant l’installation de la solution thermique du processeur. Cette UBP est fournie dans la boîte avec la solution thermique. Les images fi gurant dans ce manuel ne sont que des illustrations. L’apparence réelle des composants peut être différente. IMPORTANT ! Ne serrez aucune vis de maintien du dissipateur de chaleur entièrement avant de les mettre toutes en place. Informieren Sie sich vor der Installation des Boxed-Kühlers und des Prozessors über die Installationsprobleme, die Sie in den Installationshinweisen unter http://support.intel. com/support/processors fi nden. Der Prozessor-Kühlkörper erfordert eine einheitliche Montageplatte (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP), die vor dem Einbau der Hauptplatine im Chassis unter der Hauptplatine angebracht werden muss. Diese UBP wird in der Box mit dem Kühler geliefert. Die Abbildungen in diesem Handbuch dienen nur zur Illustration. Das tatsächliche Aussehen der Komponenten kann davon abweichen. WICHTIG! Ziehen Sie keine Befestigungsschraube für den Kühlkörper fest an, bevor nicht alle Schrauben lose eingeschraubt wurden. Antes de instalar el procesador y la solución térmica en caja, tenga en cuenta los problemas de integración descritos en las notas para la instalación que están disponibles en http://support.intel.com/support/processors. La solución térmica del procesador requiere una placa posterior unifi cada (UBP) que se conecta debajo de la placa base antes de instalar la placa madre dentro del chasis. Esta UBP se suministra en la caja con la solución G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 3 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 3 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM térmica. Las imágenes de este manual solo sirven como referencia. El aspecto real del componente puede variar. ¡IMPORTANTE! : No ajuste completamente ningún tornillo de retención del disipador térmico hasta que todos los tornillos se encuentren parcialmente colocados Antes de instalar a solução térmica e o processador em caixa, leve em consideração os problemas de integração indicados nas notas de instalação disponíveis em http://support. intel.com/support/processors. A solução térmica do processador requer que uma contraplaca unifi cada (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP) esteja acoplada embaixo da placa principal antes que a placa mãe seja instalada no gabinete. A UBP é fornecida na caixa junto com a solução térmica. As imagens neste manual são apenas representações. A aparência do componente atual poderá variar. IMPORTANTE! Não aperte completamente qualquer parafuso de retenção do dissipador de calor até que todos os parafusos estejam parcialmente encaixados. Prima di installare la soluzione termica e il processore “in box”, prendere in esame i problemi di integrazione riportati nelle note di installazione di sponibili all’indirizzo http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. La soluzione termica del processore necessita di una Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) collegata sotto la scheda madre prima che questa venga installata nello chassis. L’UBP è inclusa nella confezione della soluzione termica. Le immagini riportate nel presente manuale sono utilizzate a scopo puramente rappresentativo. L’aspetto reale dei componenti può variare. IMPORTANTE! Non stringere completamente le viti di ritenzione del dissolutore termico fi no a quando le viti non siano inserite almeno in parte. Przed zainstalowaniem dostarczonej w pudełku chłodnicy prosimy uwzględnić kwestie dotyczące integracji opisane w uwagach dostępnych na stronie http:// support.intel.com/support/processors. Chłodnica wymaga przymocowania ujednoliconej tylnej płyty (Unifi ed Back Plate, UBP) pod płytą główną przed zainstalowaniem płyty głównej wewnątrz obudowy. Płyta UBP zostanie dostarczona razem z chłodnicą. Ilustracje zamieszczone w tej instrukcji są przybliżone. Rzeczywisty wygląd komponentów może być odmienny. WAŻNE! Nie należy dokręcać do końca żadnej ze śrub utrzymujących system chłodzenia, zanim gwinty wszystkich śrub nie zostaną częściowo wkręcone. Перед установкой поставляемой в штучной упаковке системы охлаждения и процессора внимательно изучите вопросы интеграции, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 4 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 4 6/18/2012 2:54:42 PM /18/2012 2:54:42 PM указанные в замечаниях по установке, которые можно найти по адресу http://support.intel.com/support/processors. Система охлаждения процессора требует, чтобы унифицированная пластина крепления (UBP) была установлена под материнской платой до установки материнской платы в корпус. UBP будет предоставлена в упаковке вместе с системой охлаждения. Изображения в данном руководстве представлены только в качестве иллюстраций. В действительности внешний вид компонентов может быть иным. ВАЖНО! Не затягивайте полностью ни один из крепёжных болтов радиатора до тех пор, пока не зафиксируете все болты частично. 在安裝盒裝散熱解決方案和處理器之前，請先至此網站 http://support.intel.com/ support/processors 參考安裝注意事項中有關整合的問題。主機板裝入機殼前， 需先使用「一体式背板」(UBP) 將處理器散熱解決方案固定在主機板下方。UBP 隨附於散熱解決方案之外盒中。本手冊中的圖像僅供展示。實際組件的樣式可 能有所不同。 重要！請務必先將每個散熱器固定螺絲都部份地鎖入，然後再栓緊所有的螺 絲。 在安装盒装散热解决方案和处理器之前，请首先考虑站点 http://support.intel. com/support/processors 上所提供安装注释中所列的集成问题。向机箱内安装主 板之前，要求使用一体式背板 (UBP)，将处理器散热解决方案连接到主板的下 面。UBP 将随包装盒与散热解决方案一起 提供。本手册所含图示仅用于示意目 的。组件的实际外观可能有所不同。 重要！请务必在把所有螺丝都部分地拧入后再拧紧各个散热器固定螺丝。 상자에 포장된 서멀 솔루션과 프로세서를 설치하기 전에, http://support.intel.com/ support/processors에서 제공되는 설치 지침을 참조해서 설치 작업의 문제점을 고 려하십시오. 프로세서 서멀 솔루션을 사용하려면 마더보드를 섀시 내부에 설치 하기 전에 메인 보드 하단에Unifi ed Back Plate(UBP)가 장착되어 있어야 합니다. 이 UBP는 서멀 솔루션과 함께 상자에 동봉되어 있습니다. 본 설명서의 그림은 설명 목적으로만 제공되는 것입니다. 실제 부품 모양은 다를 수 있습니다. 중요 정보! 모든 나사를 약간씩 조이기 전까지는 방열기 고정 나사를 완전히 조이지 마십시오. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 5 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 5 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM ボックス版サーマル・ソリューションとプロセッサーを取り付ける前に、http://support.intel.com/support/processors にあるインストール・ノートに記述されている互換 性の問題を確認してください。プロセッサー・サーマル・ソリューションの要件とし て、マウントする前にメインボードの下に Unifi ed Back Plate (UBP) を取り付ける必 要があります。この UBP はサーマル・ソリューションに同梱されています。このマ ニュアルの画像はあくまで例示的なものに過ぎず、実際のコンポーネントの外観 は異なる場合があります。 重要! ヒート シンクの保持ネジは、すべてのネジを部分的にはめるまで完全に締 め付けないでください。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 6 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 6 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM Installation Instructions for the Intel® Thermal Solution HTS1155LP Cooling Requirement Source: Thermal data based on Intel standard methodology using Intel® Core™ Processor base frequency. Margin determined based on actual test results. Results may vary. NOTE: Installation instructions are not part of the Three Year Limited Warranty. REMARQUE: les consignes d’installation ne font pas partie de la garantie limitée de trois ans. HINWEIS: Die Installationsanleitung ist nicht Teil der eingeschränkten Dreijahresgarantie. NOTA: Las instrucciones para la instalación no están incluidas en la Garantía limitada de tres años. OBSERVAÇÃO: As instruções de instalação não fazem parte da garantia limitada de três anos. NOTA: le istruzioni per l'installazione non sono comprese nella Garanzia limitata di tre anni. CATATAN: Petunjuk pemasangan ini bukan bagian dari Jaminan Terbatas Tiga Tahun. UWAGA: Instrukcja instalacji nie jest częścią ograniczonej trzyletniej gwarancji. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ: инструкция по монтажу не является частью трехлетней ограниченной гарантии. 備註： 安裝說明不屬於三年有限售後保證的一部份。 注：安装说明并非三年有限质保之一部分。 주: 설치 지침은 3년 제한 보증에 포함되지 않습니다. 備考： このインストール説明書は 3 年間の限定保証の一部ではありません。 หมายเหต: ุ คมู่ อการต ื ดติ งไม ั้ ได่ เป้ ็นสวนหน ่ งของการร ึ่ ับประกนแบบจำก ั ดระยะสามป ั ี Lưu ý: Hướng dẫn lắp đặt này không phải là một phần trong chế độ Bảo hành Giới hạn Ba Năm. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 7 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 7 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM Make sure the thermal interface material is applied to the top of the CPU Integrated Heat Spreader prior to installation of the heatsink as shown in Step 7. Installation confi gurations may vary. The actual confi guration is defi ned by the chassis design. N'oubliez pas d'appliquer la pâte thermique sur le répartiteur de chaleur intégré au CPU avant d’installer le dissipateur thermique comme indiqué à l'étape 7. Les confi gurations d'installation peuvent différer. La confi guration réelle dépend de la conception du châssis. Stellen Sie sicher, dass vor der Installation des Kühlkörpers, wie in Schritt 7 gezeigt, die Wärmeleitpaste auf das Wärmeverteilblech (Integrated Heat Spreader – IHS) der CPU aufgebracht wird. Die Installationsanordnungen können variieren. Die tatsächliche Anordnung wird durch den Aufbau des Chassis vorgegeben. Antes de instalar el disipador térmico como se muestra en el Paso 7, asegúrese de aplicar el material de interfaz térmica en la parte superior del difusor de calor integrado a la CPU. La manera de realizar la instalación puede variar y dependerá del diseño del chasis. Certifi que-se de que o material de interface térmica seja aplicado na parte superior do Difusor de Calor Integrado da CPU antes de instalar o dissipador de calor conforme mostrado no passo 7. As confi gurações de instalação poderão variar. A confi guração fi nal depende do design do gabinete. Prima dell’installazione del dissipatore di calore integrato (IHS, Integrated Heat Spreader) della CPU assicurarsi che nella parte superiore di questo venga applicata la pasta termoconduttiva, come mostrato nel passaggio 7. Le confi gurazioni di installazione potrebbero variare. La confi gurazione effettiva dipende dalla struttura dello chassis. Przed zainstalowaniem radiatora należy pokryć materiałem termoizolacyjnym górną rozpraszającą ciepło powierzchnię procesora, jak pokazano w czynności 7. Konfi guracja może być rozmaita i zależy od konstrukcji płyty montażowej. Перед установкой радиатора убедитесь в том, что на поверхность интегрированного теплоотвода процессора нанесен специальный теплопроводящий состав, как показано на иллюстрации к Шагу 7. Конфигурация устанавливаемых элементов может отличаться. Конкретная конфигурация определяется конструкцией корпуса. 如步驟 7 所示，安裝處理器散熱器之前，確定先將熱介面材料塗在 CPU 整合 式均熱片的 上方。安裝配置可能視實際情形有所不同。 實際配置應依機殼設 計而調整。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 8 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 8 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM 请确保在安装散热器之前，事先将热界面材料施加到集成式 CPU 散热片的顶 部，如第 7 步 所示。安装配置可能有所不同。 实际配置由机箱设计决定。 단계 7의 그림과 같이 방열기를 설치하기 전에 CPU 통합형 방열판의 상단 에 열 전달제를 바르십시오. 설치 구성은 다양할 수 있습니다. 실제 구성 은 섀시 설계에 따라 결정됩니다. ステップ 7 に示すようにヒートシンクを取り付ける前に、CPUのインテグレーテッ ド・ヒートスプレッダーの上に必ずサーマル・インターフェース・マテリアルを塗布 してください。構造は異なることがあります。 実際の構造はシャーシの設計に 左右されます。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 9 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 9 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 10 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 10 6/18/2012 2:54:43 PM /18/2012 2:54:43 PM http://www.intel.com/go/aio 1 2 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 11 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 11 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 3 4 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 12 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 12 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 5 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 13 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 13 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 6 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 14 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 14 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM 7 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 15 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 15 6/18/2012 2:54:44 PM /18/2012 2:54:44 PM A. Partially tighten the screws A. Serrez partiellement les vis A. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben leicht an A. Ajuste un poco los tornillos A. Aperte parcialmente os parafusos A. Serrare parzialmente le viti A. Dokręcić śruby do pierwszego oporu A. Наживите винты A. 螺絲稍微鎖緊 A. 略微拧紧螺丝 A. 나사를 약간 조입니다 A. ねじを途中まで締めます G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 16 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 16 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM 8 http://www.intel.com/go/aio M2.5 * 0.45 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 17 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 17 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM B. Move the heat exchanger to close the gap to the blower B. Déplacez l'échangeur thermique de façon à l’accoler au ventilateur B. Verschieben Sie den Wärmetauscher, um die Lücke zum Lüfter zu schließen B. Mueva el intercambiador de calor para acercarlo al ventilador B. Coloque o trocador de calor em posição adjacente à ventoinha B. Spostare lo scambiatore di calore in modo da colmare lo spazio verso il soffi atore B. Przesunąć wymiennik ciepła, aby zakryć szczelinę do dmuchawy B. Прижмите теплообменник к вентилятору, устранив зазор B. 將散熱模組移近風扇些 B. 移动热交换器，使其靠近鼓风机 B. 열 교환기를 움직여서 송풍기와의 간격을 줄입니다 B. ヒート・エクスチェンジを動かしてブロアーとの隙間をなく すようにします G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 18 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 18 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM 9 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 19 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 19 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM C. Fully tighten the screws C. Serrez complètement les vis C. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben vollständig fest C. Ajuste completamente los tornillos C. Aperte completamente os parafusos C. Stringere completamente le viti C. Całkowicie dokręcić śruby C. Полностью затяните винты C. 螺絲完全鎖緊 C. 完全拧紧螺丝 C. 나사를 완전히 조입니다 C. ねじを完全に締め付けます G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 20 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 20 6/18/2012 2:54:45 PM /18/2012 2:54:45 PM 10 11 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 21 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 21 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM D. Plug in the fan cable connector D. Connectez le câble du ventilateur D. Stecken Sie den Steckverbinder des Gebläsekabels ein D. Enchufe el conector del cable del ventilador D. Ligue o conector do cabo do ventilador D. Collegare il connettore del cavo della ventola D. Podłączyć kabel zasilania wentylatora D. Подсоедините разъем кабеля вентилятора D. 連接風扇線電源接頭 D. 插入风扇电缆连接器 D. 팬 케이블 커넥터를 꽂습니다 D. ファンケーブル・コネクターに接続します G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 22 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 22 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM 12 http://www.intel.com/go/aio G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 23 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 23 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 24 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 24 6/18/2012 2:54:46 PM /18/2012 2:54:46 PM LIMITED WARRANTY If you are a consumer under the Australian Consumer Law, this warranty does not apply to you. Please visit http://www.intel.com/support/processors/sb/CS-009862.htm to view the limited warranty which is applicable to Australian consumers. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product (defi ned herein as the thermal solution) in its original sealed packaging (“Original Purchaser”) and to the purchaser of a computer system built by an Original Purchaser containing the Product (“Original System Customer”) as follows: if the Product is properly used and installed, it will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifi cations for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging in the case of an Original Purchaser, and for a period of three (3) years beginning on the date of purchase of a computer system containing the Product for an Original System Customer. If the Product, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails to conform to the above warranty during the warranty period, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current value of the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT OR COMPUTER SYSTEM THAT INCLUDES THE PRODUCT AND LASTS ONLY FOR AS LONG AS YOU CONTINUE TO OWN THE PRODUCT. WARRANTY COVERAGE TERMINATES IF THE ORIGINAL SYSTEM CUSTOMER SELLS OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERS THE COMPUTER SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES THE PRODUCT. WARNING: Altering clock frequency and/or voltage may: (i) reduce system stability and useful life of the system and processor; (ii) cause the processor and other system components to fail; (iii) cause reductions in system performance; (iv) cause additional heat or other damage; and (v) affect system data integrity. Intel has not tested, and does not warranty, the operation of the processor beyond its specifi cations. Intel assumes no responsibility that the processor, including if used with altered clock frequencies and/or voltages, will be fi t for any particular purpose. EXTENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY Intel does not warrant that the Product will be free from design defects or errors known as “errata.” Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 25 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 25 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Warranty does NOT cover: • any costs associated with the repair or replacement of the Product including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product that is soldered or otherwise permanently affi xed to any printed circuit board; OR • damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal electrical, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing; OR • any Product which has been modifi ed or operated outside of Intel’s publicly available specifi cations or where the original identifi cation markings (trademark or serial number) has been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE To obtain warranty service for the Product (whether purchased in its original sealed packaging or as part of a computer system), you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) center in your region within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. (See back cover for information regarding how to contact ICS in your region.) Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identifi cation number found on the Product; (4) if applicable, a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. The ICS representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS’s verifi cation that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid, and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Freight charges and/or handling fees may apply if the Product for which you are requesting warranty services was not sold via authorized distribution in your country/Region. (For a defi nition of country/Region, contact the ICS center in your region or go to www.intel.com/support.) G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 26 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 26 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intel’s property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 27 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 27 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES. IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S) OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel garantit à l’acheteur du Produit (défini ici comme étant la solution thermique) dans son emballage d’origine non ouvert (« Acheteur original ») et à l’acheteur d’un système informatique construit par un Acheteur original contenant le Produit (« Client système original ») ce qui suit: si le Produit est correctement utilisé et installé, il sera exempt de tout défaut de matériel et de fabrication et sera conforme aux spécifi cations publiées par Intel, pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat du Produit dans son emballage original fermé, dans le cas d’un Acheteur original, et pendant une durée de trois (3) ans à compter de la date d’achat d’un système informatique contenant le Produit pour un Client système original. Si le Produit couvert par la présente Garantie limitée n’est pas conforme à la garantie ci-dessus pendant la période de garantie, Intel a le choix entre: RÉPARER le Produit au moyen de matériel informatique et/ou de logiciels ; OU REMPLACER le Produit par un autre produit; OU, si Intel ne peut pas le réparer ni le remplacer, REMBOURSER le Produit à sa valeur au moment où une demande de service sous garantie est adressée à Intel dans le cadre de cette Garantie limitée. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE, ET TOUTES LES GARANTIES TACITES ÉVENTUELLEMENT PRÉVUES PAR LE DROIT APPLICABLE AU NIVEAU DES ÉTATS, AU NIVEAU NATIONAL, AU NIVEAU PROVINCIAL OU AU NIVEAU LOCAL, NE S’APPLIQUENT QU’À VOUS EN TANT QU’ACHETEUR ORIGINAL DU PRODUIT OU DU SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT, ET EXPIRENT DÈS QUE VOUS N’ÊTES PLUS PROPRIÉTAIRE DU PRODUIT. LA COUVERTURE DE LA GARANTIE PREND FIN SI G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 28 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 28 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM LE CLIENT SYSTÈME ORIGINAL VEND OU TRANSFÈRE DE TOUTE AUTRE MANIÈRE LE SYSTÈME INFORMATIQUE QUI COMPREND LE PRODUIT. ATTENTION: Toute modifi cation de la fréquence d’horloge et/ou de la tension peut : (i) réduire la stabilité du système et la durée de vie utile du système et du processeur ; (ii) entraîner une défaillance du processeur et d’autres composants du système ; (iii) réduire les performances du système ; (iv) entraîner une augmentation de chaleur ou d’autres dégâts ; et (v) compromettre l’intégrité des données du système. Intel n’a pas testé et ne garantit aucunement le bon fonctionnement de la mémoire au-delà de ses spécifi cations. Intel décline toute responsabilité quand à l’adéquation du processeur pour un usage particulier, y compris en cas d’utilisation après modifi cation des fréquences d’horloge et/ou des tensions. ÉTENDUE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE Intel ne garantit pas l’absence de défauts ou d’erreurs de conception, appelés « errata », au sein du Produit. La liste des errata actuellement connus est disponible sur demande. De plus, la présente garantie limitée NE couvre PAS: • les frais associés à la réparation ou au remplacement du Produit, y compris les frais de main d’œuvre, d’installation ou autres frais encourus par vous, et en particulier, tous les frais ayant trait à l’enlèvement ou au remplacement de tout Produit qui est soudé ou fi xé de façon permanente par un autre moyen à une carte à circuits imprimés; OU • les dommages du Produit dus à des causes externes, notamment les accidents, problèmes d’alimentation électrique, conditions électriques, mécaniques ou environnementales anormales, utilisation non conforme au mode d’emploi du produit, négligences, modifi cations, réparations, ainsi qu’à une installation ou des tests inappropriés; OU • un Produit qui a été modifi é ou utilisé en dehors des spécifi cations publiées par Intel, ou sur lequel les marques d’identifi cation originales (marque ou numéro de série) ont été enlevées, modifi ées ou effacées. COMMENT BÉNÉFICIER DES SERVICES DE LA GARANTIE Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie pour le Produit (qu’il ait été acheté dans son emballage original fermé ou dans un système informatique), vous pouvez contacter votre point de vente original, en suivant ses instructions, ou contacter Intel. Pour bénéfi cier des services de garantie d’Intel, vous devez contacter le centre de support client Intel (« SCI ») dans votre région durant la période de garantie, pendant G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 29 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 29 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM les heures ouvrables (heure locale), à l’exception des jours fériés, et renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. (Reportez-vous à la couverture arrière pour savoir comment contacter le SCI dans votre région). Nous vous demanderons : (1) vos nom, adresse postale, adresse électronique et numéros de téléphone ; (2) la preuve d’achat; (3) le nom du modèle et le numéro d’identifi cation du produit se trouvant sur le Produit ; (4) le cas échéant, une description du système informatique, notamment la marque et le modèle ; et (5) une explication du problème. Selon la nature du problème, le représentant SCI pourra être amené à vous demander des informations supplémentaires. Après vérifi cation par le SCI que le Produit peut bénéfi cier des services de garantie, vous recevrez un numéro d’autorisation de renvoi de matériel (« ARM ») et des instructions pour renvoyer le Produit au centre SCI désigné. Lorsque vous renvoyez le Produit au centre SCI, vous devez inscrire le numéro ARM à l’extérieur du paquet. Intel n’acceptera aucun Produit renvoyé sans numéro ARM, ou avec un numéro ARM non valable, sur le paquet. Vous devez expédier le Produit renvoyé au centre SCI désigné dans son emballage original ou dans un emballage équivalent, en port payé et assumer les risques de dommages ou de perte au cours du transport. Des frais de transport et/ou de manutention pourraient être appliqués si le Produit pour lequel vous demandez des services de garantie n’a pas été vendu via des canaux de distribution autorisés dans votre Pays/ Région (pour une défi nition de Pays/Région, contactez le centre ICS de votre région ou consultez la page www.intel.com/support.) Intel pourra choisir de réparer ou de remplacer le Produit par un Produit ou des composants neufs ou reconditionnés, si cela est jugé approprié par Intel. Le produit réparé ou remplacé vous sera expédié aux frais d’Intel dans un délai raisonnable après réception du produit renvoyé par le SCI. Le Produit renvoyé deviendra la propriété d’Intel à sa réception par le SCI. Le produit de remplacement est couvert par la présente garantie et soumis aux mêmes limites et exclusions, pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours ou pendant le délai de la garantie d’origine restant à courir, suivant la période la plus longue. Si Intel remplace le Produit, la durée de la Garantie limitée n’est pas allongée pour le Produit de remplacement. LIMITES ET EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES POUR LE PRODUIT ET INTEL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, NOTAMMENT LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTABILITÉ À UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE, D’ABSENCE DE CONTREFAÇON, DE CONDUITE HABITUELLE ET D’USAGE DU COMMERCE. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois l’exclusion des garanties tacites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LA DURÉE DE TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES ET G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 30 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 30 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM TACITES EST LIMITÉE À CELLE DE LA GARANTIE LIMITÉE. APRÈS CE DÉLAI, AUCUNE GARANTIE NE SERA PLUS EN VIGUEUR. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter la durée des garanties implicites et il est possible que la présente limite ne vous soit pas applicable. LIMITES DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ LA RESPONSABILITÉ D’INTEL AU TITRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE OU DE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, SE LIMITE À LA RÉPARATION, AU REMPLACEMENT ET AU REMBOURSEMENT MENTIONNÉS CI-DESSUS. CES DERNIERS REPRÉSENTENT LE SEUL ET UNIQUE RECOURS EN CAS DE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI, INTEL NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS OU SPÉCIAUX RÉSULTANT D’UNE RUPTURE DE LA GARANTIE OU D’UNE AUTRE THÉORIE JURIDIQUE (Y COMPRIS, MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, PÉRIODES D’INACTIVITÉ, PERTES DE CLIENTÈLE, DOMMAGES OU REMPLACEMENT DES BIENS ET ÉQUIPEMENTS, AINSI QUE FRAIS DE RÉCUPÉRATION, DE REPROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DES PROGRAMMES OU DONNÉES ENREGISTRÉS DANS OU UTILISÉS AVEC UN SYSTÈME CONTENANT LE PRODUIT), MÊME SI INTEL A ÉTÉ AVISÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains états (ou juridictions) interdisent toutefois de limiter ou d’exclure les dommages indirects ou consécutifs et il est possible que les présentes limites ou exclusions ne vous soient pas applicables. LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE VOUS FAIT BÉNÉFICIER DE DROITS LÉGAUX PARTICULIERS ET IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS VOUS RECONNAISSENT D’AUTRES DROITS. TOUT LITIGE SURVENANT DANS LE CADRE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU AYANT TRAIT À CELLE-CI SERA JUGÉ DANS LES JURIDICTIONS SUIVANTES ET RÉGI PAR LES LOIS SUIVANTES: POUR LES ÉTATS-UNIS D’AMÉRIQUE, LE CANADA, L’AMÉRIQUE DU NORD ET L’AMÉRIQUE DU SUD, LA JURIDICTION SERA SANTA CLARA, EN CALIFORNIE, AUX ÉTATS-UNIS, ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ÉTAT DU DELAWARE. POUR LA RÉGION DE L’ASIE ET DU PACIFIQUE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA CHINE CONTINENTALE), LA JURIDICTION SERA SINGAPOUR ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE SINGAPOUR. POUR L’EUROPE ET LE RESTE DU MONDE, LA JURIDICTION SERA LONDRES ET LA LOI APPLICABLE SERA CELLE DE L’ANGLETERRE ET DU PAYS DE GALLES. EN CAS DE CONFLIT ENTRE LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE ET TOUTE AUTRE VERSION TRADUITE DE CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE (À L’EXCEPTION DE LA VERSION EN CHINOIS SIMPLIFIÉ), LA VERSION EN LANGUE ANGLAISE FERA FOI. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 31 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 31 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet dem Käufer des Produkts (des weiteren defi niert als Thermallösung) bei versiegelter Originalverpackung (“Erstkäufer”) sowie dem Käufer eines von einem Erstkäufer gebauten Computersystems, welches das Produkt beinhaltet (“Originalsystemkunde”) folgendes: bei ordnungsgemäßem Gebrauch und korrekter Installation ist das Produkt im Falle eines Erstkäufers ab dem Kaufdatum des Produkts in der Originalverpackung für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren und im Falle eines Originalsystemkunden ab dem Kaufdatum eines das Produkt enthaltenden Computersystems für einen Zeitraum von drei (3) Jahren frei von Material- und Verarbeitungsmängeln und entspricht im Wesentlichen den öffentlich zugänglichen Spezifi kationen von Intel. Sollte das durch diese beschränkte Gewährleistung abgedeckte Produkt im Laufe der Gewährleistungszeit aus Gründen, die unter die obigen Gewährleistungsbedingungen fallen, versagen, wird Intel nach eigenem Ermessen: das Produkt mittels Hardware und/oder Software REPARIEREN; ODER das Produkt durch ein anderes Produkt ERSETZEN; ODER, falls Intel sich außer Stande sieht, das Produkt zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen, den unter dieser beschränkten Gewährleistung zum Zeitpunkt der Geltendmachung des Gewährleistungsanspruchs gegen Intel verbleibenden Wert des Produkts ERSTATTEN. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG SOWIE ALLE EVENTUELL UNTER DEM ANWENDBAREN STAATLICHEN RECHT, BUNDESSTAATLICHEN RECHT, LANDESRECHT ODER ÖRTLICHEN RECHT EXISTIERENDEN KONKLUDENTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN BEZIEHEN SICH NUR AUF SIE ALS DEN ERSTKÄUFER DES PRODUKTS ODER DES DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN COMPUTERSYSTEMS UND GELTEN NUR SO LANGE SIE EIGENTÜMER DES PRODUKTS SIND. VERÄUSSERT DER ORIGINALSYSTEMKUNDE DAS DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDE COMPUTERSYSTEM ODER TRANSFERIERT ER ES ANDERSWEITIG, ERLISCHT DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG. WARNHINWEIS: Eine Veränderung der Taktfrequenz und/oder der Spannung kann: (i) die Systemstabilität und die Nutzungsdauer des Systems und des Prozessors reduzieren; (ii) einen Ausfall des Prozessors und anderer Systemkomponenten verursachen; (iii) eine Leistungsverringerung des Systems verursachen; (iv) zusätzliche Erhitzung oder andere Schäden hervorrufen; und (v) die Datenintegrität des Systems beeinträchtigen. Intel hat die Funktion des Prozessors außerhalb seiner Spezifi kationen nicht getestet und übernimmt dafür keine Garantie. Intel übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Eignung des Prozessors für einen bestimmten Zweck, insbesondere wenn dieser mit veränderten Taktfrequenzen und/oder Spannungen betrieben wird. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 32 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 32 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM UMFANG DER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG Intel gewährleistet nicht, dass das Produkt frei von Designfehlern oder von als “Errata” bekannten Fehlern ist. Bisher festgestellte Errata werden auf Anfrage verfügbar gemacht. Des weiteren erstreckt sich diese beschränkte Gewährleistung NICHT auf: • jedwede Kosten, die Ihnen im Zusammenhang mit der Reparatur oder dem Ersatz des Produkts anfallen, ein schließlich Kosten für verrichtete Arbeiten, Installationskosten oder andere Kosten, und insbesondere jedwede Kosten im Zusammenhang mit der Entfernung oder dem Ersatz aller Produkte, die an Leiterplatten gelötet oder anderweitig an Leiterplatten befestigt sind, ODER • Produktschäden, die auf äußere Einwirkungen zurückzuführen sind, einschließlich Unfällen, Stromversor gungsproblemen, anormaler elektrischer, mechanischer oder Umgebungsbedingungen, nicht mit den Produktanleitungen übereinstimmenden Gebrauchs, Missbrauchs, Nachlässigkeit, Modifi kationen, Reparaturen, unsachgemäßer Installation oder unsachgemäßen Testens; ODER • alle Produkte, die modifi ziert oder außerhalb der öffentlich zugänglichen Spezi- fi kationen von Intel betrieben wurden und alle Produkte bei denen die OriginalIdentifi kationsmarkierungen (Marke oder Seriennummer) entfernt, verändert oder unkenntlich gemacht wurden. WIE KÖNNEN SIE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ANSPRUCH NEHMEN? Um die Gewährleistung für das Produkt in Anspruch zu nehmen (sowohl beim Kauf des Produkts in versiegelter Originalverpackung als auch als Teil eines Computersystems) setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrer Verkaufsstelle oder direkt mit Intel in Verbindung. Um die Gewährleistung von Intel in Anspruch zu nehmen, müssen Sie sich innerhalb des Gewährleistungszeitraums mit Ihrem regionalen Intel Customer Support Center (“ICS Center”) in Verbindung setzen (Ortszeit, normale Geschäftszeiten, außer sonn- und feiertags) und das Produkt an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden. (Kontaktinformationen für Ihr regionales ICS Center fi nden Sie auf der Rückseite.) Bitte halten Sie folgende Informationen bereit: (1) Ihren Namen, Postanschrift, E-Mail-Adresse und Telefonnummern; (2) Kaufbescheinigung; (3) Modell und auf dem Produkt angegebene Produktidentifi zierungsnummer; (4) ggf. eine Beschreibung des Computersystems einschließlich Hersteller und Modell; sowie (5) eine Erläuterung des aufgetretenen Problems. Je nach Art des Problems benötigen unsere ICS Mitarbeiter evtl. noch weitere Informationen. Nachdem das ICS Center bestätigt hat, dass das Produkt unter die Gewährleistung fällt, erhalten Sie eine Genehmigungsnummer für die Rücksendung (Return Material Authorization, “RMA”) und Anleitungen zum Rücksenden des Produkts an das zugewiesene G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 33 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 33 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ICS Center. Beim Rücksenden des Produkts an das ICS Center muss die RMA-Nummer auf der Verpackung angegeben werden. Zurückgesendete Produkte, bei denen die RMA-Nummern auf der Verpackung fehlen oder ungültig sind, werden von Intel nicht angenommen. Sie müssen das rückzusendende Produkt in der Originalverpackung oder einer entsprechenden geeigneten Verpackung an das zugewiesene ICS Center senden, wobei die Portokosten im Voraus zu entrichten und sämtliche mit dem Transport verbundenen Beschädigungs- und Verlustrisiken von Ihnen zu tragen sind. Frachtkosten und/oder Bearbeitungsgebühren können anfallen, wenn das Produkt, zu dem Sie Garantieleistungen beantragen, nicht über einen autorisierten Fachhändler in Ihrem Land/Ihrer Region erworben wurde. (Um eine Defi nition des Begriffes “Land/Region” zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihr regionales ICS-Center oder besuchen Sie die Webseite www.intel.com/support.) Das Produkt wird nach Intels Ermessen entweder repariert oder durch ein neues oder überholtes Produkt oder durch Produktkomponenten ersetzt. Das reparierte oder ersetzte Produkt wird auf Kosten Intels innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist nach dem Erhalt des rückgesendeten Produkts durch das ICS Center an Sie zurückgesendet. Nach dem Erhalt durch das ICS Center wird das rückgesendete Produkt Eigentum von Intel. Für das Ersatzprodukt gilt diese schriftliche Gewährleistung und das Ersatzprodukt unterliegt den gleichen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüssen für neunzig (90) Tage bzw. für die verbleibende Zeit des ursprünglichen Gewährleistungszeitraums (je nachdem, welche länger gültig ist). Wird das Produkt durch Intel ersetzt, wird die Laufzeit der beschränkten Gewährleistung für das Ersatzprodukt nicht verlängert. GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN UND -AUSSCHLÜSSE DIESE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG ERSETZT ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN FÜR DAS PRODUKT, UND INTEL WEIST ALLE ANDEREN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN VON SICH, SOWOHL AUSDRÜCKLICHE ALS AUCH STILLSCHWEIGENDE, EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH OHNE EINSCHRÄNKUNG DER IMPLIZIERTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG FÜR MARKTGÄNGIGKEIT, EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK, AUSSCHLUSS DER VERLETZUNG VON RECHTEN DRITTER, HANDELSVERKEHR ODER HANDELSGEBRÄUCHEN. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) ist der Ausschluss stillschweigender Gewährleistungen unzulässig; daher trifft dieser Ausschluss möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. ALLE AUSDRÜCKLICHEN UND STILLSCHWEIGENDEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN SIND ZEITLICH AUF DEN BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSZEITRAUM BESCHRÄNKT. NACH ABLAUF DIESER ZEIT GELTEN DIE GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN NICHT MEHR. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind zeitliche Beschränkungen stillschweigender Gewährleistungsfristen unzulässig; daher trifft diese Beschränkung möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 34 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 34 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM HAFTUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN INTELS HAFTUNG UNTER DIESER ODER ANDEREN, STILLSCHWEIGENDEN ODER AUSDRÜCKLICHEN, GEWÄHRLEISTUNGEN IST AUF DIE REPARATUR, DEN ERSATZ ODER DIE ERSTATTUNG BESCHRÄNKT, WIE OBEN ANGEGEBEN. DIESE ANSPRÜCHE STELLEN IHRE EINZIGEN UND AUSSCHLIESSLICHEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSANSPRÜCHE IM FALLE EINES GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCHES DAR. INTEL ÜBERNIMMT BIS ZUM MAXIMAL RECHTLICH ZULÄSSIGEN AUSMASS KEINERLEI VERANTWORTUNG FÜR EVENTUELL ENTSTEHENDE UNMITTELBARE, SPEZIELLE, MITTELBARE ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, DIE AUF EINEM GEWÄHRLEISTUNGSBRUCH ODER AUF IRGENDEINER RECHTSANSICHT BERUHEN ODER AUS EINER ANDEREN RECHTLICHEN LEHRE HERVORGEHEN (EINSCHLIESSLICH, JEDOCH NICHT BEGRENZT AUF GEWINNAUSFALL, AUSFALLZEIT, RUFSCHÄDIGUNG, SCHÄDEN AN ODER ERSATZ VON MATERIAL UND EIGENTUM SOWIE JEDWEDE KOSTEN, DIE MIT DER NEUBESCHAFFUNG, NEUPROGRAMMIERUNG ODER WIEDERHERSTELLUNG VON AUF EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM GESPEICHERTEN ODER MIT EINEM DAS PRODUKT ENTHALTENDEN SYSTEM VERWENDETEN PROGRAMMEN ODER DATEN VERBUNDEN SIND); DIES GILT AUCH FÜR DEN FALL, DASS INTEL AUF DIE MÖGLICHKEIT DES AUFTRETENS SOLCHER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE. In einigen Staaten (oder Gerichtsbarkeiten) sind der Ausschluss oder die Beschränkung von mittelbaren Schäden oder Folgeschäden unzulässig; daher treffen die oben beschriebenen Beschränkungen und Ausschlüsse möglicherweise nicht auf Sie zu. DIESE BESCHRÄNKTE GEWÄHRLEISTUNG GIBT IHNEN SPEZIFISCHE RECHTE; JE NACH STAAT ODER GERICHTSBARKEIT STEHEN IHNEN MÖGLICHERWEISE WEITERE RECHTE ZU. JEGLICHE UND ALLE AUS DIESEM VERTRAG ENTWACHSENEN ODER MIT DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG IN ZUSAMMENHANG STEHENDEN AUSEINANDERSETZUNGEN UNTERLIEGEN DER RECHTSPRECHUNG DER FOLGENDEN GERICHTSSTÄNDE UND DEN GESETZEN DES FOLGENDEN RECHTS: IN DEN VEREINIGTEN STAATEN VON AMERIKA, KANADA, NORDAMERIKA UND SÜDAMERIKA SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SANTA CLARA IN KALIFORNIEN, USA UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT DES STAATES DELAWARE SEIN. IM ASIATISCH-PAZIFISCHEN RAUM (MIT AUSNAHME DES CHINESISCHEN FESTLANDES) SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND SINGAPUR UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON SINGAPUR SEIN. IN EUROPA UND DER RESTLICHEN WELT SOLL DER GERICHTSSTAND LONDON UND DAS ANWENDBARE RECHT DAS RECHT VON ENGLAND UND WALES SEIN. IM FALLE VON KONTROVERSEN ZWISCHEN DER ENGLISCHSPRACHIGEN VERSION UND EINER/MEHRERER ÜBERSETZUNG(EN) DIESER BESCHRÄNKTEN GEWÄHRLEISTUNG G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 35 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 35 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM (MIT AUSNAHME DER VERSION IN VEREINFACHTEM CHINESISCH) SOLL DIE ENGLISCHSPRACHIGE VERSION DIE MASSGEBLICHE SEIN. GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel garantiza al comprador del Producto (defi nido conforme a la presente como la solución térmica) en su paquete original sellado (“Comprador Original”) y al comprador de un sistema de computación ensamblado por un Comprador Original que contenga el Producto (“Cliente Original del Sistema”), lo siguiente: si el Producto se utiliza e instala apropiadamente, el mismo estará libre de defectos en sus materiales y fabricación, y cumplirá sustancialmente con las especifi caciones de Intel, que se encuentra a disposición pública, por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto en su paquete original sellado en el caso de un Comprador Original, y por un período de tres (3) años a partir de la fecha de compra de un sistema de computación que contenga el Producto en el caso de un Cliente Original del Sistema. Si el Producto, objeto de esta Garantía Limitada, no cumple con lo especifi cado por la misma durante el período de garantía, Intel, a su elección: REPARARÁ el Producto en lo que hace a hardware y/o software; O REEMPLAZARÁ el Producto con otro producto; O, si Intel no puede reparar o reemplazar el Producto, REEMBOLSARÁ el valor corriente del Producto al momento del reclamo del servicio de garantía a Intel bajo esta Garantía Limitada. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Y LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE PUEDAN EXISTIR BAJO LEYES ESTATALES, NACIONALES, PROVINCIALES O LOCALES SE APLICARÁN ÚNICAMENTE A USTED COMO COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DEL PRODUCTO O DEL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO, Y SE PROLONGARÁN ÚNICAMENTE MIENTRAS USTED CONTINÚE SIENDO EL PROPIETARIO DEL PRODUCTO. LA COBERTURA DE LA GARANTÍA FINALIZARÁ SI EL CLIENTE ORIGINAL DEL SISTEMA VENDE O DE ALGUNA OTRA MANERA TRANSFIERE EL SISTEMA DE COMPUTACIÓN QUE INCLUYE EL PRODUCTO. ADVERTENCIA: Si altera la frecuencia y/o el voltaje del reloj, se puede (i) reducir la estabilidad del sistema y la vida útil del sistema y el procesador; (ii) provocar la falla del procesador y otros componentes del sistema; (iii) causar reducciones en el rendimiento del sistema; (iv) causar un aumento del calor u otros daños; y (v) afectar la integridad de los datos del sistema. Intel no ha probado ni garantiza el funcionamiento del procesador más allá de las especifi caciones. Intel no asume responsabilidad alguna relacionada con la idoneidad del procesador para un fi n determinado, incluso si se utiliza cuando se alteran las frecuencias y/o los voltajes del reloj. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 36 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 36 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ALCANCE DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA Intel no garantiza que el Producto estará libre de defectos de diseño o errores conocidos como “erratas”. La lista de erratas identifi cadas hasta el momento están disponibles previa solicitud. Además, esta Garantía Limitada NO cubre: • ningún costo relacionado con la reparación o el reemplazo del Producto, incluso costos de mano de obra, instalación u otros en los que usted incurra y en particular, ningún costo relacionado con la remoción o el reemplazo de cualquier Producto que esté soldado o fi jado permanentemente de alguna otra manera a cualquier placa impresa del circuito; O • daños al Producto debidos a causas externas, incluso accidentes, problemas con la alimentación eléctrica, condiciones eléctricas, mecánicas o ambientales anormales, usos no acordes a las instrucciones del producto, usos indebidos, descuido, alteración, reparación, instalación o pruebas incorrectas; O • cualquier Producto que haya sido modifi cado u operado en forma no acorde a las especifi caciones públicamente disponibles de Intel, o cuyas marcas originales de identifi cación (marca registrada o número de serie) hayan sido removidas, alteradas o borradas del Producto. CÓMO OBTENER EL SERVICIO DE LA GARANTÍA Para obtener el servicio de garantía del Producto (ya sea que éste haya sido comprado en su paquete sellado original o como parte de un sistema de computación), puede contactar a su punto original de compra de acuerdo a sus instrucciones, o puede contactar a Intel. Para solicitar el servicio de la garantía a Intel, dentro del período de garantía, puede contactar al centro de Atención al Cliente de Intel (“ICS”) de su región durante el horario normal de negocios (hora local), excluyendo los días feriados, y devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado (consulte en el dorso del paquete la información para contactar al ICS de su región). Por favor tenga listos los siguientes datos: (1) su nombre, dirección de correo postal, dirección de correo electrónico y números de teléfono; (2) comprobante de la compra; (3) nombre del modelo y número de identifi cación del producto consignado en el Producto; (4) si corresponde, una descripción del sistema de computación, incluyendo marca y modelo; y (5) una explicación del problema. El representante del ICS puede necesitar información adicional de su parte, según la naturaleza del problema. Después que el ICS verifi que que el Producto cumple los requisitos para recibir el servicio de la garantía, se le enviará un número de Autorización de Material de Devolución (“RMA”) G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 37 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 37 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM y se le darán instrucciones para devolver el Producto al centro ICS designado. Cuando devuelva el Producto al centro ICS, deberá incluir el número de RMA en la parte exterior del paquete. Intel no aceptará ningún producto devuelto sin el número de RMA o que tenga un número inválido de RMA en el paquete. Deberá enviar el Producto devuelto al centro ICS designado en el paquete original o su equivalente con los gastos de envíos prepagados y asumir el riesgo de daño o pérdida durante el envío. Existe la posibilidad de que se apliquen gastos de transporte y/o comisiones de gestión si el producto para el que solicita los servicios de la garantía no se vendió a través de un distribuidor autorizado en su país o región. (Para obtener una defi nición de país/región, póngase en contacto con el centro de Asistencia al cliente de Intel (ICS) en su región o vaya a www. intel.com/support.) Intel podrá elegir reparar o reemplazar el Producto, ya sea con Productos o componentes nuevos o reacondicionados, según Intel considere apropiado. El producto reparado o reemplazado se le enviará a cargo de Intel en un período de tiempo razonable después de la recepción del Producto devuelto por parte del ICS. El Producto devuelto se convertirá en propiedad de Intel al ser recibido por el ICS. El producto de reemplazo estará garantizado bajo esta garantía escrita, y estará sujeto a las mismas limitaciones y exclusiones por noventa (90) días o el tiempo restante del período de garantía original, lo que conforme el período más largo. Si Intel reemplaza el Producto, el período de Garantía limitada por el Producto de reemplazo no será extendido. LIMITACIONES Y EXCLUSIONES DE LA GARANTÍA ESTA GARANTÍA REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA DEL PRODUCTO, E INTEL REPUDIA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, EXPRESA O IMPLÍCITA, INCLUYENDO, SIN LIMITACIÓN, LAS GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN, APTITUD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR, NO INFRACCIÓN, CURSO DE COMPORTAMIENTO Y USO DE COMERCIO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión de garantías implícitas, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. TODA GARANTÍA EXPRESA E IMPLÍCITA ESTARÁ LIMITADA EN SU DURACIÓN AL PERÍODO DE LA GARANTÍA LIMITADA. NINGUNA GARANTÍA SE APLICARÁ DESPUÉS DE ESTE PERÍODO. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten limitaciones en la duración de una garantía implícita, por lo que esta limitación puede no aplicarse a usted. LIMITACIONES DE RESPONSABILIDAD LA RESPONSABILIDAD DE INTEL BAJO ESTA O CUALQUIER OTRA GARANTÍA, IMPLÍCITA O EXPRESA, SE LIMITA A REPARAR, REEMPLAZAR O REEMBOLSAR, COMO SE HA ESPECIFICADO CON ANTELACIÓN. ESTAS COMPENSACIONES SON LAS ÚNICAS Y EXG36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 38 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 38 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM CLUSIVAS COMPENSACIONES ANTE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA. HASTA EL MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LA LEY, INTEL NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR DAÑO ALGUNO, DIRECTO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL O CONSECUENCIAL, RESULTANTE DE CUALQUIER INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LA GARANTÍA O BAJO CUALQUIER OTRA TEORÍA LEGAL (INCLUYENDO, PERO SIN LIMITARSE A, PERDIDA DE GANACIAS, LUCRO CESANTE, PLUSVALÍA, DAÑOS AL EQUIPO Y LA PROPIEDAD, O REEMPLAZOS DE LOS MISMOS, Y CUALQUIER COSTO DE RECUPERACIÓN, REPROGRAMACIÓN O REPRODUCCIÓN DE CUALQUIER PROGRAMA O INFORMACIÓN ALMACENADOS EN O UTILIZADOS CON EL SISTEMA QUE CONTIENE EL PRODUCTO), AUN EN EL CASO DE QUE INTEL HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDA DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES DAÑOS. Algunos Estados (o jurisdicciones) no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consecuenciales, por lo que las limitaciones o exclusiones antes mencionadas pueden no aplicarse a usted. ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA LE OTORGA DERECHOS LEGALES ESPECÍFICOS, Y USTED PUEDE TENER TAMBIÉN OTROS DERECHOS QUE VARÍAN SEGÚN EL ESTADO O LA JURISDICCIÓ. TODO CONFLICTO QUE SURJA BAJO ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA, O EN RELACIÓN A LA MISMA, SERÁN DIRIMIDOS EN LAS SIGUIENTES JURISDICCIONES Y REGULADO POR LAS SIGUIENTES LEYES: PARA LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, NORTEAMÉRICA Y SUDAMÉRICA, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, EE.UU., Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DEL ESTADO DE DELAWARE. PARA LA REGIÓN DEL PACÍFICO ASIÁTICO (EXCEPTO CHINA CONTINENTAL), LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ SINGAPUR Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE SINGAPUR. PARA EUROPA Y EL RESTO DEL MUNDO, LA JURISDICCIÓN SERÁ LONDRES Y LA LEY APLICABLE SERÁ LA DE INGLATERRA Y GALES. EN CASO DE CUALQUIER CONFLICTO ENTRE LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA Y CUALQUIER OTRA VERSIÓN O VERSIONES TRADUCIDAS DE ESTA GARANTÍA LIMITADA (CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LA VERSIÓN SIMPLIFICADA CHINA), PREVALECERÁ LA VERSIÓN EN LENGUA INGLESA. GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel garante ao comprador do Produto (defi nido neste documento como a solução térmica), em sua embalagem original lacrada (“Comprador Original”) e ao comprador de um equipamento fabricado pelo Comprador Original, que contenha o Produto (“Cliente do Equipamento Original”) o seguinte: se o Produto for adequadamente utilizado e instalado, estará livre de defeitos de material e de manufatura e estará, substancialmente, em conformidade com as especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da data em que o Produto foi adquirido em sua embalagem original lacrada, no caso de um Comprador Original, e por um período de três (3) anos, a partir da G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 39 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 39 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM data da compra de um equipamento que contenha o Produto, no caso de um Cliente do Equipamento Original. Se o Produto, o qual é objeto desta Garantia Limitada, não estiver conforme a garantia acima durante o período de garantia, a Intel, a seu critério, irá: REPARAR o Produto por meio de hardware e/ou software; OU SUBSTITUIR o Produto por outro produto; OU, se a Intel for incapaz de reparar ou substituir o Produto, REEMBOLSAR o valor do Produto em vigência no momento em que a reivindica- ção pelo serviço de garantia for feita à Intel, nos termos desta Garantia Limitada. ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA, E QUAISQUER GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS QUE POSSAM EXISTIR DE ACORDO COM AS LEIS ESTADUAIS, NACIONAIS, PROVINCIANAS OU LOCAIS APLICÁVEIS, APLICAM-SE APENAS SOMENTE A VOCÊ, NA QUALIDADE DE COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DO PRODUTO OU DO EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUA O PRODUTO, E SUA DURAÇÃO ESTENDE-SE SOMENTE AO PERÍODO EM QUE VOCÊ CONTINUAR SENDO O PROPRIETÁRIO DO PRODUTO. A COBERTURA DA GARANTIA TERMINA SE O CLIENTE DO EQUIPAMENTO ORIGINAL VENDER, OU TRANSFERIR DE QUALQUER OUTRA MANEIRA, O EQUIPAMENTO QUE INCLUI O PRODUTO. AVISO: Alterar a frequência e/ou tensão do relógio poderá: (i) reduzir a estabilidade do sistema e a vida útil do sistema e do processador; (ii) fazer com que o processador e outros componentes do sistema falhem; (iii) causar reduções no desempenho do sistema; (iv) causar aquecimento adicional ou outros danos; e (v) afetar a integridade dos dados do sistema. A Intel não testou e não garante a operação do processador além de suas especifi cações. A Intel não assume nenhuma responsabilidade de que o processador, inclusive se usado com frequências e/ou tensões de relógio alteradas, será adequado para qualquer fi m em particular. COBERTURA DA GARANTIA LIMITADA A Intel não garante que o Produto estará livre de defeitos ou erros de design, conhecidos como “errata”. A lista de errata caracterizada atualmente está disponível mediante solicitação. Ademais, esta Garantia Limitada NÃO cobre: • quaisquer custos relacionados ao reparo ou à substituição do Produto, incluindo mão-deobra, instalação ou outros custos incorridos por você e, em particular, quaisquer custos referentes à remoção ou à substituição de qualquer Produto soldado ou permanentemente afi xado por outros meios a qualquer placa de circuito impresso; OU • danos ao Produto devido a causas externas, incluindo acidentes, problemas com a alimentação elétrica, condições anormais, elétricas, mecânicas ou ambientais, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 40 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 40 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM utilização que não esteja de acordo com as instruções do produto, mau uso, negligência, alteração, reparo, instalação inadequada ou testes inadequados; OU • qualquer Produto que tenha sido modifi cado ou operado fora das especifi cações da Intel publicamente disponíveis ou do qual as marcações de identifi cação originais (marca registrada ou número de série) tenham sido removidas, alteradas ou obliteradas. COMO OBTER O SERVIÇO DE GARANTIA Para obter o serviço da garantia do Produto (seja ele adquirido na sua embalagem original lacrada ou como parte de um equipamento), você pode entrar em contato com o local original da compra, de acordo com as suas instruções, ou pode contatar a Intel Para solicitar o serviço da garantia à Intel, você deve entrar em contato com o centro de Apoio ao Cliente Intel (“ICS”) da sua região, dentro do período de garantia e durante o horário comercial normal (horário local), excluindo-se os feriados, e devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. (Veja na capa posterior as informações sobre como contatar o ICS na sua região.) Prepare-se para fornecer: (1) o seu nome, endereço para correspondência, endereço de e-mail e números de telefone; (2) comprovante da compra; (3) nome do modelo e número de identifi cação do produto, encontrados no Produto; e (4) se aplicável, uma descrição do equipamento, incluindo a marca e o modelo e (5) uma explicação do problema. O representante do ICS pode solicitar informações adicionais, dependendo da natureza do problema. Desde que verifi cado pelo ICS que o Produto é elegível para o serviço de garantia, será emitido um número de Autorização de Devolução de Material (“RMA”) e você receberá instruções para devolver o Produto ao centro de ICS designado. Quando você devolver o produto no centro de ICS, você deve colocar o número de RMA na parte externa da embalagem. A Intel não aceitará nenhum Produto devolvido cuja embalagem não inclua o número de RMA, ou cujo número de RMA seja inválido. Você deve entregar o Produto devolvido, na embalagem original ou equivalente, ao centro de ICS designado, com as tarifas de postagem pré-pagas e assumir o risco de perdas ou danos durante o envio. Taxas de frete e/ou manuseio poderão ser aplicadas se o Produto para o qual você estiver solicitando serviços de garantia não tiver sido vendido através de distribuição autorizada em seu país/região. (Para ver a defi nição de país/região, entre em contato com o centro de Suporte ao Cliente da Intel (ICS, Intel Customer Support) em sua região ou vá para www.intel.com/support.) A Intel pode decidir reparar ou substituir o Produto por um Produto ou componentes novos ou recondicionados, a seu critério, de acordo com o que a Intel considerar mais G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 41 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 41 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM apropriado. O produto reparado ou substituído será enviado a você as custas da Intel, dentro de um período razoável após o recebimento, no ICS, do produto devolvido. O Produto devolvido se tornará propriedade da Intel, assim que for recebido pelo ICS. O produto de substituição é garantido dentro dos termos desta garantia por escrito, e está sujeito às mesmas limitações e exclusões, por noventa dias (90) ou pelo restante do período da garantia original, o que for mais longo. Se a Intel substituir o Produto, o período da Garantia Limitada para o Produto de substituição não é prorrogado. LIMITAÇÕES E EXCLUSÕES DA GARANTIA ESTA GARANTIA SUBSTITUI TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS DO PRODUTO E A INTEL EXIME-SE DE TODAS AS DEMAIS GARANTIAS, EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS, INCLUINDO, SEM LIMITAÇÃO, AS GARANTIAS IMPLÍCITAS DE GARANTIA DE COMERCIALIZAÇÃO, ADEQUAÇÃO PARA UMA FINALIDADE ESPECÍFICA, NÃO-INFRAÇÃO, CURSO DE NEGOCIAÇÃO E USO DE COMÉRCIO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão de garantias implícitas, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. TODAS AS GARANTIAS EXPRESSAS OU IMPLÍCITAS TÊM DURAÇÃO RESTRITA AO PERÍODO LIMITADO DE GARANTIA. NENHUMA GARANTIA É APLICÁVEL DEPOIS DE TAL PERÍODO. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem limitações referentes à duração de uma garantia implícita, portanto esta limitação pode não ser aplicável. LIMITAÇÕES DE RESPONSABILIDADE A RESPONSABILIDADE DA INTEL SOB ESTA OU QUALQUER OUTRA GARANTIA, IMPLÍCITA OU EXPRESSA, É LIMITADA AO REPARO, SUBSTITUIÇÃO OU REEMBOLSO, NOS TERMOS DESCRITOS ACIMA. ESSES RECURSOS SÃO OS ÚNICOS E EXCLUSIVOS PARA QUALQUER VIOLAÇÃO DA GARANTIA. ATÉ O ÂMBITO MÁXIMO PERMITIDO POR LEI, A INTEL NÃO É RESPONSÁVEL POR NENHUM DANO DIRETO, ESPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OU CONSEQÜENTE RESULTANTE DE QUALQUER DESCUMPRIMENTO DE GARANTIA OU SOBRE QUALQUER OUTRA TEORIA LEGAL (INCLUINDO, MAS NÃO LIMITADA A, PERDA DE LUCRO, TEMPO RESERVADO À MANUTENÇÃO, FUNDO DE COMÉRCIO, DANOS OU SUBSTITUIÇÃO DE EQUIPAMENTOS E PROPRIEDADES, E QUAISQUER CUSTOS REFERENTES À RECUPERAÇÃO, REPROGRAMAÇÃO OU REPRODUÇÃO DE QUALQUER PROGRAMA OU DADO ARMAZENADO EM, OU USADO COM UM SISTEMA QUE CONTENHA O PRODUTO), MESMO QUE TENHA SIDO AVISADA DA POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS. Alguns estados (ou jurisdições) não permitem a exclusão ou a limitação de danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, portanto as limitações ou exclusões acima podem não ser aplicáveis. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 42 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 42 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA CONCEDE DIREITOS LEGAIS ESPECÍFICOS E VOCÊ TAMBÉM PODE TER OUTROS DIREITOS, QUE VARIAM DE ACORDO COM O ESTADO OU A JURISDIÇÃO. TODAS E QUAISQUER DISPUTAS RESULTANTES OU RELACIONADAS A ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA SERÃO JULGADAS NOS SEGUINTES FÓRUMS E REGIDAS PELAS SEGUINTES LEIS: NO CASO DOS ESTADOS UNIDOS DA AMÉRICA, CANADÁ, AMÉRICA DO NORTE E AMÉRICA DO SUL, O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE SANTA CLARA, NA CALIFÓRNIA, EUA, E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DO ESTADO DE DELAWARE. NO CASO DA REGIÃO DA ÁSIA-PACÍFICO (COM EXCEÇÃO DA CHINA CONTINENTAL), O FÓRUM DEVE SER O DE CINGAPURA E AS LEIS APLICÁVEIS SERÃO AS DE CINGAPURA. NO CASO DA EUROPA E DO RESTANTE DO MUNDO, O FÓRUM SERÁ LONDRES E AS LEIS APLICADAS SERÃO AS DA INGLATERRA E DO PAÍS DE GALES. NO EVENTO DE QUALQUER CONFLITO ENTRE A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS E QUAISQUER OUTRAS VERSÕES TRADUZIDAS DESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA (COM EXCEÇÃO DA VERSÃO PARA O CHINÊS SIMPLIFICADO), A VERSÃO NO IDIOMA INGLÊS DEVERÁ PREVALECER. GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel esprime la seguente garanzia all’acquirente del Prodotto (la soluzione termica) nella confezione originale sigillata (“Acquirente originale”) e all’acquirente di un computer realizzato da un Acquirente originale e contenente il Prodotto (“Cliente del sistema originale”): purché installato e utilizzato correttamente, il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti nei materiali e nella lavorazione e rispondente nella sostanza alle specifi che tecniche rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto del Prodotto nella sua confezione originale sigillata (nel caso di un Acquirente originale) e per un periodo di tre (3) anni a partire dalla data di acquisto di un computer contenente il Prodotto (nel caso di un Cliente del sistema originale). Se il Prodotto, soggetto alla presente Garanzia limitata, dovesse risultare non conforme alla suddetta garanzia entro il periodo di validità, Intel si impegna, a propria descrizione, a: RIPARARE il Prodotto a mezzo di hardware e/o software; OVVERO SOSTITUIRE il Prodotto con un altro; OVVERO, qualora Intel non fosse in grado di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto, RIMBORSARE il valore ammortizzato del Prodotto nel momento in cui viene richiesta assistenza in garanzia a Intel ai sensi della presente Garanzia limitata. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA, E QUALSIASI GARANZIA IMPLICITA SECONDO LE LEGGI STATALI O LOCALI PERTINENTI, È RIFERITA ESCLUSIVAMENTE ALL’ACQUIRENTE G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 43 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 43 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ORIGINALE DEL PRODOTTO O DEL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO E HA DECORSO SOLO FINTANTOCHÉ L’ACQUIRENTE ORIGINALE STESSO NE RIMANE PROPRIETARIO. LA COPERTURA IN GARANZIA CESSA NEL MOMENTO IN CUI IL CLIENTE DEL SISTEMA ORIGINALE VENDE O TRASFERISCE IL COMPUTER CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO. AVVISO: La modifi ca della frequenza di clock e/o della tensione può: (i) ridurre la stabilità del sistema e la durata utile del sistema e del processore; (ii) causare guasti al processore o di altri componenti del sistema; (iii) ridurre le prestazioni del sistema; (iv) provocare un surriscaldamento eccessivo o ulteriori danni; e (v) incidere sull'integrità dei dati del sistema. Intel non ha testato e non garantisce il funzionamento del processore oltre le sue specifiche. Intel declina ogni responsabilità per l'idoneità del processore e di altri componenti del sistema per uno scopo particolare, incluso l'utilizzo con frequenze di clock e/o tensioni alterate. APPLICAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA LIMITATA Intel non garantisce che il Prodotto sarà esente da difetti progettuali o errori. I dati sugli errori noti al momento sono disponibili su richiesta. La presente Garanzia limitata NON copre quanto segue: • qualsiasi costo associato alla riparazione o sostituzione del Prodotto, compresi i costi di manodopera, installazione e altro, sostenuti dall’acquirente e in particolare tutti i costi relativi alla rimozione o sostituzione di un Prodotto saldato o comunque affi sso in maniera permanente ad una scheda a circuito stampato; OVVERO • i danni subiti dal Prodotto per cause esterne, compresi incidenti, problemi con l’alimentazione elettrica, picchi di corrente, condizioni meccaniche o ambientali, utilizzo difforme dalle istruzioni fornite con il Prodotto, abuso, negligenza, alterazione, riparazione, installazione inadeguata e prove improprie; OVVERO • qualsiasi Prodotto modifi cato o utilizzato in modi non contemplati nelle specifi che rese pubblicamente disponibili da Intel o dal quale siano state rimosse, alterate o altrimenti obliterate le etichette di identifi cazione originali (marchio di fabbrica o numero di serie) del Prodotto. RICHIESTA DI ASSISTENZA IN GARANZIA Entro il periodo di garanzia, per richiedere assistenza sul Prodotto (sia acquistato nella confezione originale sigillata o come facente parte di un computer), rivolgersi al punto di acquisto per le istruzioni oppure contattare Intel direttamente. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 44 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 44 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Se si richiede assistenza in garanzia a Intel, rivolgersi al centro Intel Customer Support (“ICS”) della propria zona nelle ore lavorative normali (fuso locale), escluso festivi, per la restituzione del Prodotto. I recapiti e numeri dei centri ICS sono riportati sulla terza di copertina. Premunirsi dei seguenti dati: (1) nome, recapito postale, indirizzo di e-mail e numero telefonico; (2) scontrino d’acquisto; (3) nome del modello e numero identifi cativo del Prodotto (ad esso affi ssi); (4) se pertinente, una descrizione del computer, compresi marca e modello; e (5) una spiegazione dettagliata del problema. L’agente ICS potrebbe richiedere ulteriori informazioni, secondo la natura del problema. Dopo aver appurato che il Prodotto risponde ai requisiti necessari per l’assistenza in garanzia, il centro ICS genererà un numero di autorizzazione alla restituzione del materiale (“RMA”) e fornirà al cliente le istruzioni per la restituzione del Prodotto. Quando si spedisce un Prodotto al centro ICS, annotare il numero RMA sull’esterno del pacco. Intel non accetta Prodotti ricevuti senza questo numero (o con un numero non valido) stampato visibilmente sul pacco. Spedire il Prodotto al centro ICS della propria zona nell’imballo originale o in uno equivalente, con spese di spedizione prepagate. Il cliente dovrà inoltre assumersi la responsabilità per danni o perdite conseguenti alla spedizione. Potrebbero essere applicate spese di trasporto e/o costi di movimentazione se il Prodotto per il quale richiedete servizi di garanzia non sia stato venduto attraverso canali di distribuzione autorizzati nel vostro Paese/Regione (per conoscere la defi nizione di Paese/Regione, contattate il centro ICS della vostra regione o visitate la pagina www.intel.com/support.) Intel può decidere, a propria discrezione e secondo i casi, di riparare o sostituire il Prodotto con un altro (nuovo o ricondizionato, nel tutto o nelle sue parti). Il Prodotto riparato o sostituito sarà rispedito al cliente con spese a carico di Intel, entro un periodo ragionevole dalla ricezione del pacco presso il centro ICS. Il Prodotto ricevuto diverrà proprietà Intel all’arrivo presso il centro ICS. Il prodotto fornito in sostituzione è accompagnato da una garanzia scritta e soggetto alle stesse limitazioni ed esclusioni per novanta (90) giorni o comunque per la parte restante del periodo della garanzia originale. Se Intel decide di fornire un Prodotto sostitutivo, il periodo della Garanzia limitata non viene protratto. LIMITAZIONI ED ESCLUSIONI IN GARANZIA QUESTA GARANZIA SOSTITUISCE QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA DEL PRODOTTO E INTEL DISCONOSCE OGNI ULTERIORE GARANZIA ESPLICITA O IMPLICITA, COMPRESE MA NON A TITOLO ESCLUSIVO LE GARANZIE IMPLICITE DI COMMERCIABILITÀ E IDONEITÀ AD UN DETERMINATO SCOPO, DI MANCATA VIOLAZIONE E DI USANZE COMMERCIALI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono esclusioni delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. QUALSIASI GARANZIA ESPLICITA E IMPLICITA È SOGGETTA AL DECORSO DELLA GARANZIA G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 45 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 45 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM LIMITATA. NON SONO PREVISTE ALTRE GARANZIE DOPO TALE PERIODO. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono limitazioni alla durata delle garanzie implicite, nel qual caso le limitazioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. RESPONSABILITÀ LIMITATA LA RESPONSABILITÀ DI INTEL AI SENSI DI QUESTA O DI QUALSIASI ALTRA GARANZIA IMPLICITA O ESPLICITA, SI LIMITA A RIPARAZIONE, SOSTITUZIONE O RIMBORSO, COME SOPRA INDICATO. QUESTE AZIONI DI TUTELA COSTITUISCONO L’UNICO ED ESCLUSIVO RISARCIMENTO CONTRO LA VIOLAZIONE DELLA GARANZIA. NEI LIMITI MASSIMI CONCESSI DALLA LEGGE, INTEL DECLINA OGNI RESPONSABILITÀ PER DANNI DIRETTI, SPECIALI, FORTUITI O CONSEGUENTI DERIVANTI DA VIOLAZIONE DI GARANZIA O DA INADEMPIMENTO CONTRATTUALE (COMPRESI, MA NON A CARATTERE ESCLUSIVO, PERDITA DI PROFITTI O REPUTAZIONE, TEMPI DI INATTIVITÀ, DANNI O SOSTITUZIONE DI ATTREZZATURE E BENI IMMOBILI, E QUALSIASI COSTO PER RECUPERO, RIPROGRAMMAZIONE O RIPRODUZIONE DI APPLICATIVI O DATI MEMORIZZATI O UTILIZZATI CON IL SISTEMA CONTENENTE IL PRODOTTO), ANCHE QUALORA INTEL FOSSE A CONOSCENZA DELLA POSSIBILITÀ DI TALI DANNI. Alcuni stati od ordinamenti non consentono l’esclusione o la limitazione dei danni fortuiti o conseguenti, nel qual caso le limitazioni o le esclusioni sopra indicate potrebbero non valere. LA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA CONFERISCE SPECIFICI DIRITTI LEGALI AL CLIENTE E POTREBBERO SUSSISTERE ALTRI DIRITTI CHE VARIANO SECONDO GLI STATI E GLI ORDINAMENTI. OGNI E QUALSIASI DISPUTA INSORGENTE ALLA LUCE O IN CONNESSIONE DI QUESTA GARANZIA LIMITATA SARÀ DECISA NEI SEGUENTI FORI COMPETENTI E DISCIPLINATA DALLE SEGUENTI LEGGI: PER STATI UNITI D’AMERICA, CANADA, NORD E SUDAMERICA, IL FORO ASSEGNATO HA SEDE A SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA (USA) MENTRE LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE NELLO STATO DEL DELAWARE. PER LA REGIONE ASIA-PACIFICO (TRANNE LA CINA CONTINENTALE), IL FORO HA SEDE A SINGAPORE E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE A SINGAPORE. PER L’EUROPA E IL RESTO DEL MONDO, IL FORO HA SEDE A LONDRA E LA LEGGE PERTINENTE È QUELLA VIGENTE IN INGHILTERRA E NEL GALLES. NELL’EVENTUALITÀ DI CONFLITTI TRA LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE E UNA VERSIONE TRADOTTA DALLA PRESENTE GARANZIA LIMITATA (ECCETTO LA VERSIONE IN CINESE SEMPLIGICATO), PREVARRÀ LA VERSIONE IN LINGUA INGLESE. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 46 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 46 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA Intel gwarantuje nabywcy Produktu (zdefi niowanego w niniejszym dokumencie jako systemem chłodzenia) znajdującego się w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu („Pierwotny Nabywca”), oraz nabywcy systemu komputerowego zbudowanego przez Pierwotnego Nabywcę i zawierającego Produkt („Pierwotny Nabywca Systemu”) co następuje: w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcyjeżeli Produkt jest użytkowany i zainstalowany we właściwy sposób, nie będzie on miał usterek materiałowych i wykonawczych oraz będzie odpowiadał ogólnie dostępnym specyfi kacjom fi rmy Intel przez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia Produktu w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu; w odniesieniu do Pierwotnego Nabywcy Systemuprzez okres trzech (3) lat liczony od daty nabycia systemu komputerowego zawierającego Produkt. Jeżeli Produkt, który jest przedmiotem niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji, nie będzie odpowiadał warunkom powyższej gwarancji w okresie gwarancyjnym, Intel, zgodnie z podjętą przez fi rmę decyzją podejmie następujące działania: DOKONA NAPRAWY Produktu za pomocą sprzętu lub / i oprogramowania; LUB DOKONA WYMIANY Produktu na inny produkt; LUB, jeżeli naprawa lub wymiana Produktu znajduje się poza możliwościami fi rmy Intel, DOKONA ZWROTU KWOTY równoważnej aktualnej wartości Produktu w chwili złożenia w fi rmie Intel zamówienia dotyczącego serwisu gwarancyjnego w ramach niniejszej ograniczonej gwarancji. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK GWARANCJE DOMNIEMANE, KTÓRE OKREŚLONE SĄ W MAJĄCYCH ZASTOSOWANIE STANOWYCH, KRAJOWYCH, REGIONALNYCH LUB LOKALNYCH PRZEPISACH PRAWNYCH, ODNOSZĄ SIĘ DO PIERWOTNEGO NABYWCY PRODUKTU LUB SYSTEMU KOMPUTEROWEGO ZAWIERAJĄCEGO PRODUKT I MAJĄ MOC PRAWNĄ TYLKO W OKRESIE, W KTÓRYM PRODUKT STANOWI WŁASNOŚĆ NABYWCY. OKRES GWARANCYJNY WYGASA W CHWILI, GDY PIERWOTNY NABYWCA SYSTEMU SPRZEDA LUB W INNY SPOSÓB PRZEKAŻE SYSTEM KOMPUTEROWY, KTÓRY ZAWIERA PRODUKT. OSTRZEŻENIE: Zmiana częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia może: (i) obniżyć stabilność systemu operacyjnego oraz żywotność system i procesora; (ii) spowodować awarię procesora lub innych komponentów; (iii) spowodować obniżenie wydajności systemu; (iv) spowodować powstanie dodatkowego G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 47 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 47 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ciepła lub uszkodzenia oraz (v) zaburzyć integralność danych. Firma Intel nie testowała i nie obejmuje gwarancją sprawnego działania procesora w zakresie przekraczającym jego specyfi kacje fabryczne. Intel nie odpowiada za poprawne funkcjonowanie procesora w przypadku zmodyfi kowania częstotliwości zegara i/lub napięcia. ZAKRES OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI Intel nie gwarantuje, że Produkt pozbawiony będzie usterek projektowych lub błędów określanych terminem „errata”. Na życzenie udostępnimy wykaz błędów typu errata. Ponadto niniejsza gwarancja NIE obejmuje: • jakichkolwiek kosztów związanych z naprawą lub wymianą Produktu, w tym kosztów robocizny, instalacji oraz innych poniesionych przez nabywcę, a w szczególności wszelkich kosztów związanych z usunięciem lub wymianą jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który jest przylutowany lub w inny sposób trwale zamocowany do dowolnej płyty drukowanej; LUB • uszkodzenia Produktu z przyczyn o charakterze zewnętrznym, takich jak wypadek, problemy z zasilaniem, nienormalne warunki elektryczne, mechaniczne lub środowiskowe, niezgodne z instrukcją użytkowanie produktu, zaniedbania, wprowadzenie modyfi kacji, naprawa, niewłaściwa instalacja lub nieprawidłowo przeprowadzone testowanie; LUB • jakiegokolwiek Produktu, który został poddany modyfi kacji lub obsługiwany jest niezgodnie z ogólnie dostępnymi specyfi kacjami fi rmy Intel, lub którego oryginalne oznaczenia identyfi kacyjne (znak handlowy lub numer seryjny) zostały usunięte, zmienione lub zamazane. ZASADY KORZYSTANIA Z SERWISU GWARANCYJNEGO Aby uzyskać pomoc w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego dla Produktu (zakupionego w oryginalnym, zamkniętym opakowaniu lub jako element systemu komputerowego) należy skontaktować się, zgodnie z zaleceniami podanymi w instrukcji, z oryginalnym punktem sprzedaży lub z fi rmą Intel. Aby złożyć zamówienie do fi rmy Intel dotyczące wykonania usług w zakresie serwisu gwarancyjnego należy skontaktować się w okresie gwarancyjnym z regionalnym centrum obsługi klientów (Intel Customer Support – „ICS”) w normalnych godzinach urzędowych (czasu lokalnego), z wyjątkiem świąt, i zwrócić Produkt do centrum ICS. (Informacje dotyczące adresu, adresu email oraz numeru telefonu centrum ICS w regionie nabywcy podane są na ostatniej stronie okładki). G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 48 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 48 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM Prosimy o przygotowanie następujących danych: (1) imienia i nazwiska, adresu wysyłkowego, adresu email i numerów telefonów; (2) dowodu zakupu; (3) nazwy modelu i numeru identyfi kacyjnego Produktu; (4) jeśli dotyczy, opisu systemu komputerowego, w tym marki i modelu, oraz (5) opisu zaistniałego problemu. W zależności od charakteru problemu przedstawiciel ICS może wymagać podania dodatkowych informacji. Po upewnieniu się przez ICS, że Produkt kwalifi kuje się do naprawy w ramach serwisu gwarancyjnego, nabywca otrzyma numer autoryzacyjny zwrotu materiału (Return Material Authorization – „RMA”) oraz instrukcję dotyczącą procedury zwrotu Produktu do wyznaczonego centrum ICS. Przy zwrocie Produktu do centrum ICS na zewnętrznej stronie opakowania należy podać numer RMA. Firma Intel nie przyjmie Produktu bez podanego numeru RMA lub z nieważnym numerem RMA na opakowaniu. Produkt musi być dostarczony do centrum ICS w oryginalnym lub podobnym opakowaniu, wraz z uiszczonymi opłatami przesyłkowymi. Należy uwzględnić ryzyko uszkodzenia lub zaginięcia Produktu podczas transportu. Jeśli produkt dla którego żądasz gwarancji serwisowej nie został sprzedany poprzez autoryzowanego dystrybutora w Twoim kraju/regionie, może on podlegać opłatom wysyłkowym i/lub opłatom obsługowym. (Aby uzyskać defi nicję kraju/regionu, skontaktuj się z centrum ICS w Twoim regionie lub sprawdź w witrynie www.intel.com/support/pl.) Firma Intel, według swojego uznania, może dokonać naprawy lub wymiany Produktu lub elementów na nowe lub odnowione. Naprawiony lub wymieniony produkt zostanie przesłany do nabywcy na koszt fi rmy Intel w odpowiednim czasie po otrzymaniu zwrotu Produktu przez ICS. Po otrzymaniu Produktu przez ICS staje się on własnością fi rmy Intel. Wymieniony produkt podlega warunkom określonym w niniejszej pisemnej gwarancji oraz jest przedmiotem takich samych ograniczeń i wykluczeń przez dłuższy z okresów: dziewięćdziesiąt (90) dni lub pozostałość oryginalnego okresu gwarancyjnego. W przypadku wymiany Produktu przez fi rmę Intel okres gwarancyjny dla wymienionego Produktu nie ulega przedłużeniu. OGRANICZENIA I WYKLUCZENIA GWARANCYJNE NINIEJSZA GWARANCJA ZASTĘPUJE WSZELKIE INNE GWARANCJE DOTYCZĄCE PRODUKTU. FIRMA INTEL ZRZEKA SIĘ WSZELKICH INNYCH OKREŚLONYCH LUB DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI, W TYM, BEZ ŻADNYCH OGRANICZEŃ, DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI SPRZEDAWALNOŚCI, PRZYDATNOŚCI DO OKREŚLONYCH CELÓW, NIENARUSZALNOŚCI PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH, PRZEBIEGU G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 49 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 49 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM TRANSAKCJI I PRAKTYK HANDLOWYCH. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia domniemanych gwarancji, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. TERMIN WAŻNOŚCI WSZYSTKICH OKREŚLONYCH I DOMNIEMANYCH GWARANCJI OGRANICZONY JEST DO OKRESU GWARANCYJNEGO. PO ZAKOŃCZENIU TEGO OKRESU ŻADNE GWARANCJE NIE MAJĄ ZASTOSOWANIA. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się ograniczenia okresu ważności gwarancji domniemanych, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. OGRANICZENIA ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI PRAWNEJ ZGODNIE Z POWYŻSZYMI USTALENIAMI, ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚĆ FIRMY INTEL NA MOCY TEJ LUB DOWOLNEJ INNEJ GWARANCJI, OKREŚLONEJ LUB DOMNIEMANEJ, OGRANICZONA JEST DO WYKONANIA NAPRAWY, ZAMIANY LUB ZWROTU KOSZTÓW. W PRZYPADKU NIEDOTRZYMANIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI ZASTOSOWANE ZOSTANĄ TYLKO I WYŁĄCZNIE WYMIENIONE WYŻEJ ŚRODKI. FIRMA INTEL, W MAKSYMALNYM ZAKRESIE DOZWOLONYM PRZEZ PRAWO, NIE PONOSI ODPOWIEDZIALNOŚCI ZA ŻADNE BEZPOŚREDNIE, SZCZEGÓLNE, PRZYPADKOWE LUB WTÓRNE SZKODY WYNIKAJĄCE Z NARUSZENIA WARUNKÓW GWARANCJI LUB INNYCH PRZEPISÓW PRAWNYCH (W TYM, MIĘDZY INNYMI, UTRATĘ ZYSKÓW, PRZERWY W PRACY, SPADEK WARTOŚCI PRZEDSIĘBIORSTWA, USZKODZENIE LUB WYMIANĘ SPRZĘTU I MAJĄTKU, ORAZ JAKIEKOLWIEK KOSZTY ZWIĄZANE Z ODZYSKANIEM, PRZEPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB REPRODUKCJĄ DOWOLNEGO PROGRAMU LUB DANYCH PRZECHOWYWANYCH LUB UŻYWANYCH W SYSTEMIE ZAWIERAJĄCYM PRODUKT) NAWET WÓWCZAS, GDY FIRMA INTEL ZOSTAŁA POINFORMOWANA O MOŻLIWOŚCI ZAISTNIENIA TAKICH SZKÓD. W niektórych stanach (lub obszarach podlegających kompetencji sądów) nie dopuszcza się wykluczenia lub ograniczenia przypadkowych lub wtórnych szkód, w związku z czym powyższe ograniczenie może nie dotyczyć danego użytkownika. NINIEJSZA OGRANICZONA GWARANCJA PRZYZNAJE UŻYTKOWNIKOWI SZCZEGÓLNE UPRAWNIENIA, PRZY CZYM UŻYTKOWNIK MOŻE RÓWNIEŻ POSIADAĆ INNE PRAWA W ZALEŻNOŚCI OD STANU LUB OBSZARU SĄDOWNICZEGO. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 50 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 50 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM WSZYSTKIE SPORY WYNIKŁE LUB ZWIĄZANE Z WARUNKAMI NINIEJSZEJ GWARANCJI BĘDĄ ROZSTRZYGANE W SĄDACH ORAZ PODLEGAĆ BĘDĄ NASTĘPUJĄCYM PRZEPISOM PRAWNYM: DLA STANÓW ZJEDNOCZONYCH, KANADY, AMERYKI PÓŁNOCNEJ I POŁUDNIOWEJ OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SANTA CLARA (KALIFORNIA, USA), A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO STANU DELAWARE. DLA KRAJÓW AZJATYCKICH POŁOŻONYCH W REJONIE PACYFIKU (Z WYJĄTKIEM CHIN KONTYNENTALNYCH) OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST SINGAPUR, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO SINGAPURSKIE. DLA EUROPY I RESZTY ŚWIATA OBSZAREM SĄDOWNICZYM JEST LONDYN, A OBOWIĄZUJĄCE PRZEPISY PRAWNE TO PRAWO ANGLII I WALII. W PRZYPADKU ROZBIEŻNOŚCI POMIĘDZY WERSJĄ ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNĄ NINIEJSZEJ OGRANICZONEJ GWARANCJI A DOWOLNĄ INNĄ WERSJĄ STANOWIĄCĄ TŁUMACZENIE (Z WYJĄTKIEM WERSJI PRZETŁUMACZONEJ NA UPROSZCZONY JĘZYK CHIŃSKI), WERSJA ANGIELSKOJĘZYCZNA PEŁNI ROLĘ NADRZĘDNĄ. Ограниченная гарантия «Интел» гарантирует покупателю Изделия (определяемого в настоящем документе как система охлаждения), приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке («Первоначальный покупатель»), а также покупателю компьютерной системы, изготовленной Первоначальным покупателем и содержащей Изделие («Покупатель первоначальной системы»), что при правильной эксплуатации и монтаже Изделие не будет иметь дефектов материалов и качества изготовления и будет, в основном, соответствовать опубликованным спецификациям «Интел» в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения Изделия в его оригинальной запечатанной упаковке применительно к Первоначальному покупателю, или в течение 3 (трех) лет с даты приобретения компьютерной системы, содержащей Изделие применительно к Покупателю первоначальной системы. Если в течение указанного гарантийного срока Изделие, на которое распространяется настоящая Ограниченная гарантия, не будет отвечать вышеуказанным гарантийным требованиям, то «Интел» по своему усмотрению: ОТРЕМОНТИРУЕТ Изделие с применением аппаратных и (или) программных средств; ИЛИ ЗАМЕНИТ Изделие другим изделием, ИЛИ, если «Интел» не сможет отремонтировать или заменить Изделие, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 51 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 51 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM ВОЗМЕСТИТ текущую стоимость Изделия по состоянию на момент предъявления требования о гарантийном обслуживании в соответствии с настоящей Ограниченной гарантией. НАСТОЯЩАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ И ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ СУЩЕСТВОВАТЬ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ПРИМЕНИМЫМИ ЗАКОНАМИ ШТАТОВ, ГОСУДАРСТВ, ПРОВИНЦИЙ ИЛИ МЕСТНЫХ ОРГАНОВ ВЛАСТИ, ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНЫ ТОЛЬКО ДЛЯ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОГО ПОКУПАТЕЛЯ ИЗДЕЛИЯ ИЛИ КОМПЬЮТЕРНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ, И ДЕЙСТВУЮТ ТОЛЬКО ДО ТЕХ ПОР, ПОКА ВЫ ЯВЛЯЕТЕСЬ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЕМ ИЗДЕЛИЯ. ГАРАНТИЙНОЕ ПОКРЫТИЕ УТРАЧИВАЕТ СИЛУ, ЕСЛИ ПОКУПАТЕЛЬ ПЕРВОНАЧАЛЬНОЙ СИСТЕМЫ ПРОДАЕТ ИЛИ ИНЫМ ОБРАЗОМ ПЕРЕДАЕТ КОМПЬЮТЕРНУЮ СИСТЕМУ, ВКЛЮЧАЮЩУЮ ИЗДЕЛИЕ. ВНИМАНИЕ: Изменение тактовой частоты и/или напряжения могут: (i) снизить стабильность и эксплуатационную долговечность системы и процессора; (ii) привести к сбою процессора и других компонентов системы; (iii) снизить рабочие характеристики системы; (iv) привести к дополнительному выделению тепла или иным повреждениям; и (v) повлиять на целостность данных системы. Корпорация Intel не проводила испытаний и не гарантирует работу процессора вне указанных для него спецификаций. Intel не несет ответственности за пригодность процессора для той или иной конкретной цели, в том числе, в случае использования с измененными величинами тактовой частоты и/или напряжения. ОБЪЕМ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ «Интел» не гарантирует, что Изделие не будет иметь мелких конструктивных дефектов или ошибок, известных под названием «errata». Список известных в настоящее время errata предоставляется по запросу. Кроме того, настоящая Ограниченная гарантия НЕ ПОКРЫВАЕТ: • любые расходы, связанные с ремонтом или заменой Изделия, включая оплату труда, монтаж и прочие расходы, понесенные Вами, и, в частности, любые расходы, связанные с удалением или заменой любого Изделия, припаянного или иным способом стационарно прикрепленного к платам печатного монтажа; ИЛИ • повреждение Изделий по внешним причинам, включая аварии, проблемы с электропитанием, ненормальные электрические, механические или внешние воздействия, нарушение правил G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 52 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 52 6/18/2012 2:54:47 PM /18/2012 2:54:47 PM эксплуатации изделия, использование не по назначению, небрежное отношение, переделку, ремонт, нарушение правил монтажа или испытаний; ИЛИ • любое Изделие, подвергнутое изменениям или эксплуатировавшееся с нарушением опубликованных сертификаций «Интел» или с удаленными, измененными или стертыми первоначальными идентификационными маркировками (товарный знак или серийный номер). ПОРЯДОК ОБРАЩЕНИЯ ЗА ГАРАНТИЙНЫМ ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ Для проведения гарантийного обслуживания Изделия (приобретенного в оригинальной запечатанной упаковке или же в составе компьютерной системы) можно связаться с продавцом, у которого было приобретено Изделие, в соответствии с инструкциями этого продавца, или же можно связаться с «Интел». Для затребования гарантийного обслуживания в «Интел» в течение гарантийного периода следует связаться с центром обслуживания клиентов «Интел» (ICS) в вашем регионе в нормальные рабочие часы по местному времени, кроме выходных дней, и вернуть Изделие в указанный центр ICS. (Информация о контактах с центром ICS вашего региона приводится на обратной стороне обложки.) Необходимо подготовить следующую информацию: (1) ваша фамилия, почтовый адрес, адрес электронной почты и номера телефонов; (2) подтверждение покупки; (3) название модели и идентификационный номер, проставленный на Изделии; (4) если применимо, описание компьютерной системы, включая марку и модель; и (5) описание неисправности. В зависимости от характера неисправности, представителю центра ICS может потребоваться дополнительная информация. После того, как центр ICS подтвердит, что Изделие подлежит гарантийному обслуживанию, вам выдадут номер подтверждения на возврат материальных ценностей (RMA) и указания по возврату Изделия в указанный центр ICS. При возврате Изделия в центр ICS необходимо написать номер RMA снаружи на упаковке. «Интел» не принимает никаких возвращаемых Изделий без номера RMA или с недействительным номером RMA на упаковке. Вы должны отправить возвращаемое Изделие в указанный центр ICS в оригинальной или эквивалентной упаковке с оплаченным почтовым сбором и принять на себя риск повреждения или утраты при транспортировке. Расходы по перевозке и/или сбор за обслуживание могут быть взысканы, если продукт, для которого Вы запрашиваете гарантийное обслуживание, был продан не через авторизированного агента по продаже в Вашей стране/регионе. (Для определения G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 53 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 53 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM страны/региона свяжитесь с центром ICS в Вашем регионе или пройдите на страницу www.intel.com/support/ru.) «Интел» по своему усмотрению может отремонтировать или заменить Изделие новым или отремонтированным Изделием или компонентами, в зависимости от того, что «Интел» сочтет целесообразным. Отремонтированное или заменяющее изделие будут отправлены в ваш адрес за счет «Интел» в разумный срок после поступления вашего возвращенного Изделия в центр ICS. После поступления в центр ICS возвращенное Изделие становится собственностью «Интел». Гарантия распространяется на заменяющее изделие в соответствии с условиями настоящей письменной гарантии (с учетом тех же самых ограничений и исключений) на оставшуюся часть первоначального гарантийного срока или на 90 (девяносто) дней, если гарантийный срок истечет раньше. Если «Интел» заменяет Изделие, то срок действия Ограниченной гарантии на заменяющее Изделие не продлевается. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ И ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ИЗ ГАРАНТИИ НАСТОЯЩАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ЗАМЕНЯЕТ СОБОЙ ВСЕ ПРОЧИЕ ГАРАНТИИ НА ИЗДЕЛИЕ И «ИНТЕЛ» ОТКАЗЫВАЕТСЯ ОТ ЛЮБЫХ ДРУГИХ ЯВНЫХ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ, ВКЛЮЧАЯ, БЕЗ ОГРАНИЧЕНИЯ, ЛЮБЫЕ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫЕ ГАРАНТИИ ЛИКВИДНОСТИ, ПРИГОДНОСТИ К ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЮ ПО КОНКРЕТНОМУ НАЗНАЧЕНИЮ, ОТСУТСТВИЯ НАРУШЕНИЙ, ГАРАНТИИ, ВЫТЕКАЮЩИЕ ИЗ ОБЫЧНОЙ ПРАКТИКИ ВЕДЕНИЯ ДЕЛОВЫХ ОПЕРАЦИЙ ИЛИ ТОРГОВЫХ ОБЫЧАЕВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать подразумеваемые гарантии, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. СРОК ДЕЙСТВИЯ ЛЮБЫХ ЯВНЫХ И ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМЫХ ГАРАНТИЙ НЕ ПРЕВЫШАЕТ СРОКА ДЕЙСТВИЯ ДАННОЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ. ПО ИСТЕЧЕНИИ ЭТОГО СРОКА ВСЕ ГАРАНТИИ УТРАЧИВАЮТ СИЛУ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают ограничивать срок действия подразумеваемых гарантий, так что это ограничение может не распространяться на вас. ОГРАНИЧЕНИЕ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТЬ «ИНТЕЛ» ПО НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ ЛЮБОЙ ДРУГОЙ ЯВНОЙ ИЛИ ПОДРАЗУМЕВАЕМОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ОГРАНИЧИВАЕТСЯ РЕМОНТОМ, ЗАМЕНОЙ ИЛИ ВОЗВРАЩЕНИЕМ СТОИМОСТИ, КАК УКАЗАНО ВЫШЕ. ЭТИ СРЕДСТВА ЗАЩИТЫ ЯВЛЯЮТСЯ ЕДИНСТВЕННЫМИ И ИСКЛЮЧИТЕЛЬНЫМИ СРЕДСТВАМИ ЗАЩИТЫ ПРИ ЛЮБОМ НАРУШЕНИИ ГАРАНТИИ. В МАКСИМАЛЬНОМ ОБЪЕМЕ, ДОПУСТИМОМ ПО ЗАКОНУ, «ИНТЕЛ» НЕ НЕСЕТ ОТВЕТСТВЕННОСТИ ЗА ЛЮБЫЕ ПРЯМЫЕ, G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 54 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 54 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM ОСОБЫЕ, ПОБОЧНЫЕ ИЛИ КОСВЕННЫЕ УБЫТКИ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ В РЕЗУЛЬТАТЕ НАРУШЕНИЯ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЛЮБЫМИ ДРУГИМИ ПРАВОВЫМИ ТЕОРИЯМИ (ВКЛЮЧАЯ, ПОМИМО ПРОЧЕГО, УПУЩЕННУЮ ВЫГОДУ, ПРОСТОИ, ПОТЕРЮ РЕПУТАЦИИ, ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ИЛИ ЗАМЕНУ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ И ИМУЩЕСТВА, А ТАКЖЕ ЛЮБЫЕ ЗАТРАТЫ НА ВОССТАНОВЛЕНИЕ, ПЕРЕПРОГРАММИРОВАНИЕ ИЛИ ВОСПРОИЗВЕДЕНИЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОГРАММ ИЛИ ДАННЫХ, ХРАНЯЩИХСЯ ИЛИ ИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ В СИСТЕМЕ, СОДЕРЖАЩЕЙ ИЗДЕЛИЕ), ДАЖЕ В ТОМ СЛУЧАЕ, ЕСЛИ «ИНТЕЛ» БЫЛ ИНФОРМИРОВАН О ВОЗМОЖНОСТИ ТАКИХ УБЫТКОВ. Некоторые штаты (или юрисдикции) не разрешают исключать или ограничивать побочные или косвенные убытки, так что вышеописанные исключения и ограничения могут не распространяться на вас. ДАННАЯ ОГРАНИЧЕННАЯ ГАРАНТИЯ ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТ ВАМ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ ЮРИДИЧЕСКИЕ ПРАВА, И ВЫ ТАКЖЕ МОЖЕТЕ ИМЕТЬ ДРУГИЕ ПРАВА, КОТОРЫЕ МОГУТ БЫТЬ РАЗЛИЧНЫМИ В РАЗНЫХ ШТАТАХ ИЛИ ЮРИСДИКЦИЯХ. ЛЮБЫЕ СПОРЫ, ВОЗНИКАЮЩИЕ НА ОСНОВАНИИ ДАННОГО ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ ИЛИ В СВЯЗИ С НЕЙ, ПОДЛЕЖАТ РАЗРЕШЕНИЮ В НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫХ МЕСТАХ И В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С НИЖЕУКАЗАННЫМИ НОРМАМИ ПРАВА: ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К СОЕДИНЕННЫМ ШТАТАМ АМЕРИКИ, КАНАДЕ, СЕВЕРНОЙ И ЮЖНОЙ АМЕРИКЕ РАЗРЕШЕНИЕ СПОРОВ ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. САНТА-КЛАРА (КАЛИФОРНИЯ, США) В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ ШТАТА ДЕЛАВЭР. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К АЗИАТСКО-ТИХООКЕАНСКОМУ РЕГИОНУ (КРОМЕ КИТАЙСКОЙ НАРОДНОЙ РЕСПУБЛИКИ) РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В Г. СИНГАПУР В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ СИНГАПУРА. ПРИМЕНИТЕЛЬНО К ЕВРОПЕ И ОСТАЛЬНЫМ ЧАСТЯМ МИРА РАЗБИРАТЕЛЬСТВО ПРОВОДИТСЯ В ЛОНДОНЕ В СООТВЕТСТВИИ С ЗАКОНОДАТЕЛЬСТВОМ АНГЛИИ И УЭЛЬСА. В СЛУЧАЕ ЛЮБЫХ ПРОТИВОРЕЧИЙ МЕЖДУ АНГЛИЙСКИМ ТЕКСТОМ НАСТОЯЩЕЙ ОГРАНИЧЕННОЙ ГАРАНТИИ И ЕЕ ТЕКСТАМИ, ПЕРЕВЕДЕННЫМИ НА ДРУГИЕ ЯЗЫКИ (ЗА ИСКЛЮЧЕНИЕМ ПЕРЕВОДА НА УПРОЩЕННЫЙ КИТАЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК), ТЕКСТ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ ИМЕЕТ ПРЕИМУЩЕСТВЕННУЮ СИЛУ. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 55 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 55 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 有限售後保證 Intel 謹向原封包裝的「本產品」（在此定義為散熱解決方案）之購 買人（稱 為「原購買人」）以及原購買人建造的包含本產品之電腦系統的購買人（下稱 「原系統顧客」）保證 ：「本產品」若在正常使用和正確安裝的情況之下，絕 無任何 材料和工藝上的瑕疵，且原廠密封包裝內的「本產品」，將自購買日起 三 (3) 年之內完全 符合 Intel 所公布的現用規格。本「有限售後保證」僅當以 Intel 微處理器對「本產品」加以評估之後方能生效，而上述三 (3) 年保證期始於 原購買人購買原封包裝的本產品之日或原系統顧客購買包含本產品的電腦系統 之日。若此「有限售後保證」保證之本產品在保證期限內未能符合上述保證條 件，Intel 將有權決定： 利用硬體及/或軟體修理「本產品」；或者 以其他產品更換「本產品」；或者在 Intel 無法修理或更換產品時， 根據本「有限售後保證」條款向 Intel 要求售後保證服務當時的現值退還「本 產品」。 本「有限售後保證」以及任何適用州立、聯邦、省立或當地法律規定之下的任 何暗示性 保證、僅適用於作為「本產品」原購買人的您本人或包含本產品的電 腦系統之原購買人，並且僅在該原購買人擁有本產品期間有效。倘若原系統顧 客出售或以其他方式轉讓包含本產品之電腦系統，本保證即告終止。 警告: 更改時脈頻率和／或電壓可能會：(i) 減少系統穩定性以及系統和處理器 的使用年限；(ii) 造成處理器和其他系統元件故障；(iii) 造成系統效能降低；(iv) 造成額外熱度或其他損壞；以及 (v) 影響系統資料完整性。Intel 並未測試且不 保證處理器在其規格以外的操作。有關記憶體針對任何特定用途（包括搭配更 改的時脈頻率和／或電壓時）之適用性，Intel 概不負責。 有限售後保證適用範圍 Intel 並不保證「本產品」在設計上完全沒有所稱「勘誤」的瑕疵或錯誤。歡迎 索取參閱 目前提供的問題特徵說明勘誤表。再者，本「有限售後保證」並不涵 蓋下列幾項： • 由於修理或更換「本產品」而產生的任何花費，包括人工、安裝或您所導 致的其他 開銷，且特別是與取下或更換焊接或永久附加在任何印刷電路板 之上的任何產品的 任何花費 ; 或者 • 由於包括意外、電力故障問題、異常的電氣、機械或環境狀況的外在因 素，未根據產品使用說明的不當使用、濫用、疏失、改裝、修理、不當的 安裝或不當 的測試，而對「本產品」造成損壞 ; 或者 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 56 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 56 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM • 未依照 Intel 所公布的現用規格而將任何產品加以修改或操作，或是將原產 品識 別標誌( 商標或序號 )撕下、變造或銷毀。 如何取得售後保證服務 若要取得「本產品」的售後保證服務（無論是原封包裝購買的產品還是包含在 電腦系統內的產品)，請根據指示向您的原購買地洽詢或與 Intel 取得聯繫。 若要向 Intel 要求售後保證服務, 您必須在保證期限之內在正常營業時間（當地 時間，但例假日除外) 與您當地的「Intel 客戶支援中心」 (ICS) 聯絡，並將「本 產品」退還給指定的「客戶支援中心」。（請參看封底載列的當地「客戶支援 中心」聯絡方法。）請先備妥下列資料：(1) 您的姓名、郵寄地址、電子郵件 位址以及電話號碼；(2)「本產品]的購買證明；(3)「本產品]機型名稱和識別標 誌；(4) 關於電腦系統的說明（若適用），包括品牌和型號；以及 (5) 有關故障 或問題的詳細說明。根據問題的本質而定，「客戶支援中心」代表可能會要求 您提供額外的資訊。 在「客戶支援中心」確認您的產品仍在維修保固期間內之後，「客戶支援中 心」會給您 一個退貨授權 (RMA) 號碼，並指示您如何將產品退回指定的「客 戶支援中心」。將產品 退回「客戶支援中心」時，必須將 RMA 號碼標示在外 包裝上。Intel 不受理外包裝上沒有標示 RMA 號碼，或標示無效 RMA 號碼的 退回產品。請務必將退回產品以原包裝或同等的包裝方式運送到指定的「客戶 支援中心」，您必須預付運費，同時自負運送時損壞或遺失的風險。如果您的 產品不是向貴國/區域的授權經銷商購買，要求維修保固服務時，可能需要支付 運費及（或）處理費。（有關國家/區域的定義，請聯絡您的區域「客戶支援中 心」，或請造訪 www.intel.com/support。） Intel 有權選擇在適當的情況之下，以全新或翻新的產品或組件來修理或更換 「本產品」。Intel 的「客戶支援中心」收到退還的產品之後，在合理的時限之 內，將已付運費的修理或更換產品送還給您。「客戶支援中心」收到的退還產 品將成為 Intel 的財產。根據本書面售後保證，更換產品將享有九十 (90) 天的售 後保證期限或仍適用原售後保證期限，以兩者中較長的效期為準，並受相同的 限制與排除條款的約束。如果 Intel 決定更換「本產品」，將不會延長更換產品 的「有限售後保證」期限。 售後保證限制與排除條款 本售後保證將取代「本產品」的其他所有擔保，且 INTEL 否認其他所有無論 明示或暗示性的保證，包括但不限於適銷性、符合特定目的、不侵權、進行 交易買賣與商業慣列的暗示性保證。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許排除暗 示性保證，因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。所有明示與暗示的保證 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 57 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 57 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 僅限於在本「有限售後保證」的期限之內有效。保證期限之後將無任何保證 適用。某些州（或行政轄區）並不允許對暗示性保證的有效期限加以限制， 因此您可能無需受到本限制條款的約束。 責任限制 根據本售後保證或無論暗示或明示的其他任何保證之規定，INTEL 的全部責任僅 限於前文中 所述之修理、更換或退款。這些是違反擔保條件之唯一且獨有的補 救辦法。在合法的最大限度之下，無論是由於任何違反擔保條件的情況，或根據 其任何法律理論之規定，對於任何直接、特殊、偶發或後續性的損壞（包括但不 限於商業利益、服務中斷、商業信譽所導致的損失、設備與財產的損壞或更換， 以及為了恢復、重新編程或再製包含「本產品」的系統中儲存或使用的任何程式 或資料而產生的任何花費），即使 INTEL 事先已被告知此類損壞的可能性，INTEL 概不負責。某些州並不允排除或限制偶發或後續性的損壞賠償，因此您可能無需 受到上述限制或排除條款的約束。 本「有限售後保證」賦予您某些特定的合法權利，且根據各州或行政轄區之不同法 規，您還可能享有其他的權利。 根據本「有限售後保證」所引發的或其相關的任何及所有爭議，皆應接受下列法庭 的裁決，並應受下列法律規定之約束：對於美國、加拿大、北美和南美洲地區，應為 美國加州聖塔克 拉拉縣法庭，且應適用德拉瓦州法律。對於亞太地區（中國大陸除 外），應為新加坡法庭，且應適用新加坡法律。對於歐洲及世界其他地區，應為倫敦 法庭，且應適用英國及威爾斯等地的法律。 一旦本「有限售後保證」英文版與其他任何譯文版本（簡體中文版除外）產生任何抵 觸，則應以英文版為依據標準。 有限质保条款 仅适用于在中国大陆销售之英特尔® 散热装置英特尔有限公司 (Intel Semiconductor Ltd.)（下称“英特尔”）向原始包装产品（指英特尔® 散热装 置）之购买者（原始购买者）以及包含本产品并由原始购买者组装的计算 机 系统的购买者（原始系统购买者）担保：本产品如正确安装和使用，三 (3) 年（下称“质保期”）内将不存在材料和工艺上之缺陷，且实质性符合 英特尔公开的产品规格。对于原始购买者来说，该质保期起始于原始包装 产品购买日，对于原始系统购买者来说，该质保期起始于包含该产品的计 算机系统的购买日，以原始正式销售发票为据（不论该产品是作为组件而 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 58 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 58 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 单独购买，或是作为计算机系统的一部分购买），并包括任何及所有更换 产品的质保期。在任何情况下，产品及其更换产品的质保期总计 不超过三 (3) 年。 第一年有限质保 若在本有效质保下的产品自购买日起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之 规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生在 上述 12 个月之内，原产品将被更换为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品 （下称“第一次更换”）。若第一次更换后的产品自更换之日起 12 个月 内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明 该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第一次更换的 12 个月内，该产品将更换 为功能上相同或实质上等同的新产品（下称“第二次更换”）。若第二次 更换的产品在第二次更换后起 12 个月内不符合本有限质保条款之规定而 无法正常工作，如您提供充足证据证明该产品无法正常工作发生于上述第 二次更换的 12 个月内，您将被退还产品原始正式发票上记载之购买价款 （不包括税赋、运费、发票上记载的处理费或类似费用）。 您必须在上述期间内主张第一年质保服务。如您在质保期第一年后要求第 一年质保 服务，您必须提供充足证据证明产品无法正常工作发生于上述期 间内。 如产品无法正常工作发生于有限质保期的第一年内，上述救济措施是您唯 一的和全部的救济措施。 剩余期间有限质保 如在本有限质保条款下之产品于在三年质保期的剩余期间内（下称“剩余 质保期”）不符合本有限质保条款之规定而无法正常工作，英特尔可选 择： 通过硬件和／或软件修理该产品；或 以另一产品更换该产品；或 在英特尔不能修理或更换该产品的情况下，向您退还您根据本有限质保条款主 张质保服务 当时与该产品价值等值之金额。 如英特尔认为适当，其可以选择用全新或翻修的产品或者部件更换或修理产 品。此类更换之产品或部件同样受本有限质保条款所涵盖，并在九十日内或者 本有限质保条款的剩余期限内（以较长时间者为准）受相同之限制和免责条款 约束。产品或部件之更换不延长有限质保期。剩余质保期将按比例计算，取决 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 59 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 59 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 于截至您主张质保服务时，您拥有产品（包括任何有限质保期第一年内所更换 之产品）的时间。 如产品无法正常工作发生于剩余质保期内，上述救济措施是您唯一的和全部的 救济措施。 警告: 更改时钟频率和／或电压可：(i) 降低系统可靠性并缩短系统和处理 器的使用寿命；(ii) 导致处理器及其它系统组件发生故障；(iii) 导致系统性能 下降；(iv) 导致过量发热或其它损害；并且 (v) 影响系统数据完整性。英特 尔尚未对处理器在其规格以外的操作进行测试，因此不提供任何担保。有 关处理器针对任何特定用途的适用性，包括用于更改时钟频率和／或电压 的应用场合，英特尔概不承担任何责任。 有限质保的一般性条款 英特尔需要合理期间修理产品、更换产品或退款；英特尔在其客户支持中心收 到您退还的 产品后需要在一段的合理时间内自行承担费用寄回修理或者更换的 产品。质保期内提供的 任何更换产品属于上述有限质保条款质保范围，并受相 同的限制和免责条款约束。您退还 之产品一经英特尔接收即属于英特尔之财 产。 本有限质保及任何由中国大陆法律法规规定可能存在的默示担保，您只有作为本 产品或含本产品之计算机系统的原始购买者方可享有，并且只在您拥有该产品期 间内有效。如原始系统购买者出售或以其他方式转让该产品或含该产品之计算机 系统，则本有限质保即告终止。 有限质保范围 本有限质保条款仅在中国大陆有效。若您已收到退还价款或本有限质保期 届满，本有限质保条款项下之任何权利将随之终止。 英特尔并不保证本产品不存在设计上的缺陷或称为“勘误”(Errata) 之误 差。如有 要求可向您提供当前业已识别之勘误。本有限质保条款的保障范 围不包括与修理、更换相关的包括劳动力，安装的费用，以及其他因您而 引起的费用，特别是因移除或更换已焊接或用其他方法永久固定于您的集 成电路板上的产品所发生的费用。 本有限质保条款的不适用于因外在因素造成的损坏，包括但不限于意外事 故、电力 故障、异常供电、机械或者环境情形下之使用、未按产品使用指示 之使用、不当 使用、疏忽、改装、由未经英特尔授权之修理人修理、不当安 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 60 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 60 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 装、不当测试、不可 抗力、使用盗版软件、感染计算机病毒或由未经英特尔 适当授权的维修商不当处理。 下列情况下本有限质保条款不适用：(1) 缺少原始正式发票或无效三包凭 证，能提供足够证据的除外；(2) 未经授权之更换、伪造或者其它与三包 凭证或发票有关之欺诈行为；(3) 无能够表明生产商姓名、地址、生产日 期及产品质量保证书之有关资料或文件；(4) 主张质保服务产品之序列号 与原始三包凭证或发票上的资料不一致。 三包凭证 您必须在销售商处获得并且保存产品的原始三包凭证作为您购买产品的证 据。销售商应当填写该三包凭证，加盖其公章并且在您购买产品时提供给 您。您必须保留销售商提供的原始正式发票，当您主张质保服务时凭此发 票连同三包凭证一起作为购买产品的凭证。原始正式发票必须涵盖法律要 求的所有信息，包括但不限于商标、产品序列号、购买日期、购买价格， 并加盖销售商印章。质保期内如发生任何更换或退款情形，产品销售商或 英特尔客户服务代表（视情形而定）将会更新您的三包凭证。 如何获得质保服务 有限质保第一年内如需获得质保服务，请携带原始发票以及三包凭证并根 据其指示与原始销售商联系。如原始销售商已停业或质保期第一年已届 满，为获得英特尔质保服务，您必须将产品 （指英特尔® 散热装置）退还 至指定的英特尔客户支持中心。在您退还产品之前，请在质保期内，于节 假日除外的正常上班时间（当地时间），拨打 800-820-1100 与英特尔客 户支持中心就中国大陆销售之产品进行联系并将产品（盒装英特尔® 处理 器及附带之散热装置）返还于指定的英特尔 客户服务中心。致电时请准备 提供下列资料：(1) 您的姓名、邮寄地址，电子信箱和电话号码；(2) 购买凭 证，包括原始发票和原始三包凭证；(3) 产品上注明的产品标 识号；(4) 在 可以的情况下，计算机系统情况，包括品牌和型号；以及 (5) 故障情况。英 特尔客户服务代表可能会根据故障性质要求您提供其他资料。 如英特尔客户支持中心确认产品符合质保服务之要求，您将获得一个退还 确认号 （“确认号”）以及被指示将产品返还于指定的英特尔客户支持中 心。当您将产品退还至指定的英特尔客户支持中心时，您必须在外包装上 写明确认号。英特尔将 不接受任何无确认号或包含无效确认号的退还产 品。退还的产品须用原始包装或 同等包装，交付指定的英特尔客户支持中 心，并由您承担运输过程中损坏或丢失的风险。本有限质保条款承诺之服 务将由英特尔或英特尔授权代表履行。如果您索取质保服务的产品不是通 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 61 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 61 6/18/2012 2:54:48 PM /18/2012 2:54:48 PM 过贵国／地区的授权经销商销售的，可能会收取运费和／或处理费。（有 关国家／地区的特定详情，请与您所在地区的英特尔客户支持中心 联系， 或访问 www.intel.com/support。） 质保限制及免责条款 本有限质保条款取代英特尔就在中国大陆销售的产品所作出的所有其他 质保（无论以何种形式或媒介）。英特尔特此声明不承担所有其他明示 或默示的担保，包括但不限于，关乎适销性和符合某一特定用途，业务 惯例和贸易惯例的默示担保。所有明示或默示的担保只在有限质保期内 有效，质保期届满，所有担保即告终止。 赔偿责任范围 英特尔根据本担保或任何其他明示或默示担保而需承担的责任只限于上 文所述的 修理、更换或退款。此等补救措施是针对违反担保责任的唯一 和全部的救济措施。在中国法律允许的最大范围内，英特尔无需为违反 担保或基于任何其他法理而导 致的任何直接、特殊、附带或伴随的损失 承担责任，该等损失包括但不限于利润 损失、停工损失、商誉影响、设 备与财产的损害或更换、以及任何为复原、重写 或复制任何存储于或使 用于包含产品的系统内的程序或数据而引致的费用。即使 英特尔已经知 晓发生此类损害的可能性。 因本有限质保条款引起的或与本有限质保条款有关的所有任何争议，均受 中华人民 共和国法律管辖。 本有限质保条款担保之产品已通过英特尔质量认证体系。 품질 보증 Intel은 최초 봉인 포장된 상태의 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉된 감열 부품)의 구매자(“원 구매자”)와 원 구매자가 제품을 설치한 컴퓨터 시 스템의 구매자(“원 시스템 고객”)에 대해 다음과 같이 보증합니다: 제품이 정상적으로 작동되고 설치되는 한, 재료와 생산 기술에 있어 어떠한 결함 도 없으며, 원 구매자의 경우 제품을 최초 봉인된 포장 상태로 구매한 시점 으로부터 3년간, 그리고 원 시스템 고객의 경우 제품이 설치되어 있는 컴퓨 터 시스템을 구매한 시점으로부터 3년간, 제품이 Intel이 공표한 사양에 실질 적으로 부합할 것임을 보증합니다. 본 품질 보증에서 보증하는 제품이 보 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 62 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 62 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 증 기간에 내에 위에 언급된 보증사항에 부합하지 않는 경우, Intel은 자신의 선택에 따라 다음과 같은 조치를 취할 수 있습니다. 하드웨어 및/또는 소프트웨어로 제품을 수리한다. 또는 제품을 다른 제품과 교체한다. 또는 Intel이 제품을 수리하거나 교체할 수 없는 경우, 본 품질 보증에 근거하여 Intel에 보증서비스 요청을 한 당시의 해당 제품의 현재가치 만큼을 환불 한다 . 본 품질 보증 및 해당 주, 국가, 지역 또는 지방 자치단체의 법률에 근거한 어 떠한 묵시적 보증 내용도 본 제품 또는 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템의 원 구매자에게만 적용되며 구매자가 제품을 소유하고 있는 동안에만 유효합니 다. 원 시스템 고객이 본 제품이 설치된 컴퓨터 시스템을 팔거나 다른 방법으 로 양도한 경우, 본 보증은 종료됩니다. 경고: 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경하면 (i) 시스템의 안정성과 시스템 및 프로세서의 가용 수명이 줄어들고, (ii) 프로세서 및 기타 시스템 부품에 고장이 발생하고, (iii) 시스템 성능이 떨어지고, (iv) 과열 또는 기타 손상이 발생하고, (v) 시스템 데이터 무결성에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. 인텔은 사양을 초과한 환 경에서 프로세서의 작동을 테스트하지 않았으며, 그 작동을 보증하지 않습니 다. 인텔은 프로세서가 모든 목적에 적합할 것임을 보증하지 않으며, 여기에 는 클럭 주파수 및/또는 전압을 변경해서 사용하는 경우가 포함됩니다. 보증의 범위 Intel은 제품에 설계 결함이나 “errata”라고 알려진 오류가 없다는 것을 보증하 지 않습니다. 최신 errata 리스트는 사용자의 요청에 따라 제공됩니다. 또한, 본 품질 보증은 다음의 경우에는 적용되지 않습니다. • 제품의 수리 또는 교체와 관련하여 구매자가 지출하는 인건비, 설치비 또 는 기타 비용으로서, 특히 인쇄 회로 기판에 결합되거나 다른 방법으로 영 구 부착된 제품을 제거 또는 교체함으로 인해 발생되는 비용. 또는, • 사고, 전원 불량, 비정상적인 전기, 기계 또는 환경 조건, 제품 사용 설명 서를 준수하지 않은 사용, 오용, 부주의, 변경, 수리, 부적절한 설치 또는 부적절한 시험 등의 외부적인 요인으로 발생된 제품 손상. 또는, • Intel이 공표한 사양의 범주를 벗어야 수정 또는 작동되거나, 원 제품의 식 별 표시(상표 또는 일련 번호)가 제거, 변경 또는 삭제된 제품. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 63 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 63 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 (최초 봉인된 포장 상태 또는 컴퓨터 시스템의 일부로 구입한) 본 제품의 품질 보증 서비스를 받으려면 설명서에 따라 원 구입처에 문의하거나 Intel사에 문 의하면 됩니다. Intel에게 품질 보증 서비스를 요청하려면 보증 기간 내의 공휴일을 제외한 정 상영업시간(지역시간) 중에 해당 지역의 Intel고객 지원(ICS) 센터에 연결한 후, 지정된 ICS 센터에 제품(박스 포장된 Intel® 프로세서 및 동봉 감열 부품)을 반품 해야 합니다. (해당 지역의 ICS에 문의하는 방법은, 뒷면을 참조하십시오.) 서 비스 요청자는 다음의 정보를 제공해야 합니다: (1) 이름, 주소, 전자우편 주소 및 전화 번호. (2) 구입 증명서류, (3) 제품의 모델명과 제품 식별 번호, (4) 해당 되는 경우, 상표 및 모델을 포함한 컴퓨터 시스템 정보 및 (5) 제품의 문제점 설 명. ICS 담당자는 문제점의 성격에 따라 추가적인 정보를 요청할 수 있습니다. ICS에서 제품이 보증 서비스를 받을 수 있는 것으로 확인되었을 경우, 사용자 에게는 반환제품 승인(“RMA”)번호가 부여되고 제품을 지정된 ICS 센터로 반환 하는 지침이 제공됩니다. 제품을 ICS 센터로 반환할 때는 포장 외부에 RMA 번 호를 명시해야 합니다. 인텔은 제품 포장에 RMA 번호가 없거나 유효하지 않은 번호로 표시되어 반환된 제품은 받지 않습니다. 제품을 원래의 포장 또는 이 와 동등한 상태로 포장해서 운송료를 선불로 지급하여 지정된 ICS 센터로 보 내야 하며, 운송 중에 파손이나 분실이 발생할 수 있음을 감안해야 합니다. 사 용자가 보증 서비스를 요청하는 제품이 사용자의 거주 국가/지역의 공인 배급 업체를 통해 판매된 제품이 아닌 경우 운송료 및/또는 취급 수수료가 부과될 수 있습니다. (국가/지역에 대한 명확한 규정은 거주 지역의 ICS센터에 문의하 시거나 www.intel.com/support를 방문하십시오.) Intel은 자신이 적절하다고 판단하는 바에 따라 제품을 수리하거나, 신품 또는 중고 제품이나 부품으로 교체하여 줄 수 있습니다. 수리되거나 교체된 제품은 ICS가 제품을 수령한 후 합리적인 기간 내에 Intel의 비용부담으로 귀하에게 발 송됩니다. 반품된 제품은 ICS가 수령한 시점부터 Intel의 재산으로 간주됩니다. 교체된 제품은 90일 또는 본 품질 보증의 남은 기간 중 더 긴 기간 동안 본 품 질 보증에 근거하여 품질이 보증되며, 동일한 제한 및 제외사항이 적용됩니 다. Intel이 제품을 교체하여 준 경우 교체된 제품의 품질 보증 기간은 연장되 지 않습니다. 품질 보증의 제한과 제외 사항 본 품질 보증은 제품에 대한 다른 모든 보증에 우선하며, Intel은 상업상의 묵시적 보증, 특정 목적에의 적합성, 비침해, 거래 과정 및 거래 용도 등을 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 64 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 64 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 포함하여 모든 명시적 또는 묵시적인 기타의 보증을 배제합니다. 묵시적 인 품질 보증을 제외하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서 는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 모든 명시적 및 묵시적인 보 증은 보증기간만으로 제한됩니다. 그 기간 이후에는 어떠한 품질 보증도 적 용되지 않습니다. 묵시적 보증기간을 한정하는 것을 허용하지 않는 일부 주 (또는 관할지역)에서는 이러한 제한이 적용되지 않을 수 있습니다. 책임의 제한 본 품질 보증이나 기타 묵시적 또는 명시적인 보증에 따른 Intel의 책임은 위에서 명시한 바와 같이 수리, 교체 또는 환불만으로 제한됩니다. 이러한 구제 조치는 품질 보증의 위반에 대한 유일하고 배타적인 구제책입니다. 법이 허용하는 최 대한의 범위 내에서 Intel은 품질 보증의 위반으로 인해 발생하거나 또는 기타 법 이론(일실수익, 업무 중단, 영업권, 장비 및 재산에 대한 손해 또는 장비 및 재산 의 교체, 그리고 제품에 포함된 시스템에 저장되거나 이와 함께 사용되는 프로 그램이나 데이터의 복구, 리프로그래밍 또는 복제 비용을 포함하나 이에 한하지 않음)에 따라 인정도는 직접손해, 특별손해, 부수적이거나 결과적인 손해에 관 하여 비록 Intel이 그와 같은 손해의 가능성에 관해 통보 받았다고 하더라도 책임 을 지지 않습니다. 부수적 손해 또는 결과적 손해의 배제 또는 제한을 허용하지 않은 일부 주(또는 관할지역)에서는 위 제한이나 배제가 적용되지 않을 수 있습 니다. 본 품질 보증은 특별한 법률상의 권리를 부여하며, 주 또는 관할지역에 따라 서는 기타의 권리가 부여될 수도 있습니다. 본 품질 보증으로부터 또는 그와 관련하여 발생하는 모든 분쟁은 다음의 법원 에 의해 판단되고 다음의 법률에 의해 규율됩니다. 미합중국, 캐나다, 북미 및 남미 지역의 경우 법정지는 미국 캘리포니아주 산타 클라라이며 델라웨어주 법률이 적용법이 됩니다. 아시아 태평양 지역(중국 본토는 제외)에서의 법정 지는 싱가폴이며 싱가폴 법률이 적용됩니다. 유럽 및 기타 지역에서의 법정지 는 런던이며 잉글랜드와 웨일즈의 법률이 적용됩니다. 본 품질 보증서의 영문본과 외국어 번역본 간에 상충되는 부분이 있는 경우 (중국어 간체는 제외), 영문본이 우선합니다. 製品保証 インテルは、封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品（以下、「ボックス版 インテル® プロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション」という）の購入者 （以下、「最初の購入者」）、および最初の購入者が本製品を用いて組み立てたコ G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 65 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 65 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM ンピュータシステムの購入者（以下、「最初のシステム購入者」）に対して次のよう に保証します。本製品が正しくインストールされた場合、最初の購入者が封印され たオリジナルパッケージに入った本製品を購入した日から3 年間、および最初の システム購入者が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを購入した日から3年 間において、材料と製造工程に欠陥がなく、インテルが公表している製品使用に 十分適合することを保証します。本製品保証の対象品が保証期間中に前述の保 証内容が満たされないことがあれば、インテルは独自の判断で以下のいずれか のひとつを行います。 修理 ： 本製品のハードウェアおよびソフトウェアの一方または双方を修理/修 復する。 交換 ： 本製品を別の製品と交換する。 返金 ： 本保証の元でインテルに保証サービスが申請された時点における製品 価値に対 する妥当な金額を返済する（インテルが製品の修理、交換ができな い場合）。 本製品保証、ならびに国、州および地方の適用法の下に存在する黙示の保証は、 本製品の最初の購入者または本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムの最初の 購入者が製品を所有している期間に限り適用されます。最初のシステム購入者 が本製品を内蔵したコンピュータシステムを売却するか、あるいは委譲した時点 で保証期間は終了します。 警告: クロック周波数や電圧を変更すると、(i) システムの安定性ならびにシステム とプロセッサーの耐用年数の低下、(ii) プロセッサーや他のシステム・コンポーネ ントの故障、(iii) システム性能の低下、(iv) 温度の上昇やその他の損傷、(v) システ ム・データの整合性への影響が起きるおそれがあります。インテルでは、仕様の枠 を超えたプロセッサーの動作についてはテストしておらず、保証いたしません。イ ンテルでは、クロック周波数や電圧を変更した場合を含め、プロセッサーの特定 目的への適合については一切責任を負いません。 製品保証の範囲 インテルは、本製品に「エラッタ」（不具合）と呼ばれる設計上の欠陥またはエラ ーがないことを保証してはいません。ご要望に応じて、現在判明されているエラ ッタの情報を参照することができます。また、本製品保証は以下の内容について は保証していません。 • 人件費、インストール費、購入者に起因する費用など、製品の修理や交換に関 連する費用、および特にはんだ付けされた製品または印刷された回路盤に恒 久的に取り付けられた製品の取り外しまたは交換に関連する費用。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 66 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 66 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM • 事故、電力の問題、電気状態の異常、機械状態の異常、環境状態の異常、製品 の使用方法に従わない使用の仕方、誤用、怠慢、改造、修理、不適切なインスト ール、不適切なテストなど、外部からの原因による製品の損傷。 • 改造された製品、公表されているインテルの製品仕様の範囲外で使用された 製品、オリジナルのIDマーク（商標あるいはシリアル番号）が除去された、改変 された、または消されている製品。 保証サービスの受け方 本製品（封印されたオリジナルパッケージに入った製品として購入、あるいはコン ピュータシステムの一部として購入）の保証サービスを受けるためには、まず使 用説明書に従って最初の購入先、またはインテルに連絡してください。 インテルから保証サービスを受ける場合は、保証期間内であることが必要で、 休日を除く通常の営業時間内に最寄りのインテルカスタマーサポート（以下、 「ICS」）センターに連絡し、指定されたICSセンターに製品（ボックス版インテル®プ ロセッサおよび付随するサーマルソリューション）を返送します（最寄りのICSセン ターへの連絡方法は、裏表紙をご覧ください）。連絡する際は、(１)お名前、ご住 所、Eメールアドレス、電話番号、(２)購入を証明するもの、(３)製品に記されている 製品名と製品ID番号、(４)コンピュータシステムのメーカー名、製品名を含む説明 （該当する場合）、および(5)不具合の説明をお手元にご用意ください。不具合の 内容によっては、ICS担当者がさらに情報を必要とする場合があります。 ICSにより製品が保証サービスの対象であることが確認されると、Return Material Authorization (RMA)[返品許可]番号が発行され、製品を所定のICSセンターまで返 品するための手順と共に送付されます。ICSセンターに製品を返品する場合は、パ ッケージの外側に必ずRMA(返品許可)番号を記載してください。インテルでは、 パッケージの外側にRMA番号がない場合や、RMA番号が記載されていても無効 な場合、返品を受け付けませんのでご注意ください。製品を返品する際は、購入 当初のパッケージまたはそれに準ずるものを使用し、所定のICSセンターまで、送 料前払いで お送りください。輸送中に破損または紛失した場合はお客様の負担 となります。保証サービスを請求される製品が、お住まいの国/地域の正規の代 理店を通して販売されたものでない場合は、送料および/または手数料を負担し ていただく場合があります。（国/地域の定義については、最寄のICSセンターに お問い合わせになるか、 www.intel.com/supportをご覧ください。） インテルは、製品を修理するか、新品または再生された製品/コンポーネントと交 換するかを独自の判断で決定します。ICSが返送された製品を受け取った後、修理 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 67 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 67 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM された製品または交換品は、インテルの送料負担により適切な期間内にお送りい たします。返送された製品はICSが受領した時点でインテルの所有物となります。 交換品は本保証と同じ限定条件および除外条件の下で、90日または元の保障期 間の残存期間のいずれか長い期間保証されます。製品を交換した場合、交換品 に対する本製品保証の期間を延長することはありません。 保証の制限および保証対象外 本保証は、本製品に対する他の全ての保証に代わって適用されます。すなわ ちインテルは、商品性、特定の目的に対する適合性、非侵害、取引過程および 商習慣に関する黙示の保証を含む（ただしこれらに限らず）、他の一切の明 示または黙示の保証をいたしません。尚、黙示の保証の除外を認めない国ま たは地域では、この制限は適用されない場合があります。全ての明示および 黙示の保証は、この製品保証期間に限定されています。この期間経過後は、 保証が適用されません。黙示の保証期間の除外を認めない国または地域で は、この制限は適用されない場合があります。 責任の限度 本保証もしくは明示あるいは黙示の他の保証におけるインテルの責任は、前 述の修理、交換、返金に限定されます。これらは保証が守られなかった場合 の唯一の救済措置であり、他に救済措置はありません。法律によって許容さ れる最大範囲を限度として、インテルは、保証違反から起因する、または他の 法的理論に基づく、いかなる直接的、特定的、偶発的、結果的な損害（収益の 損失、稼動不能時間、評判、設備および資産の損傷や交換、本製品を内蔵し たシステムにて保存または使用されていたプログラムやデータの復帰、再 プログラミング、および再構築に必要な費用を含むがこれに限らず）に対す る責任を負いません。インテルがかかる損害の可能性について知らされてい た場合でも同様です。偶発的あるいは結果的損害の除外または限定を認め ない国または地域では、この限定または除外は適用されない場合がありま す。 本製品保証は購入者に特定の法的権利を付与するものであり、購入者は国また は地域によって異なるその他の権利を有することもあります。 本製品保証から生じるあらゆる紛争は、次の法廷地において司法的判断が下さ れるとともに、以下の法律に準拠するものとします。米国、カナダ、北米および南 米の場合、法廷地は米国カリフォルニア州サンタクララ、準拠法は米国デラウェア G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 68 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 68 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM 州法とします。アジア太平洋地域（中国本土を除く）の場合、法廷地はシンガポー ル、準拠法はシンガポール法とします。ヨーロッパおよびその他の全ての国や地 域の場合、法廷地はロンドン、準拠法はイングランド法およびウェールズ法としま す。 この製品保証の英語版と他の言語による翻訳版（中国簡体字版を除く）が矛盾す る場合は、英語版が適用されるものとします。 G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 69 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 69 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 70 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 70 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM For support, fi rst visit support.intel.com If you need further help, call: To obtain warranty service in the US and Canada call 1-800-628-8686 North America 916-377-7000 Latin America Spanish 001-916-377-0114 Portuguese 001-916-377-0180 Europe Belgium 02-714 3182 Denmark 38-487077 Finland 9-693-79297 France 01-41-91 85 29 Germany 069-9509-6099 Holland 020-487-4562 Italy 02-696-33276 Norway 23-1620-50 Spain 91-377-8166 Sweden 08-445-1251 United Kingdom 0870-607-2439 Japan 0120-868686 Asia-Pacifi c Australia 1800-649-931 Philippines 1800-1-651-0117 Hong Kong 852-2 844-4456 Indonesia 803-65-7249 Korea 822-767-2595 Thailand 1800-6310003 Singapore 65-6213-1311 Pakistan 63-2-636-8415 Taiwan 2-2545-1640 Vietnam 63-2-636-8416 China 800-820-1100 India 0006517-2-68303634 Malaysia 1800-80-1390 New Zealand 0800-444-365 From India an IDD-equipped phone is required. G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 71 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 71 6/18/2012 2:54:49 PM /18/2012 2:54:49 PM Halogen-Free: Applies only to halogenated fl ame retardants and PVC in components. Halogens are below 900 PPM bromine and 900 PPM chlorine. Intel, the Intel logo, and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Copyright © 2012 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G36426-002 Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA G36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 72 36426-002_DHA-E_TS.indd 72 6/18/2012 2:54:50 PM /18/2012 2:54:50 PM 80-00142-01 Rev. A Embedded MegaRAID® Software USER’S GUIDE November 2006 Version 2.0 ii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. This document contains proprietary information of LSI Logic Corporation. The information contained herein is not to be used by or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of an officer of LSI Logic Corporation. Document 80-00142-01 Rev. A, Version 2.0 (November 2006) This document describes version 1.0 of LSI Logic Corporation’s Embedded MegaRAID Software and will remain the official reference source for all revisions/releases of this product until rescinded by an update. LSI Logic Corporation reserves the right to make changes to any products herein at any time without notice. LSI Logic does not assume any responsibility or liability arising out of the application or use of any product described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by LSI Logic; nor does the purchase or use of a product from LSI Logic convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any other of the intellectual property rights of LSI Logic or third parties. Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGMENT LSI Logic, the LSI Logic logo design, MegaRAID, and MegaRAID Storage Manager are trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Logic Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective companies. CD To receive product literature, visit us at http://www.lsilogic.com. For a current list of our distributors, sales offices, and design resource centers, view our web page located at http://www.lsilogic.com/contacts/index.html Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide iii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Preface This document explains how to use the MegaRAID Storage Manager™ software, the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility (CU), and the MegaCLI utility to configure, monitor, and maintain RAID storage configurations with LSI Logic Embedded MegaRAID Software. Audience This document assumes that you are familiar with RAID storage configurations and configuration utilities. The people who benefit from this book are network administrators who need to create storage configurations with LSI Embedded MegaRAID Software. Organization This document has the following chapters and appendixes: • Chapter 1, Overview, provides an overview of Embedded MegaRAID Software features and an overview of RAID levels. • Chapter 2, Driver Installation, explains how to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers for Microsoft Windows and Linux. • Chapter 3, MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility, explains how to use the MegaRAID BIOS CU to create storage configurations. • Chapter 4, MegaCLI Command Tool, explains how to use the MegaCLI command line utility to create storage configurations. • Chapter 5, MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation, introduces the main features of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software and explains how to install it. iv Preface Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Chapter 6, MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus, describes the layout of the Embedded MegaRAID Software window and lists the available menu options. • Chapter 7, Configuration, describes how to use the Embedded MegaRAID Software to create storage configurations, save configurations, and apply saved configurations to a controller. • Chapter 8, Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices, explains how the Embedded MegaRAID Software monitors the status of storage configurations and devices and displays information about them. • Chapter 9, Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations, describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager software maintenance functions for virtual disks and other storage devices. • Appendix A, Events and Messages, provides descriptions of the Embedded MegaRAID Software events. Conventions The following is a list of notational conventions used throughout this manual: Notation Example Meaning and Use Courier typeface .nwk file Names of commands, files, and directories are shown in Courier typeface. Bold typeface fd1sp In a command line, keywords are shown in bold, non-italic typeface. Enter them exactly as shown. Italics module In command lines and names italics indicate user variables. Italicized text must be replaced with appropriate user-specified items. Enter items of the type called for, using lowercase. Italic underscore full_pathname When an underscore appears in an italicized string, enter a user-supplied item of the type called for with no spaces. Initial capital letters Undo Edit Apply Names of menu commands, options, check buttons, text buttons, options buttons, text boxes, list boxes, and so on, are shown in text with initial capital lettering to avoid misreading. These elements may appear on your screen in all lowercase. Brackets [version] You may, but need not, select one item enclosed within brackets. Do not enter the brackets. Bar les | les.out2 You may select one (but not more than one) item from a list separated by bars. Do not enter the bar. Preface v Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Note: Notes contain supplementary information that can have an effect on system performance. Caution: Cautions are notifications that an action has the potential to adversely affect equipment operation, system performance, or data integrity. Revision History Braces {property | -all} You must select one (but not more than one) item enclosed within braces. Do not enter the braces. Ellipses option... In command formats, elements preceding ellipses may be repeated any number of times. Do not enter the ellipses. In menu items, if an ellipsis appears in an item, clicking that item brings up a dialog box. Semicolon, and other punctuation Use as shown in the text. Notation Example Meaning and Use Document Number Date Revision Remarks 80-00142-01 Rev. A November 2006 Version 2.0 Added RAID 5 information to the document. Updated MegaCLI commands. DB15-000356-00 July 2006 Version 1.0 Initial release of this document. vi Preface Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide vii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Contents Chapter 1 Overview 1.1 Embedded MegaRAID Software Features 1-1 1.1.1 Driver Features 1-1 1.1.2 BIOS Features 1-2 1.1.3 Ctrl-M Configuration Utility Features 1-3 1.1.4 Manageability/Disk Console Features 1-4 1.2 RAID Overview 1-4 1.2.1 RAID 0 Description 1-6 1.2.2 RAID 1 Description 1-7 1.2.3 RAID 5 Description 1-7 1.2.4 RAID 10 Description 1-9 Chapter 2 Driver Installation 2.1 Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation 2-1 2.1.1 Updating the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver 2-2 2.1.2 Confirming the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation 2-2 2.2 Linux Driver Installation 2-3 2.2.1 Obtaining the Driver Image File 2-3 2.2.2 Preparing the Installation Disk(s) for Linux 2-3 2.2.3 Installing the Red Hat Linux Driver on a New System 2-5 2.2.4 Updating the Red Hat Linux Driver (Generic) 2-5 2.2.5 Installing the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Driver 2-8 viii Contents Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 3 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility 3.1 Performing a Quick Configuration 3-2 3.2 Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-2 3.2.1 Starting the MegaRAID BIOS CU 3-3 3.2.2 Using Easy Configuration 3-4 3.2.3 Using New Configuration and View/Add Configuration 3-5 3.2.4 Creating a Global Hotspare Drive 3-7 3.2.5 Initializing Logical Drives 3-8 3.3 Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies 3-10 3.4 Rebuilding a Drive 3-11 3.5 Hot Plug Support 3-12 3.6 Checking Data Consistency 3-13 3.7 Viewing and Changing Device Properties 3-14 3.7.1 Viewing and Changing Adapter Properties 3-15 3.7.2 Viewing and Changing Logical Drive Properties 3-16 3.7.3 Viewing Physical Drive Properties 3-16 3.8 Forcing Drives Online or Offline 3-16 3.9 Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive 3-17 3.10 Deleting a Logical Drive 3-17 3.11 Clearing a Storage Configuration 3-17 Chapter 4 MegaCLI Command Tool 4.1 MegaCLI CT Overview 4-2 4.2 Exception Handling 4-2 4.3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 4-3 4.4 Adapter Commands 4-5 4.4.1 Display Adapter Information 4-5 4.4.2 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 4-5 4.4.3 Set Adapter Properties 4-6 4.4.4 Display Specified Adapter Properties 4-6 4.4.5 Display Adapter Time 4-7 4.4.6 Set Factory Defaults 4-7 4.5 BIOS Commands 4-7 Contents ix Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.5.1 Set or Display Bootable Logical Drive ID 4-7 4.5.2 Set BIOS Options 4-8 4.6 Event Log Commands 4-8 4.6.1 Manage the Event Log Entries 4-8 4.7 Configuration Commands 4-9 4.7.1 Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration 4-9 4.7.2 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 4-10 4.7.3 Add RAID 10 Configuration 4-11 4.7.4 Clear Existing Configuration 4-12 4.7.5 Display Existing Configuration 4-12 4.7.6 Save Adapter Configuration 4-12 4.7.7 Restore Configuration Data from File 4-13 4.7.8 Delete Logical Drive(s) 4-13 4.7.9 Display Free Space 4-13 4.8 Logical Drive Commands 4-14 4.8.1 Display Logical Drive Information 4-14 4.8.2 Display Logical Drive Disk Cache Settings 4-14 4.8.3 Manage Logical Drive Initialization 4-14 4.8.4 Manage Consistency Check 4-15 4.8.5 View Ongoing Background Initialization 4-15 4.8.6 Display Logical Drive and Physical Drive Information 4-16 4.8.7 Display Number of Logical Drives 4-17 4.9 Physical Drive Commands 4-17 4.9.1 Display Physical Disk Drive Information 4-17 4.9.2 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online 4-17 4.9.3 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline 4-18 4.9.4 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good 4-18 4.9.5 Manage Global Hotspares 4-18 4.9.6 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive 4-18 4.9.7 Locate Physical Disk Drive(s) and Activate LED 4-19 4.9.8 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild 4-19 4.9.9 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal 4-20 4.9.10 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives 4-20 4.9.11 Display List of Physical Drives 4-20 x Contents Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.10 Miscellaneous Commands 4-21 4.10.1 Display MegaCLI Version 4-21 4.10.2 Display MegaCLI Help 4-21 Chapter 5 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation 5.1 Overview 5-1 5.1.1 Creating Storage Configurations 5-1 5.1.2 Monitoring Storage Devices 5-2 5.1.3 Maintaining Storage Configurations 5-2 5.2 Hardware and Software Requirements 5-2 5.3 Installation 5-3 5.3.1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft Windows 5-3 5.3.2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux 5-6 5.3.3 Linux Error Messages 5-7 Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus 6.1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 6-1 6.2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-4 6.2.1 Physical/Logical View Panel 6-5 6.2.2 Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel 6-6 6.2.3 Event Log Panel 6-6 6.2.4 Menu Bar 6-7 Chapter 7 Configuration 7.1 Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-2 7.1.1 Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters 7-3 7.1.2 Using Auto Configuration 7-4 7.1.3 Using Guided Configuration 7-5 7.1.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0 7-8 7.1.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1 7-10 7.1.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10 7-12 7.2 Adding Hotspare Disks 7-13 Contents xi Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.3 Changing Adjustable Task Rates 7-14 7.4 Changing Virtual Disk Properties 7-15 7.5 Deleting a Virtual Disk 7-15 7.6 Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk 7-16 7.7 Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller 7-16 7.8 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration 7-17 Chapter 8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices 8.1 Monitoring System Events 8-1 8.2 Monitoring Controllers 8-2 8.3 Monitoring Disk Drives 8-3 8.4 Monitoring Virtual Disks 8-5 8.5 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 8-7 Chapter 9 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations 9.1 Initializing a Virtual Disk 9-1 9.2 Running a Consistency Check 9-2 9.3 Rebuilding a Drive 9-2 9.4 Making a Drive Offline 9-3 Appendix A Events and Messages Customer Feedback xii Contents Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. xiii Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figures 1.1 RAID 0 Array Example with Two Disk Drives 1-6 1.2 RAID 1 Array 1-7 1.3 RAID 5 Array 1-8 1.4 RAID 10 Array 1-9 3.1 Configuration Utility Main Menu 3-3 3.2 Logical Drive Configuration Screen 3-5 3.3 Logical Drive Submenu 3-9 5.1 Customer Information Screen 5-4 5.2 Setup Type Screen 5-5 6.1 Select Server Window 6-2 6.2 Server Login Window 6-3 6.3 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-4 7.1 First Configuration Wizard Screen 7-2 7.2 Auto Configuration Screen 7-4 7.3 First Guided Configuration Screen 7-6 7.4 Second Guided Configuration Screen 7-7 7.5 First Manual Configuration Screen 7-8 7.6 Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Disk 7-9 7.7 Manual Configuration – Adding a Hotspare 7-11 8.1 Controller Information 8-2 8.2 Physical Drive Information 8-4 8.3 Virtual Disk Properties 8-6 8.4 Group Show Progress Window 8-7 xiv Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. xv Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Tables 4.1 Conventions 4-3 4.2 Display Adapter Information 4-5 4.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild 4-5 4.4 Set Adapter Properties 4-6 4.5 Display Specified Adapter Properties 4-6 4.6 Display Adapter Time 4-7 4.7 Set Factory Defaults 4-7 4.8 Bootable Logical Drive ID 4-7 4.9 Set BIOS Options 4-8 4.10 Event Log Management 4-8 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration 4-9 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 4-10 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration 4-11 4.14 Clear Existing Configuration 4-12 4.15 Display Existing Configuration 4-12 4.16 Save Adapter Configuration 4-12 4.17 Restore Configuration Data from File 4-13 4.18 Delete Logical Drives 4-13 4.19 Display Free Space 4-13 4.20 Display Logical Drive Information 4-14 4.21 Display Logical Drive Cache Settings 4-14 4.22 Manage Logical Drive Initialization 4-15 4.23 Manage Consistency Check 4-15 4.24 View Ongoing Background Initialization 4-16 4.25 Display Logical Drive and Physical Disk Drive Information 4-16 4.26 Display Number of Logical Drives 4-17 4.27 Display Physical Disk Drive Information 4-17 4.28 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online 4-17 4.29 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline 4-18 4.30 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good 4-18 4.31 Manage Hotspares 4-18 4.32 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive 4-19 4.33 Locate Physical Disk Drive and Flash LED 4-19 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild 4-19 4.35 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal 4-20 xvi Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.36 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives 4-20 4.37 Display List of Physical Drives 4-20 4.38 Display MegaCLI Version 4-21 4.39 Display MegaCLI Help 4-21 A.1 Event Error Levels A-1 A.2 Event Messages A-2 Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 1-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 1 Overview This manual explains the features of the Embedded MegaRAID® Software. It includes instructions for using the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility, the MegaCLI command line utility, and the MegaRAID Storage Manager™ software. You can use these three utilities to create storage configurations on physical disk drives controlled by Embedded MegaRAID Software. The manual also includes instructions for installing the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers in Microsoft Windows and Linux systems. This chapter contains the following sections: • Section 1.1, “Embedded MegaRAID Software Features” • Section 1.2, “RAID Overview” 1.1 Embedded MegaRAID Software Features The Embedded MegaRAID Software supports up to eight SAS or SATA ports, depending on the hardware platform. This provides a cost-effective way to achieve higher transfer rates and reliability. The following sections list the features of the driver, BIOS, the Ctrl-M Configuration Utility, and the disk management features. 1.1.1 Driver Features The Embedded MegaRAID Software driver supports the following features: • Support for 48-bit LBA • Support for drive roaming • Support for logical drives larger than 2 terabytes 1-2 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Support for migration path from Embedded MegaRAID Software to MegaRAID SAS/SATA hardware (this requires support from hardware RAID) • Automatic resumption of rebuilding, Check Consistency, full initialization, and background initialization • Online mirror rebuilding • Support for auto rebuild • Check Consistency for RAID 1 and RAID 5 • Global hotspare support • Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) support • Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10 • Support for up to 8 physical drives and eight logical drives • Stripe size of 64 Kbytes only • Support for Disk Coercion, with options None, 128Mbytes, 1Gbyte • Hot Plug support (drive insertion and removal) • Support for array cache setting (a RAID 10 volume is considered as a single array, though it might have 2, 3, or 4 spans) • Support for random deletion of logical drives • Error logging and notification • Support for Windows 2000 SP4, Windows XP, Windows 2003, & Windows Vista • Support for Red Hat, SuSE for 2.4 & 2.6 kernels 1.1.2 BIOS Features The Embedded MegaRAID Software BIOS has the following features: • Support for Interrupt 13 and Enhanced Disk Drive Specification • Support for Int19h • Option ROM size of 64 Kbytes • Support for BIOS Boot Specification (BBS) (If available in system BIOS, this allows the user to select the controller from which to boot.) • Support for power-on self test (POST) Embedded MegaRAID Software Features 1-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Support for Post Memory Management (PMM): Specification v1.01, November 21, 1997 • Industry-standard EBDA • POST and run-time BIOS support for device insertion and removal • Support for Stop On Error during boot-up The following features are supported by the BIOS and the Ctrl-M Configuration Utility: • Automatic resumption of rebuilding, Check Consistency, full initialization, and background initialization (BGI) • Global hotspare support • Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) support • Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10 • Support for auto rebuild • Support for up to eight physical drives and eight logical drives • Stripe size of 64 Kbytes only • Support for Disk Coercion, with options None, 128 Mbytes, and 1 Gbyte 1.1.3 Ctrl-M Configuration Utility Features The Ctrl-M Configuration Utility supports the following features: • Ability to select a logical drive as boot device (by default, logical drive 0 is the boot drive) • Support to disable/enable BIOS boot support • Hot Auto Rebuild (during a hot plug event or when the user forces the physical drive offline) • Hot Plug support (drive insertion and removal) • Support for array cache setting (RAID 10 volume is considered as a single array, though it may have 2, 3, or 4 spans) • Support for >2 terabyte logical drives • Support for random deletion of logical drives 1-4 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.1.4 Manageability/Disk Console Features The following features are available to manage the logical and physical disks in the system: • Configuration information display (in MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility and MegaRAID Storage Manager software) • Support for RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and 10 • Online mirror rebuilding • Online consistency checks • Array management software • Error logging and notification • Support for hot device insertion and removal • Automatic resume of rebuilding on restart • Support for manual rebuild • Ability to create up to eight logical drives per configuration • Auto-configuration support of newly added physical drive • Support for global hotspares • Support for disk coercion • Array initialization support (fast and normal) • Logical drive availability immediately after creation • Supported stripe size of 64 Kbytes only 1.2 RAID Overview This section provides a brief overview of the types of RAID configurations that Embedded MegaRAID Software supports. The first step in creating a RAID storage configuration is to configure physical disk drives in arrays. As defined for Embedded MegaRAID Software, an array is a group of one to eight physical disks that is seen by the host computer system as one large disk drive, or logical drive. Only one RAID level can be assigned to each array. • A RAID 0 array consists of one to eight physical drives. RAID Overview 1-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • A RAID 1 array consists of two physical drives. • A RAID 5 array consists of three to eight drives. • A RAID 10 array consists of four, six, or eight drives. Note: Some hardware configurations do not support eight disk drives. So depending on the hardware, the actual maximum number of drives for RAID 0, RAID 5 and RAID 10 arrays can be fewer than eight. Important: LSI recommends that you not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause decreased performance and decreased Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). You can use either of these three strategies when creating RAID arrays and logical drives: • Maximize Fault Tolerance: You can maximize fault tolerance to protect against loss of data by creating a RAID 1 array with mirroring. All data is written to the primary disk in the array and is also written (mirrored) to a second disk. • Maximize Logical Drive Performance: You can maximize logical drive performance by creating a RAID 0 array with striping. Data is broken into segments and can be simultaneously written to or read from several different stripes on several different disks in the array. RAID 10 arrays combine both striping and mirroring to provide high data transfer rates and data redundancy. • Maximizing Storage Capacity: You can maximize storage capacity when selecting a RAID level. Striping alone (RAID 0) requires less storage space than mirrored data (RAID 1) or distributed parity (RAID 5). RAID 5, which provides redundancy for one drive failure without duplicating the contents of entire disk drives, requires less space then RAID 1. 1-6 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.2.1 RAID 0 Description RAID 0 provides disk striping across all disk drives in the array. RAID 0 does not provide any data redundancy, but does offer the best performance of any RAID level. RAID 0 breaks up data into smaller segments, and then stripes the data segments across each drive in the array. The size of each data segment is determined by the stripe size, which is 64 Kbytes. Note: It is possible to create each disk as a single-drive RAID 0 array. However, spanning across single drive RAID 0 arrays is not supported. By breaking up a large file into smaller segments, Embedded MegaRAID Software can use both SAS/SATA drives to read or write the file faster. This makes RAID 0 ideal for applications that require high bandwidth but do not require fault tolerance. Figure 1.1 shows a RAID 0 array with two disk drives. Figure 1.1 RAID 0 Array Example with Two Disk Drives Uses Provides high data throughput, especially for large files; any environment that does not require fault tolerance Strong Points Provides increased data throughput for large files; no capacity loss penalty for parity Weak Points Does not provide fault tolerance; all data lost if any drive fails Drives One to eight Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment 5 Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 6 Segment 7 Segment 8 RAID Overview 1-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.2.2 RAID 1 Description RAID 1 duplicates all data from one drive to a second drive. RAID 1 provides complete data redundancy, but at the cost of doubling the required data storage capacity. Figure 1.2 shows a RAID 1 array. Figure 1.2 RAID 1 Array 1.2.3 RAID 5 Description Note: If you do not have a MegaRAID SAS 8208ELP RAID controller or a MegaRAID SAS 8208XLP RAID controller, you might need to install a key, either iButton or TSOC, to enable RAID 5. The key you need depends on your supplier. Contact your supplier for more information. RAID 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity. Parity is the data’s property of being odd or even, and parity checking is used to detect errors in the data. In RAID 5, the parity information is distributed to all drives. RAID 5 is best suited for networks that perform a lot of small input/output (I/O) transactions simultaneously. Uses Databases or any other mission critical environment that requires fault tolerance Strong Points Provides complete data redundancy; RAID 1 is ideal for any application that requires fault tolerance Weak Points Requires twice as many hard drives; performance is impaired during drive rebuilds Drives Two Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 1 Duplicated Segment 2 Duplicated Segment 3 Duplicated Segment 4 Segment 4 Duplicated 1-8 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. RAID 5 addresses the bottleneck issue for random I/O operations. Because each drive contains both data and parity, numerous writes can take place concurrently. Figure 1.3 shows a RAID 5 array with six disk drives. Figure 1.3 RAID 5 Array Uses Provides high data throughput. Use RAID 5 for transaction processing applications because each drive can read and write independently. If a drive fails, the RAID controller uses the parity drive to recreate all missing information. Use also for office automation and online customer service that requires fault tolerance. Use for any application that has high read request rates but low write request rates. Strong Points Provides data redundancy, high read rates, and good performance in most environments. Provides redundancy with lowest loss of capacity. Weak Points Not well suited to tasks requiring lot of small writes. Suffers more impact if no drive cache is used (clustering). Disk drive performance will be reduced if a drive is being rebuilt or a background initialization is in progress. Environments with few processes do not perform as well because the RAID overhead is not offset by the performance gains in handling simultaneous processes. Drives Three to eight Segment 1 Segment 7 Segment 2 Segment 8 Segment 3 Segment 9 Segment 4 Segment 10 Segment 5 Parity (6-10) Parity (11–15) Parity (1-5) Segment 6 Note: Parity is distributed across all drives in the array. Segment 13 Segment 14 Segment 15 Segment 11 Segment 12 Segment 19 Segment 25 Segment 20 Segment 23 Segment 18 Segment 21 Segment 16 Segment 22 Segment 17 Parity (21-25) Parity (26–30) Parity (16-20) Segment 24 Segment 26 Segment 27 Segment 29 Segment 28 Segment 30 RAID Overview 1-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 1.2.4 RAID 10 Description RAID 10, a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, has mirrored drives. It breaks up data into smaller blocks, then stripes the blocks of data to each RAID 1 RAID set. Each RAID 1 RAID set then duplicates its data to its other drive. The size of each block is determined by the stripe size parameter, which is 64 Kbytes. RAID 10 can sustain one drive failure in each array while maintaining data integrity. Figure 1.4 shows a RAID 10 array with four disk drives. Figure 1.4 RAID 10 Array Uses Works best for data storage that must have 100% redundancy of RAID 1 (mirrored arrays) and that also needs the enhanced I/O performance of RAID 0 (striped arrays); RAID 10 works well for medium-sized databases or any environment that requires a higher degree of fault tolerance and moderate to medium capacity Strong Points Provides both high data transfer rates and complete data redundancy Weak Points Requires twice as many drives Drives Four, six, or eight RAID 1 Disk 1 Disk 4 Disk 2 Disk 3 RAID 1 RAID 0 Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment 5 Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment 5 Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 6 Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 6 1-10 Overview Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 2-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 2 Driver Installation This chapter explains how to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers for the Windows 2000, Windows 2003, Windows XP, Red Hat Linux, and SuSE Linux operating systems. Note: No driver installation is required for DOS. The ROM BIOS contains the low-level driver that is required for MS-DOS. The chapter contains the following sections: • Section 2.1, “Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation” • Section 2.2, “Linux Driver Installation” 2.1 Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation Perform the following steps to install the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Windows 2000, Windows 2003, or Windows XP. 1. Boot the system with the Windows Boot Installation CD or diskette. The following message appears: Setup is inspecting your computers hardware configuration. 2. When the next prompt appears, press F6 to install the RAID/SCSI adapter driver. 3. When installation prompts for a key after copying some files, press S to add the SATA RAID driver. You are prompted for the floppy diskette that contains the LSI Embedded MegaRAID Software driver. 4. Insert the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver diskette and press Enter. 2-2 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 5. Scroll down the list and select the appropriate driver for the Windows version installed on your system, then click OK. 6. Continue with the normal installation procedure. 2.1.1 Updating the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Perform the following steps to update the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Windows 2000/2003/XP or to install this driver on an existing system booted from a standard IDE drive. 1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click System, click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager. Device Manager starts. 3. In Device Manager, double-click SCSI and RAID Controllers, rightclick the device for which you are installing the driver, and then click Properties. 4. On the Driver tab, click Update Driver to open the Update Device Driver wizard, and then follow the wizard instructions to update the driver. 2.1.2 Confirming the Windows 2000/2003/XP Driver Installation Perform the following steps to confirm that the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Windows 2000/2003/XP is installed properly. 1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click System, click the Hardware tab, and then click Device Manager. Device Manager starts. 3. In Device Manager, double-click SCSI and RAID Controllers, rightclick the device for which you are installing the driver, and then click Properties. 4. On the Driver tab, click Driver Details and verify that the driver information is correct. Linux Driver Installation 2-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 2.2 Linux Driver Installation This section explains how to make fresh installations of the Embedded MegaRAID Software driver for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3.0 and 4.0 and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9. 2.2.1 Obtaining the Driver Image File The Linux driver is offered in the form of a driver update disk. The required file is dud-[driver version].img, which is the driver update disk for the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack. You can obtain the latest driver files from the Download Center on the LSI web site at: http://www.lsilogic.com. 2.2.2 Preparing the Installation Disk(s) for Linux This section describes how to prepare the Linux installation disk(s) from the driver image files, using either the Windows or Linux operating systems. 2.2.2.1 Preparing Installation Disks with the Windows Operating System Under Windows, you can use the rawrite floppy image writer utility to create disk images from image files. The image writer can be downloaded from the Internet. Perform the following steps to build installation diskettes. 1. Copy the driver update disk image dud-[driver version].img and the file rawrite.exe to a directory. 2. Confirm that the files are in the selected directory. 3. If necessary, use this command to change the filename of the driver update disk to a name with fewer than eight characters: copy dud-[driver version].img dud.img. 4. Open the DOS Command Prompt and navigate to the directory where rawrite.exe is located. 5. Type the following command to create the installation diskette: rawrite 2-4 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Then press Enter. You are prompted to enter the name of the boot image file. 6. Type the following: dud.img Press Enter. You are prompted for the target drive diskette. 7. Insert a floppy diskette into the floppy drive and type: A: Then press Enter. 8. Press Enter again to start copying the file to the diskette. 9. After the command prompt returns and the floppy disk drive LED goes out, remove the diskette. 10. Label the diskette with the image name. 2.2.2.2 Preparing Installation Disks with the Linux Operating System Under Red Hat Linux and SuSE Linux, you can use a driver diskette utility to create disk images from image files. Perform the following steps to create the driver update disk: 1. Copy the driver update disk image dud-[driver version].img to a Linux system. 2. Insert a blank floppy diskette into the floppy drive. 3. Confirm that the files are in the selected directory. 4. Create the driver update diskette using the following command: dd if=dud-[driver version].img of=/dev/fd0 5. After the command prompt returns and the floppy disk drive LED goes out, remove the diskette. 6. Label the diskette with the image name. Linux Driver Installation 2-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 2.2.3 Installing the Red Hat Linux Driver on a New System This section describes the fresh installation of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3.0 or 4.0 device driver on systems with the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack. After you prepare the installation disks with the driver image, perform the following steps to install the driver on a new system. 1. Boot to CD-ROM (Disk 1). The Red Hat introductory screen appears. 2. Type the following at the boot prompt: linux dd 3. Press Enter. The prompt asks whether you have a driver disk. 4. Use the arrow key to select Yes, then press Enter. 5. Select fd0 to indicate you have a floppy diskette with the driver on it. 6. Insert the floppy diskette in the A:/ drive and press Enter. The installer locates and loads the driver for your device. The following message appears: Loading megasr driver... The prompt at the next screen asks whether you have another driver. 7. Follow the Red Hat Linux installation procedure to complete the installation. 8. Reboot the system. 2.2.4 Updating the Red Hat Linux Driver (Generic) Perform the following steps to update the Red Hat Linux driver or to install the Red Hat Linux driver in an existing system booted from a standard SAS/SATA drive or systems with the Embedded Software RAID stack. 1. Create a RAID array on the controller using the Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility. 2. Boot the system with the Red Hat Linux Installation CD from the primary controller or disk. The Red Hat introductory screen appears. 2-6 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Mount the driver update diskette (DUD) using the following command: #mount /dev/fd0 /mnt/floppy 4. Unzip the modules.cgz file that is on the DUD to get driver images for different Red Hat operating systems: #mkdir -p /home/megasr #cd /home/megasr #cp /mnt/floppy/modules.cgz . #gunizip -S .cgz modules.cgz This generates a new file named modules: #cpio -ivd < modules This provides the following driver images: {,smp, BOOT }/megasr.o 5. Update the Megasr driver module for the required kernels using the following commands: #cd /home/megasr If the /lib/modules//update/ directory is present, use the following command: # cp /megasr.[o/ko] /lib/modules//update/megasr.[o/ko] If the /lib/modules//update/ directory is not present, use the following command: # cp /megasr.[o/ko] /lib/modules/ /kernel/drivers/scsi/megasr.[o/ko] 6. Create a Megasr driver entry in the configuration file. The Red Hat configuration file is /etc/modules.conf. If the Megasr entry is not present in /etc/modules.conf, add the following line: alias scsi_hostadapter megasr If the ahci SCSI driver entry (located on the following paragraph) is present in /etc/modules.conf, remove it. It must be removed because otherwise the ahci driver would take control of the RAID Linux Driver Installation 2-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. controller without checking the subsystem device or Vendor ID. The ahci SCSI driver entry is the following: alias scsi_hostadapter ahci 7. Create a new initrd image for the required kernel. Red Hat installation uses the mk_initrd command to create an initrd image. The following command creates an initrd image for the smp kernel in the boot directory. See the mk_initrd man page for more information. The command is: #mkinitrd /boot/initrdsmp.img.new smp 8. Modify the lilo.conf/grub.conf file by adding newly created initrd(s) as new entries in the /etc/lilo.conf file. The suggested method is to copy an existing lilo entry in the file and paste it as a new one. Then modify its kernel image name, initrd image name, and label name. Sample Lilo Entry image=/boot/vmlinux-smp label=linuxnew initrd=/boot/initrd-smp.img.new read-only appended=root=LABEL=/ ” Sample Grub Entry title Red Hat Linux ( with Megasr driver) root (hd0,0) kernel /vmlinuz- ro root=LABEL=/ initrd /initrd-.img.new 9. Update the boot loader. If the boot loader is Lilo, run the lilo command to update the boot loader. The lilo command is: #lilo 10. Reboot the system to the new boot loader entry. 2-8 Driver Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 2.2.5 Installing the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 Driver This section describes the fresh installation of the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 driver on a system with the Embedded MegaRAID Software stack. Prepare installation disks with the driver image, then perform the following steps to install the driver. 1. Create a RAID array using the MegaRAID BIOS Configuration utility. (See Chapter 3, “MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility.”) 2. Boot the system using the SLES Disk. 3. When the first screen appears, press F6 and select Installation on the menu. You are prompted for the diskette. 4. Insert the driver update diskette in the A:/ drive and press Enter. 5. Press OK. The following message appears: LSI Soft RAID Driver Updates added. 6. At the menu, select the driver update medium and press the Back button. 7. Continue the installation process and complete it. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 3-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 3 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility The MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility (CU) is used to configure disk arrays and logical drives and to do other configuration tasks in a pre-boot environment. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 3.1, “Performing a Quick Configuration” • Section 3.2, “Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives” • Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies” • Section 3.4, “Rebuilding a Drive” • Section 3.5, “Hot Plug Support” • Section 3.6, “Checking Data Consistency” • Section 3.7, “Viewing and Changing Device Properties” • Section 3.8, “Forcing Drives Online or Offline” • Section 3.9, “Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive” • Section 3.10, “Deleting a Logical Drive” • Section 3.11, “Clearing a Storage Configuration” 3-2 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3.1 Performing a Quick Configuration This section provides high level instructions for quickly configuring arrays and logical drives with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. These instructions are intended for users that are familiar with configuration utilities and tools. Refer to Section 3.2, “Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives,” for detailed configuration instructions. To ensure the best performance, select the optimal RAID level for the logical drive you create. (For an explanation of RAID levels, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”) Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause decreased performance, an increased error count, and decreased MTBF. Perform the following steps to configure arrays and logical drives using the MegaRAID BIOS CU: 1. Boot the system. 2. Start the MegaRAID BIOS CU by pressing Ctrl+M. 3. Select Configure from the Management Menu. 4. Select a configuration method from the Configuration menu (Easy Configuration, New Configuration, or View/Add Configuration). 5. Create arrays using the available physical drives. 6. Define the logical drive(s) using the space in the arrays. 7. Initialize the new logical drive(s). 3.2 Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives This section provides detailed instructions for configuring arrays and logical drives with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. LSI recommends that you use drives with the same capacity when you create a storage configuration. If you use drives with different capacities in one array, the CU limits each drive to the capacity of the smallest drive. The number of physical drives in a specific array determines the possible RAID levels that you can implement with the array. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • RAID 0 requires from one to eight physical drives. • RAID 1 requires two physical drives. • RAID 5 required three to eight physical drives. • RAID 10 requires four, six, or eight physical drives. 3.2.1 Starting the MegaRAID BIOS CU Follow these steps to start the MegaRAID BIOS CU: 1. During boot-up, wait for the following message to appear on the screen: Press Ctrl-M to run LSI Logic Software RAID Setup Utility 2. When you see this message, hold down the Ctrl key while pressing the M key. The main menu for the Configuration Utility appears, as shown in Figure 3.1. Figure 3.1 Configuration Utility Main Menu Note: When you start the MegaRAID BIOS CU by pressing Ctrl-M the Configuration Manager Module of the BIOS allocates three segments of memory using either PMM or conventional memory: these are the Destination Segment, Scratch Segment, and Read Write Buffer Segment. If the three segments are not available the BIOS hooks INT19h and loads the CU at the fixed segments 5000:0 3-4 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. (Destination Segment), 6000:0 (Scratch Segment) and 7000:0 (Read Write Buffer Segment) after POST. 3.2.2 Using Easy Configuration When you select the Easy Configuration option, the CU creates one or more arrays from the available physical drives and configures each array as a single logical drive. If logical drives have already been configured, the CU does not change their configuration. Follow these steps to create a logical drive using Easy Configuration: 1. Select Configuration→ Easy Configuration from the Management Menu. A list of available (READY) physical drives appears. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the physical drives to include in the array. 3. Press the spacebar to add each selected physical drive to the new array. When you select a physical drive, its status changes from READY to ONLIN A[array number]-[drive number]. For example, ONLIN A00-01 means array 0, disk drive 1. 4. To create a global hotspare drive, highlight a READY disk drive and press F4. Then select Yes from the pop-up menu. 5. To define multiple arrays, select all the drives you want for the first array, then press Enter to start selecting drives for the second array, and so on. 6. When you have selected drives for all desired arrays, press F10. 7. Press the spacebar to select an array. The Logical Drive Configuration screen appears, as shown in Figure 3.2. This screen shows the logical drive number, RAID level, logical drive size, number of stripes in the physical array, stripe size, and state of the logical drive. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 3.2 Logical Drive Configuration Screen 8. Highlight RAID and press Enter. The available RAID levels for the current logical drive are displayed. 9. Select a RAID level for the logical drive and press Enter. 10. (Optional) Change the drive’s default Write Cache and Read Ahead policies (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). 11. When you have finished defining the current logical drive, select Accept and press Enter. 12. Save the configuration when prompted, and press any key to return to the Management Menu. 13. Initialize the new logical drive(s). (See Section 3.2.5, “Initializing Logical Drives,” for detailed instructions.) 3.2.3 Using New Configuration and View/Add Configuration When you select the New Configuration menu option, the CU deletes the existing arrays and logical drives and replaces them with the new configuration that you specify. The View/Add Configuration menu option lets you view the existing configuration or add to the existing configuration, if possible. Caution: If you want to keep the existing data on the storage configuration, use View/Add Configuration instead of New Configuration. 3-6 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Follow these steps to configure a disk array using the New Configuration or View/Add Configuration option: 1. Select Configuration→ New Configuration or Configuration→ View/Add Configuration from the Management Menu. If you selected New Configuration, select Yes to proceed. (This confirms that you are erasing the existing storage configuration.) The CU displays an array selection window. Note: The existing storage configuration will be erased only if you save the newly created configuration at the end of the process. It you do not save the new configuration, the CU will restore the previously existing configuration. 2. Use the arrow keys to select physical drives for the new array. 3. Press the spacebar to add each selected physical drive to the new array. When you select a drive, its status changes from READY to ONLIN A[array number]-[drive number]. For example, ONLIN A00-01 means array 0, disk drive 1. 4. To create a global hotspare drive, highlight a READY disk drive and press F4. Then select Yes from the pop-up menu. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA). Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is SAS and the failed drive is SATA, or vice versa. After the rebuild is completed, however, LSI recommends that you replace the new array member with a drive of the same type. 5. To define multiple arrays, select all the drives you want for the first array, then press Enter to start selecting drives for the second array, and so on. 6. When you have selected drives for all desired arrays, press F10. 7. Press the spacebar to select an array, if needed. 8. Highlight RAID and press Enter. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. A list of the available RAID levels for the current logical drive appears. 9. Select a RAID level for the logical drive and press Enter. 10. (Optional) Set the logical drive size by highlighting Size and pressing Enter. The minimum valid logical drive size is 64 Mbytes. An error message will appear if you try to create a logical drive that is smaller than 64 Mbytes. By default, all the available space in the array is assigned to the current logical drive. For RAID 10 arrays, only one logical drive can be defined for the entire array. 11. (Optional) Change the disks’s default Write Cache and Read Ahead policies (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). 12. When you have finished defining the current logical drive, select Accept and press Enter. 13. Configure additional logical drives on the same array, if desired. If you have created more than one array, configure a logical drive on the second array. 14. Save the configuration when prompted, and press any key to return to the Management Menu. 15. Initialize the new logical drive(s). (See Section 3.2.5, “Initializing Logical Drives,” for detailed instructions.) 3.2.4 Creating a Global Hotspare Drive The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to create global hotspare drives (dedicated hotspare drives are not supported). A hotspare drive can automatically replace a failed drive in a redundant RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 array, to protect against data loss. Important: When you select disk drive for a global hotspare, be sure it is the same type of drive (either SAS or SATA) as the drives in the arrays that it will protect. LSI recommends that you do not combine SAS and SATA drives in the same array. 3-8 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. You can create a hotspare when you are configuring a new storage configuration, as described in the previous sections. To add a hotspare drive to an existing redundant storage configuration, follow these steps: 1. Select Objects from the Management Menu. 2. Select Physical Drive. A list of physical drives appears. 3. Select an unconfigured drive or Ready drive from the list, and press Enter. 4. When the Physical Drive Property menu appears, select Make Hot Spare and press Enter. 5. Select Yes from the pop-up menu to create the hotspare drive. Note: To remove a hotspare drive, perform steps 1 and 2 above, select the HOTSP disk, press Enter, select Force Offline, and press Enter. The status of the drive changes to READY, and it can then be used in another new array. 3.2.5 Initializing Logical Drives Caution: When you initialize a logical drive all existing data on the logical drive is erased. This section explains the two methods of initializing a logical drive with the MegaRAID BIOS CU. If the Fast Init property is enabled, fast initialization will be used. In fast initialization, the MegaRAID BIOS CU quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new logical drive. If the Fast Init property is not enabled, the MegaRAID BIOS CU performs a complete initialization on the logical drive. This may take a long time if the physical disk drives are large. (First Initialization Method) Follow these steps to initialize a logical drive using the Initialize menu. 1. On the Management Menu, select Initialize. 2. Use the spacebar to highlight the logical drive to initialize. The logical drive name is highlighted in yellow. To deselect it, highlight the logical drive and press the spacebar again. 3. Press F10. 4. Select Yes at the prompt and press Enter to begin the initialization. Configuring Arrays and Logical Drives 3-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. A graph shows the progress of the initialization until it is complete. 5. After the initialization is complete, press Esc to return to previous menus. If you press Esc while initialization is in progress, the following options appear: – Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter: Management Menu→ Objects→ Adapter→ AutoResume.) The initialization is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the initialization already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, and if Fast Init is not enabled, the initialization resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent. – Continue: The initialization continues normally. – Abort: The initialization is completely aborted. If you restart initialization, it begins at 0 percent. (Second Initialization Method) Follow these steps to initialize a logical drive using the Objects menu. 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects→ Logical Drive, as shown in Figure 3.3. A list of configured logical drives appears. Figure 3.3 Logical Drive Submenu 2. Select a logical drive, if there is more than one configured, and press Enter. 3. Select Initialize from the submenu and press Enter. 3-10 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4. Select Yes at the prompt and press Enter. The CU displays a bar graph showing the initialization progress. 5. When initialization completes, press Esc to return to the previous menu. If you press Esc while initialization is in progress, the Stop, Continue, and Abort options are available, as explained earlier in this section. 3.3 Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies You can use the MegaRAID BIOS CU to set the hard disk drive Write Cache and Read Ahead settings. Any read or write cache policy changes apply to all logical drives on an array. In other words, if two logical drives are defined on a single array and you change the Read Ahead setting on one logical drive, the change will also apply to the other logical drive on the array. The Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead policies can be set to On or Off. • When the disk Write Cache is On, a write transaction is considered to be complete when all the data has been written to the disk cache. When disk Write Cache is Off, the write transaction is complete only when the data has been written to the disk. • When disk Read Ahead is On, extra data is read sequentially ahead of the data that is actually requested and is stored in a cache. If the additional read-ahead data is then requested, it can be read faster from the cache than from the disk directly. Note: When the disk Write Cache is On, there is a danger that data could be lost if the power fails before the cached data is written to disk. Follow these steps to view or change the logical drive Write Cache or Read Ahead settings: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects→ Logical Drive→ Logical Drive n→ View/Update Parameters. 2. Use the arrow key to move the cursor to Disk WC or Read Ahead and press Enter. Rebuilding a Drive 3-11 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Use the arrow key to select Off or On for Disk WC (DWC) or Read Ahead. 4. When you see the prompt Change DWC or Change Read Ahead, use the arrow key to select Off or On, then press Enter to change the cache setting. The settings are changed for all logical drives defined on the array. 3.4 Rebuilding a Drive The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to rebuild a drive of a redundant array if the array has a failed drive. If the failed drive is still good (that is, if the drive is physically present and its size is greater than or equal to the defined size of the array) it will be rebuilt. If the drive is small, an error message will appear and the MegaRAID BIOS CU will not allow the drive to be rebuilt. A rebuild cannot be started on a failed drive if its size is even 1 byte smaller than the defined size of the array. Follow these steps to rebuild a drive: 1. Select Rebuild from the Management Menu. 2. When the list of drives appears, highlight the FAIL drive that you want to rebuild and press the Spacebar to select it. 3. After selecting the physical drive, press F10 and select Yes at the confirmation prompt. The rebuild process begins, and a graph shows the progress of the rebuild until it is complete. Although the CU changes the disk drive state to Rebuild at this point, the change does not appear on the screen while the rebuild is in progress. If the CU detects a media error on the source drive during rebuild, it initiates a sector read for that block. If the sector read fails, the CU adds entries to the Soft Bad Block Management (SBBM) table, writes this table to the target drive, and displays an error message. Additional error messages are displayed if the SBBM table is 80% full or 100% full. If the SBBM table is completely full, the rebuild operation is aborted, and the drive is marked as FAIL. 3-12 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4. When rebuild is complete, the CU displays the message: Rebuilding of Drive X Completed Successfully. Press Esc. (X = the ID of the rebuilt drive.) 5. Press Esc to display the Management Menu. The state of the rebuilt disk drive changes from FAIL to ONLIN. If you press Esc while the rebuild is running, the following options display: • Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter: Management Menu -> Objects -> Adapter -> AutoResume.) The rebuild is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the rebuild already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, the rebuild resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent. • Continue: The rebuild continues normally. • Abort: The rebuild is completely aborted and the disk drive remains in the FAIL state. If you restart the rebuild, it begins at 0 percent. 3.5 Hot Plug Support The MegaRAID BIOS CU supports hot plugging of disk drives. The following hot plug message will appear when you insert or remove a disk drive: A Drive Has Been Inserted/Removed. Configuration Updated. Press ESC... After you press Esc the inserted or removed drive will be reflected in the list of drives that appears in the configuration utility. Obviously, you should not insert or remove a drive while you are defining a new logical drive or while an initialization or other process is running. The following bullets describe how the CU handles hot plugging when various actions occur: • If the Physical Drive window or one of the Configuration windows is open when you insert or remove a drive, the window will close when the hot plug message appears. Checking Data Consistency 3-13 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • CU menus such as Select Boot Drive, Select Adapter, and Logical Drive menus will completely or partially close when a drive is inserted or removed. • If a Rebuild is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU will first display the message Rebuilding Of Drive Not Complete! Press Esc.. followed by the hot plug message. If the Rebuild was not affected by this hot plug event, it will continue to rebuild from where it left off, provided that Auto Resume is enabled; otherwise, Rebuild will start over from the beginning. If the rebuilding array was affected by the hot plug event, the Rebuild will abort and the array status will change based on the hot plug operation. • If an Initialization is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU will display the message Initialization of Array Not Complete! Press ESC.. followed by the hot plug message. • If a consistency check is in progress when you insert or remove a drive, the CU will display the message CC Not Completed! Press ESC.. followed by the hot plug message. 3.6 Checking Data Consistency The Check Consistency feature can be used on RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 logical drives to verify the consistency of the data on the physical drives. The MegaRAID BIOS CU automatically corrects any differences found in the data when a consistency check is run. Follow these steps to check consistency: 1. On the Management Menu select Check Consistency and press Enter. A list of configured logical drives is displayed. 2. Highlight a logical drive with the arrow keys. 3. Press the spacebar to select the logical drive to check for consistency. Note: If you select a RAID 0 logical drive, a message appears stating that a Check Consistency cannot be performed. To continue, deselect the logical drive, highlight a redundant logical drive, and press the spacebar again. 3-14 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4. Press F10. 5. At the prompt, select Yes to start the Check Consistency process and press Enter. A graph shows the progress of the Check Consistency operation until it is complete. If the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds any data inconsistencies while comparing the source and target drives, it fixes the inconsistency by writing the source data to the target drive. When this happens, the following message appears at the bottom of the screen: The Data on the Drives is inconsistent. Repair done! If the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds a media error on the source drive, it pops up a dialog box with this message: Error in Reading Sectors! Proceed Anyway (Y/N)? If you press Y, the program skips the bad block and continues. If you press N, the program aborts the consistency check. The same message appears if the program finds a hard media error on the target drive. If you press Esc while a Check Consistency is running, the following options are displayed: • Stop: (Available only if AutoResume is enabled on the adapter: Management Menu→ Objects→ Adapter→ AutoResume.) The Check Consistency is stopped, and the CU stores the percentage of the task already completed. If AutoResume is enabled, the Check Consistency resumes where it left off when you restart it, instead of starting over from 0 percent. • Continue: The Check Consistency continues normally. • Abort: The Check Consistency is completely aborted. If you restart it, it begins at 0 percent. 3.7 Viewing and Changing Device Properties The MegaRAID BIOS CU allows you to view properties for adapters, logical drives, and physical drives. You can also change some properties for adapters and logical drives. Viewing and Changing Device Properties 3-15 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3.7.1 Viewing and Changing Adapter Properties To view or change adapter properties, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects→ Adapter. 2. Select an adapter from the list. The following list of adapter properties appears: 3. If you want to change the value of a property, highlight it and press Enter. 4. Select or type a different value for the property and press Enter. 5. When you are finished, press Esc until you return to the Management Menu. Property Options Default Rebuild Rate 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 Chk Const Rate 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 FGI Rate (Foreground initialization rate) 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 BGI Rate (Background initialization rate) 0 to 100 (% of system resources) 30 Disk WC (Disk Write Cache) Off, On Off (Write Through enabled) Read Ahead On, Off On BIOS State Enable, Disable Enable Stop On Error No, Yes No Fast Init Enable, Disable Enable Auto Rebuild On, Off On Auto Resume Enable, Disable When Enabled, you can stop a consistency check, rebuild, or initialization and resume it later where it left off, instead of aborting it and starting over. Enable Disk Coercion1 1. The Disk Coercion property can be accessed only when no configuration is present for the adapter. Otherwise, an error message will appear. None, 128MB, 1GB 1GB 3-16 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3.7.2 Viewing and Changing Logical Drive Properties To view or change logical drive properties, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Logical Drive. 2. Select View/Update Parameters. The only logical drive properties you can change are Disk WC (Disk Write Cache) and Read Ahead (see Section 3.3, “Setting the Hard Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead Policies”). The other properties are view-only. 3.7.3 Viewing Physical Drive Properties To view physical drive properties, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Physical Drive. 2. Highlight a physical drive on the list that appears and press Enter. 3. Select Drive Properties from the menu. The drive properties are Device Type (Disk), Capacity, Product ID, and Revision No. These properties are view-only. 3.8 Forcing Drives Online or Offline The MegaRAID BIOS CU enables you to force drives online or offline. You may want to force a drive of a redundant array offline so that a hotspare drive will automatically replace it. An auto rebuild will begin immediately if the MegaRAID BIOS CU finds a valid hotspare drive to replace the offline drive. You may need to force a drive online if it has gone offline due to a power failure. The MegaRAID BIOS CU will not allow a drive to be forced online if its size is smaller than the defined size of the array. To force a drive online or offline, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Objects →Physical Drive. 2. Highlight a physical drive that is a member of an array and press Enter. Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive 3-17 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Select Force Offline or Force Online from the menu. If the drive was online, its status changes to FAIL. If it was offline, its status changes to ONLIN. 3.9 Configuring a Bootable Logical Drive The default boot logical drive is LD 0. If you change the boot drive to another logical drive, the BIOS and the CU will preserve this change. However, if you delete the new boot logical drive, you must be sure to configure another logical drive for booting. The MegaRAID BIOS CU will not automatically select a different boot logical drive. Follow these steps to configure a bootable logical drive: 1. On the Management Menu, select Configure -> Select Boot Drive. 2. Select a logical drive from the list to be the designated boot drive. 3.10 Deleting a Logical Drive Caution: Before you delete a logical drive, be sure to back up all the data you want to keep. The MegaRAID BIOS CU allows you to delete any single logical drive defined in the configuration (sometimes referred to as random deletion). To delete a specified logical drive, follow these steps: 1. Select Objects -> Logical Drive. 2. Highlight the logical drive that you want to delete and press Delete. 3. Select Yes when the confirmation message appears. 3.11 Clearing a Storage Configuration Caution: Before you clear a storage configuration, be sure to back up all the data you want to keep. 3-18 MegaRAID BIOS Configuration Utility Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To clear a storage configuration, follow these steps: 1. On the Management Menu, select Configure →Clear Configuration. 2. When the message appears, select Yes to confirm. All logical drives are deleted from the configuration. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 4-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 4 MegaCLI Command Tool The MegaCLI Command Tool (CT) is a command line interface application that you can use to configure and maintain storage configurations created with Embedded MegaRAID Software. Note: The MegaCLI CT utility runs in the Microsoft® Windows® and Linux® environments. For DOS, the utility is called MegaDCLI CT and it supports a subset of the full command set. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 4.1, “MegaCLI CT Overview” • Section 4.2, “Exception Handling” • Section 4.3, “Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions” • Section 4.4, “Adapter Commands” • Section 4.5, “BIOS Commands” • Section 4.6, “Event Log Commands” • Section 4.7, “Configuration Commands” • Section 4.8, “Logical Drive Commands” • Section 4.9, “Physical Drive Commands” • Section 4.10, “Miscellaneous Commands” 4-2 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.1 MegaCLI CT Overview MegaCLI CT and MegaDCLI CT are command line interface applications you can use to configure and manage storage configurations under Embedded MegaRAID Software. You can use these command tools to perform the following tasks: • Configure logical drives and create configurations on the adapter • Display the configuration on the adapter • Display and change logical drive’s properties on the adapter • Display and change physical drive’s properties on the adapter • Display and change adapter properties • Load a configuration to the adapter from a file • Save an adapter configuration to a file • Start or stop rebuild, consistency check, and initialization • Suspend and display an ongoing background initialization • Display relevant user messages on the console or write them to the log file • Work in silent mode, if selected (no messages are displayed on the console) • Display adapter inventory data in a single command • Customize output strings • Exit with predefined success or failure exit codes • Set some predefined environment variables, such as number of adapters and number of logical drives after the execution of CT • Display help on how to use the command line options of CT 4.2 Exception Handling MegaCLI CT exits with exit code 0 for all successful operations. In case of failure, it exits with exit code 1 to 255, depending on the failure conditions. For example, assume that a rebuild is started on three physical drives. MegaCLI CT successfully starts rebuilding the first drive Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions 4-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. but fails to start rebuilding the second drive. If this happens, MegaCLI CT will not attempt to start rebuilding the third drive; instead, it will exit with an error exit code. In this case, the error code will be EXIT_ERR_START_RBLD. So even if the command was partially successful, an error code is still generated. Some operations such as GetNumberOfAdapters or GetNumberofLogicaldrives return with the actual number of adapters or logical drives. These return values are special cases and do not reflect any error conditions based on the return code, which in these cases contains meaningful values. 4.3 Command Line Abbreviations and Conventions Some commands let you specify multiple values. You can enter commands for a single adapter (-aN), multiple selected adapters (-a0,1,2) or all adapters (-aALL). This is denoted as -aN| -a0,1,2|-aALL in the command line syntax used in this chapter. Table 4.1 lists all of the conventions used in the command line options. Table 4.1 Conventions Convention Description CmdTool Specifies the command line interface used. Type either MegaCLI CT under Microsoft Windows and Linux, or MegaDCLI CT under DOS. | Specifies “or,” meaning you can choose between options. -aN N specifies the adapter number for the command. -a0,1,2 Specifies the command is for adapters 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more adapters in this manner. -aALL Specifies the command is for all adapters. -Lx x specifies the logical drive number for the command. -L0,1,2 Specifies the command is for logical drives 0, 1, and 2. You can select two or more logical drives in this manner. -Lall Specifies the command is for all logical drives. { } Indicates that the parameter is optional. 4-4 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. You can specify the -Silent command line option for all possible functions of the MegaCLI CT. If you enter this option at the command line, no messages are displayed on the screen. Some MegaCLI CT commands that are supported in hardware RAID configurations are not supported under Embedded MegaRAID Software. These include the following: • Adapter Cache Flush (-AdpCacheFlush) • Set Adapter Properties: Only the RebuildRate, BgiRate, CCRate, and CoercionMode properties are supported • Get Adapter Properties: Only the RebuildRate, BgiRate, CCRate, and CoercionMode properties are supported • Cluster Enable is not supported • Set Adapter Time (-AdpSetTime) • Patrol Read (-AdpPR, -AdpPRSetDelay) • Battery Backup commands (-AdpBbuCmd) • Foreign configuration (-CfgForeign) • Logical Drive Reconstruction (-LDRecon) • Set Logical Drive Properties (-LDSetProp) • Display Enclosure Information (-EncInfo) • Mark Configured Physical Disk Drive as Missing (-PDMarkMissing) • Display List of Missing Physical Disk Drives (-PDGetMissing) • Flashing the firmware (-AdpFWFlash, -AdpM0Flash) • Diagnostics (-AdpDiag, -AdpBatTest, -AdpNVRAM) The following sections describe the MegaCLI CT commands. Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software utility does not support Write Policy, Read Policy, or I/O Policy. Software RAID only support enabling and disabling the hard disk drive’s write cache and read-ahead functions. Note: MegaCLI CT for Embedded MegaRAID Software does not support the concept of disk enclosures, except for a default Enclosure 0 (E0). Some of the commands support an Adapter Commands 4-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. E0:Sn syntax that enables you to specify a disk drive in a particular “slot” in this default enclosure. 4.4 Adapter Commands You can use the commands in this section to set or display properties related to the adapter(s). Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers function as virtual “adapters” or “controllers.” Because the drivers are not actual hardware components, some of the adapter parameters do not apply to them. 4.4.1 Display Adapter Information Use the command in Table 4.2 to display information on adapter parameters such as the number of logical drives and initiator ID. 4.4.2 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild Use the command in Table 4.3 to turn automatic rebuild on or off for the selected adapter(s). If you have configured hotspares and enabled automatic rebuild, the RAID adapter automatically tries to use them to rebuild failed disks. Automatic rebuild also controls whether a rebuild will start when a drive that was part of the array is reinserted. Table 4.2 Display Adapter Information Syntax CmdTool –AdpAllInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays parameters on the selected adapter(s). Displayed information includes initiator ID, current status of auto rebuild, alarm, number of logical drives, rebuild rate, bus number/device number, present RAM, SAS settings, serial number of the board, and SAS address. MegaCLI CT does not support display of the firmware version or BIOS version, as the driver does not support it. Table 4.3 Enable or Disable Automatic Rebuild Syntax CmdTool –AdpAutoRbld -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Enables or disables automatic rebuild on the selected adapter(s). The -Dsply option shows the status of the automatic rebuild state. 4-6 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.4.3 Set Adapter Properties This command sets the properties on the selected adapter(s). For example, for {RebuildRate -val}, you can enter a value between 0 percent and 100 percent. (The rebuild rate is the percentage of the compute cycles dedicated to rebuilding failed drives.) At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the system is not doing anything else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity. The default rebuild rate of 30 percent is recommended. Use the command in Table 4.4 to display or set adapter properties. 4.4.4 Display Specified Adapter Properties Use the command in Table 4.5 to display specified properties on the selected adapter(s). Table 4.4 Set Adapter Properties Syntax CmdTool –AdpSetProp {RebuildRate -val} | {BgiRate –val}|{CCRate –val}| {CoercionMode –val} -aN|-a0,1,2| -aALL Description Sets the properties on the selected adapter(s). The possible settings are: • RebuildRate: Rebuild rate. Values: 0 to 100. • BgiRate: Background initilization rate. Values: 0 to 100. • CCRate: Consistency check rate. Values: 0 to 100. • CoercionMode: Drive capacity Coercion mode. Values: 0 = None; 1 = 128 Mbytes; 2 = 1 Gbyte. You can set the Coercion mode only when there is no existing configuration on the adapter. Table 4.5 Display Specified Adapter Properties Syntax CmdTool –AdpGetProp RebuildRate | BgiRate | CCRate | CoercionMode -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the properties of the selected adapter(s). BIOS Commands 4-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.4.5 Display Adapter Time Use the command in Table 4.5 to display the current time and date of the selected adapter. 4.4.6 Set Factory Defaults Use the command in Table 4.7 to set the factory defaults on the selected adapter(s). 4.5 BIOS Commands You can use the commands in this section to select the settings for BIOS-related options. 4.5.1 Set or Display Bootable Logical Drive ID Use the command in Table 4.8 to set or display the ID of the bootable logical drive. Note: This option does not write a boot sector to the logical drive. The operating system will not load if the boot sector is incorrect. Table 4.6 Display Adapter Time Syntax CmdTool –AdpGetTime -aN Description Displays the selected adapter’s time in yyyymmdd HH:mm:ss format. Table 4.7 Set Factory Defaults Syntax CmdTool -AdpFacDefSet -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Sets the factory defaults on the selected adapter(s). You cannot set the factory defaults if the adapter already has a configuration defined on it. Table 4.8 Bootable Logical Drive ID Syntax CmdTool –AdpBootDrive {-Set –LDID} | -Get -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description • -Set: Sets the logical drive as bootable so that during the next reboot, the BIOS will look for a boot sector in the specified logical drive. • -Get: Displays the bootable logical drive ID. 4-8 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.5.2 Set BIOS Options Use the command in Table 4.9 to set the options for the BIOS status. 4.6 Event Log Commands 4.6.1 Manage the Event Log Entries Use the command in Table 4.10 to manage the event entries in the event log for the selected adapter(s). Table 4.9 Set BIOS Options Syntax CmdTool –AdpBIOS -Enbl|-Dsbl|-Dsply| SOE | BE -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Sets BIOS options. The following are the settings you can select on a single adapter, multiple adapters, or all adapters: • -Enbl, -Dsbl, -Dsply: Enables, disables or displays the BIOS status on selected adapter(s). • -SOE: Stops on BIOS errors during POST for selected adapter(s). When set to -SOE, the BIOS stops in case of a problem with the configuration. This gives you the option to enter the configuration utility to resolve the problem. This is available only when you enable the BIOS status. • -BE: Bypasses BIOS errors during POST. This is available only when you enable the BIOS status. Table 4.10 Event Log Management Syntax CmdTool –AdpEventLog –GetEventlogInfo |{–GetEvents | GetSinceShutdown| GetSinceReboot | IncludeDeleted | {GetLatest } –f } |Clear -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Configuration Commands 4-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7 Configuration Commands You can use the commands in this section to create storage configurations. 4.7.1 Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration Use the command in Table 4.11 to add a RAID level 0, 1, or 5 configuration to the existing configuration on the selected adapter. For RAID level 10, see Section 4.7.3, “Add RAID 10 Configuration.” Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause decreased performance, an increased error count, and decreased MTBF. Description The RAID driver maintains a volatile circular list of 100 events, which is deleted at reboot. The following command options are available: • -GetEventlogInfo: Displays overall event information such as total number of events, newest sequence number, oldest sequence number, shutdown sequence number, reboot sequence number, and clear sequence number. • -GetEvents: Gets event log entry details. The information shown consists of the total number of entries available at the firmware side since the last clear and details of each error log entry. Start_entry specifies the initial event log entry when displaying the log. • -GetSinceShutdown: Displays all the events since last adapter shutdown. • -GetSinceReboot: Displays all the events since last adapter reboot. • -IncludeDeleted: Displays all events, including deleted events. • -GetLatest: Displays the latest number of events, if it exists. The event data is written to the file in reverse order. • -Clear: Clears the event log for the selected adapter(s). Table 4.10 Event Log Management (Cont.) Table 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgLDAdd -R0|-R1|-R5[E0:Sn] [ -szXXXXXXXX [-szYYYYYYYY [...]]] [-strpszM] [-Hsp[E5:S5,...]] [–afterLdX] -aN 4-10 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.2 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 Use the command in Table 4.12 to configure each physical disk in Unconfigured-Good state as RAID 0. Note: The MegaCLI CT does not support spanning across these single-drive RAID 0 configurations. Description Adds a RAID level 0, 1 or 5 configuration to a specified adapter. Even if no configuration is present, you have the option to write the configuration to the adapter. • –Rx[E0:Sn]: Used to specify RAID level and physical drive enclosure/slot numbers for an array. • –strpszM:: Used (optionally) to specify a stripe size. You can set the stripe size to 64 Kbytes. • –Hsp[Ex:Sx,…]: Used to create a global hotspare, with physical drive enclosure/slot numbers specified. This option cannot be used to create dedicated hotspares. • –szXXXX:: Used to specify the size of a logical drive, where XXXX is a decimal number of Mbytes. However, the actual size of the logical drive may be smaller, because the driver requires the number of blocks from physical drives in each logical drive to be aligned to the stripe size. This option can also be used to create a configuration on the free space available in the array. • -AfterLdX:: Used to specify which free slot should be used (optional). By default, MegaCLI CT uses the first free slot available in the array. This option has no meaning if the array is not already used for configuration. Table 4.11 Add RAID 0, 1, or 5 Configuration (Cont.) Table 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 Syntax CmdTool –CfgEachDskRAID0 [{WT | WB }] [{NORA | RA | ADRA}] [{Direct | Cached}] [{-strpszM} -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Configuration Commands 4-11 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.3 Add RAID 10 Configuration Use the command in Table 4.13 to add a RAID 10 configuration to the existing configuration on the selected adapter. For RAID levels 0, 1 or 5, see Section 4.7.1, “Add RAID 0, 1 or 5 Configuration.” Description Configures each physical disk in Unconfigured-Good state as RAID 0 on this controller. The options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA | ADRA} {Direct | Cached} must be entered in the sequence that is shown. • WT : Used to select Write-through caching, in which a write transaction is considered to be complete when all the data has been written to the disk cache. • WB : Used to select Write-back caching, in which the write transaction is complete only when the data has been written to the disk. • NORA : Used to select Normal Read Ahead caching, which specifies that the controller reads only the requested data and does not read ahead for the current logical drive. • RA : Used to select Read Ahead caching, which specifies that data is read sequentially ahead of the data that is actually requested and is stored in a cache. If the additional read-ahead data is then requested, it can be read faster from the cache than from the disk directly. Read-Ahead supplies sequential data faster, but is not as effective when accessing random data. • ADRA : Used to select Adaptive Read Ahead, which specifies that the controller begins using Read Ahead caching if the two most recent disk accesses occurred in sequential sectors. If all read requests are random, the algorithm reverts to No Read Ahead; however, all requests are still evaluated for possible sequential operation. If you select Read Ahead, there is a danger that data could be lost if the power fails before the cached data is written to disk. • Direct : Used to specify that the controller does not buffer reads in cache memory. Data is transferred to cache and the host concurrently. If the same data block is read again, it comes from cache memory. • Cached : Used to specify that the controller buffers all reads in cache memory. • {-strpszM} : Used to specify the size of the segments written to each drive in the configuration. You can set the stripe size to 64 Kbytes. Table 4.12 Configure Each Disk as RAID 0 (Cont.) Table 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgSpanAdd -R10| –Array0[E0:Sn] –Array1[E0:Sn] [...] [{WT | WB}] [{NORA | RA | ADRA}] [{Direct | Cached}] [{-strpszM}] -aN 4-12 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.4 Clear Existing Configuration Use the command in Table 4.14 to clear the existing storage configuration on the selected adapter(s). 4.7.5 Display Existing Configuration Use the command in Table 4.15 to display the logical drive and physical disk drive information for the configuration on the selected adapter(s). This command also provides information about the remaining unconfigured space. 4.7.6 Save Adapter Configuration Use the command in Table 4.16 to save the configuration for the selected adapter(s) to the given filename. Description Creates a RAID level 10 (spanned) configuration from the specified arrays. Even if no configuration is present, you must use this option to write the configuration to the adapter. Multiple arrays are specified using the –ArrayX[E0:Sn,...] option. (Note that X starts from 0, not 1.) All the arrays must have the same number of physical drives. At least two arrays must be provided. The options {WT |WB} {NORA | RA | ADRA} {Direct | Cached} must be entered in the sequence that is shown. Table 4.13 Add RAID 10 Configuration (Cont.) Table 4.14 Clear Existing Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgClr -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Clears the existing storage configuration. Table 4.15 Display Existing Configuration Syntax CmdTool -CfgDsply -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the existing configuration on the selected adapter(s), which includes the logical drive and component physical drive related details. Table 4.16 Save Adapter Configuration Syntax CmdTool –CfgSave –fFileName -aN Description Saves the configuration for the selected adapter(s) to the given filename, in binary format. The command also stores the controller properties structure in the file. Configuration Commands 4-13 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.7.7 Restore Configuration Data from File Use the command in Table 4.17 to read the configuration from the file and load it on the selected adapter(s). You can restore the read/write properties and RAID configuration using hotspares. 4.7.8 Delete Logical Drive(s) Use the command in Table 4.18 to delete one or more logical drives on the selected adapter(s). 4.7.9 Display Free Space Use the command in Table 4.19 to display the free space that is available to use for configuration on the selected adapter(s). Table 4.17 Restore Configuration Data from File Syntax CmdTool –CfgRestore –fFileName -aN Description Reads the configuration from the file and loads it on the adapter. MegaCLI can store or restore all read and write adapter properties, all read and write properties for logical drives, and the RAID configuration including hotspares. Note the following: The -CfgSave option stores the configuration data and adapter properties in the file. Configuration data has only the device ID and sequence number information of the physical drives used in the configuration. The CfgRestore option will fail if the same device IDs of the physical drives are not present. Table 4.18 Delete Logical Drives Syntax CmdTool –CfgLDDel–Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Deletes one logical drive, multiple logical drives, or all the selected logical drives on selected adapter(s). Table 4.19 Display Free Space Syntax CmdTool –CfgFreeSpaceInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays all the free space available for configuration on the selected adapter(s). The information includes the number of disk groups, the number of spans in each disk group, the number of free space slots in each disk group, the start block, and the size (in both blocks and megabytes) of each free space slot. 4-14 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.8 Logical Drive Commands You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the logical drives and to perform actions on them. 4.8.1 Display Logical Drive Information Use the command in Table 4.20 to display information about logical drives on the selected adapter(s). 4.8.2 Display Logical Drive Disk Cache Settings Use the command in Table 4.21 to display the disk cache settings for the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). 4.8.3 Manage Logical Drive Initialization Use the command in Table 4.22 to manage initialization of the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts the initialization process when this command is issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for initialization. The initialization actually starts when the driver loads. Table 4.20 Display Logical Drive Information Syntax CmdTool –LDInfo –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays information about the logical drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). This information includes the name, RAID level, RAID level qualifier, size in megabytes, state, stripe size, number of drives, and span depth. Also displays activity progress, if any, including initialization, background initialization, and consistency check. Table 4.21 Display Logical Drive Cache Settings Syntax CmdTool –LDGetProp -DskCache -Lx|-L0,1,2| -Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the disk cache settings of the logical drive(s): -DskCache: Displays physical disk cache policy. Logical Drive Commands 4-15 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.8.4 Manage Consistency Check Use the command in Table 4.23 to manage a data consistency check (CC) on the logical drives for the selected adapter(s). Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts the consistency check when this command is issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives as needing a consistency check. The consistency check actually starts when the driver loads. 4.8.5 View Ongoing Background Initialization Use the command in Table 4.24 to view ongoing background initialization of the selected logical drives, after the -LDInit command has been issued to start the initialization. This function completes only when all Table 4.22 Manage Logical Drive Initialization Syntax CmdTool –LDInit –Start [Fast | Full] |-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply -Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Allows you to select the following actions for logical drive initialization: • -Start: Starts the initialization (writing 0s) on the logical drive(s) and displays the progress (this is optional). The fast initialization option initializes the first 100 Mbytes on the logical drive. The full option allows you to initialize the entire logical drive. • -Abort: Aborts the ongoing initialization on the LD(s). • -ShowProg: Displays the snapshot of the ongoing initialization, if any. • -ProgDsply: Displays the progress of the ongoing initialization until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed. Table 4.23 Manage Consistency Check Syntax CmdTool –LDCC –Start|-Abort|–ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx|-L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Allows you to select the following actions for a data consistency check: • -Start: Starts a CC on the logical drive(s), then displays the progress (optional) and time remaining. • -Abort: Aborts an ongoing CC on the logical drive(s). • -ShowProg: Displays a snapshot of an ongoing CC. • -ProgDsply: Displays ongoing CC progress until at least one CC is completed or a key is pressed. 4-16 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit. Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts initializing the logical drives when the -LDInit command is issued. You can then issue this -LDBI command to monitor the initialization progress. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for initialization. The initialization actually starts when the driver loads. 4.8.6 Display Logical Drive and Physical Drive Information Use the command in Table 4.25 to display information about the logical drives and physical disk drives for the selected adapter(s), such as the number of logical drives, RAID level, and physical disk drive size. Table 4.24 View Ongoing Background Initialization Syntax CmdTool –LDBI -Enbl|-Dsbl|-GetSetting|-ShowProg|-ProgDsply –Lx| -L0,1,2|-Lall -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays ongoing background initialization of the selected logical drives. This function completes only when all background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit. • -Enbl, -Dsbl: Enables or disables the background initialization on the given adapter(s). • -ProgDsply: Allows the user to view ongoing background initialization until all background initialization processes complete or the user presses a key to exit. • -ShowProg: Displays current progress value. • -GetSetting: Displays current background initialization setting (enabled or disabled). Table 4.25 Display Logical Drive and Physical Disk Drive Information Syntax CmdTool –LDPDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays information about the logical drive(s) and physical disk drive(s) on the selected adapter(s). Displays information including the number of logical drives, the RAID level of the logical drives, and physical drive size information, which includes raw size, coerced size, uncoerced size, and the SAS address. Physical Drive Commands 4-17 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.8.7 Display Number of Logical Drives Use the command in Table 4.26 to display the number of logical drives attached to the adapter. 4.9 Physical Drive Commands You can use the commands in this section to select settings for the physical disk drives and perform actions on them. 4.9.1 Display Physical Disk Drive Information Use the command in Table 4.27 to display information about the physical disk drives on the selected adapter(s). 4.9.2 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online Use the command in Table 4.28 to set the state of a physical disk drive to Online. In an online state, the physical drive is working normally and is a part of a configured logical drive. Table 4.26 Display Number of Logical Drives Syntax CmdTool –LDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the number of logical drives attached to the adapter. The return value is the number of logical drives. Table 4.27 Display Physical Disk Drive Information Syntax CmdTool –PDInfo -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] Description Provides information about the physical disk drives connected to the enclosure and adapter slot. The information includes the drive type, drive size, serial number, and firmware version. For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the SAS address of the drive. Table 4.28 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Online Syntax CmdTool –PDOnline -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Changes the physical disk drive state to Online. 4-18 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.9.3 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline Use the command in Table 4.29 to set the state of a physical disk drive to Offline. In the offline state, the logical drive is not available to the adapter. 4.9.4 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good Use the command in Table 4.30 to set the state of a physical disk drive from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good. 4.9.5 Manage Global Hotspares Use the command in Table 4.31 to manage the configuration and assignment of global hotspares. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA). Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is SAS and the array drives are SATA, or vice versa. Once the rebuild is completed, LSI recommends that you replace the new array member with a drive of the same type. 4.9.6 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive Use the command in Table 4.32 to start or stop a rebuild on a physical disk drive and display the rebuild progress. When a physical disk in an Table 4.29 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Offline Syntax CmdTool –PDOffline -PhysDrv[E0:S....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Changes the physical disk drive state to Offline. Table 4.30 Set Physical Disk Drive State to Unconfigured-Good Syntax CmdTool –PDMakeGood -PhysDrv[E0:Sn...] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Changes the physical disk drive state from Unconfigured-Bad to Unconfigured-Good. Table 4.31 Manage Hotspares Syntax CmdTool –PDHSP {–Set} -Rmv -PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description • -Set: Changes the physical disk drive state to hotspare for the enclosure. • -Rmv: Changes the physical drive state to ready (removes the hotspare). Physical Drive Commands 4-19 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. array fails, you can rebuild the physical disk by recreating the data that was stored on the physical disk before it failed. Note: In all operating system environments except DOS, the OS driver starts the rebuild when this command is issued. In DOS, however, there is no OS driver, so the MegaCLI CT just marks the drives for rebuild. The rebuild actually starts when the driver loads. 4.9.7 Locate Physical Disk Drive(s) and Activate LED Use the command in Table 4.33 to locate physical disk drive(s) by flashing the physical disk activity LED. 4.9.8 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild Use the command in Table 4.34 to replace a configured physical disk drive and start an automatic rebuild of the drive. Table 4.32 Rebuild Physical Disk Drive Syntax CmdTool –PDRbld –Start |-Stop|-ShowProg |-ProgDsply –PhysDrv [E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Manages a physical disk rebuild or displays the rebuild progress on one or more adapters. The physical disk must meet the size requirements before it can be rebuilt, and it must be part of an array: • -Start: Starts a rebuild on the selected physical drive(s) and displays the rebuild progress (optional). • -Stop: Stops an ongoing rebuild on the selected physical drive(s). • -ShowProg: Displays the current progress percentage and time remaining for the rebuild. This option is useful for running the application through scripts. • -ProgDsply: Displays the ongoing rebuild progress until at least one initialization is completed or a key is pressed. Table 4.33 Locate Physical Disk Drive and Flash LED Syntax CmdTool –PDLocate –PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Locates the physical disk drive(s) for the selected adapter(s) and flashes the disk activity LED. Table 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild Syntax CmdTool –PDReplaceMissing –PhysDrv[E0:Sn] –ArrayX –RowY -aN 4-20 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.9.9 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal Use the command in Table 4.35 to prepare an unconfigured physical disk drive(s) for removal from the selected adapter(s). 4.9.10 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives Use the command in Table 4.36 to display the total number of physical disk drives attached to an adapter. Drives can be attached directly or through enclosures. 4.9.11 Display List of Physical Drives Use the command in Table 4.37 to display a list of the physical drives connected to the selected adapter(s). Description Replaces the configured physical disk drives, then starts an automatic rebuild. The specified arrayIndex and row must be a missing drive. Table 4.34 Replace Configured Disk Drives and Start Automatic Rebuild (Cont.) Table 4.35 Prepare Unconfigured Physical Disk Drives for Removal Syntax CmdTool –PDPrpRmv [-Undo] –PhysDrv[E0:Sn....] -aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Prepares unconfigured physical drive(s) for removal. The drive is spun down, and the drive state is set to unaffiliated, which marks it as offline even though it is not a part of configuration. The -Undo option undoes this operation, and the firmware marks this physical disk as Unconfigured-Good. Table 4.36 Display Number of Physical Disk Drives Syntax CmdTool –PDGetNum –aN|-a0,1,2|-aALL Description Displays the total number of physical disk drives attached to an adapter. The return value is the number of physical disk drives. Table 4.37 Display List of Physical Drives Syntax CmdTool –PDList –aN|-a0,1..|-aAll Description Displays information about all physical disk drives connected to the selected adapter(s). This includes information such as the drive type, size, serial number, and firmware version. For SAS devices, this includes additional information such as the SAS address. Miscellaneous Commands 4-21 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 4.10 Miscellaneous Commands The commands in this section are used to display various information. 4.10.1 Display MegaCLI Version Use the command in Table 4.38 to display the version number of the MegaCLI utility. 4.10.2 Display MegaCLI Help Use the command in Table 4.39 to display help information for the MegaCLI utility. Table 4.38 Display MegaCLI Version Syntax CmdTool –v Description Displays the version number of the MegaCLI utility. Table 4.39 Display MegaCLI Help Syntax CmdTool –h|–Help|? Description Displays help for the MegaCLI utility. 4-22 MegaCLI Command Tool Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 5-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 5 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation MegaRAID Storage Manager software is a configuration and monitoring utility used with the Embedded MegaRAID Software. This chapter provides a brief overview of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software and explains how to install it on the supported operating systems. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 5.1, “Overview” • Section 5.2, “Hardware and Software Requirements” • Section 5.3, “Installation” 5.1 Overview MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to configure, monitor, and maintain storage configurations created under Embedded MegaRAID Software. The MegaRAID Storage Manager graphical user interface (GUI) makes it easy for you to create and manage storage configurations. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software can be used to manage a wide range of MegaRAID controllers. Some MegaRAID Storage Manager software features are not applicable for Embedded MegaRAID Software. 5.1.1 Creating Storage Configurations MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to easily configure the controllers, disk drives, and virtual disks on your workstation or server. The Configuration Wizard greatly simplifies the process of creating arrays and virtual disks. 5-2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. You can use the Configuration Wizard Auto Configuration mode to automatically create the best possible configuration with the available hardware. You can use the Guided Configuration mode, which asks you a few brief questions about the configuration, and then creates it for you. Or you can use the Manual Configuration mode, which gives you complete control over all aspects of the storage configuration. 5.1.2 Monitoring Storage Devices MegaRAID Storage Manager software displays the status of virtual disks, physical disks, and other storage devices on the workstation or server that you are monitoring. System errors and events are recorded in an event log file and are displayed on the screen. Special device icons appear on the screen to notify you of disk failures and other events that require immediate attention. 5.1.3 Maintaining Storage Configurations You can use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform system maintenance tasks such as running consistency checks on arrays that support redundancy. 5.2 Hardware and Software Requirements The hardware requirements for MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as follows: • PC-compatible computer with an IA-32 (32-bit) Intel Architecture processor or an EM64T (64-bit) processor and at least 128 Mbytes of system memory Note: LSI Logic recommends that you use at least 1 Gbyte of system memory. • Hard disk drive with at least 50 Mbytes available free space The supported operating systems for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as follows: • Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows Server 2003, and Microsoft Windows XP Installation 5-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Red Hat Linux 3.0 or 4.0 • SUSE SLES 9, with latest updates and service packs Refer to your server documentation and to the operating system documentation for more information on hardware and operating system requirements. 5.3 Installation This section explains how to install (or reinstall) MegaRAID Storage Manager software on your workstation or server for the supported operating systems: Microsoft Windows, Red Hat Linux, and SUSE Linux. 5.3.1 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software on Microsoft Windows Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows Server 2003, or Microsoft Windows XP: 1. Insert the MegaRAID Storage Manager software installation CD in the CD-ROM drive. If necessary, find and double-click the setup.exe file to start the installation program. 2. When the Welcome screen appears, click Next. If MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on this system, the Program Maintenance screen appears. Read the screen text and select Modify, Repair, or Remove. 3. When the next screen appears, read and accept the user license, and click Next. The Customer Information screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.1. 5-4 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 5.1 Customer Information Screen 4. Enter your user name and organization name. In the bottom part of the screen, select an installation option: – If you select All users, any user with administrative privileges can use this version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software to view or change storage configurations. – If you select Only for current user, the MegaRAID Storage Manager shortcuts and associated icons will be available only to the user with this user name. 5. Click Next to continue. 6. On the next screen, accept the default Destination Folder, or click Change to select a different destination folder. Click Next to continue. The Setup Type screen appears, as shown in Figure 5.2. Installation 5-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 5.2 Setup Type Screen 7. Select one of the Setup options. The options are fully explained in the screen text. – Normally, you would select Complete if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a server. – Select Client if you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a PC that will be used to view and configure servers over a network. – Select Server to install only those components required for remote server management. – Select StandAlone if you will use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and manage storage configurations on a standalone workstation. 8. Click Next to proceed. 9. Click Install to install the program. 10. Click Finish when the final Configuration Wizard screen appears. If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software), you cannot connect to a remote server unless you 5-6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. first edit the startupui.bat file. Specifically, you must add the IP address of the remote server to the end of the startupui.bat file. For example, to connect to a remote framework on server 192.168.0.10, add the IP address to the end of startupui.bat as shown in this example: start JRE\bin\javaw -classpath .;GUI.jar GUI.VivaldiStartupDialog ajsgyqkj=71244 192.168.0.10 Be sure to include a space in front of the IP address, as shown in the example. 5.3.2 Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager Software for Linux Follow these steps if you need to install MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a system running Red Hat Linux or SUSE Linux: 1. Copy the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file to a temporary folder. 2. Untar the MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz file using the following command: tar -zxvf MSM_linux_installer...tar.gz A new disk directory is created. 3. Go to the new disk directory. 4. In the disk directory, find and read the readme.txt file. 5. To start the installation, enter the following command: ./install.sh If you select Client installation for a PC used to monitor servers, and if there are no available servers with a registered framework on the local subnet (that is, servers with a complete installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software), you cannot connect to a remote server unless you first edit the startupui.sh file. Specifically, you must add the IP address of the remote server to the end of the startupui.sh file. For example, to connect to a remote framework on server 192.168.0.10, add the IP address to startupui.sh as shown in this example: start JRE\bin\javaw -classpath .;GUI.jar GUI.VivaldiStartupDialog ajsgyqkj=71244 192.168.0.10 Installation 5-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Be sure to include a space in front of the IP address, as shown in the example. 5.3.3 Linux Error Messages One or more of the following messages may appear while you are installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Linux system: • More than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software has been installed. This message indicates that the user has installed more than one copy of MegaRAID Storage Manager software. (This can be done by using the rpm-force command to install the rpm file directly, which is not recommended, instead of using the install.sh file.) In such cases, the user must uninstall all the rpm files manually before installing MegaRAID Storage Manager software with the procedure listed previously. • The version is already installed. This message indicates that the version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software you are trying to install is already installed on the system. • The installed version is newer. This message indicates that a version of MegaRAID Storage Manager software is already installed on the system, and it is a newer version than the version you are trying to install. • Exiting installation. This is the message that appears when the installation is complete. • RPM installation failed. This message indicates that the installation failed for some reason. Additional message text explains the cause of the failure. 5-8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Overview and Installation Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 6-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus This chapter explains how to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and menus. This chapter has the following sections: • Section 6.1, “Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software” • Section 6.2, “MegaRAID Storage Manager Window” 6.1 Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software Follow these steps to start MegaRAID Storage Manager software and view the main window: 1. Start the program using the method required for your operating system environment: – To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Microsoft Windows system, select Start -> Programs -> MegaRAID Storage Manager -> StartupUI, or double-click the MegaRAID Storage Manager shortcut on the desktop. Note: If a warning appears stating that Windows Firewall has blocked some features of the program, click Unblock to allow MegaRAID Storage Manager software to start. (The Windows Firewall sometimes blocks the operation of programs that use Java.) – To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a Red Hat Linux system, select Applications -> System Tools -> MegaRAID Storage Manager StartupUI. – To start MegaRAID Storage Manager software on a SUSE SLES 9 system, select Start -> System -> More Programs -> MegaRAID Storage Manager. 6-2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. When the program starts, the Select Server window appears, as shown in Figure 6.1. Figure 6.1 Select Server Window If the circle in the server icon is yellow instead of green, it means that the server is running in a degraded state—for example, because a disk drive used in a virtual disk has failed. If the circle is red, the storage configuration in the server has failed. Note: To access servers on a different subnet, type in the box at the bottom of the screen the IP address of a server in the desired subnet where MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, and click Update. If you check the Connect to remote Framework box, you can also access a standalone installation of MegaRAID Storage Manager software, if it has a network connection. 2. Double-click the icon of the server that you want to access. The Server Login window appears, as shown in Figure 6.2. Starting MegaRAID Storage Manager Software 6-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 6.2 Server Login Window 3. Select an access mode from the drop-down menu. – Select Full Access if you need to both view the current configuration and change the configuration. – Select View Only if you need to only view and monitor the configuration. 4. Enter your user name and password, and click Login. Note: If the computer is networked, this is the login to the computer itself, not the network login. You must enter the root/administrator user name and password to use Full Access mode. If your user name and password are correct for the Login mode you have chosen, the main MegaRAID Storage Manager window appears. 6-4 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window This section describes the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, which is shown in Figure 6.3. Figure 6.3 Main MegaRAID Storage Manager Window The following topics describe the panels and menu options that appear in this window. MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.1 Physical/Logical View Panel The left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays either the Physical view or the Logical view of the system and the devices in it, depending on which tab is selected. • The Physical view shows the hierarchy of physical devices in the system. At the top of the hierarchy is the system itself. One or more controllers are installed in the system. Each controller has one or more ports. Disk drives and other devices are attached to the ports. • The Logical view shows the hierarchy of controllers, virtual disks, and disk groups that are defined on the system. (Physical drives also appear in the Logical view, so you can see which physical drives are used by each virtual disk.) The following icons in the left panel represent the controllers, disk drives, and other devices: • System • Controller • Port • Array • Virtual disk • Physical drive A red circle to the right of an icon indicates that the device has failed. For example, this icon indicates that a physical drive has failed: . A yellow circle to the right of an icon indicates that a device is running in a degraded state. For example, this icon indicates that a virtual disk is running in a degraded state because a disk drive has failed: . 6-6 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.2 Properties/Operations/Graphical View Panel The right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window has either two or three tabs, depending on what kind of device is selected in the left panel. • The Properties tab displays information about the selected device. For example, if a controller icon is selected in the left panel, the Properties tab lists information such as the controller name and the device port count. For more information, see Section 8.2, “Monitoring Controllers,” Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives,” and Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks.” • The Operations tab lists the operations that can be performed on the device that is selected in the left panel. Some types of devices, such as arrays and ports, do not have operations associated with them. For more information, see Chapter 9, “Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations.” • The Graphical View tab can be selected in the right panel if a physical drive or virtual disk is selected in the left panel. In graphical view, the device’s storage capacity is color coded according to the legend shown on the screen. For example, on a physical drive configured space is blue, available space is white, and reserved space is red. For more information, see Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives,” and Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks.” 6.2.3 Event Log Panel The lower part of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window displays the system event log entries, as shown in Figure 6.3. New event log entries appear during the session. Each entry has a timestamp and date, an error level indicating the severity of the event, and a brief description of the event. For more information about the event log, see Section 8.1, “Monitoring System Events.” For more information about the event log entries, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.” MegaRAID Storage Manager Window 6-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.4 Menu Bar Here are brief descriptions of the main selections on the MegaRAID Storage Manager menu bar. Specific menu options are described in more detail in Chapters 7, 8, and 9 of this manual. 6.2.4.1 File Menu The File menu has an Exit option for exiting from the MegaRAID Storage Manager software. It also has a Rescan option for updating the display in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. (Rescan is seldom required; the display normally updates automatically.) 6.2.4.2 Operations Menu The Operations menu is available when a controller, physical drive, or logical drive is selected in the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. The Operations menu options vary depending on what type of device is selected in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. The options also vary depending on the current state of the selected device. For example, if you select an offline physical drive, the Make Drive Online option appears in the Operations menu. You can also view the Operations selections on the main window on the Operations tab in the right panel. If an operation requires user inputs before it can be executed, it appears in the Operations tab but not in the Operations menu. A device-specific Operations menu pops up if you right-click a device icon in the left panel. An Advanced Operations submenu is also available. This is where you access the Configuration Wizard and other configuration-related commands. To access this menu, select Operations -> Advanced Operations. 6.2.4.3 Group Operations Menu The Group Operations menu options include Check Consistency, Initialize, and Show Progress. 6-8 MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 6.2.4.4 Log Menu The Log menu includes options for saving and clearing the message log. For more information, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.” 6.2.4.5 Help Menu On the Help menu you can select Help -> Help to view the MegaRAID Storage Manager software online help file. You can select Help -> About to view version information for the MegaRAID Storage Manager software. Note: When you use the MegaRAID Storage Manager software online help, you may see a warning message that Internet Explorer has restricted the file from showing active content. If this warning appears, click on the active content warning bar and enable the active content. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 7-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 7 Configuration You use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to create and modify storage configurations. RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 storage configurations are supported. Important: LSI recommends that you do not use both SAS and SATA drives in the same array. Using different drive interfaces in this way could cause unpredictable behavior, decreased performance, an increased error count, and decreased MTBF. Note: You cannot create or modify a storage configuration unless you are logged on to a server with administrator privileges. This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform the following configuration tasks: • Section 7.1, “Creating a New Storage Configuration” • Section 7.2, “Adding Hotspare Disks” • Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates” • Section 7.4, “Changing Virtual Disk Properties” • Section 7.5, “Deleting a Virtual Disk” • Section 7.6, “Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk” • Section 7.7, “Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller” • Section 7.8, “Adding a Saved Storage Configuration” 7-2 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.1 Creating a New Storage Configuration You can use the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard to create new storage configurations. To open the MegaRAID Storage Manager Configuration Wizard, select a controller in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and then select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Configuration Wizard. Figure 7.1 shows the first Configuration Wizard screen. Figure 7.1 First Configuration Wizard Screen The menu lists three configuration modes: • Auto Configuration automatically creates an optimal configuration from the available disk drives. • Manual Configuration gives you the greatest level of control in creating a new virtual disk. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. • Guided Configuration asks you a few simple questions about what kind of configuration you want and then automatically creates it from the available disk drives. Note: You can use Auto, Guided, or Manual mode to create a RAID 0, or RAID 1 configuration. To create a RAID 10 configuration, you must use the Manual Configuration mode. The following subsections explain how to use the Configuration Wizard to create storage configurations: • Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters” • Section 7.1.2, “Using Auto Configuration” • Section 7.1.3, “Using Guided Configuration” • Section 7.1.4, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0” • Section 7.1.5, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1” • Section 7.1.6, “Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10” 7.1.1 Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters This section describes the Virtual Disk Parameters that you can set when you use the Guided Configuration or Manual Configuration modes of the Configuration Wizard. You should change these parameters only if you have a specific reason for doing so. It is usually best to leave them at their default settings. • Stripe Size: A stripe size of 64 Kbytes is supported. • Disk Cache Policy: Select a cache setting for this disk: Unchanged, Enabled, or Disabled. • Init State: – No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized and the existing data on the disks is not overwritten. – Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new virtual disk. – Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new configuration. This may take a long time if the disks are large. 7-4 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.1.2 Using Auto Configuration Auto Configuration is the quickest and simplest way to create a new storage configuration. When you select Auto Configuration mode on the first Configuration Wizard screen, the Configuration Wizard creates the best configuration possible using the available physical disks. Figure 7.2 shows the Auto Configuration screen. Figure 7.2 Auto Configuration Screen Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Auto Configuration mode: 1. Select a redundancy option from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the Auto Configuration window: – No Redundancy: The new configuration will have no data redundancy (RAID 0). If a physical disk in the configuration fails, all data will be lost. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. – With Redundancy: The new configuration will have data redundancy via mirrored data (RAID 1). If a physical disk fails, data is still protected. 2. Select an initialization option from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the window: – No Initialization: The new configuration is not initialized, and the existing data on the disks is not overwritten. – Fast Initialization: MegaRAID Storage Manager software quickly writes zeroes to the first and last 8 Mbyte regions of the new virtual disk. – Full Initialization: A complete initialization is done on the new configuration. This may take a long time if the disks are large. 3. (Optional) Click Modify if you want to switch to Manual Configuration mode so you can modify the suggested Auto Configuration. When you click Modify, the Virtual Disk Creation screen appears. Select the new virtual disk, and click Reclaim. Then select the new array from the Arrays with Free Space list, and change the virtual disk parameters as needed. 4. Click Finish. The new storage configuration will be created and initialized (unless you selected No Initialization). 7.1.3 Using Guided Configuration Guided Configuration provides an easy way to create a new storage configuration. Based on the information that is provided, the Configuration Wizard uses the available disk drives to create an optimal storage configuration. Figure 7.3 shows the first screen that appears when you select Guided Configuration. 7-6 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 7.3 First Guided Configuration Screen Follow these steps to create a new storage configuration in Guided Configuration mode: 1. Select a redundancy option at the top of the Guided Configuration window: – Redundancy Only: Create a configuration only if redundancy (RAID 1) is possible. – Redundancy when possible: Create a redundant configuration if possible. Otherwise, create a non-redundant configuration. – No Redundancy: Create a non-redundant configuration. 2. Choose whether you want to use existing arrays in the new virtual disk. The options are: – Use Existing Arrays Only – Don’t Use Existing Arrays – Use Existing and New Arrays The first and third options are disabled if there are no available existing arrays. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 3. Select a maximum number of virtual disks to be created. The Configuration Wizard may not be able to create as many virtual disks as you want, depending on the current configuration and the number of virtual disks that have already been created. 4. Click Next to continue to the next window, as shown in Figure 7.4. Figure 7.4 Second Guided Configuration Screen 5. Change the default volume parameters in this window, if needed. In the top section of the window you can specify the number of virtual disks to create. You can also choose to use less than the full capacity of this array for the virtual disk(s). (You could do this to leave capacity available for other virtual disks that you create later.) To learn about the Stripe Size and other virtual disk parameters, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters,” page 7-3. 6. Click Next to continue to the next window. 7. Check the configuration that you have just defined. If it is acceptable, click Finish. If you want to change something, click Back to return to the previous windows. 7-8 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.1.4 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 0 Follow these steps to create a RAID 0 storage configuration using the Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard. Figure 7.5 shows the first screen that appears when you select Manual Configuration. Figure 7.5 First Manual Configuration Screen 1. In the first Manual Configuration window, select two or more available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected drives to the right panel. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software will not allow you to select the disk drive on which the operating system is installed or any other drives that are already part of a configuration. 2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 0 array. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Note: To remove a single drive from a proposed new array, select the drive icon in the right panel and click the Left Arrow button. 3. Click Next. The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in Figure 7.6. Figure 7.6 Manual Configuration – Defining a Virtual Disk The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new array that you just defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could be used for a new configuration. 4. From the Arrays with Free Space menu, select the array to use for the new virtual disk. 5. In the right panel, select RAID 0 as the RAID level. 6. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to use the entire available capacity for the new virtual disk. 7. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.” 7-10 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 8. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk. Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk that you just defined. 9. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step. The Virtual Disk Summary window appears. 10. Review the configuration shown in the Virtual Disk Summary window. If you want to change something, click Back and change the configuration parameters. 11. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier). 7.1.5 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 1 Follow these steps to create a RAID 1 storage configuration using the Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard: 1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select two available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected drives to the right panel. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software will not allow you to select the disk drive on which the operating system is installed or any other drives that are already part of a configuration. 2. Click Accept to accept these drives for the new RAID 1 array. 3. To add a hotspare to an array, select an available drive in the left panel. Select the array from the drop-down menu, and click Add Hotspare To, as shown in Figure 7.7. Creating a New Storage Configuration 7-11 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 7.7 Manual Configuration – Adding a Hotspare 4. To remove a hotspare from an array, select it in the right panel and click Remove HotSpare. 5. Click Next. The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in Figure 7.6. The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new array(s) that you just defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could be used for a new configuration. 6. Select the array to use for the new virtual disk. 7. In the right panel, select RAID 1 as the RAID level. 8. (Optional) Set Size (in MB) to a lower number if you do not want to use the entire available capacity for the new virtual disk. 9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.” 10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk. 7-12 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk that you just defined. 11. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step. The Virtual Disk Summary window appears. 12. Review the configuration shown in the window. If you want to change something, click Back and change the configuration parameters. 13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier). 7.1.6 Using Manual Configuration: RAID 10 Follow these steps to create a RAID 10 storage configuration using the Manual Configuration mode of the Configuration Wizard: 1. In the first Manual Configuration window, shown in Figure 7.5, select two available drives in the left panel. Click the Right Arrow button to move the selected drives to the right panel. 2. Click Accept to accept these drives for a new RAID 1 array. 3. Select two more drives for a second RAID 1 array, and click Accept. 4. To add a hotspare, select an available drive in the left panel. Select the array from the drop-down menu, and click Add Hotspare To, as shown in Figure 7.7. 5. To remove a hotspare from an array, select it in the right panel and click Remove HotSpare. 6. Click Next. The next Configuration Wizard window appears, as shown in Figure 7.6. The Arrays with Free Space menu lists the new arrays that you just defined, plus any existing arrays with holes (free space) that could be used for a new configuration. 7. In the left panel, select the two RAID 1 arrays from the menu. 8. In the right panel, select RAID 10 as the RAID level. For a RAID 10 array, the entire capacity of the array is automatically used for the new virtual disk. You cannot define another virtual disk on this array. Adding Hotspare Disks 7-13 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 9. (Optional) Change the other Virtual Disk Properties, if necessary. For more information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.” 10. Click Accept to accept the configuration of the new virtual disk. Note: Click the Reclaim button if you want to undo a virtual disk that you just defined. 11. Click Next to continue with the next configuration step. The Virtual Disk Summary window appears. 12. Review the configuration shown in the window. If you want to change something, click Back and change the configuration parameters. 13. Click Finish to accept the configuration and start the initialization process (unless you selected No Initialization earlier). 7.2 Adding Hotspare Disks Hotspares are disk drives that are available to automatically replace failed drives in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 virtual disk. Only global hotspares are supported for Embedded MegaRAID Software. To add a global hotspare disk, follow these steps: 1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick the icon of any unused disk drive. 2. Select Make Global Hotspare. Make sure the capacity of the hotspare drive is equal to or larger than the capacity of the disks in the array and that it is the same type of drive (SAS or SATA). Note: The hotspare drive will rebuild a failed drive even if it is SAS and the array drives are SATA, or vice versa. Once the rebuilt is completed, LSI recommends that you replace the new array member with a drive of the same type. 7-14 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.3 Changing Adjustable Task Rates Follow these steps if you need to change the adjustable rates for rebuilds and other system tasks that run in the background: Note: LSI recommends that you leave the adjustable task rates at their default settings to achieve the best system performance. If you raise the task rates above the defaults, foreground tasks will run more slowly and it may seem that the system is not responding. If you lower the task rates below the defaults, rebuilds and other background tasks may run very slowly and may not complete within a reasonable time. If you decide to change the values, record the original default value here so you can restore them later, if necessary: Rebuild Rate: ____________ Background Initialization (BGI) Rate: ____________ Check Consistency Rate: ____________ 1. Select the Physical View tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and select a controller icon. 2. In the right panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select the Operations tab, and select Set Adjustable Task Rates. The task rates appear in the right panel. 3. Enter changes, as needed, to the task rates for Rebuild Rate, Background Initialization (BGI) Rate (for fast initialization), and Check Consistency Rate (for consistency checks). Each task rate can be set from 0 to 100. The higher the number, the faster the activity will run in the background, possibly impacting other system tasks. 4. Click Go to accept the new task rates. 5. When the warning message appears, click OK to confirm that you want to change the task rates. Changing Virtual Disk Properties 7-15 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.4 Changing Virtual Disk Properties You can change a virtual disk’s Read Policy, Write Policy, and other properties at any time after the virtual disk is created. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Select a virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. In the right panel, select the Properties tab, and then select Set Virtual Disk Properties. A list of Virtual Disk Properties appears in the right panel. 3. Change the virtual disk properties as needed in the right panel. For information on these properties, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters,” page 7-3. Note: Only the Disk Write Cache and Read Ahead functions are supported in Embedded MegaRAID Software. 4. Click Go to accept the changes. 7.5 Deleting a Virtual Disk Caution: Be sure to back up the data on the virtual disk before you delete it. Be sure that the operating system is not installed on this virtual disk. You can delete virtual disks to rearrange the storage space. To delete a virtual disk, follow these steps: 1. Back up all user data that is on the virtual disk you intend to delete. 2. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, select the Logical tab, and click the icon of the virtual disk you want to delete. 3. In the right panel, select the Operations tab, and select Delete Virtual Disk. 4. Click Go. 5. When the warning message appears, click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the virtual disk. 7-16 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.6 Saving a Storage Configuration to Disk You can save an existing controller configuration to a file so you can apply it to another controller. To save a configuration file, follow these steps: 1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Save Configuration. The Save dialog box appears. 3. In the Save dialog box, type a name for the configuration file, or accept the default name (hostname.cfg). 4. Click Save to save the configuration file. 7.7 Clearing a Storage Configuration from a Controller You can use the Add New Configuration option to add a new storage configuration while keeping the existing configuration. Alternatively, you can clear the existing storage configuration from a controller and then create a totally new configuration or load a previously saved configuration file. Caution: Before you clear a configuration, be sure to save any data that you want to keep. Clearing a configuration deletes all data from the disks of the existing configuration. Be sure that the operating system is not installed on this configuration. To clear a configuration from a controller, follow these steps: 1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Clear Configuration. A Warning message appears. 3. Click Yes to clear the configuration or No to cancel the operation. Adding a Saved Storage Configuration 7-17 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 7.8 Adding a Saved Storage Configuration When you replace a controller, or when you want to duplicate an existing storage configuration on a new controller, you can add a saved configuration to the controller. Caution: When you add a saved configuration to a replacement controller, be sure that the number and size of the physical disks connected to the controller are exactly the same as when the configuration was saved. To add a saved configuration, follow these steps: 1. Select a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. 2. On the menu bar, select Operations -> Advanced Operations -> Configuration -> Add Saved Configuration. A Warning message appears. 3. Click Yes. 4. When the Open dialog box appears, select the configuration file, and click Open. 5. View the configuration detail, then select Apply. 6. Confirm the new configuration when prompted. 7-18 Configuration Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 8-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices The MegaRAID Storage Manager software enables you to monitor the status of disk drives, virtual disks, and other storage devices. This chapter explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to perform the following monitoring tasks: • Section 8.1, “Monitoring System Events” • Section 8.2, “Monitoring Controllers” • Section 8.3, “Monitoring Disk Drives” • Section 8.4, “Monitoring Virtual Disks” • Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” 8.1 Monitoring System Events MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the system and the storage devices connected to them. When an event occurs (such as the creation of a new virtual disk or the removal of a physical drive) an event message appears in the log displayed at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. Each event in the log includes an error level (Information, Warning, Caution, Fatal, or Dead) a date and timestamp, and a brief description. (For a list of all events, see Appendix A, “Events and Messages.”) The Log menu has three options: • Save Log: Saves the current log to a file. • Clear Log: Clears the current log information. • Load Log: Enables you to load a different log file. 8-2 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 8.2 Monitoring Controllers Note: The Embedded MegaRAID Software drivers act as virtual “controllers.” Because these are not actual hardware storage controllers installed in the computer system, some of the controller properties shown in the screen below do not apply to them. When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the status of all controllers in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. If the controller is operating normally, the controller icon looks like this: . If the controller has failed, a small red circle appears to the right of the icon. (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.) To display complete controller information, click a controller icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.1 shows the Controller Information window. Figure 8.1 Controller Information Monitoring Disk Drives 8-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Most of the information on this screen is self-explanatory. Note the following: • The Rebuild Rate, Consistency Check Rate, and BGI Rate (background initialization) are all user selectable. For more information, see Section 7.3, “Changing Adjustable Task Rates,” page 7-14. • The BBU Present field indicates whether a battery backup unit is installed. The Alarm Present and Alarm Enabled fields indicate whether the controller has an alarm to alert the user with an audible tone when there is an error or problem on the controller. There are options on the controller Properties tab for silencing or disabling the alarm. 8.3 Monitoring Disk Drives When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the status of all physical disk drives in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. If the disk drive is operating normally, its icon looks like this: . If the disk drive has failed, a small red circle appears to the right of the icon, like this: . (See Section 6.2.1, “Physical/Logical View Panel” for a complete list of device icons.) To display complete disk drive information, click a disk drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.2 shows the Properties panel for a physical drive. 8-4 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 8.2 Physical Drive Information The information on this panel is self-explanatory. There are no userselectable properties for physical devices. Icons for other storage devices such as CD-ROM drives and DAT drives may also appear in the left panel. The next release of Embedded MegaRAID Software will enable you to identify which physical drive is represented by a disk icon on the left by blinking the drive’s LED. (This will work only for drives that are in a disk enclosure.) The procedure for doing this is as follows: 1. Click the physical disk icon in the left panel. 2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel. 3. Select Locate Physical Drive, and click Go. The LED on the physical disk drive in the enclosure starts blinking to show its location. 4. To stop the disk drive light from blinking, select Stop Locating Physical Drive, and click Go. Monitoring Virtual Disks 8-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To display a graphical view of a disk drive, click on a drive icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the drive’s storage capacity is color coded according to the legend shown on the screen: configured space is blue, available space is white, and reserved space is red. When you select a virtual disk from the drop-down menu, the disk space used by that virtual disk is displayed in green. 8.4 Monitoring Virtual Disks When MegaRAID Storage Manager software is running, you can see the status of all virtual disks. If a virtual disk is operating normally, the icon looks like this: . If the virtual disk is running in Degraded mode (for example, if a physical disk has failed) a small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon: . When the Logical tab is selected, the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window shows which physical disks are used by each virtual disk. The same physical disk can be used by multiple virtual disks. To display complete virtual disk information, click the Logical tab in the left panel, click on a virtual disk icon in the left panel, and click the Properties tab in the right panel. Figure 8.3 shows the Properties panel for a virtual disk. 8-6 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Figure 8.3 Virtual Disk Properties The RAID level, stripe size, and access policy of the virtual disk are set when it is configured. Note: You can change the read policy, write policy, and other virtual disk properties by selecting Operations->Set Virtual Disk Properties. The next release of Embedded MegaRAID Software will enable you to identify which physical drives are used in a virtual disk by blinking the drive LEDs. (This will work only for drives that are in a disk enclosure.) The procedure for doing this is as follows: 1. Click the virtual disk icon in the left panel. 2. Click the Operations tab in the right panel. 3. Select Locate Virtual Disk, and click Go. The LEDs on the physical disk drives in the virtual disk start blinking (except for hotspare drives). 4. To stop the LEDs from blinking, select Stop Locating Virtual Disk, and click Go. Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes 8-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To display a graphical view of a virtual disk, click on a virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the Graphical View tab. In Graphical View, the disk group (array) used for this virtual disk is shaded blue to show how much of the disk group capacity is used by this virtual disk. If part of the disk group is shaded white, this indicates that some of the capacity is used by another virtual disk. In a RAID 10 configuration, two disk groups are used by one virtual disk. 8.5 Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes MegaRAID Storage Manager software allows you to monitor the progress of rebuilds and other lengthy processes in the Group Show Progress window. Open this window, shown in Figure 8.4 by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress on the menu bar. Figure 8.4 Group Show Progress Window 8-8 Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Operations on virtual disks appear in the left panel of the Group Show Progress window, and operations on physical drives appear in the right panel. The following operations appear in this window: • Background or foreground initialization of a virtual disk • Rebuild (see Section 9.3, “Rebuilding a Drive”) • Consistency check (see Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency Check”) To abort an ongoing process, click the Abort button next to the status indicator. Click Abort All to abort all ongoing processes. Click Close to close the window. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide 9-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Chapter 9 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations This section explains how to use MegaRAID Storage Manager software to maintain and manage storage configurations. This chapter explains how to perform the following tasks: • Section 9.1, “Initializing a Virtual Disk” • Section 9.2, “Running a Consistency Check” • Section 9.3, “Rebuilding a Drive” • Section 9.4, “Making a Drive Offline” 9.1 Initializing a Virtual Disk To initialize a virtual disk after completing the configuration process, follow these steps: 1. Select the Logical tab in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, and click the icon of the virtual disk that you want to initialize. 2. Select Group Operations->Initialize. The Group Initialize dialog box appears. 3. Select the virtual disk(s) to initialize. Caution: Initialization erases all data on the virtual disk. Be sure to back up any data you want to keep before you initialize. Be sure the operating system is not installed on the virtual disk you are initializing. 4. Select the Fast Initialization check box if you want to use this option. If you leave the box unchecked, MegaRAID Storage Manager software will run a Full Initialization on the virtual disk. (For more 9-2 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. information, see Section 7.1.1, “Understanding Virtual Disk Parameters.”) 5. Click Start to begin the initialization. You can monitor the progress of the initialization. See Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more information. 9.2 Running a Consistency Check You should periodically run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual disks. It is especially important to do this if you suspect that the virtual disk consistency data may be corrupted. Be sure to back up the data before running a consistency check, if you think the consistency data may be corrupted. To run a consistency check, follow these steps: 1. Select Group Operations->Check Consistency. The Group Consistency Check window appears. 2. Select the virtual disks that you want to check, or click Select All to select all virtual disks. 3. Click Start to begin. You can monitor the progress of the consistency check. See Section 8.5, “Monitoring Rebuilds and Other Processes” for more information. Note: You can also run a consistency check by selecting the virtual disk icon in the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window and selecting the option on the Operation tab in the right panel. 9.3 Rebuilding a Drive If a single drive in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 virtual disk fails, the system is protected from data loss. The failed drive must be replaced, and the drive’s data must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system to fault tolerance. (You can choose to rebuild the data on the failed drive Making a Drive Offline 9-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. if the drive is still operational.) If hotspare disks are available, the failed drive is rebuilt automatically without any user intervention. If a drive has failed, a red circle appears to the right of the disk drive icon: . A small yellow circle appears to the right of the icon of the virtual disk that uses this physical disk: . This indicates that the virtual disk is in a degraded state; the data is still safe, but data could be lost if another drive fails. Follow these steps if you need to rebuild a physical drive: 1. Right-click the icon of the failed drive, and select Rebuild. 2. Click Yes when the warning message appears. If the drive is still good, a rebuild will start. You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress. If the drive cannot be rebuilt, an error message appears. Continue with the next step. 3. Shut down the system, disconnect the power cord, and open the computer case. 4. Replace the failed disk drive with a new drive of equal capacity. 5. Close the computer case, reconnect the power cord, and restart the computer. 6. Restart the MegaRAID Storage Manager software. When the new drive spins up, the drive icon changes back to normal status, and the rebuild process begins automatically. You can monitor the progress of the rebuild in the Group Show Progress window by selecting Group Operations->Show Progress. 9.4 Making a Drive Offline If a disk drive is currently part of a redundant configuration and you want to use it in another configuration, you can use MegaRAID Storage Manager commands to remove the disk drive from the first configuration. When you do this, all data on that drive is lost. 9-4 Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. To remove the disk drive from the configuration without harming the data on the virtual disk, follow these steps: 1. In the left panel of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window, rightclick the icon of a disk drive in a redundant virtual disk. 2. Select Make drive offline from the pop-up menu. The disk drive status changes to Offline. 3. Select File->Rescan. The disk drive status remains as Offline. At this point, the data on this disk drive is no longer valid. 4. If necessary, create a hotspare disk for the virtual disk from which you removed the disk drive. (See Section 7.2, “Adding Hotspare Disks.”) When a hotspare is available, the data on the virtual disk will be rebuilt. You can now use the removed disk for another configuration. Caution: If MegaRAID Storage Manager software detects that a disk drive in a virtual disk has failed, it makes the drive Offline. If this happens, you must remove the disk drive and replace it. You cannot make the drive usable for another configuration by using the Rescan command. Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide A-1 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Appendix A Events and Messages This appendix lists the MegaRAID Storage Manager software events that may appear in the event log. MegaRAID Storage Manager software monitors the activity and performance of all controllers in the workstation and the devices attached to them. When an event occurs, such as the start of an initialization, an event message appears in the log at the bottom of the MegaRAID Storage Manager window. Note: MegaRAID Storage Manager software can be used to manage a wide range of MegaRAID controllers. Some of the events and messages listed in this appendix are not applicable to Embedded MegaRAID Software. Each message that appears in the event log has an error level that indicates the severity of the event, as shown in Table A.1. Table A.2 lists all of the MegaRAID Storage Manager software event messages. The event message descriptions include placeholders for specific values that are determined when the event is generated. Some of the error messages are relevant only for hardware RAID. Table A.1 Event Error Levels Error Level Meaning Information Informational message; no user action is necessary. Warning Some component may be close to a failure point. Caution A component has failed, but the system has not lost data. Fatal A component has failed, and data loss has occurred or will occur. Dead A catastrophic error has occurred, and the controller has died. This event is seen only after the controller has been restarted. A-2 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Table A.2 Event Messages Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text 0x0000 0 Information Firmware initialization started (PCI ID %04x/%04x/%04x/%04x) 0x0001 1 Information Firmware version %s 0x0002 2 Fatal Unable to recover cache data from TBBU 0x0003 3 Information Cache data recovered from TBBU successfully 0x0004 4 Information Configuration cleared 0x0005 5 Warning Cluster down; communication with peer lost 0x0006 6 Information %s ownership changed from %02x to %02x 0x0007 7 Information Alarm disabled by user 0x0008 8 Information Alarm enabled by user 0x0009 9 Information Background initialization rate changed to %d%% 0x000a 10 Fatal Controller cache discarded due to memory/battery problems 0x000b 11 Fatal Unable to recover cache data due to configuration mismatch 0x000c 12 Information Cache data recovered successfully 0x000d 13 Fatal Controller cache discarded due to firmware version incompatibility 0x000e 14 Information Consistency Check rate changed to %d%% 0x000f 15 Dead Fatal firmware error: %s 0x0010 16 Information Factory defaults restored 0x0011 17 Information Flash downloaded image corrupt 0x0012 18 Caution Flash erase error 0x0013 19 Caution Flash timeout during erase 0x0014 20 Caution Flash error 0x0015 21 Information Flashing image: %s 0x0016 22 Information Flash of new firmware image(s) complete 0x0017 23 Caution Flash programming error 0x0018 24 Caution Flash timeout during programming 0x0019 25 Caution Flash chip type unknown 0x001a 26 Caution Flash command set unknown 0x001b 27 Caution Flash verify failure 0x001c 28 Information Flush rate changed to %d seconds 0x001d 29 Information Hibernate command received from host (Sheet 1 of 9) A-3 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x001e 30 Information Event log cleared 0x001f 31 Information Event log wrapped 0x0020 32 Dead Multi-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s) 0x0021 33 Warning Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s) 0x0022 34 Dead Not enough controller memory 0x0023 35 Information Patrol Read complete 0x0024 36 Information Patrol Read paused 0x0025 37 Information Patrol Read Rate changed to %d%% 0x0026 38 Information Patrol Read resumed 0x0027 39 Information Patrol Read started 0x0028 40 Information Rebuild rate changed to %d%% 0x0029 41 Information Reconstruction rate changed to %d%% 0x002a 42 Information Shutdown command received from host 0x002b 43 Information Test event: %s 0x002c 44 Information Time established as %s; (%d seconds since power on) 0x002d 45 Information User entered firmware debugger 0x002e 46 Warning Background Initialization aborted on %s 0x002f 47 Warning Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at %lx 0x0030 48 Information Background Initialization completed on %s 0x0031 49 Fatal Background Initialization corrected medium error (%s at %lx, %s at %lx) 0x0032 50 Fatal Background Initialization detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at %lx on %s) 0x0033 51 Caution Background Initialization failed on %s 0x0034 52 Progress Background Initialization progress on %s is %s 0x0035 53 Information Background Initialization started on %s 0x0036 54 Information Policy change on %s from %s to %s 0x0038 56 Warning Consistency Check aborted on %s 0x0039 57 Warning Consistency Check corrected medium error (%s at %lx, %s at %lx) 0x003a 58 Information Consistency Check done on %s 0x003b 59 Information Consistency Check done with corrections on %s, (corrections=%d) Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 2 of 9) A-4 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x003c 60 Fatal Consistency Check detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at %lx on %s) 0x003d 61 Caution Consistency Check failed on %s 0x003e 62 Fatal Consistency Check failed with uncorrectable data on %s 0x003f 63 Warning Consistency Check found inconsistent parity on %s at strip %lx 0x0040 64 Warning Consistency Check inconsistency logging disabled on %s (too many inconsistencies) 0x0041 65 Progress Consistency Check progress on %s is %s 0x0042 66 Information Consistency Check started on %s 0x0043 67 Warning Initialization aborted on %s 0x0044 68 Caution Initialization failed on %s 0x0045 69 Progress Initialization progress on %s is %s 0x0046 70 Information Fast initialization started on %s 0x0047 71 Information Full initialization started on %s 0x0048 72 Information Initialization complete on %s 0x0049 73 Information Properties updated to %s (from %s) 0x004a 74 Information Reconstruction complete on %s 0x004b 75 Fatal Reconstruction of %s stopped due to unrecoverable errors 0x004c 76 Fatal Reconstruct detected uncorrectable double medium errors (%s at %lx on %s at %lx) 0x004d 77 Progress Reconstruction progress on %s is %s 0x004e 78 Information Reconstruction resumed on %s 0x004f 79 Fatal Reconstruction resume of %s failed due to configuration mismatch 0x0050 80 Information Reconstructing started on %s 0x0051 81 Information State change on %s from %s to %s 0x0052 82 Information Clear aborted on %s 0x0053 83 Caution Clear failed on %s (Error %02x) 0x0054 84 Progress Clear progress on %s is %s 0x0055 85 Information Clear started on %s 0x0056 86 Information Clear completed on %s 0x0057 87 Warning Error on %s (Error %02x) Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 3 of 9) A-5 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x0058 88 Information Format complete on %s 0x0059 89 Information Format started on %s 0x005a 90 Caution Hot Spare SMART polling failed on %s (Error %02x) 0x005b 91 Information Inserted: %s 0x005c 92 Warning %s is not supported 0x005d 93 Warning Patrol Read corrected medium error on %s at %lx 0x005e 94 Progress Patrol Read progress on %s is %s 0x005f 95 Fatal Patrol Read found an uncorrectable medium error on %s at %lx 0x0060 96 Caution Predictive failure: %s 0x0061 97 Fatal Puncturing bad block on %s at %lx 0x0062 98 Information Rebuild aborted by user on %s 0x0063 99 Information Rebuild complete on %s 0x0064 100 Information Rebuild complete on %s 0x0065 101 Caution Rebuild failed on %s due to source drive error 0x0066 102 Caution Rebuild failed on %s due to target drive error 0x0067 103 Progress Rebuild progress on %s is %s 0x0068 104 Information Rebuild resumed on %s 0x0069 105 Information Rebuild started on %s 0x006a 106 Information Rebuild automatically started on %s 0x006b 107 Caution Rebuild stopped on %s due to loss of cluster ownership 0x006c 108 Fatal Reassign write operation failed on %s at %lx 0x006d 109 Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during rebuild on %s at %lx 0x006e 110 Information Corrected medium error during recovery on %s at %lx 0x006f 111 Fatal Unrecoverable medium error during recovery on %s at %lx 0x0070 112 Information Removed: %s 0x0071 113 Warning Unexpected sense: %s, CDB%s, Sense: %s 0x0072 114 Information State change on %s from %s to %s 0x0073 115 Information State change by user on %s from %s to %s 0x0074 116 Warning Redundant path to %s broken 0x0075 117 Information Redundant path to %s restored Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 4 of 9) A-6 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x0076 118 Information Dedicated Hot Spare PD %s no longer useful due to deleted array 0x0077 119 Caution SAS topology error: Loop detected 0x0078 120 Caution SAS topology error: Unaddressable device 0x0079 121 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple ports to the same SAS address 0x007a 122 Caution SAS topology error: Expander error 0x007b 123 Caution SAS topology error: SMP timeout 0x007c 124 Caution SAS topology error: Out of route entries 0x007d 125 Caution SAS topology error: Index not found 0x007e 126 Caution SAS topology error: SMP function failed 0x007f 127 Caution SAS topology error: SMP CRC error 0x0080 128 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple subtractive 0x0081 129 Caution SAS topology error: Table to table 0x0082 130 Caution SAS topology error: Multiple paths 0x0083 131 Fatal Unable to access device %s 0x0084 132 Information Dedicated Hot Spare created on %s (%s) 0x0085 133 Information Dedicated Hot Spare %s (%s) disabled 0x0086 134 Caution Dedicated Hot Spare %s no longer useful for all arrays 0x0087 135 Information Global Hot Spare created on %s (%s) 0x0088 136 Information Global Hot Spare %s (%s) disabled 0x0089 137 Caution Global Hot Spare %s does not cover all arrays 0x008a 138 Information Created %s 0x008b 139 Information Deleted %s 0x008c 140 Information Marking %s inconsistent due to active writes at shutdown 0x008d 141 Information Battery Present 0x008e 142 Warning Battery Not Present 0x008f 143 Information New Battery Detected 0x0090 144 Information Battery has been replaced 0x0091 145 Caution Battery temperature is high 0x0092 146 Warning Battery voltage low 0x0093 147 Information Battery started charging Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 5 of 9) A-7 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x0094 148 Information Battery is discharging 0x0095 149 Information Battery temperature is normal 0x0096 150 Fatal Battery needs replacement - SOH Bad 0x0097 151 Information Battery relearn started 0x0098 152 Information Battery relearn in progress 0x0099 153 Information Battery relearn completed 0x009a 154 Caution Battery relearn timed out 0x009b 155 Information Battery relearn pending: Battery is under charge 0x009c 156 Information Battery relearn postponed 0x009d 157 Information Battery relearn will start in 4 days 0x009e 158 Information Battery relearn will start in 2 day 0x009f 159 Information Battery relearn will start in 1 day 0x00a0 160 Information Battery relearn will start in 5 hours 0x00a1 161 Information Battery removed 0x00a2 162 Information Current capacity of the battery is below threshold 0x00a3 163 Information Current capacity of the battery is above threshold 0x00a4 164 Information Enclosure (SES) discovered on %s 0x00a5 165 Information Enclosure (SAFTE) discovered on %s 0x00a6 166 Caution Enclosure %s communication lost 0x00a7 167 Information Enclosure %s communication restored 0x00a8 168 Caution Enclosure %s fan %d failed 0x00a9 169 Information Enclosure %s fan %d inserted 0x00aa 170 Caution Enclosure %s fan %d removed 0x00ab 171 Caution Enclosure %s power supply %d failed 0x00ac 172 Information Enclosure %s power supply %d inserted 0x00ad 173 Caution Enclosure %s power supply %d removed 0x00ae 174 Caution Enclosure %s EMM %d failed 0x00af 175 Information Enclosure %s EMM %d inserted 0x00b0 176 Caution Enclosure %s EMM %d removed 0x00b1 177 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below warning threshold Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 6 of 9) A-8 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x00b2 178 Caution Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d below error threshold 0x00b3 179 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above warning threshold 0x00b4 180 Caution Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d above error threshold 0x00b5 181 Caution Enclosure %s shutdown 0x00b6 182 Warning Enclosure %s not supported; too many enclosures connected to port 0x00b7 183 Caution Enclosure %s firmware mismatch (EMM %d) 0x00b8 184 Warning Enclosure %s sensor %d bad 0x00b9 185 Caution Enclosure %s phy bad for slot %d 0x00ba 186 Caution Enclosure %s is unstable 0x00bb 187 Caution Enclosure %s hardware error 0x00bc 188 Caution Enclosure %s not responding 0x00bd 189 Information SAS/SATA mixing not supported in enclosure; %s disabled 0x00be 190 Information Enclosure (SES) hotplug on %s was detected, but is not supported 0x00bf 191 Information Clustering enabled 0x00c0 192 Information Clustering disabled 0x00c1 193 Information PD too small to be used for auto-rebuild on %s 0x00c2 194 Information BBU enabled; changing WT virtual disks to WB 0x00c3 195 Warning BBU disabled; changing WB virtual disks to WT 0x00c4 196 Warning Bad block table on %s is 80% full 0x00c5 197 Fatal Bad block table on %s is full; unable to log block %lx 0x00c6 198 Information Consistency Check Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on %s 0x00c7 199 Information Background Initialization (BGI) Aborted Due to Ownership Loss on %s 0x00c8 200 Caution Battery/charger problems detected; SOH Bad 0x00c9 201 Warning Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); warning threshold exceeded 0x00ca 202 Caution Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); critical threshold exceeded 0x00cb 203 Caution Single-bit ECC error: ECAR=%x, ELOG=%x, (%s); further reporting disabled 0x00cc 204 Caution Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched off Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 7 of 9) A-9 Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x00cd 205 Information Enclosure %s Power supply %d switched on 0x00ce 206 Caution Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable removed 0x00cf 207 Information Enclosure %s Power supply %d cable inserted 0x00d0 208 Information Enclosure %s Fan %d returned to normal 0x00d1 209 Information BBU Retention test was initiated on previous boot 0x00d2 210 Information BBU Retention test passed 0x00d3 211 Caution BBU Retention test failed! 0x00d4 212 Information NVRAM Retention test was initiated on previous boot 0x00d5 213 Information NVRAM Retention test passed 0x00d6 214 Caution NVRAM Retention test failed! 0x00d7 215 Information %s test completed %d passes successfully 0x00d8 216 Caution %s test FAILED on %d pass. Fail data: errorOffset=%x goodData=%x badData=%x 0x00d9 217 Information Self check diagnostics completed 0x00da 218 Information Foreign Configuration Detected 0x00db 219 Information Foreign Configuration Imported 0x00dc 220 Information Foreign Configuration Cleared 0x00dd 221 Warning NVRAM is corrupt; reinitializing 0x00de 222 Warning NVRAM mismatch occurred 0x00df 223 Warning SAS wide port %d lost link on PHY %d 0x00e0 224 Information SAS wide port %d restored link on PHY %d 0x00e1 225 Warning SAS port %d, PHY %d has exceeded the allowed error rate 0x00e2 226 Warning Bad block reassigned on %s at %lx to %lx 0x00e3 227 Information Controller Hot Plug detected 0x00e4 228 Warning Enclosure %s temperature sensor %d differential detected 0x00e5 229 Information Disk test cannot start. No qualifying disks found 0x00e6 230 Information Time duration provided by host is not sufficient for self check 0x00e7 231 Information Marked Missing for %s on array %d row %d 0x00e8 232 Information Replaced Missing as %s on array %d row %d 0x00e9 233 Information Enclosure %s Temperature %d returned to normal 0x00ea 234 Information Enclosure %s Firmware download in progress Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 8 of 9) A-10 Events and Messages Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. 0x00eb 235 Warning Enclosure %s Firmware download failed 0x00ec 236 Warning %s is not a certified drive 0x00ed 237 Information Dirty cache data discarded by user 0x00ee 238 Information PDs missing from configuration at boot 0x00ef 239 Information VDs missing drives and will go offline at boot: %s 0x00f0 240 Information VDs missing at boot: %s 0x00f1 241 Information Previous configuration completely missing at boot 0x00f2 242 Information Battery charge complete 0x00f3 243 Information Enclosure %s fan %d speed changed 0x00f4 244 Information Dedicated spare %s imported as global due to missing arrays 0x00f5 245 Information %s rebuild not possible as SAS/SATA is not supported in an array 0x00f6 246 Information SEP %s has been rebooted as a part of enclosure firmware download. SEP will be unavailable until this process completes. 0x00f7 247 Information Inserted: %s Info: %s 0x00f8 248 Information Removed: %s Info: %s 0x00f9 249 Information %s is now OPTIMAL 0x00fa 250 Warning %s is now PARTIALLY DEGRADED 0x00fb 251 Caution %s is now DEGRADED 0x00fc 252 Fatal %s is now OFFLINE 0x00fd 253 Warning Battery requires reconditioning; please initiate a LEARN cycle 0x00fe 254 Warning VD %s disabled because RAID-5 is not supported by this RAID key 0x00ff 255 Warning VD %s disabled because RAID-6 is not supported by this controller 0x0100 256 Warning VD %s disabled because SAS drives are not supported by this RAID key Table A.2 Event Messages (Cont.) Number (Hex) Number (Decimal) Type Event Text (Sheet 9 of 9) Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide Version 2.0 Copyright © 2006 by LSI Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. Customer Feedback We would appreciate your feedback on this document. Please copy the following page, add your comments, and fax it to us at the number shown. If appropriate, please also fax copies of any marked-up pages from this document. Important: Please include your name, phone number, fax number, and company address so that we may contact you directly for clarification or additional information. Thank you for your help in improving the quality of our documents. Reader’s Comments Fax your comments to: LSI Logic Corporation Technical Publications M/S AF-198 Fax: 408.433.4333 Please tell us how you rate this document: Embedded MegaRAID Software User’s Guide. Place a check mark in the appropriate blank for each category. What could we do to improve this document? If you found errors in this document, please specify the error and page number. If appropriate, please fax a marked-up copy of the page(s). Please complete the information below so that we may contact you directly for clarification or additional information. Excellent Good Average Fair Poor Completeness of information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Clarity of information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Ease of finding information ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Technical content ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Usefulness of examples and illustrations ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Overall manual ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Name Date Telephone Title Company Name Street City, State, Zip Department Mail Stop Fax Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 1 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 12 August 2014 Table of Contents 1 Introduction............................................................................................................................3 1.1 Changes since Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 SP1 (New in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition)...........................................................................................4 1.2 Product Contents............................................................................................................4 1.3 System Requirements ....................................................................................................5 1.3.1 Visual Studio 2008* is Not Supported .....................................................................6 1.3.2 Windows XP* is Not Supported...............................................................................6 1.4 Documentation ...............................................................................................................6 1.4.1 Documentation on Creating Windows-based Applications on the Web ..................6 1.4.2 Documentation Viewing Issue with Microsoft Internet Explorer* 10 and Windows Server* 2012..........................................................................................................................7 1.5 Optimization Notice ........................................................................................................7 1.6 Samples..........................................................................................................................7 1.7 Japanese Language Support .........................................................................................7 1.8 Technical Support...........................................................................................................8 2 Installation..............................................................................................................................8 2.1 Pre-Installation Steps .....................................................................................................8 2.1.1 Install Prerequisite Software....................................................................................8 2.2 Installation of Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS)........................8 2.3 Online Installer................................................................................................................9 2.3.1 Storing Online Installer Download Content .............................................................9 2.4 Installation ......................................................................................................................9 2.4.1 Reboot After Install Recommended ........................................................................9 2.4.2 Cluster Installation.................................................................................................10 2.4.3 Using a License Server .........................................................................................10 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 2 2.4.4 Additional Steps to Install Documentation for Microsoft Visual Studio 2010*........10 2.5 Intel® Software Manager..............................................................................................10 2.6 Changing, Updating and Removing the Product ..........................................................10 2.7 Silent Install and Uninstall ............................................................................................11 2.7.1 Support of Non-Interactive Custom Installation.....................................................11 2.8 Installation Folders .......................................................................................................12 2.9 Known Installation Issues and changes .......................................................................13 3 Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler.............................................................................................13 3.1 Compatibility .................................................................................................................14 3.1.1 Stack Alignment Change for REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) Datatypes (12.0) .....14 3.1.2 Static Form of the Intel® OpenMP* Library is No Longer Provided ......................14 3.1.3 Fortran Expression Evaluator................................................................................14 3.2 New and Changed Compiler Features .........................................................................15 3.2.1 Features from Fortran 2003 ..................................................................................15 3.2.2 Features from Fortran 2008 ..................................................................................15 3.2.3 Features from OpenMP* .......................................................................................15 3.2.4 New and Changed Directives................................................................................16 3.2.5 Other Features ......................................................................................................16 3.2.6 Coarrays (13.0) .....................................................................................................17 3.2.7 ATTRIBUTES ALIGN for component of derived type (13.0.1) ..............................17 3.2.8 Change in File Buffering Behavior (13.1) ..............................................................17 3.2.9 Static Analysis has been deprecated ....................................................................18 3.2.10 New run-time routines to get Fortran library version numbers ..............................18 3.3 New and Changed Compiler Options ...........................................................................18 3.3.1 New and Changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*.............................................................................................................................18 3.4 Visual Studio Integration Changes ...............................................................................20 3.4.1 DLL Libraries Default in New Projects (14.0) ........................................................20 3.4.2 Parallel Build Option (13.1) ...................................................................................21 3.4.3 Improved source code navigation in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE .........................21 3.4.4 Changes in Optimization Report Options support in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE.21 3.4.5 Changes in Online Help format in Microsoft Visual Studio* ..................................21 3.5 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................21 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 3 3.5.1 Command-Line Diagnostic Issue for Filenames with Japanese Characters .........21 3.5.2 Debugging might fail when only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013 is installed ...21 3.5.3 Debugging mixed language programs with Fortran does not work .......................22 3.5.4 Update for Windows 7 causes LNK1123 error when building Visual Studio 2010 projects 22 3.5.5 Certain uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types are not yet fully implemented.................................................................................................................23 3.6 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, 2012 and 2013 Notes....................................................23 3.6.1 Configuring Microsoft Visual C++ to Reference Intel® Fortran Run-Time Libraries 23 3.6.2 Adjusting Project Dependencies ...........................................................................24 3.6.3 Showing Documentation Issue with Visual Studio 2012 and Windows Server* 2012 and Windows Server* 2008 ........................................................................................25 3.7 Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 Feature Summary.......................................................25 4 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture)................................................................................................................................26 4.1 Features .......................................................................................................................26 4.2 Using the Intel® Debugger Extension ..........................................................................26 4.3 Documentation .............................................................................................................26 4.4 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................26 5 Intel® Math Kernel Library ...................................................................................................28 5.1 What's New in Intel MKL 11.2.......................................................................................28 5.2 Notes ............................................................................................................................31 5.3 Known Issues ...............................................................................................................32 5.4 Attributions....................................................................................................................32 6 Disclaimer and Legal Information ........................................................................................32 1 Introduction This document describes how to install the product, provides a summary of new and changed product features and includes notes about features and problems not described in the product documentation. For the most current update to these release notes, see the release notes posted at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center where you downloaded this product. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 4 Due to the nature of this comprehensive integrated software development tools solution, different Intel® Parallel Studio XE Composer Edition components may be covered by different licenses. Please see the licenses included in the distribution as well as the Disclaimer and Legal Information section of these release notes for details. 1.1 Changes since Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 SP1 (New in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition) Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler updated to version 15.0 o New Optimization Report interface, structure, and options (users of existing options /Qopt-report, /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qpar-report are strongly encouraged to consult the Intel Compiler User’s Guide for additional details) New IDE integration for optimization reports showing report information integrated with source with hyperlinking to relevant areas. See the User’s Guide for details. Additional OpenMP* 4.0 support Create custom install packages with the online installer Enable threadsafe profile generation with PGO New INTEL_PROF_DYN_PREFIX environment variable to add custom prefix to PGO .dyn filenames Static Analysis is deprecated Windows XP* not supported Microsoft Visual Studio 2008* not supported Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® MIC Architecture updated to version 7.7-8.0 Intel® Math Kernel Library updated to version 11.2 Corrections to reported problems 1.2 Product Contents Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* initial release includes the following components: Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler XE 15.0 for building applications that run on IA-32 and Intel® 64 architecture systems Intel® Math Kernel Library 11.2 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture) Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) for debugging Fortran applications with Microsoft Visual Studio* Integration into Microsoft* development environments Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Shell and Libraries (not included with Evaluation licenses) Sample programs On-disk documentation Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 5 1.3 System Requirements For an explanation of architecture names, see Intel® Architecture Platform Terminology A PC based on an IA-32 or Intel® 64 architecture processor supporting the Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 2 (Intel® SSE2) instructions (Intel® Pentium® 4 processor or later, or compatible non-Intel processor o For the best experience, a multi-core or multi-processor system is recommended 2GB RAM (4GB recommended) 4GB free disk space required for all product features and all architectures For Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture) development/testing: o Intel® Xeon Phi™ processor o Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS) o Debugging of offload code requires Microsoft Visual Studio* 2012 or 2013 Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8*, Microsoft Windows 8.1*, Microsoft Windows Server 2012*, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2* (IA-32 only), Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (R2 SP1) or Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008* (embedded editions not supported) o Microsoft Windows Server 2008 or Windows HPC Server 2008 requires Microsoft Visual Studio 2013* or Visual Studio 2012* or Visual Studio 2010* or Visual Studio 2010* Shell. o On Microsoft Windows 8, Microsoft Windows 8.1, and Microsoft Windows Server 2012, the product installs into the “Desktop” environment. Development of “Windows 8* UI” applications is not supported. To use the Microsoft Visual Studio development environment or command-line tools to build IA-32 or Intel® 64 architecture applications, one of: o Microsoft Visual Studio 2013* Professional Edition or higher, with C++ component installed o Microsoft Visual Studio 2012* Professional Edition or higher, with C++ component installed o Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Professional Edition or higher, with C++ component installed o Intel® Visual Fortran development environment based on Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell (included with some license types of Intel® Fortran Compiler) [1] To use command-line tools only to build IA-32 architecture applications, one of: o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2013 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2012 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Visual C++ 2010* Express Edition [2] To use command-line tools only to build Intel® 64 architecture applications, one of: o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2013 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Visual Studio Express 2012 for Windows Desktop* o Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit for Windows 8.1* o Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit for Windows 8* To read the on-disk documentation, Adobe Reader* 7.0 or later Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 6 Notes: 1. Intel® Visual Fortran development environment based on Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* Shell is included with Academic and Commercial licenses for Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. It is not included with Evaluation licenses. This development environment provides everything necessary to edit, build and debug Fortran applications. Some features of the full Visual Studio product are not included, such as: Resource Editor (see ResEdit* (http://www.resedit.net/), a third-party tool, for a substitute) Automated conversion of Compaq* Visual Fortran projects Microsoft language tools such as Visual C++* or Visual Basic* 2. Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Express Edition will coexist with the Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2015 installation of Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell. Note that the C++ and Fortran development environments will be separate. 3. The default for Intel® Visual Fortran is to build IA-32 architecture applications that require a processor supporting the Intel® SSE2 instructions. A compiler option is available to generate code that will run on any IA-32 architecture processor. Note, however, that applications calling Intel® MKL require a processor supporting the Intel® SSE2 instructions. 4. Applications can be run on the same Windows versions as specified above for development. Applications may also run on non-embedded 32-bit versions of Microsoft Windows earlier than Windows 7, though Intel does not test these for compatibility. Your application may depend on a Windows API routine not present in older versions of Windows. You are responsible for testing application compatibility. You may need to copy certain run-time DLLs onto the target system to run your application. 1.3.1 Visual Studio 2008* is Not Supported Support has been removed for installation and use with Visual Studio 2008. Intel recommends migrating to a newer version of Visual Studio*. 1.3.2 Windows XP* is Not Supported Support has been removed for installation and use on Windows XP. Intel recommends migrating to a newer version of these operating systems. 1.4 Documentation Product documentation can be found in the Documentation folder as shown under Installation Folders. 1.4.1 Documentation on Creating Windows-based Applications on the Web Documentation on using QuickWin, dialogs and the Windows API is available from the Intel Software Documentation Library: See Using Intel® Visual Fortran to Create and Build Windows*-based Applications (PDF) Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 7 1.4.2 Documentation Viewing Issue with Microsoft Internet Explorer* 10 and Windows Server* 2012 If on Windows Server 2012 you find that you cannot display help or documentation from within Internet Explorer 10, modifying a security setting for Microsoft Internet Explorer usually corrects the problem. From Tools > Internet Options > Security, add “about:internet” to the list of trusted sites. Optionally, you can remove “about:internet” from the list of trusted sites after you finish viewing the documentation. 1.5 Optimization Notice Optimization Notice Intel’s compilers may or may not optimize to the same degree for non-Intel microprocessors for optimizations that are not unique to Intel microprocessors. These optimizations include SSE2, SSE3, and SSSE3 instruction sets and other optimizations. Intel does not guarantee the availability, functionality, or effectiveness of any optimization on microprocessors not manufactured by Intel. Microprocessor-dependent optimizations in this product are intended for use with Intel microprocessors. Certain optimizations not specific to Intel microarchitecture are reserved for Intel microprocessors. Please refer to the applicable product User and Reference Guides for more information regarding the specific instruction sets covered by this notice. Notice revision #20110804 1.6 Samples Samples for each product component can be found in the Samples folder as shown under Installation Folders. 1.7 Japanese Language Support Intel compilers provide support for Japanese language users when the combined JapaneseEnglish installation is used. Error messages, visual development environment dialogs and some documentation are provided in Japanese in addition to English. By default, the language of error messages and dialogs matches that of your operating system language selection. Japaneselanguage documentation can be found in the ja_JP subdirectory for documentation and samples. Japanese language support will be available in an update on or after the release of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows. If you wish to use Japanese-language support on an English-language operating system, or English-language support on a Japanese-language operating system, you will find instructions at Changing Language Setting to see English on a Japanese OS Environment or Vice Versa on Windows. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 8 1.8 Technical Support If you did not register your compiler during installation, please do so at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center. Registration entitles you to free technical support, product updates and upgrades for the duration of the support term. For information about how to find Technical Support, Product Updates, User Forums, FAQs, tips and tricks, and other support information, please visit http://www.intel.com/software/products/support/ Note: If your distributor provides technical support for this product, please contact them for support rather than Intel. 2 Installation 2.1 Pre-Installation Steps 2.1.1 Install Prerequisite Software If you will be installing the included Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell, additional Microsoft software may be required to be installed before beginning the installation of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. Microsoft .NET 4.0 Framework* is required. If you do not already have this installed, you can download the installer: .NET 4.0 Framework 32-bit and 64-bit If you are installing on Windows 8.1*, Windows 8*, Windows 7* or Windows Server 2008, the installation of the Shell will attempt to download and install .NET Framework 4.0 automatically if it is not already present. If this fails, the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* install will fail with a message that may not indicate the exact problem. If you find that the installation of the Shell fails, please download .NET 4.0 Framework from the above link and try again. If you are installing Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* from the full product downloadable that includes Visual Studio 2010 Shell, it will try to install Visual Studio 2010 Shell if you do not already have Visual Studio 2010 installed. If you do not want Visual Studio 2010 Shell to install, you can choose a Custom install and deselect it, or choose the “_novsshell.exe” downloadable installer. 2.2 Installation of Intel® Manycore Platform Software Stack (Intel® MPSS) The Intel® Manycore Platform System Software (Intel® MPSS) should be installed only if you plan to build applications that target an Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessor. Intel® MPSS may be installed before or after installing the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* product. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 9 Using the latest version of Intel® MPSS available is recommended. It is available from the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center at http://registrationcenter.intel.com as part of your Intel® Parallel Studio XE for Windows* registration. Refer to the Intel® MPSS documentation for the necessary steps to install the user space and kernel drivers. 2.3 Online Installer The default electronic installation package now consists of a smaller installation package that dynamically downloads and then installs packages selected to be installed. This requires a working internet connection and potentially a proxy setting if you are behind an internet proxy. Full packages are provided alongside where you download this online install package if a working internet connection is not available. The online installer may be downloaded and saved as an executable file which can then be launched from the command line. 2.3.1 Storing Online Installer Download Content The online installer stores the downloaded content in the form-factor of the standard install package which can then be copied and reused offline on other systems. The default download location is \intel\downloads. This location may be changed with the online installer command line option “--download-dir [FOLDER]”. The online installer also supports a download only mode which allows the user to create a package without installation. This mode is enabled with the “--download-only” command line option. 2.4 Installation The installation of the product requires a valid license file or serial number. If you are evaluating the product, you can also choose the “Evaluate this product (no serial number required)” option during installation. After downloading the product, double-click on the executable file (.EXE) to begin installation. Note that there are several different downloadable files available, each providing different combinations of components. Please read the download web page carefully to determine which file is appropriate for you. You do not need to uninstall previous versions or updates before installing a newer version – the new version will coexist with the older versions. If you want to remove older versions, you may do so before or after installing the newer one. Register your serial number at the Intel® Software Development Products Registration Center for access to product updates and previous versions. 2.4.1 Reboot After Install Recommended Installation of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* adds to the system PATH environment variable the folders containing the compiler run-time DLLs (but not those of Intel® Math Kernel Library). On some systems, if the length of the PATH value is between 2048 and 4096 characters, command line operations may fail until the system is rebooted. Intel recommends a reboot after the first install of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 10 2.4.2 Cluster Installation If Microsoft Compute Cluster Pack* is present, and the installation detects that the installing system is a member of a cluster, the product will be installed on all visible nodes of the cluster when a “Full” installation is requested. If a “Custom” installation is requested, you will be given the option to install on the current node only. 2.4.3 Using a License Server If you have purchased a “floating” license, see Licensing: Setting Up the Client for a Floating License. This article also provides a source for the Intel® License Manager for FLEXlm* product that can be installed on any of a wide variety of systems. 2.4.4 Additional Steps to Install Documentation for Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* When installing Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* on a system with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 for the first time, you will be asked to initialize the “Local Store” for documentation for Visual Studio 2010 if it was not done before. The "Help Library Manager" will register the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* help documentation within Visual Studio 2010. Please follow the instructions of the "Help Library Manager" installation wizard to install the Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* help documentation for Visual Studio 2010. This step is only needed once. When you install Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* updates in the future, you will not be required to re-register the documentation through the “Help Library Manager”. For more information, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/enus/subscriptions/dd264831(v=vs.100).aspx or search on microsoft.com for “Help Library Manager”. 2.5 Intel® Software Manager The installation provides the Intel® Software Manager to provide a simplified delivery mechanism for product updates and provide current license status and news on all installed Intel® software products. You can also volunteer to provide Intel anonymous usage information about these products to help guide future product design. This option, the Intel® Software Improvement Program, is not enabled by default – you can opt-in during installation or at a later time, and may opt-out at any time. For more information please see Intel® Software Improvement Program. 2.6 Changing, Updating and Removing the Product Use the Windows Control Panel “Add or Remove Products” or “Programs and Features” applet to change which product components are installed or to remove the product. Depending on which product you installed, the entry will be one of the following: Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Windows* Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Professional Edition for Windows* Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 11 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Professional Edition for Fortran Windows* If you also installed Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell as part of the compiler install, the following additional entries may be present: Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Shell (Integrated) - ENU Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Files for Intel Visual Fortran Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Remote Debugger – ENU The entries for Visual Studio Shell, Files and Remote Debugger should not be removed unless you want to completely remove the product. When installing an updated version of the product, you do not need to remove the older version first. The first time you install an update, you will have the choice to replace the older version or to keep both the older and newer versions on the system. This choice is remembered for future updates. In Microsoft Visual Studio you can select which specific compiler version to use through the Tools > Options > Intel Composer XE > Visual Fortran Compiler dialog. Compiler versions older than 13.0 (Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2011) are not available to be selected through Visual Studio. All installed versions can be used from the command line. If you remove a newer version of the product you may have to reinstall the integrations into Microsoft Visual Studio from the older version. 2.7 Silent Install and Uninstall For information on how to install and uninstall the compiler in an automated fashion, please see Intel® Compilers for Windows* Silent Installation Guide. 2.7.1 Support of Non-Interactive Custom Installation Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 supports the saving of user install choices during an ‘interactive’ install in a configuration file that can then be used for silent installs. This configuration file is created when the following option is used from the command line install: --duplicate=config_file_name: it specifies the configuration file name. If the full path name is specified, “--download-dir” is ignored and the installable package will be created under the same directory as the configuration file. --download-dir=dir_name: optional, it specifies where the configuration file will be created. If this option is omitted, the installation package and the configuration file will be created under the default download directory: %Program Files%\Intel\Download\ For example: w_fcompxe_online_2015.0.0XX.exe --duplicate=ic15_install_config.ini --download-dir "C:\temp\custom_pkg_ic15" Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 12 The configuration file and installable package will be created under “C:\temp\custom_pkg_ic15”. 2.8 Installation Folders The installation folder arrangement is shown in the diagram below. Not all folders will be present in a given installation. The system environment variable IFORT_COMPILER15 can be used to locate the most recently installed Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. C:\Program Files\Intel\Composer XE 2015 o bin ia32 ia32_intel64 intel64 intel64_mic sourcechecker o compiler include ia32 intel64 mic lib ia32 intel64 mic o debugger o Documentation o mkl benchmarks bin examples include interfaces lib tests tools o redist o Samples Where the folders under bin, include and lib are used as follows: ia32: Files used to build applications that run on IA-32 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 13 intel64: Files used to build applications that run on Intel® 64 ia32_intel64: Compilers that run on IA-32 to build applications that run on Intel®64 If you are installing on a system with a non-English language version of Windows, the name of the Program Files folder may be different. On Intel® 64 architecture systems, the folder name is Program Files (X86) or the equivalent. By default, updates of a given version will replace the existing directory contents. When the first update is installed, the user is given the option of having the new update installed alongside the previous installation, keeping both on the system. If this is done, the top-level folder name for the older update is changed to Composer XE 2015.nnn where nnn is the update number. 2.9 Known Installation Issues and changes Remote offline activation via a code has been removed. Use of a license file or a license manager remain as options for alternative activation. When installing “Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*” on a system which has “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 2” installed you may get the following error in Visual Studio: “Could not load file or assembly ‘Intel.Misc.Utilities’ or one of its dependencies. The system cannot find the file specified.”. This is due to an issue in “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 2”, which was fixed in subsequent releases. This can be resolved by installing “Intel(R) C++ Composer XE 2013 SP1 Update 3” or “Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for C++ Windows*”. 3 Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler This section summarizes changes, new features and late-breaking news about the Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 14 3.1 Compatibility In general, object code and modules compiled with earlier versions of Intel Fortran Compiler (8.0 and later) may be used in a build with version 15.0. Exceptions include: Sources that use the CLASS keyword to declare polymorphic variables and which were built with a compiler version earlier than 12.0 must be recompiled. Objects built with the multi-file interprocedural optimization (/Qipo) option must be recompiled. Objects that use the REAL(16) , REAL*16, COMPLEX(16) or COMPLEX*32 datatypes and which were compiled with versions earlier than 12.0 must be recompiled. Objects built for the Intel® 64 architecture with a compiler version earlier than 10.0 and that have module variables must be recompiled. If non-Fortran sources reference these variables, the external names may need to be changed to remove an incorrect leading underscore. Modules that specified an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive outside of a derived type declaration and were compiled with versions earlier than 11.0 must be recompiled. The compiler will notify you if this issue is encountered. Modules that specified an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive inside a derived type declaration cannot be used by compilers older than 13.0.1. 3.1.1 Stack Alignment Change for REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) Datatypes (12.0) In previous releases, when a REAL(16) or COMPLEX(16) (REAL*16 or COMPLEX*32) item was passed by value, the stack address was aligned at 4 bytes. For improved performance, compiler versions 12.0 and later align such items at 16 bytes and expect received arguments to be aligned on 16-byte boundaries. This change primarily affects compiler-generated calls to library routines that do computations on REAL(16) values, including intrinsics. If you have code compiled with earlier versions and link it with the version 13 libraries, or have an application linked to the shared version of the Intel run-time libraries, it may give incorrect results. In order to avoid errors, you must recompile all Fortran sources that use the REAL(16) and COMPLEX(16) datatypes. 3.1.2 Static Form of the Intel® OpenMP* Library is No Longer Provided The static form of the Intel® OpenMP* library, libiomp5mt.lib, is no longer provided, and the /Qopenmp-link:static command line option is no longer supported. Please replace all references to libiomp5mt.lib with libiomp5md.lib, the DLL import library. This change also implies that applications using OpenMP will need to have the Intel® compiler redistributables installed if deployed on a system where an Intel® compiler is not also present. See Redistributable Libraries for Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE for more information. 3.1.3 Fortran Expression Evaluator Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) is a plug-in for Microsoft Visual Studio* that is installed with Intel® Visual Fortran Compiler. It extends the standard debugger in Microsoft Visual Studio* IDE by handling Fortran expressions. There is no other change in usability. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 15 3.2 New and Changed Compiler Features Some language features may not yet be described in the compiler documentation. Please refer to the Fortran 2003 Standard (PDF)) and Fortran 2008 Standard (PDF) if necessary. 3.2.1 Features from Fortran 2003 Parameterized Derived Types 3.2.2 Features from Fortran 2008 BLOCK construct intrinsic subroutine EXECUTE_COMMAND_LINE 3.2.3 Features from OpenMP* The following directives, clauses and procedures, from OpenMP 4.0, are supported by the compiler. Some of these features were supported in Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 Update 3 based on a preliminary specification, some keywords supported earlier (DECLARE TARGET MIRROR, DECLARE TARGET LINKABLE, MAPTO, MAPFROM, SCRATCH) are no longer supported, and some syntax has changed its meaning since the earlier specification. For more information, see the compiler documentation or the link to the OpenMP Specification above. SIMD Directives: OMP SIMD OMP DECLARE SIMD OMP DO SIMD OMP PARALLEL DO SIMD Coprocessor Directives: OMP TARGET DATA OMP TARGET OMP TARGET UPDATE OMP DECLARE TARGET Other Directives: OMP PARALLEL PROC_BIND OMP TASKGROUP OMP CANCEL OMP CANCELLATION POINT Clauses: MAP DEPEND Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 16 Procedures: OMP_GET_DEVICE_NUM OMP_GET_PROC_BIND OMP_SET_DEVICE_NUM 3.2.3.1 KMP_PLACE_THREADS Environment Variable (13.1.0) This environment variable allows the user to simplify the specification of the number of cores and threads per core used by an OpenMP application, as an alternative to writing explicit affinity settings or a process affinity mask. 3.2.3.2 KMP_DYNAMIC_MODE Environment Variable Support for “asat” Deprecated Support for “asat” (automatic self-allocating threads) by the environment variable KMP_DYNAMIC_MODE is now deprecated, and will be removed in a future release. 3.2.4 New and Changed Directives The following compiler directives are new or changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition– please see the documentation for details: ATTRIBUTES OPTIMIZATION_PARAMETER INLINE-MAX-TOTAL-SIZE=N ATTRIBUTES OPTIMIZATION_PARAMETER INLINE-MAX-PER-ROUTINE=N 3.2.4.1 ATTRIBUTES STDCALL now allowed with BIND(C) As of compiler version 15.0, the ATTRIBUTES STDCALL directive may be specified for an interoperable procedure (a procedure whose declaration includes the BIND(C) language binding attribute.) This combination has the following effects for Windows* applications targeting IA-32 architecture: The calling mechanism is changed to STDCALL, which affects how the stack is cleaned up on procedure exit The external name from the BIND attribute is suffixed with “@n”, where n is the number of bytes to be removed from the stack on return. No other effects from STDCALL, such as pass-by-value, are provided. The Fortran standard VALUE attribute (not ATTRIBUTES VALUE) may be used if desired. For all other platforms, specifying STDCALL with BIND(C) has no effect. 3.2.5 Other Features For information on these features, please see the compiler documentation. New environment variable INTEL_PROF_DYN_PREFIX. Allows the user to have some control over the naming PGO generated “.dyn” files to make it easy to distinguish files from different runs. By setting this environment variable to the desired character string prior to starting the instrumented application, the string will be included as prefix to the .dyn file names. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 17 New intrinsic __intel_simd_lane() that represents the ‘lane id’ within a SIMD vector. This feature supports writing short-vector hyperobject reducer implementation. It also enables the performing of reduction operations inside SIMD-enabled functions. 3.2.6 Coarrays (13.0) No special procedure is necessary to run a program that uses coarrays in a shared-memory environment; you simply run the executable file. The underlying parallelization implementation is Intel® MPI. Installation of the compiler automatically installs the necessary Intel® MPI run-time libraries to run on shared memory. A license for Intel® Parallel Studio XE Cluster Edition must be present in order to use the /coarray:distributed option. For details on how to run a distributed coarray application on Windows, please see Building and Running a Distributed Coarray Application on Windows. Use of coarray applications with any MPI implementation other than Intel® MPI, or with OpenMP*, is not supported at this time. By default, the number of images created is equal to the number of execution units on the current system. You can override that by specifying the option /Qcoarray-num-images: on the ifort command that compiles the main program. You can also specify the number of images in an environment variable FOR_COARRAY_NUM_IMAGES. 3.2.6.1 Coarrays and Intel® MPI Library compatibility Coarrays with Intel® Fortran Compiler 14 is incompatible with Intel® MPI Library 5.0. If using coarrays, ensure that either Intel® Fortran Compiler 15 or higher is used, or use a 4.x version of Intel® MPI Library. 3.2.7 ATTRIBUTES ALIGN for component of derived type (13.0.1) As of compiler version 13.0.1, the ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive may be specified for an ALLOCATABLE or POINTER component of a derived type. The directive must be placed within the derived type declaration, and if it is an extended type, the directive must not name a component in a parent type. If this is specified, the compiler will apply the indicated alignment when the component is allocated, either through an explicit ALLOCATE or, for ALLOCATABLE components, through implicit allocation according to Fortran language rules. A module containing an ATTRIBUTES ALIGN directive for a derived type component cannot be used with a compiler earlier than version 13.0.1. 3.2.8 Change in File Buffering Behavior (13.1) In product versions prior to Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 (compiler version 13.0), the Fortran Runtime Library buffered all input when reading variable length, unformatted sequential file records. This default buffering was accomplished by the Fortran Runtime Library allocating an internal buffer large enough to hold any sized, variable length record in memory. For extremely large records this could result in an excessive use of memory, and in the worst cases could result in available memory being exhausted. The user had no ability to change this Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 18 default buffering behavior on such READs. There was always the ability to request or deny buffering of these records when writing them, but not when reading them. This default buffering behavior was changed with the release of Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013. Beginning with this version, all such records are not buffered by default, but rather read directly from disk to the user program’s variables. This change helped programs that needed to conserve memory, but could in fact result in a performance degradation when reading records that are made of many small components. Some users have reported this performance degradation. The Intel® Visual Fortran Composer XE 2013 Update 2 (compiler version 13.1) release of the Fortran Runtime Library now provides a method for a user to choose whether or not to buffer these variable length, unformatted records. The default behavior remains as it was in 13.0; these records are not buffered by default. If you experience performance degradation when using 13.1 with this type of I/O, you can enable buffering of the input the same way that you choose whether to enable buffering of the output of these records – one of the following: specifying BUFFERED=”YES” on the file's OPEN statement specifying the environment variable FORT_BUFFERED to be YES, TRUE or an integer value greater than 0 specifying -assume buffered_io on the compiler command line In the past, these mechanisms applied only when issuing a WRITE of variable length, unformatted, sequential files. They can now be used to request that the Fortran Runtime Library buffer all input records from such files, regardless of the size of the records in the file. Using these mechanisms returns the READing of such records to the pre-13.0 behavior. 3.2.9 Static Analysis has been deprecated Static analysis is deprecated. It may be removed in a future major release. If you have concerns or feedback, please comment. 3.2.10 New run-time routines to get Fortran library version numbers FOR_IFCORE_VERSION returns the version of the Fortran run-time library (ifcore). FOR_IFPORT_VERSION returns the version of the Fortran portability library (ifport). 3.3 New and Changed Compiler Options Please refer to the compiler documentation for details. 3.3.1 New and Changed in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* /assume:[no]std_value /assume:ieee_fpe_flags /fast /Qeliminate-unused-debug-types[-] /Qinit:snan Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 19 /Qopt-dynamic-align[-] /Qopt-report /Qprof-gen:[no]threadsafe For a list of deprecated compiler options, see the Compiler Options section of the documentation. 3.3.1.1 /assume:std_value is now the default As of compiler version 15.0, the Fortran standard VALUE attribute, (not ATTRIBUTES VALUE), when specified for a dummy argument of a non-interoperable procedure (a procedure whose declaration does not include the BIND(C) language binding attribute), applies Fortran standard semantics by default. The standard specifies that for a non-interoperable procedure, VALUE causes a temporary, redefinable copy of the actual argument to be passed using the default passing mechanism. In earlier compiler versions, VALUE always caused the actual argument to be passed by value. Compiler version 14.0 introduced /assume:std_value to specify the standard-conforming semantics and this was enabled if /standard-semantics was specified. 3.3.1.2 /assume:ieee_fpe_flags enabled with /standard-semantics and /fp:strict or /fp:except As of compiler version 15.0, if /standard-semantics and one of /fp:strict or /fp:except is specified, /assume:ieee_fpe_flags is also enabled. This option causes the state of floating point exceptions to be saved on entry to a procedure and restored on exit. The save and restore operation has a significant performance penalty so it should be used only by applications that manipulate or query the floating point exception environment. Note that Intel Fortran requires that you specify /fp:strict if you are using the Fortran standard intrinsic modules IEEE_ARITHMETIC, IEEE_EXCEPTIONS and/or IEEE_FEATURES. 3.3.1.3 Change to /fast option /fp:fast=2 has been added to the /fast option. This option makes it easier to tune for performance. 3.3.1.4 New /Qinit:snan Compiler Option A new command line option to help find a class of uninitialized variables at run-time by initializing floating-point variables to signaling NaNs which can then be trapped if their values are fetched before being set. 3.3.1.5 New /Qopt-dynamic-align[-] Compiler Option When this option is set the compiler implements conditional optimizations based on dynamic alignment of the input data for maximum performance of vectorized code especially for long trip count loops. This, however, may result in different bitwise results for aligned and unaligned data with the same values. When unset the compiler will not perform these optimizations providing bitwise reproducibility. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 20 3.3.1.6 New Optimization Report interface, report structure, and options in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition The four kinds of optimization reports (/Qopt-report, /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qparreport) have been consolidated under one /Qopt-report interface in this version of Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition. This consolidated optimization report has been rewritten to improve the presentation, content, and precision of the information provided so that users better understand what optimizations were performed by the compiler and how they may be tuned to yield the best performance. The output of this report no longer defaults to stderr due to issues with parallel builds. Instead, by default an output file (extension .optrpt) containing the report for each corresponding source file is created in the target directory of the compilation process (i.e. the same directory where object files would be generated). /Qopt-report-file (for example: /Qopt-report-file:stderr) can be used to change this behavior. The /Qvec-report, /Qopenmp-report, and /Qpar-report options have been deprecated, but they remain and map to corresponding values of the /Qopt-report option. However, the report information and formatting, and the default to reporting to a file, will follow the new opt-report model. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation for full details. See the Intel Compiler User’s Guide under Compiler Reference->Compiler Option Categories and Descriptions->Optimization Report Options. 3.3.1.7 New mode for PGO instrumentation /Qprof-gen:[no]threadsafe This change adds a mode to the PGO instrumentation that allows for the collection of PGO data on applications that use a high level of parallelism, such as from OpenMP 3.1. This functionality improves PGO usage for the IA-32 and Intel® 64 architectures, as well as enables the support of PGO with the native Intel® MIC Architecture programming model. 3.4 Visual Studio Integration Changes 3.4.1 DLL Libraries Default in New Projects (14.0) New Fortran projects, created after Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*has been installed, have the project properties set so that the DLL form of the runtime libraries is used. This is consistent with Microsoft Visual C++, but is a change from previous versions of Intel® Visual Fortran. If you wish to use the static libraries, you can change the project property Fortran > Libraries > Use Runtime Library. Note that the OpenMP* library, libiomp5md.dll, is provided in DLL form only and will be used no matter which setting you select, should your application use OpenMP. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 21 3.4.2 Parallel Build Option (13.1) An enhancement to the Visual Studio build environment has been added which allows for parallel builds of sources without unresolved dependencies on multicore or multiprocessor systems. This can reduce the total time needed to build larger projects. To enable this, open the project property page Fortran > General and set the property “Multiprocessor compilation” to Yes. 3.4.3 Improved source code navigation in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE The Visual Studio IDE now provides a “tree-view” for easy module/procedure navigation (similar to the Solution explorer view). For more information, see the compiler documentation. 3.4.4 Changes in Optimization Report Options support in Microsoft Visual Studio IDE Optimization Diagnostic Level, Optimization Diagnostic Phase, Vectorizer Diagnostic Level, OpenMP Diagnostic Level, Auto-Parallelizer diagnostic Level project properties’ values (Configuration Properties->Fortran->Diagnostics) were updated in Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows*. If you are using these properties, you may need to update their values, using project property pages dialog in Visual Studio. If you change your settings to use older compiler, you may need to update these properties’ values again. 3.4.5 Changes in Online Help format in Microsoft Visual Studio* The online help format is now browser-based. When you view Intel documentation from the Microsoft Visual Studio Help menu, or when you view context-sensitive help using F1 or a help button in a dialog box or other GUI element, your default browser shows the corresponding help topic. You may encounter some minor functionality issues depending on your default browser. Known issues include: When Set Help Preference is set to Launch in Browser and you hit F1 in Tools>Options>F# Tools or Tools>Options>Intellitrace, the browser appears twice. Chrome*: When arriving at a topic from Search or Index, the Table of Contents (TOC) does not sync, nor does the Sync TOC link work. Firefox*: The TOC loses context easily. Search is case sensitive Safari*: Response on Windows is slow. 3.5 Known Issues 3.5.1 Command-Line Diagnostic Issue for Filenames with Japanese Characters The filename in compiler diagnostics for filenames containing Japanese characters may be displayed incorrectly when compiled within a Windows command shell using the native Intel® 64 architecture compiler. It is not a problem when using Visual Studio or when using the Intel® 64 architecture cross-compiler or IA-32 architecture compiler. 3.5.2 Debugging might fail when only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013 is installed On Microsoft Windows* systems with only Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013* installed debugging of Fortran applications might fail. Some symptoms might be failing watches (expression evaluations) or conditional breakpoints. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 22 Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* provides a debugger extension called Fortran Expression Evaluator (FEE) to enable debugging of Fortran applications. For some FEE functionality the Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* libraries are required. One solution is to install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010* in addition to Microsoft Visual Studio 2012/2013*. An alternative is to install the Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 SP1 Redistributable Package (x86) found here. 3.5.3 Debugging mixed language programs with Fortran does not work To enable debugging Fortran code called from a .NET managed code application in Visual Studio 2012 or later, unset the following configuration: Menu Tools ->Options, under section Debugging->General, clear the Managed C++ Compatibility Mode check box For any managed code application, one must also check the project property Debug > Enable unmanaged code debugging. 3.5.4 Update for Windows 7 causes LNK1123 error when building Visual Studio 2010 projects A Microsoft Windows Update for .NET Framework 4.5.1, or installing Visual Studio 2012, installs a new version of a DLL used in the linking process, causing the original Visual Studio 2010 linker to give the error “LNK1123: failure during conversion to COFF: file invalid or corrupt”. The fix for this issue is to install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Service Pack 1* which can be found here. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 23 3.5.5 Certain uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types are not yet fully implemented The following uses of length type parameters in parameterized derived types (PDTs) are not yet fully implemented: PDT parameter constants with length type parameters %RE and %IM are not yet implemented There is a syntax error in the FEE displaying extended types that are parameterized 3.6 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010, 2012 and 2013 Notes Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 brings several changes that primarily affect building of mixedlanguage applications where the main program is in C or C++. These changes were carried forward into Visual Studio 2012/ 2013. 3.6.1 Configuring Microsoft Visual C++ to Reference Intel® Fortran Run-Time Libraries In previous releases, one used the Tools > Options > Projects and Solutions > VC++ Directories dialog to make the Intel Fortran LIB folder available to C/C++ projects. In Visual Studio 2010, the method of doing this is very different. 1. In Visual Studio, with a solution open that contains a C++ project, select View > Property Manager. If you do not see Property Manager under the View menu, you will find it under View > Additional Windows. The Property Manager window will appear. Note that this is not Properties Window or Properties Pages. 2. Click on the triangles or + signs to expand the property tree under the Debug|Win32 configuration 3. Double click on Microsoft.Cpp.Win32.user 4. Select VC++ Directories 5. Click in the field to the right of "Library Directories" 6. Click the triangle that appears to the right and select 7. Click the New Line button or press Ctrl-Insert 8. In the new field that appears, type: $(IFORT_COMPILER15)\compiler\lib\ia32 9. Click OK, OK 10. In the Visual Studio toolbar, select File > Save All If you will be building Intel® 64 (x64) configurations: 1. Back in the Property Manager, expand the Debug|x64 configuration 2. Double click on Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user 3. Select VC++ Directories 4. Click in the field to the right of "Library Directories" 5. Click the triangle that appears to the right and select 6. Click the New Line button or press Ctrl-Insert Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 24 7. In the new field that appears, type: $(IFORT_COMPILER15)\compiler\lib\intel64 8. Click OK, OK 9. In the Visual Studio toolbar, select File > Save All Click on the Solution Explorer tab, or press Ctrl-Alt-L, to make it visible again. If you do not see the Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user property page listed for the x64 configuration, right click on Debug|x64 and select Add Existing property Sheet. Browse to the location which contains the MsBuild 4.0 property pages. On Windows XP, this is typically: C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\M icrosoft\MSBuild\v4.0 On Windows 7 and Windows 8, it is typically: C:\Users\\AppData\Local\Microsoft\MSBuild\v4.0 You may need to enable viewing of hidden files and folders to see these paths. Select Microsoft.Cpp.x64.user.props and click Open. Now follow the steps above. 3.6.2 Adjusting Project Dependencies If you are converting a project from an earlier version of Visual Studio and had established Project Dependencies, these are converted to References by Visual Studio 2010/2012/2013. A Fortran project that is referenced by a C/C++ project will prevent the C/C++ project from building, with an MSB4075 error. To solve this: 1. Right click on the C/C++ project and select References. 2. If any Fortran project is shown as a reference, click Remove Reference. Repeat this for all Fortran projects shown as a reference. Click OK. 3. Repeat the above steps for any other C/C++ project Now you have to reestablish project dependencies. 1. Right click on the C/C++ project and select Project Dependencies. (For Visual Studio 2013 select Build Dependencies > Project Dependencies). 2. Check the box for each project that is a dependent of this project. 3. Click OK. 4. Repeat the above steps for any other C/C++ project that has dependencies. Unlike earlier versions of Visual Studio, Visual Studio 2010/2012 does not automatically link in the output library of dependent projects, so you will need to add those libraries explicitly to the parent project under Linker > Additional Dependencies. You can use the Visual Studio macros $(ConfigurationName) and $(PlatformName) as required to qualify the path. For example: ..\FLIB\$(ConfigurationName)\FLIB.lib Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 25 Where $(ConfigurationName) will expand to Release or Debug, as appropriate. Similarly, $(PlatformName) will expand to Win32 or x64 as appropriate. 3.6.3 Showing Documentation Issue with Visual Studio 2012 and Windows Server* 2012 and Windows Server* 2008 If on Windows Server 2012* and Windows Server* 2008 you find that you cannot display help or documentation from within Visual Studio 2012, correcting a security setting for Microsoft Internet Explorer* usually corrects the problem. From Tools > Internet Options > Security, change the settings for Internet Zone to allow “MIME Sniffing” and “Active Scripting”. 3.7 Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 Feature Summary The Intel Fortran Compiler supports all features from the Fortran 2003 standard. The Intel® Fortran Compiler also supports many features from the Fortran 2008 standard. Additional features will be supported in future releases. Fortran 2008 features supported by the current version include: Maximum array rank has been raised to 31 dimensions (Fortran 2008 specifies 15) Coarrays o CODIMENSION attribute o SYNC ALL statement o SYNC IMAGES statement o SYNC MEMORY statement o CRITICAL and END CRITICAL statements o LOCK and UNLOCK statements o ERROR STOP statement o ALLOCATE and DEALLOCATE may specify coarrays o Intrinsic procedures ATOMIC_DEFINE, ATOMIC_REF, IMAGE_INDEX, LCOBOUND, NUM_IMAGES, THIS_IMAGE, UCOBOUND CONTIGUOUS attribute MOLD keyword in ALLOCATE DO CONCURRENT NEWUNIT keyword in OPEN G0 and G0.d format edit descriptor Unlimited format item repeat count specifier A CONTAINS section may be empty Intrinsic procedures BESSEL_J0, BESSEL_J1, BESSEL_JN, BESSEL_YN, BGE, BGT, BLE, BLT, DSHIFTL, DSHIFTR, ERF, ERFC, ERFC_SCALED, GAMMA, HYPOT, IALL, IANY, IPARITY, IS_CONTIGUOUS, LEADZ, LOG_GAMMA, MASKL, MASKR, MERGE_BITS, NORM2, PARITY, POPCNT, POPPAR, SHIFTA, SHIFTL, SHIFTR, STORAGE_SIZE, TRAILZ, Additions to intrinsic module ISO_FORTRAN_ENV: ATOMIC_INT_KIND, ATOMIC_LOGICAL_KIND, CHARACTER_KINDS, INTEGER_KINDS, INT8, INT16, INT32, INT64, LOCK_TYPE, LOGICAL_KINDS, REAL_KINDS, REAL32, REAL64, REAL128, STAT_LOCKED, STAT_LOCKED_OTHER_IMAGE, STAT_UNLOCKED Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 26 An OPTIONAL dummy argument that does not have the ALLOCATABLE or POINTER attribute, and which corresponds to an actual argument that: has the ALLOCATABLE attribute and is not allocated, or has the POINTER attribute and is disassociated, or is a reference to the NULL() intrinsic function, is considered not present A dummy argument that is a procedure pointer may be associated with an actual argument that is a valid target for the dummy pointer, or is a reference to the intrinsic function NULL. If the actual argument is not a pointer, the dummy argument shall have the INTENT(IN) attribute. BLOCK construct intrinsic subroutine EXECUTE_COMMAND_LINE 4 Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture) This section summarizes new features and changes, usage and known issues related to the Intel® Debugger Extension. This debugger extension only supports code targeting Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture). 4.1 Features • Support for both native coprocessor applications and host applications with offload extensions • Debug multiple coprocessor cards at the same time (with offload extension) 4.2 Using the Intel® Debugger Extension The Intel® Debugger Extension is a plug-in for Microsoft Visual Studio* IDE. It transparently enables debugging of projects defined by that IDE. Applications for Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessors can be either loaded and executed or attached to. Instructions on how to use Intel® Debugger Extension can be found in the documentation 4.3 Documentation The full documentation for the Intel® Debugger Extension can be found here: \Documentation\en_US|ja_JP]\debugger\ mic\gdb_quickstart_win.pdf 4.4 Known Issues Offload debugging is only supported in Microsoft Visual Studio 2012* and Microsoft Visual Studio 2013*. Disassembly window cannot be scrolled outside of 1024 bytes from the starting address within an offload section. Handling of exceptions from the Intel® MIC Architecture application is not supported. Changing breakpoints while the application is running does not work. The changes will appear to be in effect but they are not applied. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 27 Starting an Intel® MIC Architecture native application is not supported. You can attach to a currently running application, though. The Thread Window in Microsoft Visual Studio* offers context menu actions to Freeze, Thaw and Rename threads. These context menu actions are not functional when the thread is on a coprocessor. Setting a breakpoint right before an offload section sets a breakpoint at the first statement of the offload section. This only is true if there is no statement for the host between set breakpoint and offload section. This is normal Microsoft Visual Studio* breakpoint behavior but might become more visible with interweaved code from host and coprocessor. The superfluous breakpoint for the offload section can be manually disabled (or removed) if desired. Only Intel® 64 applications containing offload sections can be debugged with the Intel® Debugger Extension for Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture. Stepping out of an offload section does not step back into the host code. It rather continues execution without stopping (unless another event occurs). This is intended behavior. The functionality “Set Next Statement” is not working within an offload section. If breakpoints have been set for an offload section in a project already, starting the debugger might show bound breakpoints without addresses. Those do not have an impact on functionality. For offload sections, using breakpoints with the following conditions of hit counts do not work: “break when the hit count is equal to” and “break when the hit count is a multiple of”. The following options in the Disassembly window do not work within offload sections: “Show Line Numbers”, “Show Symbol Names” and “Show Source Code” Evaluating variables declared outside the offload section shows wrong values. Please consult the Output (Debug) window for detailed reporting. It will name unimplemented features (see above) or provide additional information required to configuration problems in a debugging session. You can open the window in Microsoft Visual Studio* via menu Debug->Windows->Output. When debugging an offload enabled application, the debugger does not evaluate expressions that contain assignments which read memory locations before writing to them (e.g. x = x + 1). Please do not use such assignments when evaluating expressions (e.g. Immediate Window, Watch Window, …) Using conditional breakpoints for offload sections might stall the debugger. If a conditional breakpoint is created within an offload section, the debugger might hang when hitting it and evaluating the condition. This is currently analyzed and will be fixed with a future version of the product. Depending on the debugger extensions provided by Intel the behavior (e.g. run control) and output (e.g. disassembly) could differ to what is known from the Microsoft Visual Studio debugger. This is because of different debugging technologies used underneath. It is intended and does not have any disproportional impact on debugging experience. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 28 5 Intel® Math Kernel Library This section summarizes changes, new features and late-breaking news about this version of the Intel® Math Kernel Library (Intel® MKL). Bug fixes can be found here. 5.1 What's New in Intel MKL 11.2 Intel MKL now provides optimizations for all Intel® Atom™ processors that support Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.1 (Intel® SSE4.1) and Intel® Streaming SIMD Extensions 4.2 (Intel® SSE4.2) instruction sets Introduced support for Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions 512 (Intel® AVX-512) instruction set with limited optimizations in BLAS, DFT and VML Introduced Verbose support for BLAS and LAPACK domains, which enables users to capture the input parameters to Intel MKL function calls Introduced support for Intel® MPI Library 5.0 Introduced the Intel Math Kernel Library Cookbook (http://software.intel.com/enus/mkl_cookbook) , a new document that describes how to use Intel MKL routines to solve certain complex problems Introduced the MKL_DIRECT_CALL or MKL_DIRECT_CALL_SEQ compilation feature that provides ?GEMM small matrix performance improvements for all processors (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User's Guide for more details) Added the ability to link a Single Dynamic Library (mkl_rt) on Intel® Many Integrated Core Architecture (Intel® MIC Architecture) Added a customizable error handler. See the Intel Math Kernel Library Reference Manual description of mkl_set_exit_handler() for further details Extended the Intel® Xeon Phi™ coprocessor Automatic Offload feature with a resource sharing mechanism.See the Intel Math Kernel Library Reference Manual for the description of mkl_mic_set_resource_limit() function and the MKL_MIC_RESOURCE_LIMIT environment variable for further details Parallel Direct Sparse Solver for Clusters: o Introduced Parallel Direct Sparse Solver for Clusters, a distributed memory version of Intel MKL PARDISO direct sparse solver o Improved performance of the matrix gather step for distributed matrices o Enabled reuse of reordering information on multiple factorization steps o Added distributed CSR format, support of distributed matrices, RHS, and distributed solutions o Added support of solving of systems with multiple right hand sides o Added cluster support of factorization and solving steps o Added support for pure MPI mode and support for single OpenMP thread in hybrid configurations BLAS: o Improved threaded performance of ?GEMM for all 64-bit architectures supporting Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions 2 (Intel® AVX2) Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 29 o Optimized ?GEMM, ?TRSM, DTRMM for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Improved performance of ?GEMM for outer product [large m, large n, small k] and tall skinny matrices [large m, medium n, small k] on Intel MIC Architecture o Improved performance of ?TRSM and ?SYMM in Automatic Offload mode on Intel MIC Architecture o Improved performance of Level 3 BLAS functions for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX2 o Improved ?GEMM performance on small matrices for all processors when MKL_DIRECT_CALL or MKL_DIRECT_CALL_SEQ is defined during compilation (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User’s Guide for more details ) o Improved performance of DGER and DGEMM for the beta=1, k=1 case for 64-bit processors supporting Intel SSE4.2, Intel® Advanced Vector Extensions (Intel® AVX), and Intel AVX2 instruction sets o Optimized (D/Z)AXPY for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Optimized ?COPY for Intel AVX2 and AVX512 instruction sets o Optimized DGEMV for Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Improved performance of SSYR2K for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 o Improved threaded performance of ?AXPBY for all Intel processors o Improved DTRMM performance for the side=R, uplo={U,L}, transa=N, diag={N,U} cases for Intel AVX-512 LINPACK: o Improved performance of matrix generation in the heterogeneous Intel® Optimized MP LINPACK Benchmark for Clusters o Intel MIC Architecture offload option of the Intel Optimized MP LINPACK Benchmark for Clusters package now supports Intel AVX2 hosts o Improved performance of the Intel Optimized MP LINPACK for Clusters package for 64-bit processors supporting Intel AVX2 LAPACK: o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)RDB o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)EV when eigenvectors are needed o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)(EV/EVR/EVD) when eigenvectors are not needed o Improved performance of ?GELQF,?GELS and ?GELSS for underdetermined case (M less than N) o Improved performance of ?GEHRD,?GEEV and ?GEES o Improved performance of NaN checkers in LAPACKE interfaces o Improved performance of ?GELSX, ?GGSVP Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 30 o Improved performance of ?(SY/HE)(EV/EVR/EVD) when eigenvectors are not needed o Improved performance of ?GETRF o Improved performance of (S/D)GE(SVD/SDD) when M>=N and singular vectors are not needed o Improved performance of ?POTRF UPLO=U in Automatic Offload mode on Intel MIC Architecture o Added Automatic Offload for ?SYRDB on Intel MIC Architecture, which speeds up ?SY(EV/EVD/EVR) when eigenvectors are not needed PBLAS and ScaLAPACK: o Enabled Automatic Offload in P?GEMM routines for large distribution blocking factors Sparse BLAS: o Optimized SpMV kernels for Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Added release example for diagonal format use in Sparse BLAS o Improved Sparse BLAS level 2 and 3 performance for systems supporting Intel SSE4.2, Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 instruction sets Intel MKL PARDISO: o Added the ability to store Intel MKL PARDISO handle to the disk for future use at any solver stage o Added pivot control support for unsymmetric matrices and out-of-core mode o Added diagonal extraction support for unsymmetric matrices and out-of-core mode o Added example demonstrating use of Intel MKL PARDISO as iterative solver for non-linear systems o Added capability to free memory taken by original matrix after factorization stage if iterative refinement is disabled o Improved memory estimation of out-of-core (OOC) portion size for reordering algorithm leading to improved factorization-solve performance in OOC mode o Improved message output from Intel MKL PARDISO o Added support of zero pivot during factorization for structurally symmetric cases Poisson library: o Added example demonstrating use of the Intel MKL Poisson library as a preconditioner for linear systems solves Extended Eigensolver: o Improved message output o Improved examples o Added input and output iparm parameters in predefined interfaces for solving sparse problems Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 31 FFT: o Optimized FFTs for the Intel AVX-512 instruction set o Improved performance for non-power-of-2 length on Intel® MIC Architecture VML: Added v[d|s]Frac function computing fractional part for each vector element VSL RNG: o Added support of ntrial=0 in Binomial Random Number Generator o Improved performance of MRG32K3A and MT2203 BRNGs on Intel MIC Architecture o Improved performance of MT2203 BRNG on CPUs supporting Intel AVX and Intel AVX2 instruction sets VSL Summary Statistics: o Added support for group/pooled mean estimates (VSL_SS_GROUP_MEAN/VSL_SS_POOLED_MEAN) Data Fitting: Fixed incorrect behavior of the natural cubic spline construction function when number of breakpoints is 2 or 3 Introduced an Intel MKL mode that ignores all settings specified by Intel MKL environment variables o User can set up the mode by calling mkl_set_env_mode() routine which directs Intel MKL to ignore all environment settings specific to Intel MKL so that all Intel MKL related environment variables such as MKL_NUM_THREADS, MKL_DYNAMIC, MKL_MIC_ENABLE and others are ignored; users can instead set needed parameters via Intel MKL service routines such as mkl_set_num_threads() and mkl_mic_enable() 5.2 Notes Intel MKL now provides a choice of components to install. Components necessary for PGI compiler, Compaq Visual Fortran Compiler, SP2DP interface, BLAS95 and LAPACK95 interfaces, Cluster support (ScaLAPACK and Cluster DFT) and Intel MIC Architecture support are not installed unless explicitly selected during installation Unaligned CNR is not available for MKL Cluster components (ScaLAPACK and Cluster DFT) Examples for using Intel MKL with BOOST/uBLAS and Java have been removed from the product distribution and placed in the following articles: o How to use Intel® MKL with Java* o How to use BOOST* uBLAS with Intel® MKL API symbols, order of arguments and link line have changed since Intel MKL 11.2 Beta Update 2. (see the Intel® Math Kernel Library User's Guide for more details) Important deprecations are listed in Intel® Math Kernel Library (Intel® MKL) 11.2 Deprecations Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 32 5.3 Known Issues Automatic Offload on Windows with large matrices may cause data corruption or crash. There is a problem in COI: HSD4868293 (critical). COI Cannot allocate a buffer with >= 2**32 bytes and 2M pages on Windows Workaround: Set MKL_MIC_MAX_MEMORY=3G. Note: This issue is resolved in Intel® MPSS 3.3 A full list of the known limitations can be found in the Intel® MKL Article List at Intel® Developer Zone 5.4 Attributions As referenced in the End User License Agreement, attribution requires, at a minimum, prominently displaying the full Intel product name (e.g. "Intel® Math Kernel Library") and providing a link/URL to the Intel® MKL homepage (www.intel.com/software/products/mkl) in both the product documentation and website. The original versions of the BLAS from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be obtained from http://www.netlib.org/blas/index.html. The original versions of LAPACK from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be obtained from http://www.netlib.org/lapack/index.html. The authors of LAPACK are E. Anderson, Z. Bai, C. Bischof, S. Blackford, J. Demmel, J. Dongarra, J. Du Croz, A. Greenbaum, S. Hammarling, A. McKenney, and D. Sorensen. Our FORTRAN 90/95 interfaces to LAPACK are similar to those in the LAPACK95 package at http://www.netlib.org/lapack95/index.html. All interfaces are provided for pure procedures. The original versions of ScaLAPACK from which that part of Intel® MKL was derived can be obtained from http://www.netlib.org/scalapack/index.html. The authors of ScaLAPACK are L. S. Blackford, J. Choi, A. Cleary, E. D'Azevedo, J. Demmel, I. Dhillon, J. Dongarra, S. Hammarling, G. Henry, A. Petitet, K. Stanley, D. Walker, and R. C. Whaley. PARDISO in Intel® MKL is compliant with the 3.2 release of PARDISO that is freely distributed by the University of Basel. It can be obtained at http://www.pardiso-project.org. Some FFT functions in this release of Intel® MKL have been generated by the SPIRAL software generation system (http://www.spiral.net/) under license from Carnegie Mellon University. The Authors of SPIRAL are Markus Puschel, Jose Moura, Jeremy Johnson, David Padua, Manuela Veloso, Bryan Singer, Jianxin Xiong, Franz Franchetti, Aca Gacic, Yevgen Voronenko, Kang Chen, Robert W. Johnson, and Nick Rizzolo. The Intel® MKL Extended Eigensolver functionality is based on the Feast Eigenvalue Solver 2.0 (http://www.ecs.umass.edu/~polizzi/feast/) 6 Disclaimer and Legal Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL(R) PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 33 ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED NOR INTENDED FOR ANY APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. The information here is subject to change without notice. Do not finalize a design with this information. The products described in this document may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications. Current characterized errata are available on request. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature, may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725, or go to: http://www.intel.com/design/literature.htm Intel processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor numbers differentiate features within each processor family, not across different processor families. Go to: http://www.intel.com/products/processor_number/ for details. The Visual Intel® Fortran Compiler and Intel® Math Kernel Library are provided under Intel Corporation’s End User License Agreement (EULA). The GNU* Project Debugger, GDB is provided under the General GNU Public License, GPL V3. Celeron, Centrino, Intel, Intel logo, Intel386, Intel486, Intel Atom, Intel Core, Itanium, MMX, Pentium, VTune, Xeon and Xeon Phi are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. * Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel® Parallel Studio XE 2015 Composer Edition for Fortran Windows* Installation Guide and Release Notes 34 Copyright © 2014 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Product Brief Intel® High-Performance SATA Solid-State Drive Product Line NAND Storage Solutions from Intel Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives Extreme Performance and Reliability for Servers, Storage, and Workstations The Intel® Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives (SSDs) offers outstanding performance and reliability for servers, storage, and high-end workstations. Reduce Your Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) Enterprise applications place a premium on performance, reliability, power consumption, and space. Unlike traditional hard disk drives, Intel® Solid-State Drives have no moving parts, resulting in a quiet, cool storage solution that also offers significantly higher performance than traditional server drives. Imagine replacing up to 50 high-RPM hard disk drives with one Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive in your servers—handling the same server workload in less space, with no cooling requirements and lower power consumption. That space and power savings, for the same server workload, will translate into a tangible reduction in your TCO. Better by Design Drawing from decades of memory engineering experience, the Intel X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive is designed to deliver outstanding performance and reliability, featuring the latest generation native SATA interface with an advanced architecture employing 10 parallel NAND Flash channels equipped with single-level cell NAND Flash memory for even greater overall performance and reliability. With powerful Native Command Queuing to enable up to 32 concurrent operations, these Intel SSDs deliver higher input/output per second and throughput performance than other SSDs on the market today—and drastically outperform traditional hard disk drives. These Intel drives also feature low write amplification and a unique wear-leveling design for higher reliability, meaning Intel drives not only perform better—they last longer. Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive 1. Active power is measured on an IOMeter workload of full bandwidth 64 K sequential writes with queue depth 1. INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life-saving, or lifesustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Copyright © 2008 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel and the Intel logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Printed in the United States. 0808/SD/HBD/PDF 319660-001US www.intel.com For more information, visit www.intel.com/go/ssd. Technical Specifications Model Name Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drive Capacity 32 GB and 64 GB NAND Flash Components Intel® Single-Level Cell (SLC) NAND Flash Memory 10 Parallel Channel Architecture with 50nm SLC ONFI 1.0 NAND Bandwidth Sustained sequential read: up to 250 MB/s Sustained sequential write: up to 170 MB/s Read Latency 75 microseconds I/O Per Second (IOPS) Random 4 KB reads: >35,000 IOPS Random 4 KB writes: >3,300 IOPS Interface SATA 1.5 Gb/s and 3.0 Gb/s Form Factor 2.5¨ industry standard hard drive form factor Compatibility SATA revision 2.6 compliant. Compatible with SATA 3 Gb/s with Native Command Queuing and SATA 1.5 Gb/s interface rates Life Expectancy 2 million hours Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF) Power Consumption Active: 2.4 W typical (server workload1 Order Number: 319984-003US January 2009 Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive SSDSA2SH032G1, SSDSA2SH064G1 Product Manual Available in 2.5” Form Factor Capacity: 32 GB, 64 GB Uses Intel NAND flash memory Single Level Cell (SLC) components Bandwidth Performance Specifications — Sustained Sequential Read: up to 250 MB/s — Sustained Sequential Write: up to 170 MB/s Read and Write IOPS Specifications (IOmeter Queue Depth 32) — Random 4 KB Reads: 35 K IOPS — Random 4 KB Writes: 3.3 K IOPS Compatibility — Intel® Matrix Storage Manager — SATA Revision 2.6 compliant, compatible with SATA 1.5 Gb/s and 3 Gb/s interface rates — ATA/ATAPI-7 Compliant — SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set — Native Command Queuing (NCQ) command Compliance — UL* — CE* — C-Tick* — BSMI* — MIC* — Microsoft* WHQL — RoHS* Power Management — 5 V SATA Supply Rail — Supports ATA Power Management and Advanced Power Management Specifications — SATA Interface Power Management — OS-Aware Hot Plug/Removal Power Specifications — Active: 2.4/2.6 W (32 GB/64 GB) TYP — Idle: .060 W TYP Temperature — Operating: 0o C to 70o C — Non-Operating: -55o C to 95o C Reliability — Bit Error Rate (BER): 1 sector per 1015 bits read — Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) 2,000,000 Hours — Write Endurance: 1 petabyte of random writes Shock — Operating and Non-operating: 1,000G/0.5 msec Vibration — Operating: 2.17 G (7-800 Hz) — Non-operating 3.13 G (10-500 Hz) Weight: — 80 +/- 2 grams (32 GB) — 90 +/- 2 grams (64 GB) (2.5” 7 mm Form Factors) Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 2 Order Number: 319984-003US Legal Lines and Disclaimers Ordering Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL® PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE, TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN INTEL'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE FOR SUCH PRODUCTS, INTEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF INTEL PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, life sustaining, critical control or safety systems, or in nuclear facility applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. Intel Corporation may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights that relate to the presented subject matter. The furnishing of documents and other materials and information does not provide any license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any such patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics of any features or instructions marked “reserved” or “undefined.” Intel reserves these for future definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future changes to them. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written consent of Intel Corporation. Contact your local Intel sales office or your distributor to obtain the latest specifications and before placing your product order. Copies of documents which have an order number and are referenced in this document, or other Intel literature may be obtained by calling 1-800-548-4725 or by visiting Intel's website at http://www.intel.com. Intel and Intel logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. *Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.Copyright © 2009, Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Decoder Intel High Performance Solid State Drive Ordering Information Part Number MM # Device Nomenclature Packaging SSDSA2SH032G101 896432 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 1 unit SSDSA2SH032G1C5 900342 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 5 unit SSDSA2SH032G1 896474 32 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 50 unit SSDSA2SH064G101 899386 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 1 unit SSDSA2SH064G1C5 901316 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 5 units SSDSA2SH064G1 899387 64 GB SATA 2.5” Drive SLC High Performance, Production Sample 50 units Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US Intel Confidential 3 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Contents 1.0 Introduction ..............................................................................................................5 1.1 Product Overview ................................................................................................5 1.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................6 1.3 Architecture........................................................................................................6 2.0 Certifications and Compliance ...................................................................................7 3.0 Product Specifications ...............................................................................................7 3.1 Capacity ............................................................................................................7 3.2 Performance .......................................................................................................7 3.3 Electrical Characteristics.......................................................................................8 3.3.1 Supply Voltage.........................................................................................8 3.3.2 Power Consumption ..................................................................................8 3.4 Environmental Conditions .....................................................................................9 3.4.1 Temperature............................................................................................9 3.4.2 Altitude...................................................................................................9 3.4.3 Shock and Vibration..................................................................................9 3.4.4 Acoustics .............................................................................................. 10 3.4.5 Electromagnetic Immunity....................................................................... 10 3.5 Reliability ......................................................................................................... 10 3.5.1 Non-recoverable read errors .................................................................... 11 3.5.2 Mean Time Between Failure ..................................................................... 11 3.5.3 Power On/Off Cycles ............................................................................... 11 3.5.4 Write Endurance .................................................................................... 11 4.0 Mechanical Information........................................................................................... 12 5.0 Pin and Signal Descriptions ..................................................................................... 13 5.1 Pin Locations .................................................................................................... 13 5.2 Signal Description Table ..................................................................................... 13 5.3 Hot Plug Support ............................................................................................... 14 6.0 Command Sets ........................................................................................................ 15 6.1 ATA Commands ................................................................................................ 15 6.1.1 ATA General Feature Command Set .......................................................... 15 6.1.2 Power Management Command Set............................................................ 18 6.1.3 Security Mode Feature Set....................................................................... 18 6.1.4 SMART Command Set ............................................................................. 19 6.1.5 Host Protected Area Command Set ........................................................... 19 6.1.6 48-Bit Address Command Set .................................................................. 19 6.1.7 Device Configuration Overlay Command Set .............................................. 19 6.1.8 General Purpose Log Command Set .......................................................... 20 6.2 SATA Commands............................................................................................... 20 6.2.1 Software Settings Preservation................................................................. 20 6.2.2 Native Command Queuing ....................................................................... 20 7.0 References .............................................................................................................. 21 8.0 Glossary .................................................................................................................. 22 9.0 Revision History ...................................................................................................... 23 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 4 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 5 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 1.0 Introduction The Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive (SSD) delivers ultimate performance in an industry standard 2.5” form factor while simultaneously improving system responsiveness over standard rotating media or hard disk drives (HDD) in some of the most demanding applications. By combining Intel’s leading NAND flash memory technology with our innovative controller, Intel delivers an SSD for Native Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) hard disk drive drop-in replacement with enhanced performance, reliability, ruggedness and power savings. Since there are no rotating platters, moving heads, fragile actuaters, unnecessary spinup time or positional seek time that can significantly slow down the storage subsystem, the Intel X25-E SATA SSD enables fast read/write access times and significant I/O, as well as performance improvement when compared to rotating media. This document describes the specifications of the Intel X25-E SATA SSD in the 2.5” form factor. 1.1 Product Overview The Intel X25-E SATA SSD primarily targets high-end workstations, desktops, gaming and various server/storage applications. Key attributes include extremely high performance, low power, enhanced reliability and improved ruggedness as compared to standard 10,000 and 15,000 RPM SATA hard drives. The Intel X25-E SATA SSD is available in an industry standard 2.5” form factor that is electronically, mechanically, and software compatible with existing SATA and Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) slots and cables. Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 6 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 1.2 Block Diagram 1.3 Architecture The Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drives utilize a cost effective System on a Chip (SOC) design to manage a full SATA 3 Gb/s bandwidth with the host while managing multiple flash memory devices on multiple channels internally. Figure 1. Block Diagram Intel System On A Chip (SOC) SATA Interface Flash Memory Channel 0 Flash Memory Channel ... Flash Memory Channel n NAND Flash Memory NAND Flash Memory NAND Flash Memory Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 7 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 2.0 Certifications and Compliance 3.0 Product Specifications 3.1 Capacity Notes: 1. 1 GB = 1,000,000,000 Byte and not all of the memory can be used for data storage. 2. 1 Sector = 512 Byte. 3.2 Performance Notes: 1. Performance measured using IOmeter with queue depth set to 32. 2. Write Cache enabled. Table 1. Device Certifications Certification/Compliance Description CE Compliant Indicate conformity with the essential health and safety requirements set out in European Directives Low Voltage Directive and EMC directive. UL Certified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Component Recognition UL60950-1. C-Tick Compliant Compliance with EN 55022:2006 and the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Framework requirements of the Australian Communication Authority (ACA). BSMI Compliant Compliance to the Taiwan EMC standard “Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment, CNS 13438 Class B.” MIC Certified Compliance with paragraph 1 of Article 11 of the Electromagnetic Compatibility control Regulation and meet the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Framework requirements of the Radio Research Laboratory (RRL) Ministry of Information and Communication Republic of Korea. Microsoft WHQL Certified Microsoft Windows Hardware Quality Labs RoHS Compliant Restriction of Hazardous Substance Directive Table 2. User Addressable Sectors Unformatted Capacity Total User Addressable Sectors in LBA Mode 32 GB 62,500,000 64 GB 125,045,424 Table 3. Maximum Sustained Read and Write Bandwidth Access Type MB/s Sequential Read up to 250 Sequential Write up to 170 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 8 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Notes: 1. Performance measured using IOmeter with queue depth set to 32. 2. Write Cache enabled. 3. Random IOPS cover the entire range of legal logical block addresses (LBAs). Measurements are performed on a full drive (all LBAs have valid content). Notes: 1. Write Cache enabled. 2. Device measured using IOmeter*. 3. Power On to Ready (POR) time assumes proper shutdown (power removal preceded by STANDBY command). 4. Read/Write latency measured on 4 k transfers. 5. Queue depth set to 1. 6. Sequential IOPS cover the entire range of legal logical block addresses (LBAs). Measurements are performed on a full drive (all LBAs have valid content). 3.3 Electrical Characteristics 3.3.1 Supply Voltage 3.3.2 Power Consumption Table 4. Random Read and Write Input/Output Operations per Second (IOPS) Access Type IOPS 4K Read 35,000 4K Write 3,300 Table 5. Latency Specifications Type Average Latency Read 75 µs (TYP) Write 85 µs (TYP) Power On to Ready 1 s Table 6. Operating Voltage Description Min Max Unit Operating Voltage for 5 V (+/- 5%) 4.75 5.25 V Table 7. Typical Power Consumption Mode Typ Unit Active 2.4 (32 GB) 2.6 (64 GB) W Idle 0.06 W Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 9 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Drive will transition to idle power level once idle for 25 ms whether or not sleep or standby command is received. Standby power levels assume DIPM enabled. Active power is measured on an IOMeter workload of full bandwidth 64 K sequential writes with queue depth 1. 3.4 Environmental Conditions 3.4.1 Temperature Note: Measured without condensation. 3.4.2 Altitude The drive is not sensitive to changes in altitude because it has no moving parts. Drive tested between -1K and 40K feet. 3.4.3 Shock and Vibration Notes: 1. Shock specifications assumes that the SSD is mounted securely with the input vibration applied to the drive mounting screws. Stimulus may be applied in the X, Y or Z axis. 2. Vibration specifications assumes that the SSD is mounted securely with the input vibration applied to the drive mounting screws. Stimulus may be applied in the X, Y or Z axis. 3. Sine wave sweeping 1 oct/min. Table 8. Temperature Related Specifications Mode Min Typ Max Unit Ambient Temperature Operating 0 70 oC Non-Operating -55 95 oC Temperature Gradient Operating 20 oC/hr * Non-Operating 30 oC/hr * Humidity Operating 5 95 % Non-Operating 5 95 % Table 9. Shock and Vibration Specifications Mode Timing Max Unit Shock1 Operating at 0.5 msec 1,000 G Non-Operating at 0.5 msec 1,000 G Vibration2 Operating 2.17 G 7-800 Hz Non-Operating 3.13 G 10-500 Hz3 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 10 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 3.4.4 Acoustics The drive has no moving or noise-emitting parts; therefore, it produces negligible sound (0 dB) in all modes of operation. 3.4.5 Electromagnetic Immunity Electromagnetic Immunity tests assume the SSD is properly installed in the representative host system. The drive will operate properly without errors or degradation in performance when subjected to radio frequency (RF) environments defined in the following table: Notes: 1. Performance Criteria A = The device shall continue to operate as intended, i.e., normal unit operation with no degradation of performance. 2. Performance Criteria B = The device shall continue to operate as intended after completion of the test. However, during the test, some degradation of performance is allowed as long as there is no data loss operator intervention to restore device function. 3. Performance Criteria C = temporary loss of function is allowed. Operator intervention is acceptable to restore device function. 4. Electrostatic Discharge applied to drive enclosure. 3.5 Reliability Table 10. Electromagnetic Immunity Specifications Test Description Performance Criteria Reference Standard Electrostatic discharge Contact, HCP, VCP: ±8 kV; Air: ± 15 kV B EN 61000-4-2: 1995 Radiated RF immunity 80 to 1,000 MHz, 3 V/m, 80% AM with 1 kHz sine 900 MHz, 3 V/m, 50% pulse modulation at 200 Hz A EN 61000-4-3: 1996 ENV 50204: 1995 Electrical fast transient ± 1 kV on AC mains, ± 0.5 kV on external I/O B EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Surge immunity ± 1 kV differential, ± 2 kV common, AC mains B EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Conducted RF immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz, 3 Vrms, 80% AM with 1 kHz sine A EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Voltage dips, interrupts 0% open, 5 seconds 0% short, 5 seconds 40%, 0.10 seconds 70%, 0.01 seconds C C C B EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Table 11. Reliability Specifications Parameter Value Nonrecoverable read errors (BER) 1 sector in 1015 bits read, max Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) 2,000,000 hours Power On/Off Cycles 50,000 cycles Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 11 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 3.5.1 Non-recoverable read errors The nonrecoverable read error rate will not exceed one sector in the specified number of bits read. In the extremely unlikely event of a nonrecoverable read error, the drive will report it as a read failure to the host; the sector in error is considered corrupt and is not returned to the host. 3.5.2 Mean Time Between Failure The Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) is calculated based on a Part Stress Analysis. It assumes nominal voltage, with all other parameters within specified range. 3.5.3 Power On/Off Cycles Defined as power being removed from the drive, and then restored. Note that host systems and drive enclosures may remove power from the drive for reasons other than a system shutdown. 3.5.4 Write Endurance The drive supports 1 petabyte of lifetime random writes. Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 12 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 4.0 Mechanical Information Note: All dimensions are in millimeters. Figure 2. Dimensions Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 13 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 5.0 Pin and Signal Descriptions This section identifies the pin locations and signal descriptions of the Intel High Performance SSDs. 5.1 Pin Locations 5.2 Signal Description Table Note: Key and spacing separate signal and power segments. Figure 3. Layout of Signal and Power Segment Pins Signal Segment S1 Power Segment P1 Table 12. Serial ATA Connector Pin Signal Definitions Pin Function Definition S1 Ground 2nd mate S2 A+ Differential signal pair A S3 AS4 Ground 2nd mate S5 BDifferential signal pair B S6 B+ S7 Ground 2nd mate Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 14 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Notes: 1. All pins are in a single row, with a 1.27 mm (0.050”) pitch. 2. Pins P1, P2 and P3 are connected together, although they are not connected internally to the device. The host may put 3.3 V on these pins. 3. The mating sequence is: • the ground pins P4-P6, P10, P12 and the 5v power pin P7. • the signal pins and the rest of the 5V power pins P8-P9. 4. Ground connectors P4 and P12 may contact before the other 1st mate pins in both the power and signal connectors to discharge ESD in a suitably configured backplane connector. 5. Power pins P7, P8,and P9 are internally connected to one another within the device. 6. The host may ground P11 if it is not used for Device Activity Signal (DAS). 7. Pins P13, P14 and P15 are connected together, although they are not connected internally to the device. The host may put 12 V on these pins. 5.3 Hot Plug Support Hot Plug insertion and removal are supported in the presence of a proper connector and appropriate operating system (OS) support as described in the SATA 2.6 specification. This product supports Asynchronous Signal Recovery and will issue an unsolicited COMINIT when first mated with a powered connector to guarantee reliable detection by a host system without hardware device detection. Table 13. Serial ATA Power Pin Definitions Pin1 Function Definition Mating Order P1 Not connected.2 3.3 V Power 2nd Mate P2 Not connected2. 3.3 V Power 2nd Mate P3 Not connected.2 3.3 V Power 1st Mate P4 Ground3, 4 1st Mate P5 Ground3 1st Mate P6 Ground3 1st Mate P7 V5 3, 5 5 V Power 1st Mate P8 V5 3, 5 5 V Power 2nd Mate P9 V5 3, 5 5 V Power 2nd Mate P10 Ground3 1st Mate P11 DAS6 Device Activity Signal6 2nd Mate P12 Ground3, 4 1st Mate P13 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate P14 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate P15 Not connected.7 12 V Power 2nd Mate Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 15 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 6.0 Command Sets 6.1 ATA Commands The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports all the mandatory ATA commands defined in the ATA/ATAPI-7 specification. 6.1.1 ATA General Feature Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the ATA General Feature command set (nonPACKET), which consists of • EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC • FLUSH CACHE • IDENTIFY DEVICE • READ DMA • READ SECTOR(S) • READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) • SEEK • SET FEATURES • WRITE DMA • WRITE SECTOR(S) • READ MULTIPLE • SET MULTIPLE MODE • WRITE MULTIPLE The Intel X25-E SATA SSD also supports the following optional commands: • READ BUFFER • WRITE BUFFER • NOP • DOWNLOAD MICROCODE 6.1.1.1 IDENTIFY DEVICE Data The following table details the sector data returned after issuing an IDENTIFY DEVICE command. Table 14. Returned Sector Data Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description 0 F 0040h General configuration bit-significant information 1 X 3FFFh Obsolete - Number of logical cylinders (16,383) 2 V C837h Specific configuration Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 16 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 3 X 0010h Obsolete - Number of logical heads (16) 4-5 X 0h Retired 6 X 003Fh Obsolete - Number of logical sectors per logical track (63) 7-8 V 0h Reserved for assignment by the CompactFlash Association 9 X 0h Retired 10-19 F Varies Serial number (20 ASCII characters) 20-21 X 0h Retired 22 X 0h Obsolete 23-26 F Varies Firmware revision (8 ASCII characters) 27-46 F Varies Model number (Intel Solid State Drive) 47 F 8010h 7:0—Maximum number of sectors transferred per interrupt on MULTIPLE commands 48 F 0h Reserved 49 F 2F00h Capabilities 50 F 4000h Capabilities 51-52 X 0h Obsolete 53 F 0007h Words 88 and 70:64 Valid 54 X 3FFFh Obsolete - Number of logical cylinders (16,383) 55 X 0010h Obsolete - Number of logical heads (16) 56 X 003Fh Obsolete - Number of logical sectors per logical track (63) 57-58 X 00FBFC10h Obsolete 59 F 0101h Number of sectors transferred per interrupt on MULTIPLE commands 60-61 F 03B9ACA0h (32 GB) 07740AB0h (64 GB) Total number of user addressable sectors 62 X 0h Obsolete 63 F 0007h Multi-word DMA modes supported/selected 64 F 0003h PIO modes supported 65 F 0078h Minimum Multiword DMA transfer cycle time per word 66 F 0078h Manufacturer’s recommended Multiword DMA transfer cycle time 67 F 0078h Minimum PIO transfer cycle time without flow control 68 F 0078h Minimum PIO transfer cycle time with IORDY flow control 69-70 F 0h Reserved (for future command overlap and queuing) 71-74 F 0h Reserved for the IDENTIFY PACKET DEVICE command. 75 F 001Eh Queue depth 76 F 0106h Serial ATA capabilities 77 F 0h Reserved for future Serial ATA definition 78 F 0048h Serial ATA features supported 79 V 0040h Serial ATA features enabled Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued) Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 17 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 80 F 00FCh Major Version Number 81 F 001Ah Minor Version Number 82 F 746Bh Command set supported. 83 F 7C01h Command sets supported. 84 F 6123h Command set/feature supported extension. 85 V 7469h Command set/feature enabled. 86 V BC01h Command set/feature enabled. 87 V 6123h Command set/feature default. 88 V 407Fh Ultra DMA Modes 89 F 0001h Time required for security erase unit completion 90 F 0001h Time required for Enhanced security erase completion 91 V 0h Current advanced power management value 92 V FFFEh Master Password Revision Code 93 F 0h Hardware reset result. The contents of bits (12:0) of this word shall change only during the execution of a hardware reset. 94 V 0h Vendor’s recommended and actual acoustic management value. 95 F 0h Stream Minimum Request Size 96 V 0h Streaming Transfer Time - DMA 97 V 0h Streaming Access Latency - DMA and PIO 98-99 F 0h Streaming Performance Granularity 100-103 V 03B9ACA0h (32 GB) 07740AB0h (64 GB) Maximum user LBA for 48-bit Address feature set. 104 V 0h Streaming Transfer Time - PIO 105 F 0h Reserved 106 F 4000h Physical sector size / logical sector size 107 F 0h Inter-seek delay for ISO-7779 acoustic testing in microseconds 108-111 F Varies Unique ID 112-115 F 0h Reserved for world wide name extension to 128 bits 116 V 0h Reserved for technical report 117-118 F 0h Words per Logical Sector 119 F 401Ch Supported Settings 120 F 401Ch Command Set/Feature Enabled/Supported 121-126 F 0h Reserved 127 F 0h Removable Media Status Notification feature set support 128 V 0021h Security status 129-159 X 0h Vendor specific 160 F 0h CompactFlash Association (CFA) power mode 1 161-175 X 0h Reserved for assignment by the CFA Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued) Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 18 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Notes: 1. F = Fixed. The content of the word is fixed and does not change. For removable media devices, these values may change when media is removed or changed. 2. V = Variable. The state of at least one bit in a word is variable and may change depending on the state of the device or the commands executed by the device. 3. X = F or V. The content of the word may be fixed or variable. 6.1.2 Power Management Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Power Management command set, which consists of • CHECK POWER MODE • IDLE • IDLE IMMEDIATE • SLEEP • STANDBY • STANDBY IMMEDIATE 6.1.3 Security Mode Feature Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Security Mode command set, which consists of • SECURITY SET PASSWORD • SECURITY UNLOCK • SECURITY ERASE PREPARE • SECURITY ERASE UNIT • SECURITY FREEZE LOCK • SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD 176-205 V 0h Current media serial number 206-216 F 0h Reserved 217 F 0001h Non-rotating media device 218-221 F 0h Reserved 222 F 101Fh Reserved 223-233 F 0h Reserved 234 F 0001h Reserved 235 F 02A0h Reserved 255 X Varies Integrity word (Checksum and Signature) Table 14. Returned Sector Data (Continued) Word F = Fixed V = Variable X = Both Default Value Description Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 19 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 6.1.4 SMART Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the SMART command set, please refer to Intel® High Performance SATA Solid State Drive S.M.A.R.T Features User Guide Order Number 320520-002US. 6.1.5 Host Protected Area Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Host Protected Area command set, which consists of • READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS • SET MAX ADDRESS • READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT • SET MAX ADDRESS EXT The Intel X25-E SATA SSD also supports the following optional commands: • SET MAX SET PASSWORD • SET MAX LOCK • SET MAX FREEZE LOCK • SET MAX UNLOCK 6.1.6 48-Bit Address Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the 48-bit Address command set, which consists of • FLUSH CACHE EXT • READ DMA EXT • READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT • READ SECTOR(S) EXT • READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT • SET MAX ADDRESS EXT • WRITE DMA EXT • WRITE MULTIPLE EXT • WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT 6.1.7 Device Configuration Overlay Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Device Configuration Overlay command set, which consists of • DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK • DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTITY • DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE • DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 20 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 6.1.8 General Purpose Log Command Set The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the General Purpose Log command set, which consists of • READ LOG EXT • WRITE LOG EXT 6.2 SATA Commands The SATA 2.6 specification is a super set of the ATA/ATAPI-7 specification with regard to supported commands. The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the following features that are unique to the SATA specification. 6.2.1 Software Settings Preservation The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the SET FEATURES parameter to enable/disable the preservation of software settings. 6.2.2 Native Command Queuing The Intel X25-E SATA SSD supports the Native Command Queuing (NCQ) command set, which consists of • READ FPDMA QUEUED • WRITE FPDMA QUEUED Notes: With a maximum queue depth equal to 31. Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 21 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 7.0 References This document references standards defined by a variety of organizations. Use the following list to identify the location of an organization’s standards information. Table 15. Standards References Date or Rev. # Title Location July 2007 RoHS Search for material data declaration sheets at http:// intel.pcnalert.com July 2007 SFF-8144, 1.8” drive form factor http://www.sffcommittee.org June 2007 Intel Matrix Storage Manager http://support.intel.com/support/chipsets/imsm/ February 2007 Serial ATA Revision 2.6 http://www.sata-io.org May 2006 SFF-8223, 2.5" Drive w/Serial Attachment Connector http://www.sffcommittee.org May 2005 SFF-8201, 2.5” drive form factor http://www.sffcommittee.org April 2004 ATA-6 spec http://www.t13.org/project/d1410r3b-ATA-ATAPI-6.pdf April 2004 ATA-7 Volume 1 http://www.t13.org/Documents/UploadedDocuments/ docs2007/D1532v1r4b-AT_Attachment_with_Packet_ Interface_-_7_Volume_1.pdf 1995 1996 1995 1995 1996 1994 International Electrotechnical Commission EN 61000- 4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 2: Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test 4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 3: Radiated, Radio Frequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test 4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 4: Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test 4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 5: Surge Immunity Test 4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 6: Immunity to Conducted Disturbances, Induced by Radio-Frequency Fields 4-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and Measurement Techniques - Section 11: Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity Tests http://www.iec.ch Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 22 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 8.0 Glossary This document incorporates many industry- and device-specific words. Use the following list to define a variety of terms and acronyms. Table 16. Glossary of Terms and Acronyms Term Definition ATA Advanced Technology Attachment ATAPI Advanced Technology Attachment Packet Interface BER Bit error rate, or percentage of bits that have errors relative to the total number of bits received DIPM Device Initiated Link Power Management. The ability of the device to request SATA link power state changes. DMA Direct Memory Access EXT Extended FP First Party GB Giga-byte defined as 1x109 bytes HDD Hard Disk Drive Hot Plug A term used to describe the removal or insertion of a SATA hard drive when the system is powered on. iMSM The Intel Matrix Storage Manager device driver and associated system software. IOPS Input output operations per second LBA Logical Block Address MB Mega-bytes defined as 1x106 bytes MTBF Mean time between failures NCQ Native Command Queuing. The ability of the SATA hard drive to queue and re-order commands to maximize execution efficiency. NOP No Operation OS Operating System Port The point at which a SATA drive physically connects to the SATA controller. RMS Root Mean Squared RPM Revolutions Per Minute SAS Serial Attached SCSI SATA Serial ATA SFF Small Form Factor SMART Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology: an open standard for developing hard drives and software systems that automatically monitors a hard drive’s health and reports potential problems. SSD Solid State Drive Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive January 2009 Product Manual Order Number: 319984-003US 23 Intel® X25-E SATA SSD 9.0 Revision History Date Revision Description January 2009 003 Added new capacity of 64 GB to the datasheet. Added power numbers and weight for 64 GB on page 1 and page 8. Added weight information for 64 GB on page 1. Updated reliability information on write endurance on page 1 and page 11. Added user addressable sectors on page 7. Modified Random IOPs table on page 8. Modified latency specification notes on page 8. Updated Identify Device ID words 59, 60, 84, 85, 87, 100 and 106 on page 15. Added a reference to 6.1.4 on page 19. July 2008 002 Updated the power number on page 1 and Table 7 on page 8. Updated standby shock spec on page 1 and Table 9 on page 9. Modified weight numbers on page 1. Updated Device decoder on page 2. Updated Random Write Speed on Table 4 on page 8. Update Sustained Sequential Read spec on page 1 and Table 3 on page 7. Changed maximum queue depth to 31 on 6.2.2. Updated Identify device information on 6.1.1.1. Added extra info on altitude in 3.4.2. RoHS link updated on Table 15 on page 21. June 2008 001 Initial Release. Earlier information released as Intel® Extreme Performance Solid State Drive Advance Product Manual - 318776-003US. Intel® X25-E SATA SSD Intel® X25-E SATA Solid State Drive Product Manual January 2009 24 Order Number: 319984-003US Intel® X25-E SATA SSD ) Idle (DIPM): 0.06 W typical Operating Shock 1,000 G/0.5 ms Voltage 5V SATA supply rail Operating Temperature 0°C to +70°C RoHS Compliance Meets the requirements of EU RoHS Compliance Directives Product Health Monitoring Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) commands, plus additional SSD monitoring Validated and Tested by Intel, on Intel All Intel® X25-E Extreme SATA Solid-State Drives are tested and validated on the latest Intel-based server and workstation platforms, for your peace of mind. Copyright © 1997 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this guide, nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information herein. *Other brands and names are the property of their respective owners. Check your computer's owner's manual ......................................... 4 Installation steps ............................................................................. 4 Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 14 Getting help .................................................................................. 21 Registration .................................................................................. 22 Three-year limited warranty ......................................................... 23 First Edition January 1997 Second Edition March 1997 Third Edition August 1997 Part number: 669409-003 Contents This symbol indicates a CAUTION or WARNING. It identifies operations or situations that may be harmful or dangerous to you or your equipment. For your safety and to protect your equipment, read and observe all cautions and warnings. Explanation of symbols used in this guide: This symbol indicates a NOTE. It identifies items of special interest that pertain to the section or procedure you are reading. Notes typically clarify or expand the material in the text. 4 Step 1—Check your computer's BIOS. Caution: Failure to update an incompatible BIOS will cause your computer to lock up after installation. The system control program (BIOS) in some computers doesn't support the higher speed of the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. You must update an incompatible BIOS before installing the processor. Failure to update your incompatible BIOS will cause your computer to lock up after installation. This lock-up may occur every time you start your computer or only after you install new hardware such as graphics or audio cards. Follow these steps to determine whether your computer's BIOS must be updated. 1. Insert the OverDrive Processor Diagnostic diskette in drive A. 2. Choose File (for Windows* 3.1 or Windows NT*) or Start (Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0). 3. Choose Run. 4. Type a:\diag, click OK, then choose Run Diagnostics from the menu. If your computer's BIOS is incompatible with the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, you must update the BIOS before installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology (see "BIOS update needed" on page 17). A successful result indicates that the likelihood of encountering a problem due to a BIOS incompatibility is low. Please continue the installation with Step 2. This diagnostic is limited to certain BIOS tests only; it does not test for other possible incompatibilities between the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and a particular PC hardware configuration. If you experience problems after installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, contact Intel customer support for more information. (See "Getting Help" on page 21.) First check your computer owner's manual to see if it has a section on installing computer upgrade hardware such as the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. If it does, follow the owner's manual procedure. Otherwise, use this manual. Check your computer's owner's manual 5 Step 3—Unplug computer and remove cover. Step 2—Ground yourself. To prevent damaging the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and your computer with a static discharge, ground yourself by touching the metal back or side panel of your computer’s system unit. Warning: Danger to equipment! The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology can be damaged by static discharge. Before handling the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, be sure to ground yourself by touching the metal on your computer. Limiting your movements during installation reduces static electricity. Warning: Don't burn yourself! Many components can become hot enough to cause mild skin burns. Wait at least 15 minutes after turning off the power before handling any parts. Turn off the computer and any attached equipment (such as a monitor or printer), unplug the power cord, and remove the cover. OFF ON 6 Step 4—Find the computer's Pentium processor. Find the Pentium processor in the computer. The Pentium processor in most computers looks like the following: Some computers have a power cable attached to the Pentium processor's fan or have a passive heat sink (which may be attached with a clip) on top of the Pentium processor . Pentium processor Your computer's owner's manual may show the location of the processor. If you can't locate your computer's original processor, contact your dealer or your computer manufacturer for assistance. Some computers have an empty second socket next to the processor. For more information on the installation process for these computers, see page 15. PC-3785 PC-3786 Clip Fan power cable OverDrive processor socket 7 After locating the processor, examine the socket to determine the socket type. Most Pentium processor-based computers use a socket with a handle that locks and unlocks, called a zero insertion force (ZIF) socket. If the socket in your computer doesn't have a handle, Intel strongly recommends that you have a qualified professional install the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology rather than installing it yourself. Typical LIF socket (no handle) Typical ZIF socket (with handle) Some computers use a socket without a handle, called a low insertion force (LIF) socket. • If your computer has either a power cable attached to the Pentium processor's heat sink or a heat sink attached with a clip, go to step 5. • If your computer doesn't have a power cable attached to the heat sink and doesn't have a heat sink attached with a clip, skip step 5 and go to step 6. Handle 8 The heat sink on your computer's original processor is either clipped to the socket or fastened directly to the top of the processor. If the heat sink is fastened directly to the processor without a clip and doesn't have a fan cable, go to step 6 now. You do not need the fan, fan cable, or clip to install the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. After removing these parts, store them with your original processor. Step 5—Unplug the fan power cable or unfasten the heat sink clip. Unplug the fan power cable Some computers have a power cable attached to the fan. Carefully unplug the fan power cable from the power source. After unplugging the fan power cable, carefully fold the power source cable out of the way so it doesn't touch any computer components. After unplugging the fan power cable from the computer power source, fold the computer power source cable out of the way. PC-3252 System power source cable Fan power cable 9 PC-3312 Removing the heat sink clip If the heat sink is clipped to the socket, remove the clip by pressing down and unfastening it from the tab on the socket. Be sure to hold your hand over the clip while unfastening it to prevent it from flying loose. Heat sink fins Heat sink clips to socket tab Heat sink fan Socket Typical fan heat sink clip Heat sink clip surrounds fan and hooks to socket tabs. Remove heat sink fan and fins as one piece. PC-2822 Heat sink clips to socket tab Press down on tab to release heat sink clip Typical passive heat sink clip Some heat sinks clamp tightly over the socket tab and require a tool such as a screwdriver to loosen the clip enough to slide over the tab. Carefully insert the tool between the heat sink and the socket, just above the socket tab, and gently pry outward to allow the heat sink to slip over the tab. You should then be able to completely release the heat sink from all the other socket tabs. Use screwdriver to loosen clip while pressing down Fan Processor Socket 10 Step 6—Open the socket handle and remove the existing processor from the socket. Push the handle slightly sideways to slide it over the lever lock tab, then move the handle to a 90-degree, upright position. Be sure the socket is completely open. Don't use excessive force. Your computer’s motherboard should not bend or flex while you are opening the socket. Once the socket is open, remove the processor. Be sure the socket is completely open. PC-2833 Some manufacturers use thermal grease to attach the heat sink to the processor. Thermal grease is a conductive material and can damage your computer if it gets on socket pin holes, processor pins, or other components. Avoid getting thermal grease residue on your hands or the computer when you remove the heat sink from the processor. Save the original processor in case you need it later. Store it in a safe place, such as in the box that the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology came in. 11 Step 7—Insert the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology into the socket. Correctly orienting your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology in the socket is crucial to the success of your installation. The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fits in the socket only one way. Incorrectly aligning your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology can damage the processor and your computer. Orient the notch on one corner of the OverDrive processor with MMX technology to the notch on one corner of the socket. Place the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology on the socket and align the pins with the pin holes. Notch Notch Once the pins and pin holes are properly aligned, gently insert the processor into the socket. Don't use force to insert the processor in the socket. Don't apply pressure to the center of the fan. PODP5V 109X4405H6J05 DC 5V 0.14A SANYO DENKI 12 Step 8—Close the socket handle. Close the socket handle to lock the OverDrive processor with MMX technology in place. Once it is locked in place, the OverDrive processor with MMX technology should fit snugly in the socket. Step 9—Replace the cover, plug in the computer, and turn it on. Put the cover back on the computer. Reconnect all the cables and cords, and plug the power cord into the wall outlet. Turn on your computer. If your computer requires it, run the computer’s setup or configuration program. Refer to your computer's owner’s manual. If you have problems with your computer after installing the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, turn to the "Troubleshooting" section. If your computer requires setting jumpers or switches, refer to your computer's owner's manual or the "Troubleshooting" section. 13 Installation of your Intel Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology is complete. When you ran the diagnostics in step 1, the program stored information about your old processor. Run the diagnostics again to see how much faster your computer performs with your new Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. The disk also contains the following diagnostics to test your installation: Processor Instruction Test Tests various processor functions to see whether they are working properly. Floating Point Tests the processor's floating-point unit by Conformance Test comparing the value the floating-point unit calculates to the value established by the IEEE standard. MMX Instruction Test Tests the various MMX technology instructions to see whether they are working properly. MMX Technology Checks whether your computer is Video Test compatible with the MMX technology instructions. In addition, you can test your installation by running software programs you use frequently and experiencing the increased performance. If you don't see increased performance, or if you have difficulty getting the computer to run successfully, see the "Troubleshooting" section to determine possible problems. If you still need help, contact your dealer. Step 10—Test the installation of the Pentium OverDrive Processor with MMX Technology. 14 Troubleshooting Read through the symptoms below. If you find one that resembles the problem you’re having, try the corresponding possible solutions. The computer doesn’t power on when you turn on the switch, or the operating system prompt doesn’t appear on the screen. • Be sure: • The power cord is plugged into the wall outlet. • The cables and cords are attached correctly. • Any cards you removed are reinstalled properly. • The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology and the socket are correctly aligned. • Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your computer owner's manual? For further information on jumpers and switches, see page 20. • Your computer may need an updated control program (BIOS). Contact the technical support department at your computer vendor or dealer for BIOS information. • If you have access to another Pentium processor-based computer, remove your Pentium OverDrive processor and install it in the second computer. Your application programs don’t run any faster with the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology installed. • Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your computer's owner’s manual? For further information on jumpers and switches, see page 20. • Does your computer require you to run its setup program? Check your computer's owner's manual or contact your dealer to verify. • If your computer appears to be functioning normally and you have eliminated jumper settings and setup requirements as the problem, but you still don't see a speed improvement, see the "Getting Help" section on page 21. Some of the pins on the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology are bent. • Carefully straighten any bent pins with needlenose pliers or tweezers before inserting the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology in the socket. 15 Your computer has an extra processor socket. • Some computers have two processor sockets that can be used for dual processing as well as for single processing. The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology does not support dual processing. However, if you use your two-socket computer in single-processing mode, you can upgrade your computer with the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. To install: 1. Remove the original processor from the socket. Refer to installation steps 4 through 6 for more information on removing the original processor. 2. Align and seat the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology in an upgrade socket. (Usually this is the same socket that contained the original processor. Refer to your computer's owner's manual for information on locating the upgrade socket.) Refer to installation step 7 for more information on aligning and seating the OverDrive processor with MMX technology. 3. Continue with installation step 8. Motherboard with two processor sockets Caution: After operating for several hours, many chips in your computer, including the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, can become hot enough to cause mild skin burns if handled. Let the computer cool off before handling the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology feels hot. • It is normal for the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology to generate heat while operating. PC-3787 16 Your computer powers on and runs normally for a few minutes then hangs up or shuts down. • Is the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology socket handle fully locked? • Is the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fully inserted? • Did you set the jumpers or system switches correctly, as described in your computer's owner's manual? • Check to see if your fan is functioning properly. Warning: When your computer is plugged in, the power is on, and the cover is off, don't touch your computer or the fan. Exercise extreme care, as injury may occur from moving parts or death may occur from electrocution. If uncertain, seek expert technical assistance. 1. Remove the computer cover. 2. Check that nothing is blocking the airflow from the fan. Are there cables, cards, or other components that prevent good airflow to the vents in the chassis? 3. Observe the fan on the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. The fan blades should be turning. If the fan works, turn off and unplug your computer, then replace the cover. Note: There must be adequate clearance between the top of the fan and the nearest object to ensure proper airflow. After unplugging your computer, you can measure the space above the fan. It should be at least 0.4 inch, or about the thickness of your finger. • Your computer may not be providing enough airflow to adequately cool the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. Call your computer manufacturer for information about evaluating a possible thermal condition in your computer. 17 BIOS update needed Here's what to do when the Intel diagnostic tells you to update your computer's BIOS before installing the OverDrive processor with MMX technology. 1. Collect this information: BIOS serial number. The BIOS serial number is usually displayed on the initial power-on screen. Most computers can be halted at this screen by pressing the Pause key. Press the Enter key to continue. Motherboard model number. Check your computer's owner's manual. Computer name, model, and serial number. Check your computer's owner's manual and the back of the computer. 2. Determine the proper BIOS update for your computer. With the information you collected in the previous step, the motherboard's or computer manufacturer's customer support can help determine the BIOS update you need. Intel supplies information on contacting many manufacturers of motherboards and computers: on the World Wide Web, www.intel.com/overdrive/bios; on the Intel Bulletin Board Service (BBS), (503) 264-7999 (ask for the BIOS update document on the OverDrive area of the BBS); and by FaxBack, (800) 525-3019 (ask for FaxBack document 1522). 3. Obtain the proper BIOS update file for your computer. Either download a file containing the new BIOS from the motherboard or computer manufacturer's web site or BBS (see the Intel web site at www.intel.com/overdrive/bios for links to many manufacturers) or get a disk directly from the manufacturer. The BIOS file or disk typically contains two parts: a flash update utility program and a BIOS data file. Most Pentium processor-based motherboards store the system BIOS in a flash memory component, which lets the BIOS be easily updated through a flash update utility program. This program is provided by most manufacturers and provides the capability to save, verify, and update the system BIOS. The BIOS file(s) is specific to your computer. Some manufacturers distribute the utility program and the data file in a single compressed file (such as NEW_BIOS.ZIP) that you must uncompress. 18 4. Install the new BIOS on your computer. The procedure for updating the BIOS is different for every model of computer. Read and follow your motherboard's or computer manufacturer's instructions exactly. The following is just an outline of the BIOS update procedure. Use your motherboard or computer manufacturer's instructions. a) Record the current BIOS settings. Most computers prompt you during power-up to press a specific key (such as F1) to view the setup screens. b) Create a DOS-bootable diskette. Most BIOS update utilities require that they be run from a disk from which the computer is started. This requires the computer to run in a basic mode without memory managers or drivers in memory. Refer to your operating system's manual for instructions on creating a DOS-bootable disk. c) Update the BIOS. Before starting the update, be sure you read and understand the manufacturer's instructions. Often the instructions are in a README file on the disk. In general, you'll copy the BIOS utility and data files to the bootable disk you created earlier and restart your computer from the disk. Then run the BIOS update utility, following the manufacturer's instructions. If the utility allows it, save your old BIOS. Do not turn off the computer while the BIOS update utility is running. An interruption in power can corrupt the BIOS code, making your computer non-functional. d) After the update, verify the BIOS settings against the settings you recorded in step a. If updating the BIOS sounds risky, have a qualified technician update the BIOS for you. If you update the BIOS yourself, follow the manufacturer's instructions exactly. Your computer's BIOS or CMOS setup program doesn't identify the new Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology, but the Intel diagnostic program indicates that it is working correctly. The BIOS in many older computers cannot identify the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology; however, those systems might still operate correctly with the new processor. If the processor passes the Intel diagnostic program and the system seems to be operating correctly with satisfactory performance, then the fact that the BIOS does not correctly display the name of the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology probably will not affect the system's or the processor's operation, and it probably is not worth the effort to update the BIOS. 19 Your Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fan is not working. • Is the fan fully seated? The Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology fan is powered from three power connections on the processor top. To ensure your fan is fully seated: 1. Ground yourself by touching the metal on your computer, then unplug your computer. Limiting your movements during installation reduces static electricity, which can damage the part and your computer. 2. Release the corner of the fan assembly by gently squeezing together the two retaining clips. 3. While keeping the clips squeezed together, slowly lift up the corner, pivoting it against the opposite corner. 4. When the fan assembly is at an approximately 45-degree angle, gently lift straight up from the processor. 5. Hold the fan at an approximately 45-degree angle, and align the fan assembly over the base unit, starting with the corner opposite the retaining clip. Take special care to align the contact pins on the fan assembly to the three pads on the base unit. 6. Carefully lower the fan onto the base. 7. Secure the fan assembly to the base unit by ensuring that the retaining clips have snapped into place. If the fan still does not work properly after reseating, see the "Getting Help" section. Retaining Clips Base unit contact pads Lift 45o Contact pins 20 You need to set jumpers or switches to configure your computer for the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. • In most computers, the jumper and switch settings for the original Pentium processor and the Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology are the same. In some cases, however, you may need to specifically configure your system for a Pentium OverDrive processor with MMX technology. Your computer's owner's manual or your computer manufacturer should have the correct settings for your computer. Intel also has information about some computers. See the "Getting Help" section for how to get this information. Jumpers are very small pins fastened to the motherboard. If you look closely, you can see that each jumper is labelled with a number or letter that typically is printed on the motherboard, as shown below. The pins are connected (ON) when a tiny plastic connector covers two pins. The connector has a metal piece embedded in the plastic that allows current to pass between the pins. To turn the connection OFF, remove the jumper connector from the pins. You can also place the connector over only one of the pins for safekeeping as shown. To turn the connection ON, place the connector over the two indicated pins. Note that while some jumpers appear in pairs, others may appear in sets of four or more, as shown. PC-2913 J1 JP1 1 2 3 4 5 J 1 JP1 21 Getting Help Intel Customer Support on the World Wide Web Support information for Intel Brand products is available on the Internet for downloading by anonymous FTP and for viewing or downloading on the World Wide Web. Try Intels newsgroup forum for answers to common questions or post your question to be answered. Intel web site http://www.intel.com Customer support web site http://support.intel.com Intel FTP hostname ftp.intel.com Customer support files ftp.intel.com/pub/support Intel Internet newsgroup news://cs.intel.com or http://cs.intel.com Intel Customer Support FaxBack* Service Have documents sent to your fax machine or fax/modem. For information about Intel support services options, order FaxBack document #8549. For information about support for discontinued Intel products, order FaxBack document #8715. In North America (Oregon, USA) 800-525-3019 In Europe (Swindon, UK) +44-1793-432-509 Intel Customer Support Technicians If you are unable to find the information you need on one of our electronic services, you may need to call a customer support technician. Country Customer Support Hours (Local Time) Telephone Number Monday through Friday U.S. and Canada 1-800-321-4044 07:00-17:00 Swindon, UK English +44-1793-404-900 08:00-24:00 French +44-1793-404-988 08:00-17:00 German +44-1793-404-777 08:00-17:00 (Tuesday 08:00-16:00) Italian +44-1793-404-141 08:00-17:00 (Tuesday 08:00-16:00) Japan 03-5350-0860 09:00-17:00 Asia-Pacific Australia (Sydney) +1-800-649-931 05:00-15:00 Hong Kong +852-2-844-4456 05:00-15:00 Korea +822-767-2595 05:00-15:00 Singapore +65-831-1311 05:00-15:00 Taiwan +886-2-718-9915 05:00-15:00 From anywhere in the world, contact your local dealer or distributor, or call the North American Service Center at +1-916-377-7000 (hours are 07:00-15:00, Pacific Time). 22 Registration Please take a few moments to fill out your OverDrive processor registration card. Returning this card allows us to send you important OverDrive processor announcements and new product information. Three Year Limited Warranty Intel warrants that the OverDrive® processor, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel's publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the OverDrive processor was purchased. If the OverDrive processor which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: REPAIR the OverDrive processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the OverDrive processor with another OverDrive processor; OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the OverDrive processor, REFUND the then-current value of the OverDrive processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE OVERDRIVE PROCESSOR AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your OverDrive processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata for Pentium OverDrive processors are available upon request. This limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any OverDrive processor that is soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system's motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. If you do not wish to install the OverDrive processor yourself, you should have the vendor from whom you purchased the product install it. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service, you must return the OverDrive processor to the vendor from whom you purchased it, or, with proof of purchase, to Intel. Before returning the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must contact Intel Customer Support at 916- 377-7000 or toll free in the U.S., 1-800-321-4044. 23 If you obtain warranty service from Intel, upon Intel's verification that the OverDrive processor is or may be defective, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization (RMA). When you return the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned OverDrive processor that has no RMA number on the package.If you return the OverDrive processor to Intel, you must assume the risk of damage or loss during shipping. You must use the original packaging or the equivalent, and you must pay the postage. Intel may require you to verify that you are the original end user purchaser of the OverDrive processor. Intel may elect to replace or repair the OverDrive processor with either a new or reconditioned product. The returned product shall become Intel's property on receipt by Intel. The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL'S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR OVERDRIVE PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. www.samsung.com Mode d’emploi SM-T230 2 À propos de ce mode d’emploi Cet appareil vous permet de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • Les images et les captures d’écran peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung : www.samsung.com. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier selon l’appareil, votre version logicielle ou votre opérateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des éditeurs de logiciels autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 3 • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui. Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements. Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires. Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document, sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. À propos de ce mode d’emploi 4 Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 5 Table des matières Démarrage 7 Présentation de l’appareil 8 Touches 9 Contenu du coffret 10 Charger la batterie 12 Insérer une carte mémoire 14 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 15 Manipuler l’appareil 15 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil 15 Régler le volume 15 Activer le profil Discret Fonctions de base 16 Icônes d’informations 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements 22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres 26 Notifications 27 Écran d’accueil 29 Liste des applications 31 Utiliser les applications 31 Aide 32 Saisir du texte 34 Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi 35 Créer un compte 36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs 36 Transférer des fichiers 37 Protéger l’appareil 38 Mettre l’appareil à jour Communication 40 Contacts 44 Email 46 Google Mail 48 Hangouts 48 Google+ 49 Google+ Photos Web et réseau 50 Internet 51 Chrome 52 Bluetooth Multimédia 54 Musique 56 Appareil photo 61 Galerie 65 Vidéo 66 YouTube Table des matières 6 Géolocalisation 85 Maps Paramètres 86 Accéder au menu des paramètres 86 Connexions 89 Appareil 94 Contrôle 97 Général 101 Paramètres Google Dépannage Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 67 Play Store 68 Samsung Apps 68 Play Livres 69 Play Films 69 Play Musique 69 Play Jeux 69 Play Kiosque Utilitaires 70 Mémo 71 S Planner 73 Mode Enfant 74 Dropbox 74 Cloud 75 Google Drive 75 Hancom Office Viewer 78 Alarme 79 Horloge mondiale 80 Calculatrice 80 S Voice 81 Recherche Google 82 Recherche vocale 82 Mes fichiers 7 Démarrage Présentation de l’appareil Touche Applications récentes Touche Accueil Écran tactile Objectif avant Connecteur à fonctions Touche Retour multiples Touche de volume Compartiment pour carte mémoire Microphone Touche Marche/Arrêt Antenne GPS Objectif arrière Haut-parleur Prise audio 3,5 mm Démarrage 8 • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pendant 8 secondes pour réinitialiser l’appareil en cas d’erreur fatale, ou s’il ne répond plus ou se bloque. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’appareil. Lorsque l’écran tactile s’éteint, l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Applications récentes • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer l’application de recherche Google. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 9 Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Les dysfonctionnements résultant d’une utilisation d’accessoires non homologués ne sont pas couverts par le service de garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Démarrage 10 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est parfaitement chargée. Charger la batterie avec le chargeur Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Démarrage 11 Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise en cours de chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Vérifier la charge de la batterie Lorsque vous chargez la batterie et que l’appareil est éteint, les icônes suivantes indiquent l’état du chargement : Chargement en cours Chargement terminé Démarrage 12 Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Insérer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte apparaît dans le dossier SD card du menu Mes fichiers. Démarrage 13 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son compartiment jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. 1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. 2 Appuyez avec précaution sur la carte mémoire pour la libérer, puis sortez-la du compartiment. 3 Fermez le cache du compartiment de la carte mémoire. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte ou une corruption des données, ou endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Démarrage 14 Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Si vous allumez l’appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à sa configuration. Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Démarrage 15 Manipuler l’appareil Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’appareil Pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas, vous pouvez le verrouiller. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et l’appareil passe en mode Verrouillage. Il se verrouille également automatiquement si vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil alors que l’écran est désactivé, appuyez ensuite sur l’écran, puis faites-y glisser votre doigt. Régler le volume Pour régler le volume de la musique ou des vidéos, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. Activer le profil Discret Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Maintenez la touche de volume Bas enfoncée jusqu’à ce que le profil Discret soit activé. • Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Muet. • Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur Son. 16 Fonctions de base Icônes d’informations Les icônes susceptibles de s’afficher en haut de l’écran vous indiquent le statut de l’appareil. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Icône Signification Wi-Fi connecté Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Fonction Écran intelligent activée Connecté à un ordinateur Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Fonctions de base 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile réagit uniquement au doigt. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. Mouvements Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une commande ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 18 Maintenir appuyé Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelle, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes. Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément vers un nouvel emplacement, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément et faites-le glisser sur l’écran. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises pour annuler le zoom. Fonctions de base 19 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l’écran d’accueil ou dans la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Pincer Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 20 Reconnaissance des mouvements Vous pouvez contrôler l’appareil à l’aide de quelques mouvements simples. Avant toute chose, vérifiez que la fonction de reconnaissance des mouvements est activée. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contrôle → Mouvement de paume, puis faites glisser le curseur Mouvement de paume vers la droite. Si l’appareil est soumis à des secousses ou à des chocs excessifs, cela peut entraîner un comportement imprévu. Veillez à contrôler vos gestes. Pivoter l’écran De nombreuses applications autorisent l’affichage en mode Portrait ou Paysage. Lorsque vous faites pivoter l’appareil, l’écran s’adapte automatiquement à la nouvelle orientation. Pour empêcher l’écran de pivoter automatiquement, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et désélectionnez l’option Rotation écran. • Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. • Pour certaines autres applications, l’écran affiché diffère selon l’orientation. Par exemple, pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique, vous devez pivoter l’écran en mode Paysage. Fonctions de base 21 Balayer Balayez l’écran avec le côté de la main pour réaliser une capture d’écran. L’image est enregistrée dans Galerie → Screenshots. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Recouvrir Recouvrez l’écran avec la paume de la main pour effectuer une pause lors de la lecture d’un contenu multimédia. Fonctions de base 22 Utiliser le mode Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Seules les applications définies par défaut dans le volet Multi-fenêtres peuvent être exécutées. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour utiliser la fonction Multi-fenêtres, depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Appareil → Fenêtres multiples, puis faites glisser le curseur Fenêtres multiples vers la droite. Utiliser un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres Utilisez cette fonction pour exécuter des applications sur un écran partagé. Lancer des applications sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres 1 Placez votre doigt sur le côté droit de l'écran et faites-le glisser vers le milieu de l’écran. Vous pouvez également maintenir le doigt appuyé sur . Le volet Multi-fenêtres s’affiche sur le côté droit de l’écran. Volet Multi-fenêtres Fonctions de base 23 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faitesla glisser vers l’écran. Relâchez l’icône de l’application lorsque l’écran devient bleu. 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône d’une autre application dans le volet Multi-fenêtres, puis faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Fonctions de base 24 Partager du contenu entre applications Vous pouvez facilement partager du contenu entre des applications comme Email et Internet par un mouvement de glisser-déposer. Il est possible que certaines applications ne soient pas compatibles avec cette fonction. 1 Lancez les applications Email et Internet sur un écran partagé Multi-fenêtres. Accéder aux options Multi-fenêtres 2 Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application, puis appuyez sur . Appuyez sur le cercle situé entre les deux fenêtres d'application pour accéder aux options suivantes : • : passer d’une application Fenêtres multiples à l’autre. • : partager facilement des éléments comme des images, du texte ou des liens entre les fenêtres d'application en réalisant un mouvement de glisser-déposer. • : agrandir la fenêtre. • : fermer l’application. Fonctions de base 25 3 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément dans la fenêtre Internet et faites-le glisser vers un emplacement dans la fenêtre E-mail. Fonctions de base 26 Notifications Des icônes de notification peuvent apparaître dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran afin de vous signaler les nouveaux messages, les événements à venir, le statut de l’appareil, et plus encore. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites glisser votre doigt de haut en bas sur le volet. Pour afficher des notifications supplémentaires, faites défiler la liste vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet, faites-le glisser de bas en haut. Vous pouvez afficher tous les paramètres actuels de votre appareil à partir du volet des raccourcis. Faites glisser le volet des raccourcis vers le bas, puis appuyez sur pour utiliser les options suivantes : • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. • Position : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Son : activer ou désactiver le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction Bluetooth. • Fenêtres multiples : activer ou désactiver la fonction Multi-fenêtres. • Synchro. : activer ou désactiver la synchronisation automatique des applications. • Smart Stay : activer ou désactiver la fonction de veille intelligente Smart Stay. • Éco. énergie : activer ou désactiver le mode économie d’énergie. • Mode blocage : activer ou désactiver le mode blocage. En mode blocage, l’appareil bloque toutes les notifications. Pour sélectionner les notifications à bloquer, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Mode Blocage. • Mode Hors-ligne : activer ou désactiver le mode Hors-ligne. La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Pour redisposer les options dans le volet des raccourcis, ouvrez-le, appuyez sur → , puis maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 27 Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des icônes d’information, des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les éléments de l’écran d’accueil Ajouter une icône d’application Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application, puis faites-la glisser sur l’aperçu d’un volet. Déplacer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille qui apparaît en haut de l’écran d’accueil. Lorsque la corbeille devient rouge, relâchez l’élément. Fonctions de base 28 Organiser les volets de widgets Ajouter un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, puis appuyez sur . Déplacer un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les pour passer en mode Modification. Maintenez ensuite le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Supprimer un volet Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et resserrez-les, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’aperçu d’un volet, puis faites-le glisser vers la corbeille en haut de l’écran. Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond d’écran d’accueil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Définir fond d’écran → Écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez un des éléments suivants : • Galerie : photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou images que vous avez téléchargées depuis Internet. • Fonds d’écran animés : fonds d’écran animés fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. • Photos : images de l'application Google Photos. • Fonds d’écran : fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. Sélectionnez une image, redimensionnez le cadre si nécessaire, puis définissez-la comme fond d’écran. Fonctions de base 29 Utiliser les widgets Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des informations pratiques sur l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez ajouter des widgets depuis le volet des widgets sur l’écran d’accueil. • Certains widgets permettent de se connecter à des services Web. L’utilisation d’un widget Internet peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. • La disponibilité des widgets dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Widgets. Faites défiler le volet des widgets vers la gauche ou la droite, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un widget pour l’ajouter à l’écran d’accueil. Placezle à l’endroit souhaité, redimensionnez-le en étirant son cadre, puis, le cas échéant, appuyez à un endroit quelconque de l’écran pour valider le nouvel emplacement du widget. Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher les autres volets, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Organiser les applications Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode d’affichage Grille personnalisable. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord droit ou gauche de l’écran. Fonctions de base 30 Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Placez les applications similaires dans un même dossier pour faciliter leur utilisation. Appuyez sur → Modifier, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l'option Créer dossier. Saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Placez les applications dans le nouveau dossier en les faisant glisser, puis appuyez sur Sauveg. pour sauvegarder la nouvelle configuration. Installer des applications Utilisez les boutiques d’applications, comme Samsung Apps, pour télécharger et installer des applications. Désinstaller des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désinstaller. Il est impossible de désinstaller les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil. Désactiver des applications Appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications, puis sélectionnez l’application à désactiver. Pour activer de nouveau des applications depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Afficher les applications désactivées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. • Les applications téléchargées et certaines des applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil ne peuvent pas être désactivées. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, les applications désactivées disparaissent de la liste des applications, mais restent enregistrées dans l’appareil. Fonctions de base 31 Utiliser les applications Cet appareil peut exécuter différent types d’applications, vous permettant d’utiliser aussi bien des contenus multimédia que des contenus Internet. Ouvrir une application Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Certaines applications sont regroupées dans des dossiers. Appuyez sur un dossier, puis sur une application pour l’ouvrir. Ouvrir des applications récemment utilisées Appuyer sur pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. Appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Fermer une application Fermez les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan pour économiser la batterie et optimiser les performances de l’appareil. Appuyez sur → Gest. tâches, puis sur Fin à côté de l’application à fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur Fermer tout près du nombre total d’applications actives. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur → Tout fermer. Aide Accédez aux informations d’aide pour apprendre à utiliser l’appareil et les applications, ou configurer des paramètres importants. Appuyez sur Aide depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher des conseils, sélectionnez une catégorie. Pour trier les catégories par ordre alphabétique, appuyez sur . Pour rechercher des mots-clés, appuyez sur . Fonctions de base 32 Saisir du texte Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le clavier Samsung ou la fonction de saisie vocale. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Utiliser le clavier Samsung Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Accéder aux paramètres du clavier Samsung. Insérer un espace. Saisir des majuscules. Ajouter un élément du presse-papier. Mots-clés suggérés Saisir des majuscules Appuyez sur avant de saisir un caractère. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier le type de clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur pour activer le clavier flottant. Sur le clavier flottant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur et déplacez le clavier flottant vers un autre emplacement. Fonctions de base 33 Modifier la langue du clavier Ajoutez des langues au clavier, puis faites glisser la barre d’espace vers la gauche ou la droite pour modifier la langue du clavier. Écrire de façon manuscrite Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , appuyez ensuite sur , puis écrivez un mot à l’aide du doigt. Les mots suggérés apparaissent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Sélectionnez une suggestion. Utilisez les gestes de saisie manuscrite pour effectuer des opérations, comme la modification ou la suppression de caractères, et l’insertion d’espaces. Pour afficher les didacticiels, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur , puis appuyez sur → Aide → Utiliser les gestes de saisie manuscrite. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Dicter du texte Activez la fonction de saisie vocale, puis parlez dans le microphone. L’appareil affiche à l’écran ce que vous venez de dire. Si l’appareil ne reconnaît pas correctement les mots, appuyez sur le texte mis en surbrillance et sélectionnez une autre proposition dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît. Pour modifier la langue de la reconnaissance vocale ou en ajouter une autre, appuyez sur la langue actuellement prise en charge. Fonctions de base 34 Copier et coller du texte Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte souhaité, faites glisser l’icône ou pour redimensionner la sélection, puis appuyez sur Copier pour copier le texte ou sur Couper pour le couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. Pour le coller dans une zone de saisie, placez le curseur à l’endroit où vous souhaitez insérer le texte, puis appuyez sur → Coller. Établir une connexion au réseau Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils (p. 86). Assurez-vous que la connexion Wi-Fi est activée avant d’utiliser les applications Internet. Activer ou désactiver un réseau Wi-Fi Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Wi-Fi pour activer ou désactiver la fonction. • Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée et est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. Établir une connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Wi-Fi, puis faites glisser le curseur Wi-Fi vers la droite. Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi détectés, saisissez un mot de passe, le cas échéant, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône représentant un verrou. Après connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi, l’appareil s’y connectera automatiquement dès qu’il sera disponible. Fonctions de base 35 Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi Si le réseau souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste, appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi au bas de la liste des réseaux. Saisissez le nom du réseau dans la zone SSID du réseau, sélectionnez le type de sécurité, indiquez votre mot de passe si le réseau est protégé, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Supprimer un réseau Wi-Fi Si un réseau ne doit plus être utilisé, même s’il s’agit du réseau actuellement activé, vous pouvez le supprimer afin que l’appareil ne s’y connecte plus automatiquement. Sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste, puis appuyez sur Oublier. Créer un compte Les applications Google, comme Play Store, nécessitent un compte Google et Samsung Apps requiert un compte Samsung. Créez des comptes Google et Samsung afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil. Ajouter des comptes Lorsque vous ouvrez une application Google, suivez les instructions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour créer un compte Google, vous n’avez pas besoin de vous connecter. Pour vous connecter à un compte Google ou en créer un, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Ajouter compte → Google. Appuyez ensuite sur Nouveau pour créer un compte ou sur Compte existant pour vous connecter, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs comptes Google sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez également créer un compte Samsung. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes, sélectionnez un nom de compte sous l’option MES COMPTES, choisissez le compte à supprimer, puis appuyez sur Supprimer le compte. Fonctions de base 36 Configurer les profils utilisateurs Configurez des profils utilisateurs, puis sélectionnez-en un lorsque vous déverrouillez l’appareil pour utiliser des paramètres personnalisés. En configurant plusieurs profils utilisateurs, plusieurs utilisateurs peuvent partager l’appareil sans affecter les paramètres personnels des autres, tels que les comptes de messagerie électronique ou les préférences de fond d’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Général → Utilisateurs → → OK, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un nouveau profil utilisateur. Pour accéder à l’appareil avec un profil utilisateur, sélectionnez un profil en haut à droite de l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Transférer des fichiers Vous pouvez transférer différents types de fichiers (sons, vidéos, images, etc.) de l’appareil vers un ordinateur, et inversement. Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies Samsung Kies est un logiciel qui permet de gérer vos contenus multimédia et vos informations personnelles avec des appareils Samsung. Téléchargez la dernière version de Samsung Kies à partir du site Web Samsung. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement sur l’ordinateur. Si Samsung Kies ne démarre pas, double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur. 2 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. Connecter l’appareil à Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. Fonctions de base 37 Connecter l’appareil en tant qu’appareil multimédia 1 Raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 2 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, puis appuyez sur Connecté en tant que périphérique multimédia → Périphérique multimédia (MTP). Appuyez sur Appareil photo (PTP) si votre ordinateur ne gère pas le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) ou ne dispose pas du pilote approprié. 3 Transférez des fichiers entre votre appareil et l’ordinateur. Protéger l’appareil Vous pouvez empêcher toute personne d’utiliser votre appareil et de consulter les données et informations personnelles qui y sont enregistrées. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Déverrouillage par modèle Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Modèle. Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Fonctions de base 38 Déverrouillage par code PIN Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Code PIN. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouillage par mot de passe Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Appareil → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran → Mot de passe. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Déverrouiller l’appareil Allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis saisissez le code ou dessinez le modèle de déverrouillage. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Mettre l’appareil à jour L’appareil peut être mis à jour avec la version logicielle la plus récente. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Mettre l’appareil à jour avec Samsung Kies Démarrez Samsung Kies et raccordez l’appareil à un ordinateur. Samsung Kies reconnaît automatiquement l’appareil et affiche, le cas échéant, les mises à jour disponibles. Pour lancer la mise à jour, cliquez sur la touche Mettre à jour dans la boîte de dialogue. Pour plus d’informations sur la mise à jour, consultez l’aide Samsung Kies. • Lorsque vous mettez votre appareil à jour, n’éteignez pas l’ordinateur et ne déconnectez pas le câble de USB. • Ne raccordez pas non plus d’autres appareils multimédia à l’ordinateur. Cela pourrait interférer avec le processus de mise à jour. Fonctions de base 39 Mettre l’appareil à jour sans connexion PC Grâce au service FOTA (Firmware Over The Air), le logiciel de l’appareil peut être mis à jour sans passer par une connexion avec un ordinateur. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → À propos de l’appareil → Mise à jour logicielle → Mettre à jour maintenant. 40 Communication Contacts Utilisez cette application pour gérer les contacts, y compris les numéros de téléphone, les adresses e-mail, et plus encore. Appuyez sur Contacts depuis la liste des applications. Gérer les contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Créer un contact Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations d’un contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d’information. Modifier un contact Sélectionnez un contact à modifier, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer un contact Appuyez sur . Communication 41 Rechercher des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Pour faire défiler la liste rapidement, placez votre index à gauche de la liste de contacts et faites défiler vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • : rédiger un e-mail. Afficher les contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Par défaut, l’appareil affiche tous les contacts enregistrés. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts à afficher, puis sélectionnez la source à partir de laquelle les contacts doivent être affichés. Synchroniser des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Google Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Google. Les contacts Google sont caractérisés par l’icône . Synchroniser les contacts de l’appareil avec les contacts Samsung Appuyez sur → Fusionner les comptes → Fusionner avec Samsung. Les contacts Samsung sont caractérisés par l’icône . Communication 42 Importer et exporter des contacts Appuyez sur Contacts. Importer des contacts Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation. Exporter des contacts Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’exportation. Partager des contacts Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Plusieurs contacts, sélectionnez les contacts à partager, appuyez sur OK, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Contacts favoris Appuyez sur Favoris. Appuyez sur pour ajouter des contacts à vos favoris. Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Supprimer des favoris : supprimer des contacts des favoris. • Affichage Liste / Affichage Grille : afficher les contacts sous forme de tableau ou de liste. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Communication 43 Groupes de contacts Appuyez sur Groupes. Créer un groupe Appuyez sur , configurez les détails du groupe, ajoutez des contacts, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Ajouter des contacts à un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, puis appuyez sur → Ajouter membre. Sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Gérer les groupes Appuyez sur , puis choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • Rechercher : rechercher des contacts. • Supprimer des groupes : sélectionner des groupes auxquels vous avez ajouté des contacts, puis appuyer sur OK. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les groupes par défaut. • Modifier le groupe : modifier les paramètres du groupe. • Ajouter membre : ajouter des membres au groupe. • Supprimer du groupe : retirer un membre du groupe. • Envoyer un e-mail : envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe. • Modifier l’ordre : maintenir le doigt appuyé sur l’icône près du nom du groupe, faire glisser l’icône vers le haut ou le bas jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité, puis appuyer sur OK. • Aide : accéder aux informations d’aide à propos des contacts. Envoyer un e-mail aux membres d’un groupe Sélectionnez un groupe, appuyez sur → Envoyer un e-mail, sélectionnez des membres, puis appuyez sur OK. Communication 44 Carte de visite Appuyez sur Contacts. Créez une carte de visite et envoyez-la à vos contacts. En haut de la liste des contacts, appuyez sur Profil configuré, saisissez vos coordonnées, comme votre numéro de téléphone, votre adresse e-mail et votre adresse postale, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Si, lorsque vous avez configuré votre appareil, vous avez enregistré vos coordonnées d’utilisateur, sélectionnez la carte de visite, puis appuyez sur pour la modifier. Appuyez sur → Partager carte de visite via → Contact sélectionné, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Email Utilisez cette application pour envoyer ou consulter des e-mails. Appuyez sur Email depuis la liste des applications. Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique privé, comme Google Mail, appuyez sur ; pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel, appuyez sur Config manuelle. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Ajouter compte. Envoyer des e-mails Sélectionnez le compte de messagerie électronique que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis appuyez sur en haut de l’écran. Saisissez les destinataires, l’objet et le message, puis appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. Pour ajouter un destinataire figurant dans votre liste de contacts, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur +Moi pour vous ajouter comme destinataire. Pour ajouter davantage de destinataires, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur pour joindre des images, vidéos, contacts, mémos, événements, etc. Appuyez sur → pour insérer dans le message des images, événements, contacts, informations de localisation et bien plus encore. Communication 45 Envoyer des e-mails programmés Lorsque vous rédigez un e-mail, appuyez sur → Envoi programmé. Cochez la case Envoi programmé, définissez une heure et une date, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil envoie le message à l’heure et à la date indiquées. • Le message ne sera pas envoyé à l’heure et à la date programmées, si l’appareil est éteint, s’il n’est pas connecté au réseau ou si le réseau est instable. • Cette fonction est basée sur l’heure et la date configurées sur l’appareil. Si vous changez de fuseau horaire et que le réseau ne met pas ces informations à jour, il se peut que l’heure et la date soient incorrectes. Lire des e-mails Sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Supprimer le message. Rédiger un message. Répondre au message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts. Transférer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Appuyez sur l’onglet de la pièce jointe pour l’ouvrir ou sur Enreg. pour l’enregistrer. Communication 46 Google Mail Utilisez cette application pour accéder directement au service Google Mail. Appuyez sur Google Mail depuis la liste des applications. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application peut s’intituler différemment selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. Envoyer des e-mails Dans la boîte de réception, appuyez sur , saisissez les destinataires et un objet, rédigez un message, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. Pour enregistrer le message afin de l’envoyer ultérieurement, appuyez sur → Enregistrer le brouillon. Pour joindre des photos, des vidéos, de la musique et d’autres fichiers, appuyez sur → Joindre un fichier. Pour annuler votre message, appuyez sur → Supprimer. Appuyez sur → Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de Google Mail. Appuyez sur → Envoyer des commentaires pour indiquer votre opinion sur le développement de l’application. Appuyez sur → Aide pour accéder aux informations d’aide à propos de Google Mail. Communication 47 Lire des e-mails Afficher la pièce jointe. Supprimer le message. Archiver le message. Répondre au message. Identifier le message comme non lu. Déplacer le message vers une autre messagerie. Répondre à tous les destinataires ou imprimer le message. Transférer le message. Identifier le message comme favori. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Libellés Google Mail utilise des libellés pour classer les messages. Par défaut, Google Mail affiche les messages du libellé Boîte de réception. Appuyez sur → Actualiser pour récupérer manuellement les nouveaux messages. Pour afficher des messages portant d’autres libellés, appuyez sur . Pour ajouter un libellé à un message, sélectionnez le message, appuyez sur → Modifier les libellés, puis sélectionnez le libellé que vous souhaitez lui attribuer. Communication 48 Hangouts Utilisez cette application pour discuter avec vos amis. Appuyez sur Hangouts depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez un ami dans la liste ou saisissez des critères de recherche et sélectionnez un ami dans les résultats pour commencer à discuter. Google+ Utilisez cette application pour rester connecté à votre entourage via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Google+ depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Appuyez sur Tous pour modifier la catégorie, puis faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas pour afficher les publications de vos cercles d’amis. Communication 49 Google+ Photos Utilisez cette application pour afficher et partager des images ou des vidéos via le service de réseau social de Google. Appuyez sur Photos depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • TOUT : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos prises ou téléchargées sur l’appareil. • SÉLECTION : afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos regroupées par date ou par album. Appuyez sur pour afficher toutes les photos ou vidéos du groupe. Sélectionnez ensuite une photo ou une vidéo. En mode affichage d'une photo ou d'une vidéo, utilisez l’une des icônes suivantes : • : modifier la photo ou la vidéo. • : partager la photo ou la vidéo avec d’autres personnes. • : supprimer la photo ou la vidéo. 50 Web et réseau Internet Utilisez cette application pour naviguer sur Internet. Appuyez sur Internet depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, saisissez l’adresse Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Appuyez sur pour accéder à des options complémentaires lors de l’affichage d’une page Web. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis appuyez sur l’icône du moteur de recherche près de l’adresse Web. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis sur → , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → → Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Web et réseau 51 Historique Pour ouvrir une page figurant dans la liste des pages récemment consultées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Historique. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur . Pages enregistrées Pour afficher des pages Web enregistrées, appuyez sur → Favoris → Pages enreg. Liens Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un lien d’une page Web pour l’ouvrir dans une nouvelle page, l’enregistrer ou le copier. Pour afficher les liens enregistrés, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mes fichiers → Historique des téléchargements. Partager des pages Web Pour partager l’adresse d’une page Web avec d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Partager via. Pour partager une partie d’une page Web, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte de votre choix, puis appuyez sur Partager via. Chrome Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des informations et parcourir des pages Web. Appuyez sur Chrome depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Afficher des pages Web Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse, puis saisissez une adresse Web ou des critères de recherche. Ouvrir un nouvel onglet Appuyez sur → Nouvel onglet. Pour passer d'un onglet à l'autre, faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite, puis appuyez sur le titre pour le sélectionner. Web et réseau 52 Favoris Pour enregistrer la page Web actuelle dans les favoris, appuyez sur → Enregistrer. Pour ouvrir une page Web enregistrée dans vos favoris, appuyez sur → Favoris, puis sélectionnez la page souhaitée. Effectuer une recherche oralement Appuyez sur , prononcez un mot-clé, puis sélectionnez l’une des suggestions qui apparaissent à l’écran. Synchroniser votre appareil avec d’autres appareils Synchronisez des onglets et des favoris ouverts afin de les utiliser avec Chrome sur un autre appareil lorsque vous êtes connecté au même compte Google. Pour afficher des onglets ouverts sur d’autres appareils, appuyez sur → Autres appareils. Sélectionnez la page Web à ouvrir. Pour afficher les favoris, appuyez sur FAVORIS. Bluetooth La fonction Bluetooth crée une connexion sans fil directe entre deux appareils sur de courtes distances. Pour échanger des données ou des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils, utilisez la fonction Bluetooth. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains appareils, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. • N’utilisez pas la fonction Bluetooth de manière illégale (par exemple, pour la copie pirate de fichiers ou l’enregistrement de communications à des fins commerciales). Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des répercussions d’une utilisation illégale de la fonction Bluetooth. Pour activer la fonction Bluetooth, depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth, puis faites glisser le curseur Bluetooth vers la droite. Web et réseau 53 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Connexions → Bluetooth → Analyser pour afficher la liste des appareils détectés. Sélectionnez l’appareil auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter, puis acceptez la demande d’autorisation automatiquement générée sur les deux appareils pour confirmer l’opération. Envoyer et recevoir des données De nombreuses applications prennent en charge le transfert de données via la fonction Bluetooth. C’est le cas, par exemple, de l’application Galerie. Ouvrez l’application Galerie, sélectionnez une image, appuyez sur → Bluetooth, puis sélectionnez un appareil Bluetooth. Ensuite, pour recevoir l’image, confirmez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth sur l’autre appareil. Lorsqu’un autre appareil vous envoie des données, acceptez la demande d’autorisation Bluetooth émanant de cet autre appareil. Les fichiers reçus sont enregistrés dans le dossier Download. Si vous recevez un nouveau contact, il est automatiquement ajouté à votre liste de contacts. 54 Multimédia Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique. Appuyez sur Musique depuis la liste des applications. Écouter de la musique Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique, puis un morceau à écouter. Appuyez sur l’image de l’album en bas de l’écran pour afficher le lecteur MP3 en plein écran. Passer au morceau suivant. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Régler le volume. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Modifier le mode de répétition. Redémarrer le morceau en cours de lecture ou revenir au morceau précédent. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Activer la lecture aléatoire. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Recherche d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Définir le fichier comme votre morceau favori. Multimédia 55 Pour écouter de la musique à volume égal, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Volume intelligent. Lorsque la fonction Volume intelligent est activée, le volume effectif peut être plus élevé que celui réglé sur l’appareil. Soyez prudent et évitez toute exposition prolongée à des niveaux sonores élevés, car cela pourrait provoquer des séquelles auditives. Volume intelligent peut ne pas être activée pour certains fichiers. Pour personnaliser vos réglages audio lors de l’écoute de musique avec un casque ou un écouteur, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Lecteur → Adapt Sound → Activé. Lorsque vous réglez le volume au niveau 14 ou supérieur, l’option d’adaptation du son (Adapt Sound) n’est pas appliquée. Si vous baissez le volume au niveau 13 ou inférieur, l’option est de nouveau appliquée. Définir un morceau comme sonnerie d’alarme Pour utiliser le morceau de musique en cours de lecture comme sonnerie d’alarme, appuyez sur → Définir comme tonalité d’alarme. Créer des listes de lecture Faites votre propre sélection de morceaux de musique. Appuyez sur Listes lect., puis sur → Créer une liste de lecture. Saisissez un titre, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez les morceaux à inclure dans la liste de lecture, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour ajouter le morceau de musique en cours de lecture à une liste de lecture, appuyez sur → Aj. liste lecture. Écouter de la musique par catégorie Écoutez de la musique classée par atmosphère musicale. L’appareil crée automatiquement la liste de lecture. Appuyez sur → Coin musique et sélectionnez une atmosphère. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs atmosphères en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran. Multimédia 56 Appareil photo Utilisez cette application pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos. Pour visionner les photos et des vidéos prises avec l’appareil, utilisez l’application Galerie (p. 61). Appuyez sur Appareil photo depuis la liste des applications. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Prendre des photos Prendre une photo Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . Afficher le mode en cours. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Afficher davantage d’options. Basculer entre l’appareil photo et le caméscope. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Multimédia 57 Mode de capture Il existe plusieurs effets de photo. Appuyez sur MODE, puis faites défiler les modes à droite de l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. • Auto : ce mode permet à l’appareil photo d’évaluer l’environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. • Beauté : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de visages plus claires pour obtenir des images plus douces. • Son & prise : ce mode permet de prendre une photo et d'enregistrer le son de la scène. Pour prendre une photo, appuyez sur . L’appareil enregistre quelques secondes de contenu audio après la prise de vue. Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans ce mode, le son est enregistré par le microphone interne. • Panorama : ce mode permet de prendre une photo panoramique composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : – Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. – Maintenez l’objectif, de l’appareil photo dans le cadre de guidage. – Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. • Sports : ce mode permet de prendre des photos de sujets en action. • Nuit : ce mode permet de prendre des photos dans l’obscurité. Photos panoramiques Une photo panoramique est une large image en mode paysage constituée de plusieurs clichés. Appuyez sur MODE → Panorama. Appuyez sur et déplacez l’appareil photo dans le sens de votre choix. Lorsque les deux cadres de prise de vue sont alignés, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement un autre cliché pour constituer une séquence panoramique. Pour mettre fin à la prise de vue, appuyez sur . Si l’objectif n’est plus aligné, la prise de vue s’interrompt. Multimédia 58 Appliquer des effets de filtre Utilisez les effets de filtre pour prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos uniques. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un effet de filtre. Les options disponibles varient selon le mode sélectionné. Enregistrer des vidéos Enregistrer une vidéo Faites glisser le curseur vers l’icône de caméscope, puis appuyez sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. Pour interrompre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur . La mise au point manuelle n’est pas disponible en mode caméscope. Mode d’enregistrement Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Sélectionner un des divers effets disponibles. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Afficher davantage d’options. Afficher le mode en cours. Basculer entre l’appareil photo et le caméscope. Multimédia 59 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Utilisez la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. La fonction zoom avant/arrière est disponible en cours d’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Partager des photos Appuyez sur → , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Partage : envoyer directement une photo à un autre appareil Wi-Fi Direct. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer la photo à la personne dont le visage est utilisé comme libellé. Multimédia 60 Configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo et du caméscope Pour configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo, appuyez sur . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope). Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé. • Taille des photos / Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une option de résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mesure : sélectionner une méthode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrière-plan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la luminosité à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • Balise de localisation : joindre une étiquette de géolocalisation GPS à la photo. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre de balise GPS. • Touche de volume : paramétrer l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Retardateur : prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo à l’issue d’un délai de retardement prédéfini. • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. • Luminosité : modifier la luminosité. Multimédia 61 • Guide : afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. • Nom de fichier contextuel : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche des balises contextuelles. Activez cette fonction pour utiliser les tags contexuels dans la Galerie. • Retourner l’image : inverser l’image pour créer une image miroir de la scène initiale. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement lorsque vous utilisez l’objectif avant. • Stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et vidéos. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser les paramètres de l’appareil photo/caméscope. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide pour utiliser l’appareil photo. Raccourcis Réorganisez les raccourcis pour accéder facilement aux différentes options de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur et maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de raccourci. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une option et faites-la glisser vers un autre emplacement en haut de l’écran. Galerie Utilisez cette application pour visualiser des photos ou des vidéos. Appuyez sur Galerie depuis la liste des applications. Afficher des images Lorsque vous lancez l’application, la Galerie affiche les dossiers disponibles. Lorsqu’une autre application, telle que Email, enregistre une image, le dossier Download contenant l’image est automatiquement créé. De même, si vous effectuez une capture d’écran, le dossier Screenshots est automatiquement créé. Sélectionnez un dossier pour l’ouvrir. Les images d’un dossier sont affichées par date de création. Appuyez sur une image pour l’afficher en plein écran. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher l’image précédente ou suivante. Multimédia 62 Effectuer un zoom avant et arrière Pour effectuer un zoom sur une image, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez deux fois sur l’image à l’endroit de votre choix. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran à l’endroit de votre choix ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les ; pour revenir à l’affichage initial, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Lire des vidéos Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône . Sélectionnez la vidéo que vous souhaitez regarder, puis appuyez sur . Découper les segments d’une vidéo Sélectionnez une vidéo, puis appuyez sur . Déplacez le crochet d’ouverture au début de la section souhaitée et le crochet de fermeture à la fin, puis enregistrez la vidéo. Modifier des photos En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Favoris : ajouter à votre liste de favoris. • Diaporama : lancer un diaporama de l’ensemble des photos du dossier ouvert. • Cadre photo : ajouter un cadre et des notes à une image. L’image modifiée est enregistrée dans le dossier Photo frame. • Note photo : écrire une note à l’arrière de l’image. Pour modifier la note, appuyez sur . • Copier dans le presse-papier : copier l’image dans le presse-papiers. Multimédia 63 • Imprimer : imprimer l’image en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Renommer : renommer le fichier. • Partage de photo d’ami : envoyer l’image à une personne dont le visage sert de libellé. • Rotation à gauche : pivoter dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rotation à droite : pivoter l’image dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. • Rogner : redimensionner le cadre bleu pour couper l’image. • Définir comme : définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou image d’un contact. • Détails : afficher les détails d’une image. • Paramètres : modifier les paramètres de la Galerie. Mes photos favorites En mode affichage d’une image, appuyez sur → Favoris pour ajouter l’image à votre liste de favoris. Supprimer des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur . • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur . Partager des photos Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans un dossier, appuyez sur → Sélectionner élément, sélectionnez une image, puis appuyez sur pour l'envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. • En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur pour l’envoyer à des contacts ou la partager via des services de réseaux sociaux. Multimédia 64 Définir une image comme fond d’écran En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Définir comme pour définir l’image comme fond d’écran ou l’affecter à un contact. Libellés de portraits En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags, puis cochez la case Libellé de portrait. Un cadre jaune apparaît autour du visage identifié. Appuyez sur le visage, puis sur Ajouter un nom, et sélectionnez ou ajoutez un contact. Lorsque le libellé de portrait apparaît sur une image, appuyez sur le nom et utilisez les fonctions disponibles, comme la messagerie. Selon l’angle du visage, la taille, l’expression, les conditions lumineuses ou les accessoires portés par la personne, il est possible que la reconnaissance faciale ne fonctionne pas. Utiliser les tags contextuels Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Tags → Tag contextuel, puis faites glisser le curseur Tag contextuel vers la droite pour afficher une balise contextuelle (météo, localisation, date et nom de la personne) lors de l’ouverture d’une image. Organiser les applications dans des dossiers Créez un dossier pour organiser les images ou les vidéos enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez copier ou déplacer des fichiers d’un dossier à un autre. Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur . Saisissez le nom du dossier, appuyez sur OK, puis cochez les images ou les vidéos à intégrer au nouveau dossier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une image ou une vidéo, faites-la glisser vers le nouveau dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou sur Déplacer pour déplacer. Multimédia 65 Vidéo Utilisez cette application pour lire des fichiers vidéo. Appuyez sur Vidéo depuis la liste des applications. Lire des vidéos Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la gauche. Ouvrir la liste de lecture. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Recherche d’autres appareils pour lire le fichier. Redémarrer la vidéo en cours de lecture ou revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Régler le volume. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Passer en mode d’écran flottant. Modifier le format d’écran. Déplacer le volet de commande vers la droite. Supprimer des vidéos Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez des vidéos, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. Multimédia 66 Partager des vidéos Appuyez sur → Partager via, sélectionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur OK, puis choisissez une méthode de partage. Utiliser le lecteur contextuel Utilisez cette fonctionnalité pour utiliser d’autres applications sans fermer le lecteur vidéo. Lorsque vous visionnez des vidéos, appuyez sur pour utiliser le lecteur contextuel. Pour agrandir le lecteur, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour le réduire, rapprochezles. Pour déplacer le lecteur, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé, puis faites-le glisser vers un autre emplacement. YouTube Utilisez cette application pour regarder des vidéos à partir du site Web YouTube. Appuyez sur YouTube depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Visionner des vidéos Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un mot-clé. Sélectionnez l’un des résultats de recherche obtenus pour visionner la vidéo correspondante. Appuyez sur l’écran, puis sur et faites pivoter ensuite l’appareil vers la gauche pour afficher la vidéo en plein écran. Partager une vidéo Sélectionnez la vidéo à partager, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mettre une vidéo en ligne Appuyez sur → Vidéos ajoutées → , sélectionnez une vidéo, saisissez les informations de la vidéo, puis appuyez sur ENVOYER. 67 Boutiques d’applications et multimédia Play Store Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications et des jeux, gratuits ou payants, pouvant s’exécuter sur votre appareil. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour effectuer une recherche à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Désinstaller des applications Désinstallez les applications téléchargées sur Play Store. Appuyez sur → Mes applications, sélectionnez une application à supprimer depuis la liste des applications installées, puis appuyez sur DÉSINSTALLER. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 68 Samsung Apps Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des applications Samsung, gratuites ou payantes. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site apps.samsung.com. Appuyez sur Samsung Apps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie. Appuyez sur CATÉGORIES pour sélectionner une catégorie. Pour rechercher une application, appuyez sur en haut de l’écran, puis saisissez un mot-clé dans le champ de recherche. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour la télécharger, appuyez sur Gratuit. Si l’application est payante, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer l’achat. Lorsqu’une nouvelle version d’une application installée est disponible, une icône de mise à jour apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis en haut de l’écran. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône pour mettre à jour l’application. Play Livres Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des fichiers de livre. Appuyez sur Play Livres depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Boutiques d’applications et multimédia 69 Play Films Utilisez cette application pour regarder, télécharger et louer des films ou des émissions TV. Appuyez sur Play Films depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Musique Utilisez cette application pour écouter de la musique à l’aide de l’appareil ou de la musique diffusée sur le service Cloud de Google. Appuyez sur Play Musique depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Jeux Utilisez cette application pour télécharger des jeux et y jouer. Appuyez sur Play Jeux depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Play Kiosque Utilisez cette application pour lire les articles les plus récents. Appuyez sur Play Kiosque depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 70 Utilitaires Mémo Cette application permet d’enregistrer des informations importantes à sauvegarder et à consulter ultérieurement. Appuyez sur Mémo depuis la liste des applications. Ajouter et gérer des catégories Créez des catégories afin de trier et gérer vos mémos. Pour ajouter une catégorie, appuyez sur → Ajouter une catégorie, saisissez le nom d’une catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour supprimer une catégorie, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis sur près de la catégorie concernée. Pour renommer une catégorie, sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur → Renommer une catégorie, nommez la catégorie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour modifier l’ordre des catégories, appuyez sur → Modifier les catégories, puis appuyez sur près de la catégorie concernée et faite-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas, vers une nouvelle position. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lors de la rédaction d’un mémo, utilisez les options suivantes : • : créer ou définir une catégorie. • : insérer des images. • : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer. Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Enreg. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur le contenu du mémo. Utilitaires 71 Naviguer parmi les mémos Parcourez les mémos miniatures en faisant défiler l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer un mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un mémo, puis appuyez sur . Pour imprimer les mémos en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Pour supprimer des mémos, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez les mémos, puis appuyez sur . Afficher un mémo Appuyez sur la miniature d’un mémo pour l’ouvrir. Pour supprimer le mémo, appuyez sur . Pour envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . Pour imprimer le mémo en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante, appuyez sur . Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. S Planner Utilisez cette application pour gérer des événements et des tâches. Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Créer un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Événement : saisir un événement avec un paramètre de répétition en option. • Tâche : saisir une tâche avec un paramètre de priorité en option. Utilitaires 72 Pour ajouter plus rapidement un événement ou une tâche, appuyez deux fois sur une date. Saisissez un titre et indiquez le calendrier que vous souhaitez utiliser pour la synchronisation. Appuyez ensuite sur Modif. détails événement ou sur Modifier détails tâche pour ajouter d’autres détails, comme la fréquence de répétition de l’événement ou de la tâche, son association ou non à une alerte préalable ou le lieu concerné. Invitez d’autres personnes à l’événement en envoyant un e-mail. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail dans la zone Participants ou appuyez sur pour ouvrir la liste de contacts. Joignez une carte indiquant le lieu de l’événement. Saisissez l’adresse dans le champ Emplacement, appuyez sur près du champ, puis signalez l’endroit précis en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur la carte qui apparaît. Synchroniser avec Google Agenda Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Comptes → Google sous Mes comptes, sélectionnez le compte Google, puis cochez la case Synchroniser Calendrier. Pour réaliser la synchronisation manuellement et mettre le calendrier à jour, appuyez sur S Planner → → Synchroniser depuis la liste des applications. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches synchronisés, appuyez sur → Calendriers, puis cochez le compte Google. Utilitaires 73 Modifier le type de calendrier En mode paysage, appuyez en haut à gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez l’un des différents types de calendrier incluant l’année, le mois, la semaine, etc. Rechercher un événement ou une tâche Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un critère de recherche. Pour afficher les événements ou les tâches de la date du jour, appuyez sur Aujourd’hui tout en haut de l’écran. Supprimer un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, puis appuyez sur → Supprimer. Partager un événement ou une tâche Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, appuyez sur → Partager via, puis sélectionnez un mode de partage. Mode Enfant Utilisez ce widget pour offrir à vos enfants un environnement ludique et sécurisé en les empêchant d’accéder à certaines applications ou certains contenus. Avant d’utiliser ce widget, vous devez le télécharger et l’installer. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Mode Enfant → Installer. Une fois installé, le widget apparaît sur l’écran d’accueil et dans la liste des applications. Pour démarrer le mode Enfants, appuyez sur Mode Enfant depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Lorsque vous lancez ce widget pour la première fois, appuyez sur Définir un code PIN au bas de l’écran. Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l’écran. • Si le widget Mode Enfant est accidentellement désinstallé, vous pouvez le réinstaller. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Widgets, puis maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le widget Mode Enfant. Faites glisser le widget sur l’écran d’accueil et appuyez sur Mode Enfant pour le réinstaller. • La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 74 Dropbox Utilisez cette application pour enregistrer et partager des fichiers avec d’autres personnes via le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Lorsque vous enregistrez des fichiers dans Dropbox, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel le service Dropbox est installé. Appuyez sur Dropbox depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Connectez-vous à votre compte Dropbox. Si vous n’en possédez pas, créez un compte Dropbox. Une fois la Dropbox activée, appuyez sur Activer Chargements appareil photo pour télécharger automatiquement sur Dropbox les photos et les vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo de l’appareil. Pour afficher les photos ou les vidéos importées, appuyez sur . Pour partager ou supprimer des fichiers ou créer des albums, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Pour importer des fichiers dans Dropbox, appuyez sur → → Transférer ici → Photos ou vidéos ou Autres fichiers. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans Dropbox, sélectionnez un fichier. En mode affichage d’une image ou d’une vidéo, appuyez sur pour les ajouter à la liste des favoris. Pour ouvrir des fichiers dans la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . Pour afficher les notifications, appuyez sur . Cloud Utilisez cette fonction pour synchroniser vos fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou Dropbox. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Cloud. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Synchroniser avec le compte Samsung Pour synchroniser les fichiers, sélectionnez votre compte Samsung ou appuyez sur Paramètres sync. Utilitaires 75 Sauvegarder ou restaurer des données Pour sauvegarder ou restaurer des données avec votre compte Samsung, appuyez sur Sauvegarder ou Restaurer. Synchroniser avec la Dropbox Appuyez sur Associer le compte Dropbox, puis accédez au compte Dropbox. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Autoriser afin que l’appareil synchronise automatiquement les fichiers avec la Dropbox dès que vous effectuez des modifications. Google Drive Utilisez cette application pour créer et modifier des documents et les partager avec d’autres personnes via le service de stockage Google Drive. Lorsque vous créez des documents ou téléchargez des fichiers dans Google Drive, votre appareil les synchronise automatiquement avec le serveur Web et tout autre ordinateur sur lequel Google Drive est installé. Accédez à vos fichiers sans transfert ou téléchargement. Appuyez sur Drive depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Hancom Office Viewer Cette application permet de consulter des documents dans différents formats, y compris des feuilles de calcul et des présentations. Appuyez sur Hancom Office Viewer depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Utilitaires 76 Rechercher des documents Appuyez sur Ouvrir pour parcourir un document. Lorsque vous parcourez un document, utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : créer un dossier. • : récupérer de nouveaux documents. • : trier des documents et des dossiers. • : modifier le mode d’affichage. • : sélectionner des documents ou des dossiers. Pour rechercher des documents récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Documents récents. Lire des documents Appuyez sur un document dans Documents récents ou dans un dossier. Appuyez sur ou sur , puis utilisez l’une des fonctions suivantes : Traitement de texte • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Utilitaires 77 Présentation • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Diaporama : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la première page. • À partir de la diapositive active : démarrer un diaporama à partir de la page en cours. • Mode Présentateur : afficher les outils de présentation sur l’appareil lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un moniteur externe. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Feuille de calcul • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Descriptif du document : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Trier : trier les cellules selon des critères spécifiques. • Afficher les formules : afficher les formules à l’intérieur des cellules à la place des résultats. • Figer les volets : garder la ligne sélectionnée en place. • Quadrillage : afficher ou masquer les grilles de ligne. • Afficher tous les commentaires : afficher ou masquer des mémos sur le document. • Zone d’impression : sélectionner une zone à imprimer. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Modifier : modifier le document. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l’application. • Aide : afficher des informations sur Hancom Office Viewer. Utilitaires 78 PDF • Rechercher : rechercher du texte. • Envoyer : envoyer le document à d’autres personnes ou le partager. • Propriétés : afficher les détails du document, comme le titre, la date et l’auteur. • Zoom : modifier la taille de l’affichage. • Masquer les commentaires : afficher ou masquer les commentaires sur le document. • Défilement vertical / Affichage en continu / Défilement horizontal : modifier le mode d’affichage. • Mode lecture : afficher le contenu du document uniquement, sans les marges. • Atteindre la page : accéder à une page indiquée. • Signets : afficher des signets sur le document. • Imprimer : imprimer le document en connectant l’appareil à une imprimante. Certaines imprimantes peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec l’appareil. Alarme Utilisez cette application pour définir des alarmes pour les événements importants. Appuyez sur Alarme depuis la liste des applications. Activer ou désactiver cette alarme. Utilitaires 79 Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , sélectionnez l’heure d’activation de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition de l’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. • Alarme géolocalisée : définir une position. L’alarme ne se déclenche qu’une fois que vous vous trouvez à l’endroit indiqué. • Répéter : définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’alarme doit sonner une nouvelle fois et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : utiliser cette option pour que votre appareil simule des sons naturels avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour répéter l’alarme après une période donnée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Supprimer une alarme Appuyez sur → Supprimer, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur OK. Horloge mondiale Utilisez cette application pour vérifier l’heure de nombreuses grandes villes dans le monde. Appuyez sur Horloge mondiale depuis la liste des applications. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez une horloge, puis appuyez sur . Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Utilitaires 80 Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Appuyez sur Calculatrice depuis la liste des applications. Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l’option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Pour afficher l’historique des calculs, appuyez sur pour masquer le clavier. Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur → Effacer l’historique. S Voice Utilisez cette application pour commander vocalement l’appareil pour qu’il exécute différentes fonctions. Appuyez sur S Voice depuis la liste des applications. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Cette application n’est pas prise en charge dans certaines langues. Voici quelques exemples de commandes vocales : • Ouvrir le lecteur MP3 • Lancer la calculatrice • Vérifier le calendrier Conseils pour améliorer la reconnaissance vocale : • Parlez clairement. • Parlez dans des endroits tranquilles. • N’utilisez pas de langage injurieux ni d’argot. • Évitez de parler avec un accent local. Selon l’environnement où vous vous trouvez ou la manière dont vous parlez, il se peut que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas vos commandes ou qu’il exécute des commandes erronées. Utilitaires 81 Recherche Google Utilisez cette application pour effectuer une recherche non seulement sur Internet, mais aussi dans les applications et le contenu de l’appareil. Appuyez sur Google depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Effectuer une recherche sur l’appareil Appuyez sur le champ de recherche, puis saisissez un mot-clé. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur , puis énoncer un mot-clé. Si les applications ne renvoient aucun résultat, le navigateur Web apparaît, affichant les résultats de recherche. Étendre la recherche Pour sélectionner les applications qui doivent faire l’objet d’une recherche, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Recherche sur la tablette, puis cochez les éléments correspondants. Google Now Démarrez la recherche Google pour afficher les cartes Google Now qui vous indiquent, dès que vous en avez besoin, la météo du jour, les infos trafic en temps réel, vos prochains rendez-vous, et bien plus encore. Rejoignez Google Now lorsque vous ouvrez pour la première fois la recherche Google. Pour modifier les paramètres de Google Now, appuyez sur → Paramètres, puis faites glisser le curseur Google Now vers la gauche ou la droite. Utilitaires 82 Recherche vocale Utilisez cette application pour rechercher des pages Web oralement. Appuyez sur Recherche vocale depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Quand l’instruction Parlez maintenant apparaît à l’écran, prononcez un mot-clé ou une expression. Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à tous les types de fichiers stockés dans l’appareil, y compris les images, vidéos, musiques et clips musicaux. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Visionner des fichiers Les fichiers enregistrés dans l’appareil sont triés par critères. Depuis le volet gauche de l’écran, sélectionnez l’une des catégories suivantes : • Date : afficher les fichiers regroupés par date. • Dossiers Favoris : afficher les raccourcis vers les dossiers. • Dossiers : afficher les fichiers enregistrés dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire, ainsi que les raccourcis vers les serveurs FTP. • Catégories : afficher les fichiers triés selon leurs types. • Applications : afficher les fichiers enregistrés ou créés dans des applications spécifiques. Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis un fichier ou un dossier à ouvrir. Utilitaires 83 Sélectionnez une catégorie, appuyez sur , puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • Sélectionner : sélectionner des fichiers ou des dossiers. • Trier par : trier les fichiers ou les dossiers. • Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris. • Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran d’accueil. • Ajouter FTP : ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. • Rechercher des périphériques : rechercher des périphériques dont le partage multimédia est activé. • Options d’affichage : modifier les options d’affichage des fichiers. Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez un fichier ou un dossier, puis utilisez l’une des options suivantes : • : envoyer des fichiers à d’autres contacts ou les partager. • : supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers. • : déplacer des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • : copier des fichiers ou des dossiers vers un autre dossier. • → Accéder au dossier : accéder au dossier où se trouve le fichier sélectionné. • → Renommer : renommer un fichier ou un dossier. • → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris : ajouter un raccourci vers le dossier dans Dossiers Favoris. • → Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil : ajouter un raccourci à un fichier ou un dossier vers l’écran d’accueil. • → Zip : compresser des fichiers ou des dossiers pour créer un fichier zip. • → Détails : afficher les détails d’un fichier ou d’un dossier. Rechercher un fichier Appuyez sur , puis saisissez un critère de recherche. Afficher les informations de mémoire Appuyez sur pour afficher les informations de mémoire relatives à l’appareil et à la carte mémoire. Utilitaires 84 Modifier le mode d’affichage Appuyez sur pour modifier le mode d’affichage. Créer un dossier Appuyez sur , saisissez le nom du dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Ajouter des raccourcis à des dossiers Ajoutez un raccourci aux dossiers fréquemment utilisés dans Dossiers Favoris. Sélectionnez un dossier et appuyez sur → Ajouter aux dossiers Favoris. Ajouter des raccourcis de serveur FTP à l’appareil Ajouter un raccourci vers un serveur FTP dans Dossiers. Appuyez sur → Ajouter FTP, saisissez les informations sur le serveur FTP, puis appuyez sur OK. 85 Géolocalisation Maps Utilisez cette application pour repérer la position de votre appareil, rechercher des lieux ou obtenir un itinéraire. Appuyez sur Maps depuis la liste des applications. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Rechercher des lieux Recherchez des lieux en saisissant une adresse ou un mot-clé. Une fois le lieu trouvé, sélectionnez-le afin d’afficher des informations détaillées. Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’aide. Obtenir un itinéraire Appuyez sur pour définir une adresse de départ et une adresse de destination, et choisir un mode de transport. L’appareil affiche l’itinéraire à suivre pour arriver à destination. 86 Paramètres Accéder au menu des paramètres Utilisez cette application pour configurer l’appareil, définir les paramètres d’une application et ajouter des comptes. Appuyez sur Paramètres depuis la liste des applications. Connexions Wi-Fi Activez la fonction Wi-Fi pour permettre la connexion à un réseau Wi-Fi et accéder à Internet ou à d’autres périphériques réseau. Pour utiliser des options, appuyez sur . • Paramètres avancés : personnalisez les paramètres Wi-Fi. • Touche WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’une touche WPS. • Entrée PIN WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi-Fi sécurisé à l’aide d’un code PIN WPS. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Wi-Fi. Politique de mise en veille Wi-Fi Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés → Wi-Fi activé en mode veille. Paramètres 87 Paramètres de notification réseau L’appareil détecte les réseaux Wi-Fi ouverts et affiche une icône dans le volet des raccourcis lorsqu’un réseau est disponible. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → → Paramètres avancés et cochez la case Notification réseau pour activer cette fonctionnalité. Wi-Fi Direct Le Wi-Fi Direct autorise la connexion directe entre deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur Connexions → Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activez la fonction Bluetooth pour échanger des informations sur de courtes distances. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Délai d'expiration de la visibilité : définissez la durée pendant laquelle l’appareil est visible. • Fichiers reçus : affichez les fichiers reçus via la fonction Bluetooth. • Renommer le périphérique : changez le nom de l’appareil. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide à propos du Bluetooth. Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de l’appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Paramètres 88 Utilisation des données Suivez le trace du volume de données utilisées. • Cycle d’util. des données : indiquez la date à laquelle effectuer la vérification mensuelle des données. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Synchroniser les données automatiquement : activez ou désactivez la synchronisation automatique des applications. Vous pouvez sélectionner les informations à synchroniser pour chaque compte dans Paramètres → Général → Comptes. • Points d’accès mobiles : sélectionnez des points d’accès mobiles Wi-Fi afin d’empêcher que les applications fonctionnant en arrière-plan ne les utilisent. Position Modifiez les paramètres des informations de localisation. • Mode : sélectionnez une méthode pour recueillir vos données de localisation. • DEMANDES DE LOCALISATION RÉCENTES : affichez les applications qui requièrent votre position et la batterie qu'elles consomment. • SERVICES DE LOCALISATION : affichez les services de localisation que votre appareil utilise. • Mes endroits : définissez des profils correspondant à des adresses spécifiques qui vous aideront à localiser votre position lorsque vous utilisez des options GPS, Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth. Plus de réseaux Personnalisez les paramètres permettant de contrôler les connexions avec d’autres appareils ou réseaux. Impression Configurez les paramètres pour les modules d’extension d’imprimante installés sur l’appareil. Vous pouvez rechercher les imprimantes disponibles ou en ajouter une manuellement pour imprimer des fichiers via le réseau Wi-Fi ou les services de Cloud. Paramètres 89 VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. Appareils à proximité • NOM DE L’APPAREIL : affichez le nom de l’appareil. • Contenus partagés : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir partager son contenu avec d’autres appareils. • Appareils autorisés : affichez la liste des appareils qui peuvent accéder à votre appareil. • Appareils refusés : affichez la liste des appareils qui ne sont pas autorisés à accéder à votre appareil. • Destination de téléchargement : sélectionnez l’emplacement de la mémoire dans laquelle enregistrer les fichiers multimédia téléchargés. • Téléch. depuis autres app. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser le chargement à partir d’autres appareils. Appareil Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de l’appareil. • Volume : réglez le volume de la musique et des vidéos, des sons système et des notifications. • Notifications : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les notifications, telles que les messages entrants. • Sélections audibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG : modifiez les paramètres de notification pour chaque application. • Son en cas d’appui : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Adapt Sound : personnalisez vos réglages audio pour écouter de la musique. Paramètres 90 Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. • Luminosité : définissez la luminosité de l’écran. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Écran de veille : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer l’économiseur d’écran lorsque l’appareil est connecté à une station d’accueil ou est en cours de chargement. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Fenêtres multiples Activez la fonction Multi-fenêtres pour exécuter plusieurs applications sur le même écran en même temps. • Ouvrir en vue Multi-fenêtre : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il active la fonction Fenêtres multiples lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers dans Mes fichiers ou Vidéo. De même, l’appareil désactive cette fonction lorsque vous affichez les pièces jointes des messages. Écran de verrouillage Modifiez les paramètres de l’écran de verrouillage. • Déverrouillage de l’écran : activez la fonction de déverrouillage sécurisé de l’écran. Les options suivantes peuvent varier selon la fonction de déverrouillage d’écran sélectionnée. • Options du widget Horloge : configurez les paramètres pour le widget horloge. – Taille de l’horloge : modifiez la taille de l’horloge. – Afficher la date : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la date en même temps que l’heure. • Raccourcis : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher et modifier les raccourcis des applications sur l’écran verrouillé. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Paramètres 91 • Message personnel : paramétrez l’appareil pour afficher un message personnel sur l’écran verrouillé. – Modifier un massage personnel : modifiez le message personnel. • Infos propriétaire : saisissez les informations que vous souhaitez voir apparaître sur l'écran verrouillé. • Effet de déverrouillage : sélectionnez un effet à appliquer lorsque vous déverrouillez l’écran. • Texte d’aide : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher un texte d’aide sur l’écran verrouillé. Fond d’écran Modifiez les paramètres du fond d’écran. • Écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. • Écran de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. • Écrans d’accueil et de verrouillage : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil et de l’écran de verrouillage. Police Modifiez les paramètres de la police. • Police : modifiez le type de police du texte affiché à l’écran. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. Volet des raccourcis Personnalisez les éléments apparaissant dans le volet des raccourcis. • Luminosité et volume : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche les barres de réglage de la luminosité et du volume dans le volet des raccourcis. • Applications recommandées : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche la liste des applications recommandées dans le volet des raccourcis en fonction de vos actions, par exemple lorsque vous connectez un casque ou un écouteur à l’appareil. • Déf. bout. config. rapide : réorganisez les touches de paramétrage rapide dans le volet des raccourcis. Paramètres 92 Accessibilité Les services d’accessibilité sont des fonctions spéciales destinées aux personnes présentant des handicaps physiques. Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour améliorer l’accessibilité à l’appareil. • Rotation auto. écran : paramétrez l’interface pour qu’elle pivote automatiquement en même temps que l’appareil. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai à l’issue duquel l’écran doit s’éteindre automatiquement. • Énoncer les mots de passe : paramétrez l’appareil pour que les mots de passe que vous saisissez sur les sites Web à l’aide de la fonction TalkBack soient énoncés à voix haute. • Mode appui unique : paramétrez l’appareil pour commander les notifications en appuyant sur la touche plutôt qu’en la faisant glisser. • Afficher le raccourci : ajoutez un raccourci vers le menu Accessibilité ou TalkBack dans le menu rapide qui apparaît lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. • Gérer l’accessibilité : exportez ou importez les paramètres d’accessibilité afin de les partager avec d’autres appareils. – Exporter : exportez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier. – Mise à jour : importez les paramètres d’accessibilité en cours sous forme de fichier. – Partager via : envoyez le fichier des paramètres d’accessibilité à d’autres personnes. • TalkBack : activez le service TalkBack qui propose des commentaires parlés. • Taille de police : modifiez la taille de la police. • Gestes d’agrandissement : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière à l’aide des doigts. • Couleurs négatives : inversez les couleurs d’affichage pour une meilleure visibilité. • Réglage des couleurs : définissez une zone de l’écran dans laquelle la saisie tactile est inopérante. • Rappel de notification : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne lorsque vous avez des notifications et définissez un intervalle pour la répétition de l’alerte. • Raccourci d’accessibilité : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir activer TalkBack lorsque vous maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et maintenez deux doigts appuyés à l’écran. Paramètres 93 • Options synthèse vocale : – MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . – Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. – Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. – État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. • Balance audio : réglez la balance audio lors de l’utilisation d’un casque à double oreillette. • Audio mono : activez le réglage audio monophonique lorsque vous utilisez une seule oreillette. • Désactiver tous les sons : désactivez tous les sons de l’appareil. • Sous-titres Google (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Google et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Sous-titres Samsung (CC) : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des sous-titres sur les contenus pris en charge par Samsung et pour modifier les paramètres des sous-titres. • Menu assistant : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir afficher l’icône d’assistance qui vous permettra d’accéder aux fonctions prises en charge par les touches externes ou les options du volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez également modifier le menu de l’icône de raccourci. – Main dominante : sélectionnez la main gauche ou droite pour une utilisation aisée du menu d’assistance. – Modif. : personnalisez les éléments apparaissant sur le menu d’assistance. • Durée de l’appui prolongé : définissez le délai de reconnaissance lorsque vous maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’écran. • Contrôle interaction : activez le mode Contrôle par interaction afin d’éviter que l'appareil réagisse aux saisies malencontreuses qui pourraient se produire dans une application. Mode Blocage Sélectionnez les notifications qui seront bloquées et la durée du blocage. Paramètres 94 Contrôle Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de la saisie de texte. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de la langue sélectionnée. Langue Sélectionnez la langue d’affichage des menus et des applications. Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres du clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . La disponibilité des options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sélectionner langue de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Texte intuitif : activez le mode de saisie intuitive pour que des suggestions de mots s’affichent au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de la saisie intuitive. • Remplacement automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour corriger les fautes d’orthographe et les mots incomplets en appuyant sur la barre d’espace ou un signe de ponctuation. • Majuscules auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir mettre automatiquement en majuscules la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). • Espace auto : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Ponctuation automatique : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Aucun(e) : paramétrez l’appareil pour désactiver la fonction de balayage du clavier. • Saisie en continu : autorisez la saisie continue qui consiste à faire glisser le doigt d’une lettre à l’autre sur le clavier, sans le soulever. Paramètres 95 • Contrôle du curseur : activez la fonction de navigation intelligente qui permet de déplacer le curseur en faisant défiler le clavier. • Son : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Aperçu du caractère : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une image agrandie de chaque caractère saisi. • Aide : accédez aux informations d’aide du clavier Samsung. • Réinitialiser paramètres : réinitialisez les paramètres du clavier Samsung. Saisie vocale Google Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . • Sélect. langues saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. • Bloquer termes choquants : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il bloque les mots injurieux lors de la saisie vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. Outil reconnais. vocale Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale. Cette fonction apparaît lorsque vous utilisez une application de reconnaissance vocale. Recherche vocale Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Masquer mots injurieux : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • A propos de : affichez les informations concernant la version. • Ouvrir via touche accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer S Voice en appuyant deux fois sur la touche Accueil. • Réveil vocal : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir lancer la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide d’une commande de réveil quand vous utilisez S Voice. Paramètres 96 • Événements manqués : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vérifie les messages ou événements manqués lorsque vous lancez S Voice en appuyant sur la touche du casque/écouteur. • Adresse personnelle : saisissez l’adresse à utiliser dans les informations de localisation de la reconnaissance vocale. • Se connecter à Facebook : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Facebook pour utiliser Facebook à l’aide de l’application S Voice. • Se connecter à Twitter : indiquez oralement les informations de votre compte Twitter pour l’utiliser avec l’application S Voice. Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes : • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale. • Détection du mot clé Ok Google : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il lance la reconnaissance vocale lorsque vous prononcez la commande Ok Google lorsque vous utilisez l’application de recherche. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Sortie vocale : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vous prévienne de l’action en cours à l’aide d’un retour vocal. • Bloquer termes choquants : masquez les mots injurieux dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Reconnaissance vocale hors connexion : téléchargez et installez les données linguistiques pour la saisie vocale hors-ligne. • Reconnais. personnalisée : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir optimiser la reconnaissance vocale à l’aide des informations du tableau de bord Google. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Casque Bluetooth : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu'il autorise la recherche vocale avec un casque Bluetooth lorsque ce dernier est connecté à l’appareil. Options synthèse vocale • MOTEUR TTS FAVORI : sélectionnez un moteur de synthèse vocale. Pour modifier les paramètres des moteurs de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur . • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de diction de la synthèse vocale. • Écouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. • État langue par défaut : affichez le statut de la langue par défaut pour la fonction synthèse vocale. Paramètres 97 Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connectés à l’appareil. Mouvement de paume Activez la fonction des mouvements de la main pour contrôler l’appareil par un simple contact avec l’écran tactile. • Capture d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir effectuer une capture d’écran en balayant l’écran avec le côté de la main vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Muet/Pause : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir interrompre la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en effleurant l’écran de la paume de la main. Smart Screen • Smart Stay : paramétrez l’appareil pour empêcher le rétroéclairage de se désactiver lorsque vous consultez l’écran. Général Comptes Ajoutez des comptes de messagerie électronique ou de réseaux sociaux. Cloud Modifiez les paramètres de synchronisation des données ou des fichiers avec votre compte Samsung ou le stockage Cloud Dropbox. Paramètres 98 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des paramètres et des données. • Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. • Compte de sauvegarde : configurez ou modifiez votre compte de sauvegarde Google. • Restauration auto. : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées. • Rétablir param. par défaut : restaurez les valeurs par défaut de l’appareil et supprimez toutes vos données. Date et heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les afin de contrôler l’affichage de l’heure et de la date. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, l’heure et la date sont alors réinitialisées. • Définir la date : réglez la date du jour manuellement. • Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : sélectionnez le fuseau horaire de votre zone géographique. • Format 24 heures : affichez l’heure au format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez le format de la date. Accessoires Modifiez les paramètres des accessoires. • Son station d’accueil : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous le connectez à une station d’accueil ou l’en déconnectez. • Mode de sortie audio : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir utiliser le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil lorsque l’appareil y est connecté. Paramètres 99 Gestionnaire d’applications Affichez et gérez les applications installées sur votre appareil. Applications par défaut Sélectionnez un paramètre par défaut pour utiliser des applications. Utilisateurs Paramétrez et gérez les profils utilisateurs pour des réglages personnalisés. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. • Affich. pourcentage batterie : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche l’autonomie restante de la batterie. Mode Éco. d’énergie Activez le mode Économie d’énergie et modifiez les paramètres. • Performances du CPU : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources système de l’appareil. • Sortie d’écran : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir diminuer la luminosité de l’écran. • En savoir plus : découvrez comment réduire la consommation de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations relatives à la quantité de stockage disponible sur l’appareil et la carte mémoire, ou formatez une carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées. La mémoire interne de votre appareil a une capacité réelle disponible inférieure à la capacité indiquée, car elle est en partie occupée par le système d’exploitation et les applications installées par défaut. La capacité disponible peut varier lorsque vous mettez à jour l’appareil. Paramètres 100 Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de l’appareil. • Crypter l’appareil : définissez un mot de passe pour crypter les données enregistrées sur l’appareil. Vous devez saisir ce mot de passe à chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil. Chargez la batterie avant d’activer ce paramètre, car il peut arriver que le cryptage des données dure plus d’une heure. • Crypter la carte SD externe : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir crypter les fichiers contenus sur une carte mémoire. Votre appareil ne sera pas en mesure de lire les fichiers cryptés si vous le réinitialisez alors que ces paramètres sont activés. Désactivez ces paramètres avant de réinitialiser votre appareil. • Contrôle à distance : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir le contrôler à distance via Internet si vous l’égarez ou s’il vous est dérobé. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. – ENREGISTREMENT DU COMPTE : enregistrez ou connectez-vous à votre compte Samsung. – Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez l’appareil pour pouvoir autoriser la collecte des données de localisation en cas de perte ou de vol ou retrouver l’appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi. • Accéder au site Web : accédez au site Web Traçage du mobile (findmymobile.samsung.com). Ce site vous permet de repérer et de contrôler un appareil égaré ou dérobé. • Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de votre appareil. Vous pouvez autoriser les administrateurs de l’appareil à appliquer de nouvelles règles à celui-ci. • Sources inconnues : parametrez l’appareil pour autoriser l’installation d’applications provenant de sources inconnues. • Vérifier les applications : paramétrez l’appareil pour permettre à Google de vérifier que les applications ne présentent aucun danger avant de les installer. • Type de stockage : définissez un type de stockage pour les fichiers d’identification. • Infos d’ident. sécurisées : recourez à des certificats et des identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. Paramètres 101 • Installer depuis stock. périph. : installez les certificats cryptés stockés sur une clé USB. • Effacer infos identification : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe. À propos de l’appareil Accédez aux informations relatives à l’appareil, modifiez le nom de l’appareil ou mettez à jour le logiciel de l’appareil. Paramètres Google Utilisez cette application pour configurer certaines fonctions proposées par Google. Appuyez sur Paramètres Google depuis la liste des applications. 102 Dépannage Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Samsung, veuillez essayer de mettre en œuvre les solutions suivantes. Il est possible que certaines situations ne s’appliquent pas à votre appareil. Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : • Mot de passe : lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. • Code PIN : lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque vous avez activé le verrouillage de votre appareil par code PIN, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez désactiver cette fonction à l’aide du menu de verrouillage de la carte SIM. • Code PUK : si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. • Code PIN2 : lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant le code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de réseau et de service • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Lorsque vous vous déplacez, plusieurs messages d’erreur peuvent apparaître. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil ne s’allume pas • Lorsque la batterie est entièrement déchargée, il n’est pas possible d’allumer l’appareil. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, il est possible qu’elle n’ait pas été correctement insérée. Réinsérez la batterie. • Si la batterie peut être remplacée par l’utilisateur, essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réinsérez-la. Dépannage 103 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile • Si vous fixez sur l’écran tactile un cache de protection ou tout autre accessoire en option, il est possible que l’écran ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Si vous portez des gants, si vos mains ne sont pas parfaitement propres, ou si vous appuyez sur l’écran avec un objet pointu ou vos ongles, l’écran tactile risque de présenter des dysfonctionnements. • L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez bien de la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. • Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond plus ou se bloque, vous devrez éventuellement fermer les applications, ou éteindre l’appareil et le rallumer. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant 8 secondes afin de le redémarrer. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Général → Sauvegarder et réinitialiser → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le périphérique → Supprimer tout. Avant de rétablir les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. Si le problème persiste, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Impossible de passer des appels • Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone que vous composez. • Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appel pour le numéro de téléphone de l’appel entrant. Vos interlocuteurs ne vous entendent pas • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. • Vérifiez que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. • Si vous utilisez un kit piéton ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Dépannage 104 Vous percevez un écho lors des appels Réglez le volume en appuyant sur la touche de volume ou déplacez-vous. Déconnexions fréquentes du réseau cellulaire ou d’Internet, ou mauvaise qualité audio • Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée à l’appareil. • Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans une zone de mauvaise réception, vous risquez de perdre la connexion au réseau. Vos problèmes de connectivité peuvent être dus à une panne au niveau de votre opérateur. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Si vous utilisez votre appareil tout en vous déplaçant, il est possible que les services de réseau sans fil soient désactivés en raison de problèmes sur le réseau de votre opérateur. L’icône de la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur. La batterie ne se charge pas correctement (pour les chargeurs homologués Samsung) • Assurez-vous que le chargeur est correctement branché. • Si les bornes de la batterie sont sales, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger correctement ou l’appareil risque de s’éteindre. Essuyez les deux contacts dorés et réessayez de recharger la batterie. • Sur certains appareils, la batterie ne peut pas être remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour remplacer ce type de batterie, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. La batterie se décharge de plus en plus rapidement • Lorsque la batterie est exposée à des températures extrêmes, la charge utile peut être réduite. • La consommation de la batterie augmente lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctionnalités, comme les SMS et MMS, ou certaines applications, comme les jeux ou Internet. • La batterie est un consommable et sa charge utile diminue avec le temps. Dépannage 105 L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications simultanément ou sur une période prolongée, l’appareil peut chauffer. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil doit disposer de suffisamment de mémoire et sa batterie être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la s’il s’agit d’une batterie remplaçable par l’utilisateur. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Qualité des photos inférieure par rapport à l’aperçu • La qualité de vos photos peut varier selon l’environnement et les techniques photographiques utilisées. • Si vous prenez des photos avec une luminosité insuffisante, de nuit ou en intérieur, l’image risque d’être floue. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers multimédia Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur ou si vous ne parvenez pas à lire les fichiers multimédia lorsque vous les ouvrez sur votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un ordinateur ou en supprimant des éléments de l’appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si le fichier est protégé par des droits DRM, vous devez posséder une licence ou une clé pour pouvoir le lire. • Assurez-vous que les formats de fichiers sont pris en charge par l’appareil. Pour confirmer les formats de fichier compatibles avec votre appareil, connectez-vous à www.samsung.com. Dépannage 106 • Votre appareil est compatible avec les photos et vidéos capturées avec ce même appareil. Les photos et vidéos capturées avec d’autres appareils peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement. • Votre appareil prend en charge les fichiers multimédia autorisés par votre opérateur ainsi que les opérateur, des autres services réseaux. Il est possible que certains contenus circulant sur Internet, comme des sonneries, vidéos ou fonds d’écran, ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est également activée sur l’appareil auquel vous tentez de vous connecter. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se trouvent bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 m maximum). Si les conseils ci-dessus ne résolvent pas le problème, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un ordinateur • Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. • Vérifiez que le pilote nécessaire est bien installé sur votre ordinateur et qu’il est à jour. • Si vous utilisez Windows XP, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est équipé de Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou de toute version ultérieure. • Vérifiez que Samsung Kies ou Windows Media Player 10 (ou toute version ultérieure) est installé sur votre ordinateur. Votre appareil ne parvient pas à détecter votre position À certains endroits, comme à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment, les signaux GPS peuvent être faibles. Si cela se produit, configurez votre appareil pour l’utilisation d’un réseau Wi-Fi ou mobile afin de trouver votre position. Dépannage 107 Les données stockées sur l’appareil ont été perdues Effectuez toujours des copies des données importantes stockées sur votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, vous ne pourriez pas récupérer vos données corrompues ou perdues. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte des données stockées sur votre appareil. Un petit espace est apparu sur le bord externe du boîtier de l’appareil • Cet espace est une caractéristique de fabrication, et il est possible d’observer un jeu ou une vibration des pièces. • Au fil du temps, la friction entre les pièces peut entraîner l’élargissement de cet espace. www.samsung.com French. 07/2014. Rev.1.1 Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. www.samsung.com User Manual SM-G530FZ English (EU). 01/2015. Rev.1.0 2 Table of Contents Read me first Getting started 6 Package contents 7 Device layout 9 Using the SIM or USIM card and battery 14 Using a memory card 16 Turning the device on and off 16 Locking and unlocking the screen Basics 17 Using the touch screen 20 Home screen layout 24 Notifications panel 26 Opening apps 26 Installing or uninstalling apps 28 Entering text 30 Screen capture 31 My Files 32 Power saving feature Network connectivity 33 Mobile data 33 Wi-Fi 34 Tethering and Mobile hotspot Personalising 36 Managing the Home and Apps screens 38 Setting wallpaper and ringtones 39 Changing the screen lock method 40 Transferring data from your previous device 41 Setting up accounts Phone 42 Making calls 43 Receiving calls 44 Options during calls Contacts 45 Adding contacts 45 Importing and exporting contacts 46 Searching for contacts Table of Contents 3 Connecting with other devices 69 Bluetooth 71 Wi-Fi Direct 73 NFC 75 Screen Mirroring 77 Mobile printing Device & data manager 78 Upgrading the device 79 Transferring files between the device and a computer 80 Backing up and restoring data 80 Performing a data reset Settings 81 About Settings 81 CONNECTIONS 85 DEVICE 88 PERSONAL 90 SYSTEM Troubleshooting Messages & email 47 Messages 48 Email Camera 51 Basic shooting 53 Shooting modes 56 Camera settings Gallery 58 Viewing content on the device 59 Editing photos Useful apps and features 60 S Planner 61 Internet 62 Video 62 Calculator 63 Clock 64 Memo 65 Radio 66 Voice Recorder 67 Google apps 4 Read me first Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or device’s software. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Apps related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by apps supplied by providers other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or apps to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. • You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services depending on your data plan. For large data transfers, it is recommended to use the Wi-Fi feature. • Default apps that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an app provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed apps, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Read me first 5 Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information 6 Getting started Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Battery • Quick start guide • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Using unapproved accessories may cause the performance problems and malfunctions that are not covered by the warranty. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Getting started 7 Device layout Microphone Touch screen Front camera Proximity sensor Multipurpose jack Home button Recent apps button Power button Earpiece Back button Volume button Speaker Headset jack GPS antenna Back cover Main antenna Rear camera Flash NFC antenna (on the battery) Getting started 8 • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Using a Samsung-approved screen protector is recommended. Unapproved screen protectors may cause the sensors to malfunction. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press to turn on or lock the screen. Recent apps • Tap to open the list of recent apps. • Tap and hold to access additional options for the current screen. Home • Press to turn on the screen while the screen is locked. • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to launch Google. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume. Getting started 9 Using the SIM or USIM card and battery Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. • Only microSIM cards work with the device. • Some LTE services may not be available depending on the service provider. For more information about service availability, contact your service provider. 1 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover. Getting started 10 2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to remove the memory card. • Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards. 3 Insert the battery with the battery’s gold-coloured contacts properly aligned with the device’s contacts. 2 1 Getting started 11 4 Replace the back cover. • Ensure that the back cover is closed tightly. • Use only Samsung-approved back covers and accessories with the device. Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the battery. 3 Pull out the SIM or USIM card. Getting started 12 Charging the battery Use the charger to charge the battery before using it for the first time. A computer can be also used to charge the battery by connecting them via the USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the battery icon appears empty. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. • If you use multiple apps at once, network apps, or apps that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these apps after fully charging the battery. Connect the USB cable to the USB power adaptor and then plug the end of the USB cable into the multipurpose jack. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. Getting started 13 • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The charger should remain close to the electric socket and easily accessible while charging. Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save the battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary apps using the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of apps. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the screen brightness. Getting started 14 Using a memory card Installing a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports the FAT and the exFAT file systems for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the My Files → SD card folder. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing upwards. 3 Replace the back cover. Getting started 15 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Unmount SD card. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the memory card. 3 Replace the back cover. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or can damage the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data. Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps → Settings → Storage → Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Getting started 16 Turning the device on and off Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. When you turn on your device for the first time or after performing a data reset, follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off. Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. Locking and unlocking the screen Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and locks it. Also, the screen turns off and automatically locks if the device is not used for a specified period. To unlock the screen, press the Power button or the Home button and flick your finger in any direction within the unlock screen area. You can change the unlock code to unlock the screen. Refer to Changing the screen lock method for more information. 17 Basics Using the touch screen • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • The device may not recognise touch inputs close to the edges of the screen, which are outside of the touch input area. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. • It is recommended to use fingers when you use the touch screen. Tapping To open an app, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the keyboard on the screen, tap it with a finger. Basics 18 Tapping and holding Tap and hold an item or the screen for more than 2 seconds to access available options. Dragging To move an item, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage or image to zoom in. Double-tap again to return. Basics 19 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Apps screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list of items, such as contacts. Spreading and pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out. Basics 20 Home screen layout Home screen The Home screen is the starting point for accessing all of the device’s features. It displays widgets, shortcuts to apps, and more. Widgets are small apps that launch specific app functions to provide information and convenient access on your Home screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or tap one of the screen indicators at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Home screen, refer to Managing the Home screen. An app A folder A screen indicator Favourite apps A widget Basics 21 Home screen options On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, or pinch your fingers together to access the available options. Basics 22 Apps screen The Apps screen displays icons for all apps, including newly installed apps. On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Apps screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right, or select a screen indicator at the bottom of the screen. To customise the Apps screen, refer to Managing the Apps screen. Access additional options. An app Screen indicators Basics 23 Indicator icons Indicator icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen. The icons listed in the table below are most common. The status bar may not appear at the top of the screen in some apps. To display the status bar, drag down from the top of the screen. Icon Meaning No signal Signal strength Roaming (outside of normal service area) GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected HSDPA network connected HSPA+ network connected / LTE network connected Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Call in progress Missed call Synced with the web Connected to computer No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message Alarm activated Mute mode activated Vibration mode activated Basics 24 Icon Meaning Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Notifications panel Using the notifications panel When you receive new notifications, such as messages or missed calls, indicator icons appear on the status bar. To see more information about the icons, open the notifications panel and view the details. To open the notifications panel, drag the status bar downwards. To close the notifications panel, drag the bar from the bottom of the screen upwards. Basics 25 You can use the following functions on the notifications panel. Launch Settings. Tap a notification and perform various actions. Clear all notifications. Adjust the brightness. Activate or deactivate options. Tap and hold a button to view more detailed settings. Using the quick setting buttons You can activate or deactivate some features on the notifications panel. Tap the following options to activate or deactivate them. You can view more detailed settings if you tap and hold a button. • Wi-Fi: Refer to Wi-Fi for more information. • Location: Refer to Location for more information. • Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Select a sound mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. Some apps do not allow screen rotation. Basics 26 • Bluetooth: Refer to Bluetooth for more information. • Mobile data: Refer to Data usage or Mobile networks for more information. • U. power saving: Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. • Mobile hotspot: Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information. • Screen Mirroring: Refer to Screen Mirroring for more information. • NFC: Refer to NFC for more information. • Sync: When you activate this feature, the device automatically syncs apps, such as calendar or email. • Flight mode: Refer to Flight mode for more information. Opening apps On the Home screen or the Apps screen, select an app icon to open it. To open the list of recently-used apps, tap and select an app icon to open. Closing an app Tap and drag an app icon to the left or right to close it. To close all running apps, tap → . Installing or uninstalling apps Samsung GALAXY Apps Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap GALAXY Apps on the Apps screen. This app may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Basics 27 Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap Install. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the button that shows the app’s price. To change the auto update settings, tap → Settings → Auto update apps, and then select an option. Play Store Use this app to purchase and download apps. Tap Play Store on the Apps screen. Installing apps Browse apps by category or tap to search for a keyword. Select an app to view information about it. To download free apps, tap INSTALL. To purchase and download apps where charges apply, tap the price and follow the on-screen instructions. To change the auto update settings, tap → SETTINGS → Auto-update apps, and then select an option. Managing apps Uninstalling or disabling apps To disable default apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Uninstall/disable apps. appears on the apps that you can disable. Select an app and tap OK. To uninstall downloaded apps, open the Apps screen and tap → Downloaded apps → → Uninstall. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, select an app, and then tap Uninstall. Basics 28 Enabling apps On the Apps screen, tap → Show disabled apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Application manager, scroll to DISABLED, select an app, and then tap Enable. • Hiding apps: Hide apps in the Apps screen only. You can continue to use hidden apps. • Disabling apps: Disable selected default apps that cannot be uninstalled from the device. You cannot use disabled apps. • Uninstalling apps: Uninstall downloaded apps. Entering text Keyboard layout A keyboard appears automatically when you enter text to send messages, create memos, and more. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. For all caps, tap it twice. Change the keyboard settings. Enter a space. Basics 29 Changing the input language Tap → Select input languages, and then select the languages to use. If you select two or more languages, you can switch between the input languages by sliding the space key left or right. Changing the keyboard layout Tap , select a language under INPUT LANGUAGES, and then select a keyboard layout to use. On 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap the corresponding key repeatedly until the desired character appears. Using additional keyboard functions Tap and hold to use various functions. Other icons may appear instead of depending on the last function that was used. • : Enter text by voice. Change the language. Open the keyboard. Start or pause entering text by voice. • : Change the keyboard settings. • : Enter emoticons. Basics 30 Changing the keyboard type Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select the type of keyboard to use. If default keyboards do not appear in the list of available keyboards or you install new keyboards, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Language and input, and then tick a keyboard. Copying and pasting 1 Tap and hold over text. 2 Drag or to select the desired text, or tap Select all to select all text. 3 Tap Copy or Cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. 4 Tap and hold at the point where the text is to be inserted and tap Paste. Screen capture Capture a screenshot while using the device. Press and hold the Home button and the Power button simultaneously. The image is saved in the Gallery → Screenshots folder. After capturing a screenshot, you can edit the image and share it with others. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some apps. Basics 31 My Files About My Files Use this app to access various files stored in the device. Tap My Files on the Apps screen. Access additional options. Search for files or folders. View files by categories. View the download history. View files stored in the device. Basics 32 Power saving feature Ultra power saving mode Use this mode to extend the device’s battery power. In ultra power saving mode, the device performs the following: • Restricts the available apps to essential and selected apps only. • Deactivates the mobile data connection when the screen turns off. • Deactivates the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth features. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Ultra power saving mode, and tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. To add an app to the Home screen, tap and select an app. To change the settings for ultra power saving mode, such as network connectivity or sound, tap → Settings. To deactivate ultra power saving mode, tap → Disable ultra power saving mode. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. 33 Network connectivity Mobile data Connect the device to a mobile network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Data usage for additional options. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Data usage, and then tick Mobile data. Alternatively, open the notifications panel and tap Mobile data to activate it. Wi-Fi Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. Refer to Wi-Fi for additional options. Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Select a network from the Wi-Fi networks list. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. 3 Tap Connect. Once the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will reconnect to that network each time it is available without requiring a password. To prevent the device connecting to the network automatically, select it from the list of networks and tap Forget. Network connectivity 34 Tethering and Mobile hotspot About tethering and mobile hotspots Use this feature to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers and other devices if an Internet connection is unavailable. Connections can be made via Wi-Fi, USB, or Bluetooth. You may incur additional charges when using this feature. Using the mobile hotspot Use your device as a mobile hotspot to share your device’s mobile data connection with other devices. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 2 Tick Mobile hotspot. • appears on the status bar. Other devices can find your device in the Wi-Fi networks list. • To set a password for the mobile hotspot, tap → Configure hotspot and select the level of security. Then, enter a password and tap Save. 3 On the other device’s screen, search for and select your device from the Wi-Fi networks list. 4 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet. Network connectivity 35 Using USB tethering Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via a USB cable. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 2 Connect your device to the computer via the USB cable. 3 Tick USB tethering. appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected. 4 On the computer, use your device’s mobile data connection. Using Bluetooth tethering Share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices via Bluetooth. Ensure that the computer that you connect to supports the Bluetooth feature. 1 Pair your device with the other device via Bluetooth. Refer to Pairing with other Bluetooth devices for more information. 2 On the Apps screen of your device, tap Settings → Tethering and Mobile hotspot. 3 Tick Bluetooth tethering. 4 On the connected device, open the Bluetooth settings screen, tap → Internet access. appears on the status bar when the two devices are connected. 5 On the connected device, use the device’s mobile data connection to access the Internet. The connection methods may vary depending on the connected devices. 36 Personalising Managing the Home and Apps screens Managing the Home screen Adding items Tap and hold an app from the Apps screen, and then drag it to the Home screen. To add widgets, open the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, tap Widgets, tap and hold a widget, and then drag it to the Home screen. Moving and removing an item Tap and hold an item on the Home screen, and then drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. You can also move frequently-used apps to the shortcuts area at the bottom of the Home screen. To remove an item, tap and hold the item. Then, drag it to Remove that appears at the top of the screen. Creating a folder 1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an app, and then drag it to Create folder that appears at the top of the screen. 2 Enter a folder name. 3 Tap , select the apps to move to the folder, and then tap Done. Personalising 37 Managing panels On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area to add, move, or remove a panel. To add a panel, scroll left to the last panel, and then tap . To move a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. To remove a panel, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to Remove at the top of the screen. To set a panel as the main Home screen, tap . Managing the Apps screen Changing the sorting method On the Apps screen, tap → View as and select a sorting method. Hiding apps Hide apps that you do not want to see on the Apps screen. On the Apps screen, tap → Hide apps, select apps, and then tap Done. To display hidden apps, tap → Show hidden apps, select apps, and then tap Done. Moving items On the Apps screen, tap → Edit. Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move the item to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. To move an item to a new panel, drag it to Create page that appears at the top of the screen. Personalising 38 Setting wallpaper and ringtones Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen or the locked screen. 1 On the Home screen, tap and hold an empty area, and then tap Wallpapers. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Settings → Display → Wallpaper. 2 Select a screen to change or apply wallpaper to. 3 Scroll left or right and select from images displayed at the bottom of the screen. To select photos taken by the device’s camera or other images, tap From Gallery. 4 Tap Set as wallpaper or Done. Changing ringtones Change ringtones for incoming calls and notifications. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Sound. To set a ringtone for incoming calls, tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and then tap Done. To use a song stored in the device or in your account as a ringtone, tap Add. To set a ringtone for notifications, tap Notifications, select a ringtone, and then tap Done. Personalising 39 Changing the screen lock method You can change the way that you lock the screen to prevent others from accessing your personal information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen → Screen lock, and then select a screen lock method. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Pattern Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. PIN A PIN consists of numbers only. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Password A password consists of characters and numbers. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Personalising 40 Transferring data from your previous device Using backup accounts You can transfer backup data from your previous device to your new device using your Google account. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. Using Samsung Smart Switch You can transfer data of the previous device to a new device via Smart Switch. Visit www.samsung.com/smartswitch for more information. Samsung Smart Switch is not supported on some devices or computers. Using Smart Switch with computers Use this feature to import a backup of your data (from selected manufacturer’s mobile devices) from a computer to your device. You can download the app from www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Back up data from a previous device to the computer. For more information, contact the device’s manufacturer. 2 On the computer, launch Smart Switch. 3 Connect your current device to the computer using the USB cable. 4 On the computer, click the manufacturer of the previous device and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer data to your device. Personalising 41 Using Samsung Kies Import a backup of your data from your computer via Samsung Kies to restore data on your device. You can also back up data to the computer via Samsung Kies. Refer to Connecting with Samsung Kies for more information. Setting up accounts Adding accounts Some apps used on your device require a registered account. Create accounts to have the best experience with your device. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts → Add account and select an account service. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. To sync content with your accounts, select an account and tick items to sync. Removing accounts On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts, select an account, and then tap → Remove account. 42 Phone Making calls Tap Phone on the Apps screen. Tap Keypad, enter a phone number, and then tap to make a voice call, or tap to make a video call. You can also make calls to phone numbers listed in Logs, Favourites, and Contacts. Add the number to the contacts Access additional options. list. Preview the phone number. View favourite contacts. Delete a preceding character. View the contacts list. View call and message logs. Enter the number using the keypad. Making calls from call logs or contacts list Tap Logs or Contacts, select a contact or a phone number, and then tap or . Phone 43 Making an international call Tap Keypad. Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, and then tap . To block outgoing international calls, tap → Settings → Call → Additional settings → Call barring → a voice call or video call. Then, tick International calls, enter password, and then tap OK. Receiving calls Answering a call When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle. Rejecting a call When a call comes in, drag outside the large circle. To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, drag the reject message bar upwards. To create various rejection messages, open the Apps screen and tap Phone → → Settings → Call → Set up call reject messages → . Missed calls If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of missed calls. Alternatively, on the Apps screen, tap Phone → Logs to view missed calls. Phone 44 Options during calls During a voice call The following actions are available: • Add call: Dial a second call. • Keypad: Open the keypad. • End call: End the current call. • Speaker: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • Bluetooth: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. Tap to view more options. During a video call The following actions are available: • → Hide me: Hide your image from the other party. • → Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party. • → Capture image: Capture the other party’s image. • → Record video: Record a video of the other party’s images. • → Memo: Create a memo. • → Messages: Send a message. • → Keypad: Open the keypad. • → Speaker off / Speaker on: Activate or deactivate the speakerphone. When using the speakerphone, speak into the microphone at the top of the device and keep the device away from your ears. • → Switch to headset / Switch to phone: Switch sound output to a connected Bluetooth headset or back to the device’s speaker. Tap the screen to use the following options: • Switch: Switch between the front and rear cameras. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • End call: End the current call. 45 Contacts Adding contacts Moving contacts from other devices You can move contacts from other devices to your device. Refer to Transferring data from your previous device for more information. Creating contacts manually 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field. 3 Tap Save. To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, tap Keypad, enter the number, and then tap Add to contacts. Importing and exporting contacts Import contacts from storage services to your device or export contacts from the device to storage services. On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Tap → Settings → Contacts → Import/export, and then select an import or export option. Contacts 46 Searching for contacts On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • / : Make a voice or video call. • : Compose a message. • : Compose an email. Adding shortcuts for contacts to the Home screen Add shortcuts to contacts that you frequently communicate with on the Home screen. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Contacts → Contacts. 2 Select a contact. 3 Tap → Add shortcut to home screen. 47 Messages & email Messages Sending messages Send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS). You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are roaming. 1 Tap Messages on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . 3 Add recipients and enter a message. Access additional options. Enter a message. Attach files. Select contacts from the contacts list. Enter recipients. Send the message. 4 Tap to send the message. Messages & email 48 Viewing incoming messages Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact. Select a contact to view the person’s messages. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages when you are roaming. While viewing a message, tap to view more options. Email Setting up email accounts Tap Email on the Apps screen. Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap → Settings → Manage accounts → . If you have more than one email account, you can set one as the default account. Tap → Manage accounts, select an account, and then tick Default account. Messages & email 49 Sending emails Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap at the bottom of the screen to compose a message. Add recipients. Add a CC or BCC. Add recipients from the contacts Enter a message. list. Enter a subject. Send the message. Access additional options. Attach images, videos and others. Save the message for later delivery. Discard the message. Messages & email 50 Reading emails Tap Email on the Apps screen. Tap , select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list or view other options. Reply to all recipients. Forward the message. Go to the previous or next message. Delete the message. Open attachments. Access additional options. Mark the message as a reminder. 51 Camera Basic shooting Taking photos or recording videos 1 Tap Camera on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. 3 Tap to take a photo or tap to record a video. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. • To capture an image from the video while recording, tap . View photos and videos you have captured. Start recording a video. Take a photo. Change camera settings. Switch between the front and rear cameras. Display current mode. Change the shooting mode. Camera 52 • The camera automatically shuts off when unused. • Make sure that the lens is clean. Otherwise, the device may not work properly in some modes that require high resolutions. • The front camera lens is suitable for taking wide-angle photos. Minor distortion may occur in wide-angle photos and does not indicate device performance problems. Launching Camera on the locked screen To quickly take photos of special moments, launch Camera on the locked screen. On the locked screen, drag outside the large circle. If is not shown, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Lock screen, and then tick Camera shortcut. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or record videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or record videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or record videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy. Camera 53 Shooting modes Auto Use this mode to allow the camera to evaluate the surroundings and determine the ideal mode for the photo. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Auto. Selfie Use this mode to take a self-portrait using the front camera. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera. 2 Tap to use the front camera. 3 Tap → Selfie. 4 Show your palm to the screen or tap to take a photo of yourself. Wide selfie Use this mode to take a wide self-portrait using the front camera. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera. 2 Tap to use the front camera. 3 Tap → Wide selfie. Camera 54 4 Show your palm to the screen or tap to take a photo of yourself. 5 Slowly rotate the device left and then right to take a panoramic photo. The device combines the photos into a single panoramic image. • Make sure to keep the blue frame inside the viewfinder window. • The subjects should remain still while taking wide self-portraits. • The resolution of a photo may be affected by lighting conditions. • The top and bottom parts of the image displayed on the preview screen may be cut out of the photo depending on the shooting conditions. Beauty face Use this mode to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Beauty face. Panorama Use this mode to take a photo composed of many photos strung together. The device identifies the photo with in Gallery. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Panorama. To get the best shot, follow these tips: • Move the camera slowly in one direction. • Keep the image within the frame on the camera’s viewfinder. • Avoid taking photos of indistinct backgrounds, such as an empty sky or a plain wall. Camera 55 Rear-cam selfie Use this mode to allow the camera to detect and focus your face automatically when you take a self-portrait using the rear camera. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Rear-cam selfie. 2 Move the frame to the position where your face will appear and adjust the frame size. 3 Position the device so the rear camera is aimed at your face. When the face is detected, the device beeps. Then, the device automatically takes the photo after 2 seconds. Continuous shot Use this mode to take a series of photos of moving subjects. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Continuous shot. Tap and hold to take several photos continuously. HDR (Rich tone) Use this mode to take photos with rich colours and reproduce details even in bright and dark areas. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → HDR (Rich tone). Without effect With effect Camera 56 Night Use this mode to take a photo in low-light conditions, without using the flash. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Night. Animated GIF Use this mode to create an animated photo from a series of photos. On the Apps screen, tap Camera → → Animated GIF. Camera settings On the Apps screen, tap Camera → . Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. • : Activate or deactivate the flash. • : Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene, when taking photos with the front camera. • : Use this for delayed-time shots. • : Select a filter effect to use when taking photos or recording videos. • / : Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. To use more options, tap . • Palm selfie: Set the device to detect your palm, so you can use it to take self-portraits. • Beauty face: Set the device to take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. Camera 57 • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • Metering modes: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • Tap to take pics: Tap the image on the preview screen to take photos. • Video size: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • Recording mode: Change the recording mode. • Location tags: Set the device to attach the location tag to the photo. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • When you share a photo with the location tag attached, the location information may be exposed to others. • Storage location: Select the memory location for storage. • Grid lines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Voice control: Set the device to take photos with voice commands. • The volume key: Set the device to use the Volume button to control the shutter or zoom function. • Reset settings: Reset the camera settings. The available options vary depending on the mode used. 58 Gallery Viewing content on the device On the Apps screen, tap Gallery and select an image or a video. Video files show the icon on the preview thumbnail. To hide or show the menu bar and the preview thumbnails, tap the screen. Access additional options. Delete the image. Modify the image. Move to the previous screen. Send the image to others. Image and video preview thumbnails Gallery 59 Editing photos Edit images by applying various effects. Tap Gallery on the Apps screen. To use this feature, you need to download and install the required app. While viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Rotate: Rotate the image. • Crop: Crop the image. • Colour: Adjust the saturation or brightness of the image. • Effect: Apply effects to the image. • Portrait: Correct red-eye, adjust and retouch faces, or make background blurry. • Sticker: Attach stickers. • Drawing: Draw on the image. • Frame: Apply frames to the image. When you are finished editing the image, tap . 60 Useful apps and features S Planner Creating events or tasks 1 Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. 2 Tap . Alternatively, select a date with no events or tasks in it and tap the date again. If the date already has saved events or tasks in it, tap the date and tap . 3 Select either event or task and enter details. • Add event: Set a start and end date for an event. You can set an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Add a task to do on a specific date. You can set an optional priority setting. Enter a title. Add more details. Select a calendar to use or sync with. Select an item. Set a start and end date for the event. 4 Tap Save to save the event or task. Useful apps and features 61 Syncing events and tasks with your accounts Tap S Planner on the Apps screen. To sync events and tasks with your accounts, tap → Sync. To add accounts to sync with, tap → Calendars → Add account. Then, select an account to sync with and sign in. When an account is added, a green circle is displayed next to the account name. To change an account’s syncing option, open the Apps screen, tap Settings → Accounts, and then select an account service. Internet 1 Tap Internet on the Apps screen. 2 Tap the address field. To change the search engine, tap the search engine icon next to the web address field. 3 Enter the web address or a keyword, and then tap Go. To view the toolbars, drag your finger downwards slightly on the screen. Read an article in reading mode. Bookmark the current webpage. Open the homepage. Move to the previously-visited page. View your bookmarks and recent Internet history. Access additional options. Open the webpage window manager. Refresh the current webpage. Useful apps and features 62 Video Playing videos Tap Video on the Apps screen. Select a video to play. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Change screen ratio. Skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Access additional options. Pause and resume playback. Rotate the screen's orientation. Adjust the volume. Calculator Use this app for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Apps screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap → Scientific calculator. Useful apps and features 63 Clock Alarm On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Alarm. Setting alarms Tap in the alarms list, set an alarm time, select the days on which the alarm will repeat, set other various alarm options, and then tap Save. To activate or deactivate alarms, tap next to the alarm in the alarms list. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time and tone for the smart alarm. A smart alarm starts at a low volume a few minutes before a preset alarm is scheduled to sound. The volume of the smart alarm increases gradually until you turn it off or the preset alarm sounds. Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. If you have previously enabled the snooze option, drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap → Select, select alarms, and then tap . World clock On the Apps screen, tap Clock → World clock. Creating clocks Tap and enter a city name or select a city from the cities list. Deleting clocks Tap → Select, select clocks, and then tap . Useful apps and features 64 Stopwatch On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Stopwatch. Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times. Tap Stop to stop timing. To clear lap times, tap Reset. Timer On the Apps screen, tap Clock → Timer. Set the duration, and then tap Start. Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off. Memo Use this app to create memos and organise them by category. Tap Memo on the Apps screen. Composing memos Tap on the memos list and enter a memo. While composing a memo, use the following options: • : Create or set a category. • : Insert images. • : Make a voice recording to insert. To save the memo, tap Save. To edit a memo, tap a memo, and then tap the content of the memo. Searching for memos Tap on the memos list and enter a keyword to search for memos that include the keyword. Useful apps and features 65 Radio Listening to the FM radio Tap Radio on the Apps screen. Before you use this app, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically when running for the first time. Tap to turn on the FM radio. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. View the list of favourite stations. Access additional options. Turn the FM radio on or off. Adjust the volume. Add the current radio station to the favourites list. Fine-tune the frequency. View the list of available stations. Record a song from the FM radio. Enter radio station frequency manually. Search for an available radio station. Scanning radio stations Tap Radio on the Apps screen. Tap → Scan, and then select a scan option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. Useful apps and features 66 Voice Recorder Recording voice memos Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen. Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone. Tap to pause recording. To cancel recording, tap . Tap to finish recording. Display the list of voice memos. Access additional options. Start recording. Recording elapsed time Playing voice memos Tap Voice Recorder on the Apps screen. Tap and select a voice memo to play. • / : Pause or resume playback. • / : Skip to the previous or next voice memo. Useful apps and features 67 Google apps Google provides entertainment, social network, and business apps. You may require a Google account to access some apps. Refer to Setting up accounts for more information. To view more app information, open the each app’s main screen and tap → Help. Some apps may not be available or may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Chrome Search for information and browse webpages. Drive Store your content on the cloud, access it from anywhere, and share it with others. Gmail Send or receive emails via the Google Mail service. Google Search quickly for items on the Internet or your device. Google Settings Configure settings for some features provided by Google. Google+ Share your news and follow updates that your family, friends, and others share. You can also back up your photos and videos, and more. Hangouts Chat with your friends individually or in groups and use images, emoticons, and video calls while you are chatting. Useful apps and features 68 Maps Find your location on the map, search for locations, and view location information for various places. Photos Manage photos, albums, and videos that you have saved on the device and uploaded to Google+. Play Books Download various books from Play Store and read them. Play Games Download games from Play Store and play them with others. Play Movies & TV Watch videos stored on your device and download various content to watch from Play Store. Play Music Discover, listen to, and share music on your device. Play Newsstand Read news and magazines that interest you in one convenient location. Voice Search Search quickly for items by saying a keyword or phrase. YouTube Watch or create videos and share them with others. 69 Connecting with other devices Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via Bluetooth. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. Connecting with other devices 70 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth, tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it, and then tap Scan. The detected devices are listed. To set the device as visible to other devices, tap the device name. 2 Select a device to pair with. If your device has paired with the device before, tap the device name without confirming the auto-generated passkey. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. 3 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many apps support data transfer via Bluetooth. You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other Bluetooth devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Bluetooth, and then select a device to transfer the image to. If the device you want to pair with is not in the list, request that the device turns on its visibility option. Or, set your device as visible to other devices. 4 Accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device. Connecting with other devices 71 Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder. Unpairing Bluetooth devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Bluetooth. The device displays the paired devices in the list. 2 Tap next to the device’s name to unpair. 3 Tap Unpair. Wi-Fi Direct About Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. Connecting to other devices 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. 2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. The detected devices are listed. 3 Select a device to connect to. To connect to multiple devices, tap → Multi-connect. To change the device name, tap → Rename device. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device to confirm. Connecting with other devices 72 Sending and receiving data You can share data, such as contacts or media files, with other devices. The following actions are an example of sending an image to another device. Sending an image 1 On the Apps screen, tap Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct, select a device to transfer the image to, and then tap Done. 4 Accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request on the other device. Receiving an image When another device sends you an image, accept the Wi-Fi Direct authorisation request. The received image is saved in the Gallery → Download folder. Ending the device connection 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Wi-Fi. 2 Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. The device displays the connected devices in the list. 3 Tap End connection → OK to disconnect the devices. Connecting with other devices 73 NFC About NFC Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for transportation or events after downloading the required apps. The battery contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the battery carefully to avoid damaging the NFC antenna. Using the NFC feature Use the NFC feature to send images or contacts to other devices, and read product information from NFC tags. If you insert a SIM or USIM card that has a payment feature, you can use the device to make payments conveniently. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. Place the NFC antenna area on the back of your device near an NFC tag. The information from the tag appears. Ensure that the device’s screen is unlocked. Otherwise, the device will not read NFC tags or receive data. Connecting with other devices 74 Making a purchase with the NFC feature Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile payment service. To register or get more information about the service, contact your service provider. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. Touch the NFC antenna area on the back of your device to the NFC card reader. To set the default payment app, tap Tap and pay and select an app. The payment services list may not include all available payment apps. Sending data Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. 1 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. 2 Tap Android Beam and tap the Android Beam switch to activate it. 3 Select an item and touch the other device’s NFC antenna to your device’s NFC antenna. 4 When Touch to beam. appears on the screen, tap your device’s screen to send the item. Connecting with other devices 75 Screen Mirroring About Screen Mirroring Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle or HomeSync and then share your contents. You can also use this feature with other devices that support the Wi-Fi Miracast feature. Screen mirroring -enabled devices (AllShare Cast dongle, HomeSync and Wi-Fi Miracast devices) • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Miracast-enabled devices that do not support High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP 2.X) may not be compatible with this feature. • Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network connection. • To save energy, deactivate this feature when not in use. • If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency, AllShare Cast dongles or HomeSync may not be detected or connected. • If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience. Connecting with other devices 76 Viewing content on a TV Before you connect your device to a TV, connect the TV and the screen mirroring-enabled device. To set up the connection, refer to the device’s user manual. The following actions are an example of viewing content on a TV connected via an AllShare Cast dongle. 1 Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the TV using an HDMI cable. 2 On the TV, select a connection mode, such as HDMI mode, to connect an external device. 3 On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Screen Mirroring. The detected devices are listed. 4 Select a device to connect to. Your device’s screen appears on the TV screen. If you connect the device for the first time, tap and hold the dongle’s name in the list and enter the PIN shown on the TV screen. 5 Open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device. Connecting with other devices 77 Mobile printing Connect the device to a printer via Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct, and print images or documents. Some printers may not be compatible with the device. Adding printer plug-ins Add printer plug-ins for printers you want to connect the device to. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing → Add printer, and search for a printer plug-in in Play Store. Select a printer plug-in and install it. Connecting to a printer On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Printing, select a printer plug-in, and then tap the switch at the top right of the screen to activate it. The device searches for printers that are connected to the same Wi-Fi network as your device. Select a printer to use as the default printer. To add printers manually, select a printer plug-in, tap → Add printer → , enter details, and then tap OK. To change print settings, select a printer plug-in and tap → Printing settings. Printing content While viewing content, such as images or documents, tap → Print, and then select a printer. 78 Device & data manager Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → About device → Software update → Update. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Download the latest version of Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information about how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Device & data manager 79 Transferring files between the device and a computer Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. Do not disconnect the USB cable from the device when you are transferring files. Doing so may cause data loss or device damage. • Do not disconnect the device from the computer when you play files saved in the device on the connected computer. After you finish playing the file, disconnect the device from the computer. • The devices may not connect properly if they are connected via a USB hub. Directly connect the device to the computer’s USB port. Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device → Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer app that manages media contents and personal information with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Device & data manager 80 Backing up and restoring data Keep your personal information, app data, and settings safe on your device. You can back up your sensitive information to a backup account and access it later. 1 Tap Settings on the Apps screen. 2 Tap Backup and reset and tick Back up my data. 3 Tap Backup account and select an account as the backup account. To restore data, you must sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard. You can launch and open the setup wizard by performing a factory data reset on the device. If you do not sign in to your Google account via the setup wizard, you cannot restore the backup data. Performing a data reset Delete all settings and data on the device. Before performing a factory data reset, ensure you back up all important data stored on the device. Refer to Backing up and restoring data for more information. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. The device automatically restarts. 81 Settings About Settings Use this app to configure the device, set app options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Apps screen. CONNECTIONS Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi, and then tap the Wi-Fi switch to activate it. To use options, tap . • Scan: Search for available networks. • Wi-Fi Direct: Activate Wi-Fi Direct and connect devices directly via Wi-Fi to share files. • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy Tap → Advanced → Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. When the screen is turned off, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses mobile networks if it is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid additional charges, set this option to Always. Settings 82 Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. Tap → Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. On the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth, and then tap the Bluetooth switch to activate it. To use more options, tap . • Visibility timeout: Set duration that the device is visible. • Received files: View received files via Bluetooth. Tethering and Mobile hotspot Use the device as a mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with other devices. Refer to Tethering and Mobile hotspot for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Tethering and Mobile hotspot. • Mobile hotspot: Use the mobile hotspot to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network. You can use this feature when the network connection is not available. • USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless modem for the computer. • Bluetooth tethering: Use Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile data connection with computers or other devices via Bluetooth. Settings 83 Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. On the Settings screen, tap Flight mode. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount and customise the settings for the limitation. On the Settings screen, tap Data usage. • Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network. • Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for mobile data usage. • Data usage cycle: Set a monthly reset date to monitor data usage between periods. To use more options, tap . • Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming. • Restrict background data: Set the device to disable sync in the background while using a mobile network. • Auto sync data: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of apps, such as calendar or email. You can select what information to sync for each account in Settings → Accounts. • Show Wi-Fi usage: Set the device to show your data usage via Wi-Fi. • Mobile hotspots: Select mobile hotspots to prevent apps that are running in the background from using them. Location Change settings for location information permissions. On the Settings screen, tap Location, and then tap the Location switch to activate it. • Mode: Select a method to collect your location data. • RECENT LOCATION REQUESTS: View which apps request your current location information and their battery usage. • LOCATION SERVICES: View the location services your device is using. Settings 84 NFC Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information. On the Settings screen, tap NFC, and then tap the NFC switch to activate it. • Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. • Tap and pay: Set the default payment app for mobile payments. The payment services list may not include all available payment apps. Screen Mirroring Activate the screen mirroring feature and share your display with others. On the Settings screen, tap Screen Mirroring. Printing Download a printer app to print files. On the Settings screen, tap Printing. More networks Customise settings to control networks. On the Settings screen, tap More networks. Default messaging app Select the default app to use for messaging. Mobile networks • Mobile data: Set the device to use data connections on any mobile network. • Data roaming: Set the device to use data connections when you are roaming. • Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). • Network mode: Select a network type. • Network operators: Search for available networks and manually register a network. Settings 85 VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). DEVICE Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. On the Settings screen, tap Sound. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. • Notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages and missed calls. • Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. • Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when you tap the buttons on the keypad. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when you select an app or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen. Display Change the display settings. On the Settings screen, tap Display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screen: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. Settings 86 • Notification panel: – Application notifications: Change the notification method for each app. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Auto rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Daydream: Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is charging. • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. Lock screen Change settings for the locked screen. On the Settings screen, tap Lock screen. • Screen lock: Change the screen lock method. The following options may vary depending on the screen lock method selected. • Dual clock: Set the device to show the dual clock. • Show date: Set the device to show the date with the clock. • Camera shortcut: Set the device to show the camera shortcut on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Owner information: Enter your information that is shown with the clock. • Unlock effect: Select an effect that you see when you unlock the screen. • Help text: Set the device to show the help text on the locked screen. Settings 87 Call Customise the settings for calling features. On the Settings screen, tap Call. • Set up call reject messages: Add or edit the message sent when you reject a call. • Answering/ending calls: – Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home button. – Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button. • Additional settings: – Caller ID: Display your caller ID to other parties for outgoing calls. – Call forwarding: Divert incoming calls to another number. – Auto area code: Set the device to automatically insert a prefix (area or country code) before a phone number. – Call barring: Block incoming or outgoing calls. – Call waiting: Allow incoming call alerts when a call is in progress. – Fixed Dialling Numbers: Activate or deactivate FDN mode to restrict calls to numbers in the FDN list. Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card. • Ringtones and keypad tones: – Ringtones: Add or select a ringtone for incoming calls. – Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. – Dialling keypad tone: Set the device to sound when buttons on the keypad are tapped. • Hide my video: Select an image to be shown to the other party. • Voicemail service: Select your voicemail service provider. • Voicemail settings: Enter the number to access the voicemail service. Obtain this number from the service provider. Application manager View and manage the apps on your device. On the Settings screen, tap Application manager. Settings 88 PERSONAL Accounts Add email or SNS accounts. On the Settings screen, tap Accounts. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. On the Settings screen, tap Backup and reset. • Back up my data: Set the device to back up settings and app data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore settings and app data when the apps are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Accessibility Use this feature to improve accessibility to the device. On the Settings screen, tap Accessibility. • Direct access: Set the device to open selected accessibility menus when you press the Home button three times quickly. • Answering/ending calls: – Pressing the home key: Set the device to answer a call when you press the Home button. – Pressing the power key: Set the device to end a call when you press the Power button. • Single tap mode: Set the device to control incoming calls or notifications by tapping the button instead of dragging it. • SERVICES: Select an accessibility app to use. Settings 89 • TalkBack: Activate TalkBack, which provides voice feedback. To view help information to learn how to use this feature, tap Settings → Launch “Explore by touch” tutorial. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read the password aloud when you enter the password while TalkBack is activated. • Font size: Change the font size. • Magnification gestures: Set the device to magnify the screen and to zoom in on a specific area. • Accessibility shortcut: Set the device to activate TalkBack when you press and hold the Power button, and then tap and hold the screen with two fingers. • Text-to-speech options: – PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select an engine for the text-to-speech feature. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. – Default language status: View the status of the current language set for the text-to speech feature. • Flash notification: Set the flash to blink when you have incoming calls, new messages, or notifications. • Turn off all sounds: Set the device to mute all device sounds, such as media sounds, and the caller’s voice during a call. • Google subtitles (CC): Set the device to display closed captions on content supported by Google and to change the closed caption settings. • Mono audio: Set the device to switch the sound output from stereo to mono when a headset is connected. • Sound balance: Set the device to adjust the sound balance when using a headset. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. • Interaction control: Activate interaction control mode to restrict the device’s reaction to inputs while using apps. Settings 90 SYSTEM Language and input Change the settings for text input. Some options may not be available depending on the selected language. On the Settings screen, tap Language and input. Language Select a display language for all menus and apps. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. • English(UK): Select a default keyboard layout. • Select input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Auto replacement: Set the device to correct misspelled and incomplete words by tapping the space bar or punctuation mark. • Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Auto spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. • Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. • Keyboard swipe: – None: Set the device to deactivate the keyboard swipe feature. – Continuous input: Set the device to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. Settings 91 • Sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set the device to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Voice search • Language: Select a language for voice recognition. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • “Ok Google” Detection: Set the device to begin voice recognition when you say the wake-up command while using the search app. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Bluetooth headset: Set the device to allow voice input of search keywords via the Bluetooth headset microphone when a Bluetooth headset is connected. Text-to-speech options • PREFERRED TTS ENGINE: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Default language status: View the status of the default language for the text-to-speech feature. Settings 92 Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. On the Settings screen, tap Date and time. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across time zones. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Automatic time zone: Set the device to receive time zone information from the network when you move across time zones. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Ultra power saving mode Extend standby time and reduce battery consumption by displaying a simpler layout and allowing limited access to an app. Refer to Ultra power saving mode for more information. On the Settings screen, tap Ultra power saving mode, and then tap the Ultra power saving mode switch to activate it. The estimated maximum standby time shows the time remaining before the battery power runs out if the device is not used. Standby time may vary depending on your device settings and operating conditions. Settings 93 Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. On the Settings screen, tap Battery. • Display battery percentage: Set the device to display the remaining battery life. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. On the Settings screen, tap Storage. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default apps occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device. Security Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card. On the Settings screen, tap Security. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Set the device to allow the installation of apps from unknown sources. • Verify apps: Set the device to check the apps for harmful content before installing them. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: Set the device to encrypt files on a memory card. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. Settings 94 • Remote controls: Set the device to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. • SIM Change Alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps locate the device when lost or stolen. • Go to website: Access the Find my mobile website (findmymobile.samsung.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device from the Find my mobile website. • Set up SIM card lock: – Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. – Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. • Make passwords visible: Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. • Security policy updates: Set the device to check and download security updates. • Send security reports: Set the device to automatically send the updated security reports to Samsung. • Storage type: Set a storage type for credential files. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various apps. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. About device Access device information, edit the device name, or update device software. On the Settings screen, tap About device. 95 Troubleshooting Before contacting a Samsung Service Centre, please attempt the following solutions. Some situations may not apply to your device. When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. While moving, error messages may appear repeatedly. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. For more information, contact your service provider. Your device does not turn on • When the battery is completely discharged, your device will not turn on. Fully charge the battery before turning on the device. • The battery may not be inserted properly. Insert the battery again. • Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and insert the battery again. Troubleshooting 96 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly • If you attach a protective cover or optional accessories to the touch screen, the touch screen may not function properly. • If you are wearing gloves, if your hands are not clean while touching the touch screen, or if you tap the screen with sharp objects or your fingertips, the touch screen may malfunction. • The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, visit a Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or turn off the device and turn it on again. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button and the Volume button down simultaneously for more than 7 seconds to restart it. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Apps screen, tap Settings → Backup and reset → Factory data reset → Reset device → Erase everything. Before performing the factory data reset, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. If the problem is still not resolved, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Calls are not connected • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Troubleshooting 97 Sound echoes during a call Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume button or move to another area. A cellular network or the Internet is often disconnected or audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. You may have connectivity problems due to issues with the service provider’s base station. Move to another area and try again. • When using the device while moving, wireless network services may be disabled due to issues with the service provider’s network. The battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Charge the battery. The battery does not charge properly (For Samsung-approved chargers) • Ensure that the charger is connected properly. • If the battery terminals are dirty, the battery may not charge properly or the device may turn off. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts and try charging the battery again. The battery depletes faster than when first purchased • When you expose the device or the battery to very cold or very hot temperatures, the useful charge may be reduced. • Battery consumption increases when you use messaging features or some apps, such as games or the Internet. • The battery is consumable and the useful charge will get shorter over time. Troubleshooting 98 Your device is hot to the touch When you use apps that require more power or use apps on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera app. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera app after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Photo quality is poorer than the preview • The quality of your photos may vary, depending on the surroundings and the photography techniques you use. • If you take photos in dark areas, at night, or indoors, image noise may occur or images may be out of focus. Error messages appear when opening multimedia files If you receive error messages or multimedia files do not play when you open them on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that the file formats are supported by the device. If a file format is not supported, such as DivX or AC3, install an app that supports it. To confirm the file formats that your device supports, visit www.samsung.com. Troubleshooting 99 • Your device supports photos and videos captured with the device. Photos and videos captured by other devices may not work properly. • Your device supports multimedia files that are authorised by your network service provider or providers of additional services. Some content circulated on the Internet, such as ringtones, videos, or wallpapers, may not work properly. Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper driver installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. Your device cannot find your current location GPS signals may be obstructed in some locations, such as indoors. Set the device to use Wi-Fi or a mobile network to find your current location in these situations. Troubleshooting 100 Data stored in the device has been lost Always make backup copies of all important data stored in the device. Otherwise, you cannot restore data if it is corrupted or lost. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of data stored in the device. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly. Copyright Copyright © 2015 Samsung Electronics This manual is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics. Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. Présentation de l’appareil Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Touche Accueil Touche Retour Touche Marche/ Arrêt Touche de volume Touche Applications récentes Connecteur à fonctions multiples Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Seules les cartes microSIM sont compatibles avec cet appareil. 2 1 Charger la batterie Avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois, vous devez charger la batterie. Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Élimination correcte Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur l’appareil et la mise au rebut de la batterie, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. Ce symbole apposé sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.), ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. Ce symbole apposé sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. Déclaration de conformité Samsung Electronics déclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux dispositions applicables de la Directive 1999/5/CE. Rendez-vous sur www.samsung.com/mobile_doc pour afficher la Déclaration de conformité. Consulter le mode d'emploi Sur votre appareil, ouvrez le navigateur Web et sélectionnez le favori correspondant au mode d’emploi dans la liste des favoris. Vous pouvez également vous rendre sur le site www.samsung.com pour consulter des informations sur l'appareil, le mode d'emploi, etc. • En fonction de votre navigateur ou de votre opérateur, le mode d’emploi peut ne pas être disponible dans les favoris. • L’accès au Web peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. SM-G530FZ Guide de prise en main rapide Respectez les avertissements ci-dessous, afin d’éviter de blesser autrui ou d’endommager l’appareil • Ne laissez pas les jeunes enfants ou les animaux de compagnie mordiller ou lécher l’appareil. • N’enfoncez pas l’appareil dans les yeux, les oreilles ou toute autre partie du corps, et ne l’introduisez pas dans la bouche. • Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil est équipé d’un flash, ne l’utilisez pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des animaux. • N’entreposez pas votre appareil dans des endroits extrêmement chauds ou froids. Il est recommandé d’utiliser votre appareil à des températures comprises entre 5°C et 35°C. • Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine ou de conteneurs à haute pression. • Conservez votre appareil au sec. • N’utilisez pas votre appareil en extérieur pendant un orage. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule. Pour protéger votre ouïe lorsque vous utilisez un casque audio, n’écoutez pas à des volumes élevés pendant trop longtemps. Pour afficher la totalité des consignes de sécurité, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. Consignes de sécurité Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes de sécurité, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. Avertissement Suivez les avertissements indiqués cidessous, afin d’éviter tout accident comme un incendie ou une explosion • Évitez de heurter ou d’endommager votre appareil. - Ne placez pas l’appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à la ceinture. - Rangez les batteries de rechange dans un étui de protection approprié. • Utilisez des batteries, des chargeurs, des accessoires et des fournitures homologué(e)s. • Évitez que le connecteur à fonction multiple et les bornes de la batterie n’entrent en contact avec des éléments conducteurs, tels que du métal ou des liquides. • Ne touchez pas l’appareil avec des mains humides. De même, n’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des environnements humides, tels que des toilettes, ou lors d’activités aquatiques, telles que la nage. • Si une partie quelconque de l’appareil est fissurée ou brisée, ou si l’appareil chauffe, cessez immédiatement de l’utiliser et apportez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung. • N’allumez pas l’appareil et ne l’utilisez pas si le compartiment de la batterie est exposé à l’air libre. Printed in Korea GH68-43006B Rev.1.0 French. 12/2014 Le contenu de ce guide de prise en main rapide peut différer par rapport à votre appareil en fonction de votre zone géographique, votre opérateur ou votre version logicielle, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Copyright © 2014 Samsung Electronics Informations sur la certification DAS Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur la certification DAS, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → À propos de l’appareil → Mentions légales → Consignes de sécurité. CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES Votre appareil mobile a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences recommandées par les directives internationales et en vigueur en France. Ces directives, développées par un organisme scientifique indépendant (ICNIRP), tiennent compte d’une marge importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la sécurité des personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé. La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou débit d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur DAS maximale autorisée est de 2,0 W/kg. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP : Valeurs DAS pour les pays de l’Union européenne : les valeurs DAS indiquées ci-dessous sont valables uniquement pour les appareils destinés à être utilisés au sein de l’Union européenne. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle DAS au niveau de la tête 0,464 W/kg DAS au niveau du corps 0,351 W/kg Des essais DAS ont été réalisés avec ce produit porté à une distance de 1,5 cm du corps. Afin de respecter les exigences en matière d’exposition aux radiofréquences, cet appareil doit être positionné au moins à cette distance du corps. www.sar-tick.com Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission de votre appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l’écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil mobile est faible. Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de quelconques précautions spéciales. Cependant, des organismes tels que l’Organisation Mondiale de la Santé et la Food and Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes souhaitant minimiser leur exposition aux radiofréquences de réduire la durée d'utilisation de l'appareil ou d’utiliser autant que possible un kit mains-libres permettant d’éloigner l’appareil mobile de leur tête et de leur corps durant son utilisation. Conformément à la législation française en vigueur, nous sommes tenus de vous informer qu’il est recommandé dans ce cas d’éloigner le téléphone du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des adolescents. Valeurs DAS pour les autres pays : pour connaître les valeurs DAS spécifiques à votre appareil, rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com/sar où vous pourrez effectuer une recherche en fonction de votre zone géographique et de la référence de votre modèle. Pour transférer des données de votre ancien appareil vers votre nouvel appareil : visitez www.samsung.com/smartswitch pour en savoir plus. www.samsung.com Mode d'emploi SM-G530FZ French. 02/2015. Rev.1.0 2 Table des matières À lire avant utilisation Démarrage 6 Contenu du coffret 7 Présentation de l’appareil 9 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie 14 Utiliser une carte mémoire 16 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil 16 Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’écran Fonctions de base 17 Utiliser l’écran tactile 20 Disposition de l'écran d’accueil 24 Volet des raccourcis 26 Ouvrir des applications 26 Installer ou désinstaller des applications 28 Saisir du texte 30 Capture d'écran 31 Mes fichiers 32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie Connectivité réseau 33 Données mobiles 33 Wi-Fi 34 Modem et point d'accès mobile Personnaliser votre appareil 36 Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications 38 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries 39 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran 40 Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil 41 Paramétrer des comptes Téléphone 42 Passer des appels 43 Recevoir des appels 44 Options en cours d’appel Contacts 45 Ajouter des contacts 45 Importer et exporter des contacts 46 Rechercher des contacts Table des matières 3 Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils 69 Bluetooth 71 Wi-Fi Direct 73 NFC 75 Screen Mirroring 77 Fonction d’impression mobile Gestionnaire d’appareils et de données 78 Mettre l’appareil à jour 79 Transférer des fichiers entre l’appareil et un ordinateur 80 Sauvegarder et restaurer des données 80 Réinitialiser les données Paramètres 81 Accéder au menu des paramètres 81 CONNEXIONS 85 APPAREIL 88 PERSONNEL 90 SYSTÈME Dépannage Messages et e-mails 47 Messages 48 Email Appareil photo 51 Prise de vue de base 53 Modes de prise de vue 56 Paramètres de l'appareil photo Galerie 58 Afficher les photos et les vidéos de l’appareil 59 Modifier des photos Applications et fonctions utiles 60 S Planner 61 Internet 62 Vidéo 62 Calculatrice 63 Horloge 64 Mémo 65 Radio 66 Enregistreur vocal 67 Applications Google 4 À lire avant utilisation Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi, afin de pouvoir utiliser votre appareil correctement et en toute sécurité. • Les descriptions sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. • En fonction de votre zone géographique, de votre opérateur ou de la version logicielle, certains contenus peuvent différer par rapport à votre appareil. • Les contenus de qualité élevée nécessitant une forte utilisation du processeur et de la RAM peuvent avoir une incidence sur les performances générales de l’appareil. Les applications en rapport avec ces contenus peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement selon les caractéristiques de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des prestataires autres que Samsung. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entraîner des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’appareil ou de ses applications. • Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus multimédia fourni(e)s avec cet appareil sont concédés sous licence et leur usage est soumis à une utilisation limitée. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ces éléments à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Les utilisateurs sont entièrement responsables de toute utilisation illégale d’un contenu multimédia. • Les services de données tels que l’envoi ou la réception de messages, le téléchargement ou le chargement de données, la synchronisation automatique ou l’utilisation de services de localisation peuvent occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre à laquelle vous avez souscrit dans le cadre de votre forfait. Pour les transferts de données volumineux, il est recommandé d’utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi. • Les applications fournies par défaut avec l’appareil peuvent être modifiées ou ne plus être disponibles, et ce, sans préavis. Si vous avez des questions à propos d’une application fournie avec l’appareil, contactez un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Pour les applications installées par l’utilisateur, contactez les opérateurs. • Toute modification du système d’exploitation de l’appareil ou installation de logiciels non officiels peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements et corrompre vos données. Ces actions constituent des violations de l’accord de licence Samsung et annuleront votre garantie. À lire avant utilisation 5 Icônes Avertissement : situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser autrui Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires 6 Démarrage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : • Appareil • Batterie • Guide de prise en main rapide • Les éléments fournis avec l’appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. • Les accessoires fournis ont été spécialement conçus pour votre appareil et peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec d’autres appareils. • L’aspect et les caractéristiques du produit peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. • Vous pouvez acheter d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. Avant tout achat, assurez-vous qu’ils sont compatibles avec votre appareil. • Utilisez exclusivement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation d’accessoires non homologués peut entraîner des problèmes de performances, ainsi que des dysfonctionnements non couverts par la garantie. • La disponibilité de l’ensemble des accessoires dépend entièrement des fabricants. Pour plus d’informations sur la disponibilité des accessoires, consultez le site Web Samsung. Démarrage 7 Présentation de l’appareil Microphone Écran tactile Objectif avant Capteur de proximité Connecteur à fonctions multiples Touche Accueil Touche Applications récentes Touche Marche/Arrêt Écouteur Touche Retour Touche de volume Haut-parleur Prise audio 3,5 mm Antenne GPS Cache arrière Antenne principale Objectif arrière Flash Antenne NFC (sur la batterie) Démarrage 8 • Ne recouvrez pas la zone autour de l’antenne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. Cela peut entraîner des problèmes de connectivité ou décharger la batterie. • L’utilisation d’une protection d’écran agréée Samsung est recommandée. Les protections d’écran non agréées peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement des capteurs. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil. • Appuyez sur cette touche pour activer ou verrouiller l'écran. Applications récentes • Appuyer sur cette touche pour ouvrir la liste des applications récentes. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour accéder à des options supplémentaires dans l’écran actuel. Accueil • Appuyer sur cette touche pour allumer l’écran lorsqu’il est verrouillé. • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. • Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour lancer la fonction de recherche Google. Retour • Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume • Appuyer sur cette touche pour régler le volume de l’appareil. Démarrage 9 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM fournie par votre opérateur, ainsi que la batterie. • Seules les cartes microSIM sont compatibles avec cet appareil. • La disponibilité de certains services 4G dépend de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus sur la disponibilité des services, contactez votre opérateur. 1 Retirez le cache arrière. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache arrière. Évitez de plier ou de déformer excessivement le cache arrière. Vous risqueriez de l’endommager. Démarrage 10 2 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas. • N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM. Si une carte mémoire venait à se coincer dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire retirer. • Veillez à ne pas perdre ou à ne pas laisser d’autres personnes utiliser votre carte SIM ou USIM. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de dommage ou désagrément résultant d’une perte ou d’un vol de carte. 3 Insérez la batterie en alignant correctement ses bornes avec celles de l'appareil. 2 1 Démarrage 11 4 Remettez le cache arrière en place. • Assurez-vous que le cache arrière est bien fermé. • Avec cet appareil, utilisez uniquement des caches arrières et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Retirer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie 1 Retirez le cache arrière. 2 Retirez la batterie. 3 Retirez la carte SIM/USIM. Démarrage 12 Charger la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez également charger la batterie à l’aide d’un ordinateur en les connectant via le câble USB. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs, des batteries et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’éclatement de la batterie ou endommager l’appareil. • Lorsque le niveau de charge est faible, l’icône de la batterie est vide. • Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil. • Si vous utilisez simultanément plusieurs applications, des applications réseaux ou des applications qui nécessitent une connexion à un autre appareil, la batterie se déchargera rapidement. Pour éviter toute déconnexion du réseau ou perte d’alimentation lors d’un transfert de données, utilisez toujours ces applications lorsque la batterie est parfaitement chargée. Branchez le câble USB sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis la fiche micro-USB sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. Démarrage 13 • L’appareil peut être utilisé en cours de chargement, mais dans ce cas, le chargement complet de la batterie risque de prendre plus de temps. • Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. • Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte ni la durée de vie, ni les performances de l’appareil. Si la température de la batterie devient trop élevée, le chargement risque de s’interrompre. • Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Lorsque la batterie est complètement chargée, déconnectez l’appareil du chargeur. Pour ce faire, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager l’appareil. • Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d'une touche Marche/Arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. L’appareil doit rester à proximité de la prise lors du chargement. • Le socle de prise de courant doit être installé à proximité du matériel et doit être aisément accessible. Réduire la consommation d’énergie de la batterie Votre appareil est doté d’options destinées à optimiser l’autonomie de votre batterie. En personnalisant ces options et en désactivant les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrièreplan, vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil plus longtemps entre deux chargements : • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil, désactivez l’écran tactile en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. • Fermez toutes les applications fonctionnant inutilement en arrière-plan à l’aide du Gestionnaire de tâches. • Désactivez la fonction Bluetooth. • Désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. • Désactivez les applications de synchronisation automatique. • Réduisez la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. • Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran. Démarrage 14 Utiliser une carte mémoire Installer une carte mémoire L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 64 Go. Selon le fabricant et le modèle, certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre appareil. • Certaines cartes mémoire peuvent ne pas être parfaitement compatibles avec l’appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager l’appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Veillez à insérer la carte mémoire du bon côté. • Seules les structures de fichiers FAT et exFAT sont compatibles avec les cartes mémoire de l’appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, l’appareil vous invite à la reformater. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil, le répertoire de fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier Mes fichiers → Carte SD. 1 Retirez le cache arrière. 2 Insérez la carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le haut. 3 Remettez le cache arrière en place. Démarrage 15 Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer la carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Démonter la carte SD. 1 Retirez le cache arrière. 2 Retirez la carte mémoire. 3 Remettez le cache arrière en place. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Cela peut occasionner une perte ou une corruption des données ou des dommages au niveau de la carte mémoire ou du périphérique. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de données résultant d’une utilisation frauduleuse ou en cas de détérioration d’une carte mémoire. Formater une carte mémoire Une carte mémoire ayant été formatée sur un ordinateur peut ne pas être compatible avec l’appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis → Paramètres → Stockage → Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Démarrage 16 Allumer et éteindre l’appareil Pour allumer l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant quelques secondes. Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois ou après avoir réinitialisé les paramètres, suivez les instructions à l'écran pour configurer votre appareil. Pour éteindre l’appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. Verrouiller et déverrouiller l’écran Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt, l’écran s’éteint et se verrouille. De même, si vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un certain temps, l’écran s’éteint et se verrouille. Pour déverrouiller l’appareil, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l’écran dans le sens de votre choix. Vous pouvez changer le code permettant de déverrouiller l'écran. Pour plus d’informations, reportezvous à la section Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran. 17 Fonctions de base Utiliser l’écran tactile • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Pour éviter d’endommager l’écran tactile, n’appuyez pas dessus avec un objet pointu et n’exercez aucune pression excessive avec vos doigts. • Il se peut que l'appareil ne reconnaisse pas la saisie tactile près des bords de l'écran, hors de la zone de saisie dédiée. • Si l’écran tactile reste inactif pendant une période prolongée, des images rémanentes risquent d’apparaître (ou persistance de l’affichage). Éteignez l’écran tactile lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser l’écran tactile avec les doigts. Appuyer Pour ouvrir une application, sélectionner un élément de menu, activer une touche à l’écran ou saisir un caractère sur le clavier à l’écran, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec un seul doigt. Fonctions de base 18 Maintenir appuyé Pour ouvrir une fenêtre d'options contextuelle, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément ou l'écran pendant plus de 2 secondes. Faire glisser Pour déplacer un élément, maintenez-y le doigt appuyé et faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Appuyer deux fois Pour effectuer un zoom sur une page Web ou une image, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Pour annuler le zoom, appuyez à nouveau à deux reprises sur l'écran. Fonctions de base 19 Effleurer Pour passer d’une fenêtre à l’autre, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications. Pour parcourir une page Web ou une liste d'éléments, telle que celle de vos contacts, faites glisser votre doigt vers le haut ou le bas de l’écran. Écarter et rapprocher les doigts Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une page Web, une carte ou une image, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Rapprochez-les pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Fonctions de base 20 Disposition de l'écran d’accueil Écran d’accueil L’écran d’accueil est le point de départ pour accéder à toutes les fonctions de l’appareil. Il affiche des widgets, des raccourcis vers les applications, etc. Les widgets sont de petits outils qui permettent d’obtenir des informations comme la météo ou l’actualité par exemple. Pour afficher d'autres volets, faites défiler l'écran vers la gauche ou la droite, ou sélectionnez l'icône d'un type de volet en bas de l'écran. Pour personnaliser l’écran d’accueil, reportez-vous à la section Gérer l’écran d’accueil. Application Dossier Volet d'écran d'accueil Applications favorites Widget Fonctions de base 21 Options de l’écran d’accueil Pour accéder aux options disponibles, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l'écran d'accueil ou rapprochez-y deux doigts. Fonctions de base 22 Liste des applications La liste des applications affiche les icônes de toutes vos applications, y compris celles récemment installées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applis pour ouvrir la liste des applications. Pour afficher d’autres volets, faites défiler la liste des applications vers la gauche ou la droite ou appuyez sur le point d'un volet d’applications en bas de l’écran. Pour plus d’informations sur la personnalisation de la liste des applications, reportez-vous à la section Gérer la liste des applications. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Application Volets d’applications Fonctions de base 23 Icônes d’informations Des icônes d'informations sont susceptibles de s'afficher dans la barre d'état en haut de l'écran. Les icônes répertoriées dans le tableau ci-dessous sont les plus courantes. Il se peut que la barre d’état ne s’affiche pas en haut de l’écran dans certaines applications. Pour afficher la barre d’état, faites glisser le doigt du haut de l’écran vers le bas. Icône Signification Aucun signal Puissance du signal Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale) Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE connecté Réseau UMTS connecté Réseau HSDPA connecté Réseau HSPA+ connecté / Réseau LTE (4G) connecté Connecté au réseau Wi-Fi Fonction Bluetooth activée GPS activé Appel en cours Appel manqué Synchronisation avec le Web Connecté à un ordinateur Carte SIM ou USIM absente Nouveau SMS ou MMS Alarme activée Profil Discret activé Mode Vibreur activé Fonctions de base 24 Icône Signification Mode Hors-ligne activé Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie Volet des raccourcis Utiliser le volet des raccourcis Lorsque vous recevez de nouvelles notifications, telles que des messages ou des appels manqués, des icônes d’information apparaissent en haut de votre écran. Pour en savoir plus sur les icônes, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et consultez les détails. Pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glisser vers le bas. Pour fermer le volet des raccourcis, faites-le glissser de bas en haut. Fonctions de base 25 Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes dans le volet des raccourcis. Ouvrir les Paramètres. Appuyer sur une notification et exécuter différentes actions. Effacer toutes les notifications. Régler la luminosité. Activer ou désactiver des options. Maintenir le doigt appuyé sur une touche pour afficher les paramètres détaillés. Utiliser les touches de paramétrage rapide Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver certaines fonctions du volet des raccourcis. Appuyez sur les options suivantes pour les activer ou les désactiver. Vous pouvez afficher des paramètres plus détaillés en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur une option. • Wi-Fi : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Wi-Fi. • Position : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Localisation. • Son / Vibreur / Muet : activer ou désactiver le son de votre appareil ou le profil Discret. • Rotation écran : autoriser ou empêcher l’interface de pivoter lorsque vous tournez l’appareil. Certaines applications ne permettent pas la rotation de l’écran. Fonctions de base 26 • Bluetooth : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Bluetooth. • Données mobiles : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections Utilisation des données ou Réseaux mobiles. • Ultra éco énergie : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Ultra économie d’énergie. • Pt accès mobile : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Modem et point d'accès mobile. • Screen Mirroring : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Screen Mirroring. • NFC : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section NFC. • Synchro. : activer cette fonction permet à l'appareil de synchroniser automatiquement les applications, comme le calendrier ou la messagerie électronique. • Mode Hors-ligne : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Mode Hors-ligne. Ouvrir des applications Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou la liste des applications, appuyez sur une icône pour ouvrir l’application correspondante. Pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez l’icône d’une application à ouvrir. Fermer une application Appuyez sur et faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur l'icône d'une application pour la fermer. Pour fermer toutes les applications en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur → . Installer ou désinstaller des applications Applications Samsung GALAXY Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur GALAXY Apps. La disponibilité de cette application dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Fonctions de base 27 Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications gratuites, appuyez sur Installer. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur la touche qui indique le prix de l’application. Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Mettre à jour les applications automatiquement, puis sélectionnez une option. Play Store Utilisez cette application pour acheter et télécharger des applications. Appuyez sur Play Store depuis la liste des applications. Installer des applications Parcourez les applications par catégorie ou appuyez sur pour rechercher une application à l’aide d’un mot-clé. Sélectionnez une application pour en afficher les informations. Pour télécharger des applications gratuites, appuyez sur INSTALLER. Pour acheter et télécharger des applications payantes, appuyez sur le prix et suivez les instructions à l’écran. Pour modifier les paramètres de mise à jour automatique, appuyez sur → PARAMÈTRES → Mise à jour automatique des applis, puis sélectionnez une option. Gérer les applications Désinstaller ou désactiver des applications Pour désactiver les applications par défaut, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur → Désinstaller/désactiver des applications. L'icône apparaît en haut à droite de chaque application qu’il est possible de désactiver. Sélectionnez une application, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour désinstaller des applications téléchargées, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur → Applications téléchargées → → Désinstaller. Une autre solution consiste à appuyer, depuis la liste des applications, sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d'applications, à sélectionner une application, puis à appuyer sur Désinstaller. Fonctions de base 28 Activer les applications désactivées Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Aff. applis désact., sélectionnez des applications à activer de nouveau, puis appuyez sur OK. Vous pouvez également, depuis la liste des applications, appuyer sur Paramètres → Gestionnaire d'applications, faire défiler jusqu'à l'onglet DÉSACTIVÉ, sélectionner une application, puis appuyer sur Activer. • Masquer des applications : masquer des applications uniquement dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez continuer à utiliser les applications masquées. • Désactiver des applications : désactiver les applications fournies par défaut et ne pouvant pas être désinstallées de l’appareil. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les applications désactivées. • Désinstaller des applications : désinstaller des applications téléchargées. Saisir du texte Disposition du clavier Un clavier apparaît automatiquement lorsque vous saisissez du texte pour envoyer des messages, créer des mémos, etc. La saisie de texte est impossible dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une des langues prises en charge. Passer à la ligne suivante. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Saisir des signes de ponctuation. Saisir des majuscules. Pour saisir l’ensemble de votre texte en majuscules, appuyez deux fois sur cette touche. Modifier les paramètres du clavier. Insérer un espace. Fonctions de base 29 Modifier la langue de saisie Appuyez sur → Sélectionner langue de saisie, puis sélectionnez les langues à utiliser. Si vous sélectionnez au moins deux langues, vous pouvez passer d'une langue de saisie à l’autre en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la barre d'espace vers la gauche ou la droite. Modifier la disposition du clavier Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une langue sous LANGUES DE SAISIE, puis sélectionnez la disposition de clavier à utiliser. Sur le Clavier 3x4, une touche correspond à trois ou quatre caractères. Pour saisir un caractère, appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur la touche correspondante jusqu’à ce que le caractère souhaité s’affiche. Utiliser les fonctions supplémentaires du clavier Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche pour utiliser diverses fonctions. Suivant la dernière fonction utilisée, d’autres icônes peuvent apparaître à la place de l'icône . • : saisir du texte en le dictant. Changer de langue. Ouvrir le clavier. Démarrer ou interrompre la saisie orale de texte. • : modifier les paramètres du clavier. • : insérer des émoticônes. Fonctions de base 30 Modifier le type de clavier Appuyez sur une zone de saisie, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur Mode de saisie, puis choisissez le type de clavier à utiliser. Si les claviers par défaut n'apparaissent pas dans la liste des claviers disponibles ou que vous installez de nouveaux claviers, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Langue et saisie, puis cochez un clavier. Copier et coller du texte 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le texte. 2 Faites glisser l'icône ou pour sélectionner le texte voulu, ou appuyez sur Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner l’intégralité du texte. 3 Appuyez sur Copier ou sur Couper. Le texte sélectionné est copié dans le presse-papier. 4 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’emplacement où le texte doit être inséré et appuyez sur Coller. Capture d'écran Vous pouvez effectuer une capure d'écran lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil. Maintenez les touches Accueil et Marche/Arrêt simultanément enfoncées. L'image est enregistrée dans le dossier Galerie → Screenshots. Après avoir réalisé une capture d'écran, vous pouvez modifier l'image et la partager avec d'autres personnes. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour certaines applications. Fonctions de base 31 Mes fichiers À propos de Mes fichiers Utilisez cette application pour accéder à divers fichiers enregistrés sur l'appareil. Appuyez sur Mes fichiers depuis la liste des applications. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Rechercher des fichiers ou des dossiers. Afficher les fichiers par catégories. Afficher l'historique de téléchargement. Afficher les fichiers stockés sur l'appareil. Fonctions de base 32 Utiliser la fonction d’économie d’énergie Mode Ultra économie d'énergie Utilisez cette fonction pour prolonger l’autonomie de la batterie. En mode Ultra économie d’énergie, l’appareil se comporte comme suit : • Il limite le nombre d’applications disponibles à l’essentiel et affiche uniquement les applications sélectionnées. • Il désactive la connexion de données mobiles quand l’écran s’éteint. • Il désactive les fonctions Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Mode Ultra économie d'énergie, puis appuyez sur le curseur Mode Ultra économie d'énergie pour activer la fonction. Pour ajouter une application à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une application. Pour modifier les paramètres du mode Ultra économie d’énergie, par exemple la connectivité réseau ou le son, appuyez sur → Paramètres. Pour désactiver le mode Ultra économie énergie, appuyez sur → Désact. Ultra économie énergie. Le délai de veille maximum estimé est le temps qu’il faut à la batterie pour se décharger complètement lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. Le délai de veille peut varier selon les paramètres de l’appareil et les conditions d’utilisation. 33 Connectivité réseau Données mobiles Connectez l’appareil à un réseau mobile pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils. Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation des données ». Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Utilisation des données, puis cochez la case Données mobiles. Une autre solution consiste à ouvrir le volet des raccourcis, puis à appuyer sur Données mobiles pour activer la fonction. Wi-Fi Connectez l’appareil à un réseau Wi-Fi pour pouvoir utiliser Internet ou partager des fichiers multimédia avec d’autres appareils Pour connaître les options supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la section « Wi-Fi ». Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas le réseau Wi-Fi, désactivez-le afin d’économiser la batterie. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Wi-Fi, puis appuyez sur le curseur Wi-Fi pour activer la fonction. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi. Les réseaux nécessitant un mot de passe sont signalés par une icône en forme de verrou. 3 Appuyez sur Connexion. Une fois l’appareil connecté à un réseau Wi-Fi, il se reconnecte automatiquement à ce réseau à chaque fois qu’il est disponible sans nécessiter de mot de passe. Pour éviter la connexion automatique de l’appareil au réseau, sélectionnez le réseau dans la liste de réseaux et appuyez sur Oublier. Connectivité réseau 34 Modem et point d'accès mobile À propos de la fonction Point d’accès mobile et modem En l’absence de connexion Internet, utilisez cette fonction pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs et d’autres appareils. Les connexions peuvent être effectuées via la fonction Wi-Fi, USB ou Bluetooth. L’utilisation de cette fonction peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Utiliser le point d’accès mobile Utilisez votre appareil comme point d’accès mobile pour partager sa connexion de données avec d’autres appareils. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile. 2 Cochez la case Point d'accès mobile. • L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état. Les autres appareils peuvent détecter le vôtre dans la liste de réseaux Wi-Fi. • Pour définir un mot de passe pour le point d’accès mobile, appuyez sur → Configurer le point d'accès, puis sélectionnez le type de sécurité. Saisissez ensuite un mot de passe, puis appuyez sur Enreg. 3 Sur l’écran de l’autre appareil, recherchez et sélectionnez votre appareil dans la liste des réseaux Wi-Fi. 4 Sur l’appareil connecté, utilisez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil pour accéder à Internet. Connectivité réseau 35 Utiliser le modem USB Partagez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil avec d’autres ordinateurs via un câble USB. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile. 2 Connectez l’appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Cochez la case Modem USB. L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état lorsque les deux appareils sont connectés. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, utilisez la connexion de données de votre appareil. Utiliser le modem Bluetooth Partagez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil avec d’autres ordinateurs via la fonction Bluetooth. Assurez-vous que l’ordinateur auquel vous vous connectez prend en charge la fonction Bluetooth. 1 Associez les deux appareils via la fonction Bluetooth. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la section Établir une connexion avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth. 2 Depuis la liste des applications de votre appareil, appuyez sur Paramètres → Modem et point d'accès mobile. 3 Cochez la case Modem Bluetooth. 4 Sur l’appareil connecté, ouvrez l’écran des paramètres Bluetooth, puis appuyez sur → Accès Internet. L'icône apparaît dans la barre d’état lorsque les deux appareils sont connectés. 5 Sur l’appareil connecté, utilisez la connexion de données mobiles de votre appareil pour accéder à Internet. Les modes de connexion peuvent varier en fonction des appareils connectés. 36 Personnaliser votre appareil Gérer l’écran d’accueil et la liste des applications Gérer l’écran d’accueil Ajouter des éléments Depuis la liste des applications, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l’écran d’accueil. Pour ajouter des widgets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l'écran d'acceuil, appuyez sur Widgets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un widget, puis faites-le glisser vers l’écran d’accueil. Déplacer et supprimer un élément Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément depuis l’écran d’accueil, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran. Vous pouvez également déplacer les applications fréquemment utilisées vers la zone de raccourcis située en bas de l’écran d’accueil. Pour supprimer un élément, maintenez le doigt appuyé dessus. Faites-le ensuite glisser vers l’option Supprimer qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Créer un dossier 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une application, puis faites-la glisser vers l’option Créer dossier qui apparaît en haut de l’écran. 2 Saisissez un nom de dossier. 3 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez les applications à déplacer vers le dossier, puis appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser votre appareil 37 Gérer les volets Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide pour ajouter, déplacer ou supprimer un volet. Pour ajouter un volet, faites défiler l'icône l’écran vers la gauche jusqu’au dernier volet, puis appuyez sur . Pour déplacer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son aperçu, puis faites-le glisser vers l’option Supprimer en haut de l’écran. Pour définir un volet comme écran d’accueil principal, appuyez sur . Gérer la liste des applications Changer le mode d'affichage Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Type d'affichage et sélectionnez un mode d'affichage. Masquer des applications Vous pouvez masquer les applications que vous ne voulez pas retrouver dans la liste des applications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Masquer les applications, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour afficher les applications masquées, appuyez sur → Afficher apps masquées, sélectionnez des applications, puis appuyez sur OK. Déplacer des éléments Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur → Modifier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à déplacer, puis faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Pour déplacer l’élément vers un autre volet, faites-le glisser vers le bord de l’écran. Pour déplacer un élément vers un tout nouveau volet, faites-le glisser vers l’option Créer une page qui s’affiche en haut de l’écran. Personnaliser votre appareil 38 Définir un fond d’écran et des sonneries Définir un fond d’écran Définissez une image ou une photo enregistrée dans l’appareil comme fond de l’écran d’accueil ou de verrouillage. 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil, puis appuyez sur Fonds d'écran. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur Paramètres → Affichage → Fond d'écran dans la liste des applications. 2 Sélectionnez un écran à modifier ou auquel appliquer un fond d’écran. 3 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite, puis sélectionnez une image parmi celles affichées en bas de l’écran. Pour sélectionner les photos que vous avez prises avec l’appareil photo ou d’autres images, appuyez sur Depuis Galerie. 4 Appuyez sur Définir comme fond d'écran ou sur OK. Modifier les sonneries Modifiez les sonneries des appels entrants et des notifications. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Son. Pour définir une sonnerie pour les appels entrants, appuyez sur Sonneries, sélectionnez une sonnerie, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour utiliser un morceau de musique stocké sur l’appareil ou sur l’un de vos comptes, comme une sonnerie, appuyez sur Ajouter. Pour définir une sonnerie pour les notifications, appuyez sur Notifications, sélectionnez une sonnerie, puis appuyez sur OK. Personnaliser votre appareil 39 Changer la méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran Vous pouvez définir une méthode de déverrouillage de l’écran pour empêcher l’accès à vos informations personnelles par autrui. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage → Déverrouillage de l'écran, puis sélectionnez une méthode de déverrouillage. Pour protéger votre appareil, vous pouvez définir un code de déverrouillage. Sans ce code, l’appareil ne pourra pas être déverrouillé. Si vous oubliez le code de déverrouillage, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. Modèle Dessinez un modèle en reliant au moins quatre points, puis recommencez pour valider. Définissez un code PIN de secours pour déverrouiller l’écran en cas d’oubli du modèle. Code PIN Un code PIN se compose uniquement de chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre chiffres, puis recommencez pour valider. Mot de passe Un mot de passe comprend des caractères et des chiffres. Saisissez au moins quatre caractères, y compris des chiffres et des symboles, puis recommencez pour valider. Personnaliser votre appareil 40 Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil Utiliser un compte de sauvegarde Vous pouvez transférer des données de sauvegarde depuis votre ancien appareil vers votre nouvel appareil à l'aide de votre compte Google. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Sauvegarder et restaurer des données. Utiliser Samsung Smart Switch Vous pouvez transférer des données de votre ancien appareil vers un nouvel appareil via Smart Switch. Visitez www.samsung.com/smartswitch pour en savoir plus. Samsung Smart Switch n’est pas pris en charge sur certains appareils ou ordinateurs. Utiliser Smart Switch avec un ordinateur Utilisez cette fonction pour importer une sauvegarde de vos données (depuis des appareils mobiles d'un fabricant sélectionné) depuis un ordinateur vers votre appareil. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis www.samsung.com/smartswitch. 1 Sauvegardez les données d'un ancien appareil sur un ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations, contactez le fabricant de l’appareil. 2 Sur l’ordinateur, lancez Smart Switch. 3 Connectez votre ancien appareil à l’ordinateur à l’aide d'un câble USB. 4 Sur l'ordinateur, sélectionnez le fabricant de l'ancien appareil, puis suivez les instructions à l'écran pour transférer les données vers votre appareil. Personnaliser votre appareil 41 Utiliser Samsung Kies Importez un fichier de sauvegarde de vos données depuis votre ordinateur via Samsung Kies pour restaurer les données sur votre appareil. Vous pouvez également sauvegarder les données sur l'ordinateur via Samsung Kies. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à la section Connecter l’appareil avec Samsung Kies. Paramétrer des comptes Ajouter des comptes Certaines applications utilisées sur l’appareil nécessitent un compte enregistré. Afin de profiter au maximum de votre appareil, créez des comptes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes → Ajouter compte et sélectionnez un service de compte. Ensuite, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour synchroniser du contenu avec vos comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis cochez les éléments à synchroniser. Supprimer un compte Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis appuyez sur → Supp. compte. 42 Téléphone Passer des appels Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Téléphone. Appuyez sur Clavier, composez un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur pour passer un appel vocal ou sur pour réaliser un appel visio. Vous pouvez également passer des appels aux numéros de téléphone répertoriés dans les menus Journal, Favoris et Contacts. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ajouter le numéro à la liste de contacts. Afficher un aperçu du numéro de téléphone. Afficher les contacts favoris. Supprimer le caractère précédent. Afficher la liste de contacts. Afficher les journaux d’appels et de messages. Composer un numéro à l’aide du clavier. Passer des appels depuis le journal d’appels ou la liste de contacts Appuyez sur Journal ou Contacts, sélectionnez un contact ou un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur ou . Téléphone 43 Appeler un numéro à l’étranger Appuyez sur Clavier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la touche 0 jusqu’à ce que le signe + apparaisse. Composez l’indicatif du pays, l’indicatif régional et le numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur . Pour interdire les appels passés à l’étranger, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Appel → Paramètres supplémentaires → Restriction d'appel → pour les appels vocaux ou les appels visio. Ensuite, cochez la case Appels internationaux, saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. Recevoir des appels Répondre à un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Rejeter un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejetez un appel entrant, faites glisser la barre des messages de rejet située en bas de l’écran vers le haut. Pour créer des messages de rejet, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → → Paramètres → Appel → Définir les messages de rejet → . Appels manqués Si vous manquez un appel, l’icône apparaît dans le volet des raccourcis. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis pour afficher la liste des appels manqués. Une autre solution consiste, depuis la liste des applications, à appuyer sur Téléphone → Journal pour afficher les messages manqués. Téléphone 44 Options en cours d’appel Options au cours d’un appel vocal Les options suivantes sont disponibles : • Ajouter : passer un autre appel. • Clavier : ouvrir le clavier. • Fin : terminer l'appel en cours. • HP : activer ou désactiver le haut-parleur. Lorsque vous utilisez le haut-parleur, parlez dans le microphone en haut de l’appareil et éloignez l’appareil de vos oreilles. • Muet : désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne puisse pas vous entendre. • Bluetooth : sélectionner un casque Bluetooth, à condition qu’il soit connecté à l’appareil. Appuyez sur pour afficher d'autres options. Options au cours d’un appel visio Les options suivantes sont disponibles : • → Masquer mon image : masquer votre image à l'interlocuteur. • → Image sortante : sélectionner l'image à afficher à votre correspondant. • → Capturer une image : capturer l’image de votre correspondant. • → Enregistrer une vidéo : enregistrer une vidéo de votre correspondant. • → Mémo : créer un mémo. • → Messages : envoyer un message. • → Clavier : ouvrir le clavier. • → Désactiver haut-parleur / Activer haut-parleur : activer ou désactiver le haut-parleur. Lorsque vous utilisez le haut-parleur, parlez dans le microphone en haut de l’appareil et éloignez l’appareil de vos oreilles. • → Basculer sur le casque / Basculer sur le téléphone : basculer la sortie audio entre le casque Bluetooth connecté ou le haut-parleur de l’appareil. Appuyez sur l’écran pour utiliser les options suivantes : • Objectif : basculer entre l'objectif avant et arrière, et inversement. • Muet : désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne puisse pas vous entendre. • Fin : terminer l'appel en cours. 45 Contacts Ajouter des contacts Transférer des contacts depuis d’autres appareils Vous pouvez transférer des contacts depuis d'autres appareils sur votre appareil. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Transférer des données depuis votre ancien appareil. Créer manuellement des contacts 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur , sélectionnez une mémoire de stockage, puis saisissez les informations du contact. • : ajouter une image. • / : ajouter ou supprimer un champ d'information. 3 Appuyez sur Enreg. Pour ajouter un numéro de téléphone à la liste de contacts à partir du clavier, appuyez sur Clavier, composez le numéro, puis appuyez sur Ajouter aux contacts. Importer et exporter des contacts Importez des contacts depuis des services de stockage ou exportez-les vers ces services. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Appuyez sur → Paramètres → Contacts → Importer/Exporter, puis sélectionnez une option d’importation ou d’exportation. Contacts 46 Rechercher des contacts Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. Utilisez l’une des méthodes de recherche suivantes : • Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou le bas. • Appuyez sur le champ de recherche tout en haut de la liste de contacts, puis saisissez vos critères de recherche. Une fois le contact sélectionné, choisissez l’une des options suivantes : • : ajouter le contact aux favoris. • / : passer un appel vocal ou visio. • : rédiger un message. • : rédiger un e-mail. Ajouter des raccourcis vers des contacts à l’écran d’accueil Ajoutez des raccourcis vers les contacts avec lesquels vous communiquez fréquemment sur l’écran d’accueil. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Contacts → Contacts. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Appuyez sur → Ajouter un raccourci à l'écran d'accueil. 47 Messages et e-mails Messages Envoyer des messages Envoyez des messages texte (SMS) ou des messages multimédia (MMS). L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Messages. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Ajoutez des destinataires, puis saisissez un message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Insérer un message. Joindre des fichiers. Sélectionner des contacts depuis votre liste de contacts. Saisir les destinataires. Envoyer le message. 4 Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Messages et e-mails 48 Lire les messages entrants Les messages entrants sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact. Pour afficher les messages d’un contact, sélectionnez ce dernier. L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires. En mode affichage d'un message, appuyez sur pour afficher d'autres options. Email Configurer des comptes de messagerie électronique Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Lorsque vous ouvrez l’application Email pour la première fois, configurez un compte de messagerie électronique. Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. Appuyez sur Suivant s’il s’agit d’un compte de messagerie électronique privé ou sur Configuration manuelle s’il s’agit d’un compte de messagerie électronique professionnel. Suivez ensuite les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration du compte. Pour configurer un compte de messagerie électronique supplémentaire, appuyez sur → Paramètres → Gérer les comptes → . Si vous disposez de plus d’un compte de messagerie électronique, vous pouvez définir l’un d’eux comme compte par défaut. Appuyez sur → Gérer les comptes, sélectionnez un compte, puis cochez la case Compte par défaut. Messages et e-mails 49 Envoyer des e-mails Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Appuyez sur l'icône en bas de l’écran pour rédiger un message. Ajouter des destinataires. Ajouter un destinataire en copie ou copie cachée. Ajouter des destinataires depuis la liste de contacts. Insérer un message. Entrer un objet. Envoyer le message. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Joindre des images, des vidéos et autres. Enregistrer le message pour l'envoyer ultérieurement. Ignorer le message. Messages et e-mails 50 Lire des e-mails Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Email. Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez un compte de messagerie électronique à utiliser. Les nouveaux messages sont récupérés. Pour récupérer manuellement les messages, appuyez sur . Appuyez sur un message pour le lire. Répondre au message. Ajouter cette adresse e-mail à votre liste de contacts ou afficher d'autres options. Répondre à tous les destinataires. Transférer le message. Passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent. Supprimer le message. Ouvrir les pièces jointes. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Identifier le message comme favori. 51 Appareil photo Prise de vue de base Prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur l’écran d’aperçu à l’endroit où l’appareil photo doit faire la mise au point. 3 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo ou sur pour enregistrer une vidéo. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant, écartez deux doigts l’un de l’autre sur l’écran ; pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez-les. • Pour capturer une image de la vidéo en cours d’enregistrement, appuyez sur . Afficher les photos et les vidéos que vous avez prises. Enregistrer une vidéo. Prendre une photo. Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Basculer entre l'objectif avant et arrière, et inversement. Afficher le mode en cours. Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Appareil photo 52 • Lorsque vous n’utilisez plus l’appareil photo, il se ferme automatiquement. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est bien propre. Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement dans certains modes nécessitant des résolutions élevées. • L’objectif avant est adapté à la prise de photos grand-angle. Il se peut qu’une distorsion mineure se produise dans les photos grand-angle ; cela ne traduit pas un problème de performances de l’appareil. Ouvrir l’appareil photo depuis l’écran verrouillé Pour prendre rapidement des photos de moments particuliers, depuis l’écran de verrouillage, démarrez l’application Appareil photo. Depuis l’écran verrouillé, faites glisser votre doigt sur l'icône . Si l’icône ne s’affiche pas, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Écran de verrouillage, puis cochez la case Raccourci Appareil photo. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Bon usage de l’appareil photo • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos d’autres personnes sans leur consentement. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos lorsque la loi l’interdit. • Ne prenez pas de photos et n’enregistrez pas de vidéos en violation de la vie privée d’autrui. Appareil photo 53 Modes de prise de vue Auto. Ce mode permet à l'appareil photo d'évaluer l'environnement et de déterminer le mode idéal de prise de vue. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Auto. Selfie Utilisez ce mode pour faire un autoportrait avec l'objectif avant. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur pour utiliser l'objectif avant. 3 Appuyez sur → Selfie. 4 Présentez la paume de la main à l'écran ou appuyez sur pour faire un autoportrait. Selfie panorama Utilisez ce mode pour faire un autoportrait grand-angle avec l'objectif avant. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur pour utiliser l'objectif avant. 3 Appuyez sur → Selfie panorama. Appareil photo 54 4 Présentez la paume de la main à l'écran ou appuyez sur pour faire un autoportrait. 5 Tournez lentement l'appareil vers la gauche, puis vers la droite pour prendre une photo panoramique. L'appareil combine les photos en une seule image panoramique. • Veillez à ce que le cadre bleu reste à l'intérieur du cadre de prise de vue. • Les sujets ne doivent pas bouger pendant la prise de vue d'autoportraits grand-angle. • Les conditions d'éclairage peuvent affecter la résolution d'une photo. • Les parties supérieures et inférieures de l'image affichée sur l'écran d'aperçu peuvent être coupées de la photo selon les conditions de prise de vue. Beauté Ce mode permet de photographier des portraits avec des couleurs plus claires afin d'obtenir des images plus douces. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Beauté. Panorama Ce mode permet de prendre une photo composée de différents clichés assemblés les uns aux autres. L’appareil identifie la photo à l’aide de l’icône dans la Galerie. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Panorama. Pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible, suivez ces conseils : • Déplacez l’appareil photo lentement dans le sens de votre choix. • Maintenez l’image à l’intérieur du cadre de prise de vue de l’appareil photo. • Évitez de prendre des photos de sujets devant des arrière-plans non identifiables, comme un ciel ou un pan de mur uni. Appareil photo 55 Selfie arrière Utilisez ce mode pour permettre à l'appareil photo de détecter votre visage et d'effectuer la mise au point dessus automatiquement lorsque vous faites un autoportrait à l'aide de l'objectif arrière. 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Selfie arrière. 2 Déplacez le cadre jusqu'à votre visage et ajustez la taille du cadre. 3 Positionnez l'appareil de manière à ce que l'objectif arrière soit dirigé vers votre visage. Lorsque le visage est détecté, l'appareil émet un bip. L'appareil prend alors automatiquement la photo après 2 secondes. Rafale Ce mode permet de prendre une série de photos de sujets en mouvement. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Rafale. Maintenez le doigt enfoncé sur la touche pour prendre plusieurs photos en continu. HDR (Ton riche) Ce mode vous permet de prendre des photos riches en couleurs et de reproduire chacun des détails, même dans des conditions de luminosité extrêmes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → HDR (Ton riche). Sans effet Avec effet Appareil photo 56 Nuit Ce mode permet de prendre une photo dans des conditions de faible éclairage, sans utiliser le flash. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → Nuit. GIF animé Ce mode permet de créer une photo animée à partir d'une série de photos. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → → GIF animé. Paramètres de l'appareil photo Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Appareil photo → . Les options suivantes sont disponibles pour les deux modes (appareil photo et caméscope) ou l'un ou l'autre des modes. • : activer ou de désactiver le flash. • : inverser l'image pour créer une image miroir de la scène originale, lorsque vous prenez des photos avec l'objectif avant. • : définir le délai à l'issue duquel l'appareil doit prendre une photo ou enregistrer une vidéo. • : sélectionner un effet de filtre à utiliser lorsque vous prenez des photos ou enregistrez des vidéos. • / : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. Pour accéder à des options supplémentaires, appuyez sur . • Selfie paume : paramétrer l'appareil de manière à ce qu'il détecte votre paume et que vous puissiez ainsi l'utiliser pour prendre des autoportraits. • Beauté : paramétrer l'appareil de manière à ce qu'il photographie des portraits avec des couleurs plus claires afin d'obtenir des images plus douces. • Valeur d'expos. : modifier la valeur d'exposition. Ce paramètre détermine la quantité de lumière reçue par le capteur de l’appareil photo. En cas de faible luminosité, utilisez une exposition plus élevée. • ISO : sélectionner une valeur ISO. Ce paramètre permet de contrôler la sensibilité lumineuse de l’appareil photo. Celle-ci est mesurée en équivalents de caméra-film. Les valeurs faibles sont destinées aux objets immobiles vivement éclairés. Les valeurs plus élevées sont pour les objets en mouvement ou faiblement éclairés. Appareil photo 57 • Balance des blancs : sélectionner une balance des blancs appropriée de sorte que les images offrent une gamme de couleurs proches de la réalité. Les paramètres sont conçus pour des situations lumineuses spécifiques. Ils sont similaires à la gamme thermique d’exposition et de balance des blancs des appareils photo professionnels. • Modes de mesure : sélectionner un mode de mesure. Ce paramètre détermine la manière dont les valeurs lumineuses sont calculées. Mesure pondérée centrale mesure la lumière d’arrièreplan au centre de la scène. Spot mesure la valeur de la lumière à un endroit spécifique. Matrice calcule la moyenne de la scène toute entière. • Photo par appui : appuyer sur l'image à l'écran pour prendre une photo. • Taille de la vidéo : sélectionner une résolution. Pour obtenir une meilleure qualité, utilisez une résolution élevée. Cependant, notez qu’une résolution élevée nécessite davantage de mémoire. • Mode enregistr. : modifier le mode d’enregistrement. • Tags de localis. : paramétrer l'appareil pour qu'il joigne la balise de localisation à la photo. • Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. • Lorsque vous partagez une photo comprenant une balise de localisation, il se peut les informations de localisation soient exposées à des tiers. • Emplac. de stockage : sélectionner l’emplacement de stockage des photos et des vidéos. • Grille : afficher des lignes directrices sur l'écran d'aperçu. • Contrôle vocal : paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il prenne des photos à l’aide de commandes vocales. • Touche de volume : utiliser la touche de volume pour contrôler l’obturateur ou le zoom. • Réinit. les paramètres : réinitialiser les paramètres de l'appareil. Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon le mode utilisé. 58 Galerie Afficher les photos et les vidéos de l’appareil Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie et sélectionnez une image ou une vidéo. Les fichiers vidéo sont caractérisés par l’icône dans l'aperçu miniature. Pour masquer ou afficher la barre de menus et les miniatures, appuyez sur l'écran. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Supprimer l’image. Modifier la photo. Revenir à l’écran précédent. Envoyer l’image à d’autres personnes. Miniatures d'aperçu des photos et des vidéos Galerie 59 Modifier des photos Modifiez vos images en leur appliquant différents effets. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Galerie. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez télécharger et installer l'application requise. En mode affichage d’une photo, appuyez sur et utilisez les fonctions suivantes : • Pivoter : pivoter l’image. • Rogner : rogner l’image. • Couleur : ajuster la saturation ou la luminosité de l’image. • Effet : appliquer des effets à l’image. • Portrait : corriger les yeux rouges, ajuster ou retoucher les visages, ou appliquer un effet de flou à l’arrière-plan. • Autocollant : appliquer des autocollants à l’image. • Dessin : dessiner sur l’image. • Cadre : appliquer des cadres à l’image. Une fois l’image modifiée, appuyez sur . 60 Applications et fonctions utiles S Planner Créer un événement ou une tâche 1 Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. 2 Appuyez sur . Vous pouvez également sélectionner une date ne comportant aucun événement ou tâche, et appuyer à deux reprise dessus. Si la date comporte déjà des événements ou tâches, appuyez sur la date et sur . 3 Sélectionnez un événement ou une tâche, et saisissez les détails. • Ajouter événement : définir la date de début et de fin d’un événement. Vous pouvez lui appliquer une option de répétition. • Ajouter une tâche : ajouter une tâche à faire à une date spécifique. Vous pouvez lui appliquer une option de priorité. Saisir un titre. Ajouter des détails. Sélectionner un calendrier à utiliser ou à synchroniser. Sélectionner un élément. Définir une date de début et de fin pour l’événement. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour sauvegarder l’événement ou la tâche. Applications et fonctions utiles 61 Synchroniser les événements et les tâches avec vos comptes Appuyez sur S Planner depuis la liste des applications. Pour synchroniser des événements et des tâches avec vos comptes, appuyez sur → Synchroniser. Pour ajouter des comptes avec lesquels effectuer la synchronisation, appuyez sur → Calendriers → Ajouter compte. Sélectionnez ensuite un compte avec lequel effectuer la synchronisation et ouvrez une session. Une fois le compte ajouté, un cercle vert apparaît près du nom du compte. Pour modifier l’option de synchronisation d'un compte, ouvrez la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres → Comptes, puis sélectionnez un service de compte. Internet 1 Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur le champ d’adresse. Pour changer de moteur de recherche, appuyez sur l’icône du moteur de recherche près du champ d’adresse Web. 3 Saisissez une adresse Web ou un mot-clé, puis appuyez sur Aller à. Pour afficher la barre de navigation, faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas de l’écran. Lire un article en mode Lecture. Enregistrer la page Web en cours dans les favoris. Ouvrir la page d'accueil. Revenir à la page précédente. Afficher vos favoris et votre historique Internet récent. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Ouvrir le gestionnaire de fenêtres de page Web. Actualiser la page Web en cours. Applications et fonctions utiles 62 Vidéo Lire une vidéo Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Vidéo. Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. Effectuer un retour ou une avance rapide en faisant glisser la barre. Modifier le format d’écran. Revenir à la vidéo précédente. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer un retour rapide. Passer à la vidéo suivante. Maintenir la touche appuyée pour effectuer une avance rapide. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Mettre en pause et reprendre la lecture. Changer l'orientation de l'écran. Régler le volume. Calculatrice Utilisez cette application pour réaliser des calculs simples ou complexes. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Calculatrice. Faites pivoter l’appareil vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique en mode Paysage. Si l'option Rotation écran est désactivée dans le volet des raccourcis, appuyez sur → Calculatrice scientifique. Applications et fonctions utiles 63 Horloge Alarme Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Alarme. Créer une alarme Appuyez sur , réglez l’heure de l’alarme, sélectionnez les jours de répétition, paramétrez diverses autres options d’alarme, puis appuyez sur Enreg. Pour activer ou désactiver les alarmes, appuyez sur près de l'alarme concernée dans la liste des alarmes. • Répéter : définir le délai à l'issue duquel l'alarme doit sonner de nouveau et le nombre de répétitions. • Alarme intelligente : définir la tonalité de l’alarme intelligente et combien de temps avant l'alarme principe elle doit sonner. Une alarme intelligente démarre à faible volume quelques minutes avant l’heure prédéfinie de l’alarme. Le volume de l’alarme intelligente augmente graduellement jusqu’à ce que vous l’éteigniez ou que vous désactiviez l’alarme principale. Arrêter ou répéter une alarme Pour éteindre une alarme, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Si vous avez précédemment activé l'option de répétition, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône pour répéter l'alarme à l'issue d'une période de répétition prédéfinie. Supprimer une alarme Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'alarme à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Horloge mondiale Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Horloge mondiale. Créer une horloge Appuyez sur , puis saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Supprimer une horloge Appuyez sur → Sélectionner, sélectionnez l'horloge à supprimer, puis appuyez sur . Applications et fonctions utiles 64 Chronomètre Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Chronomètre. Appuyez sur Début pour commencer à chronométrer. Pour enregistrer des temps intermédiaires, appuyez sur Tour. Appuyez sur Arrêter pour arrêter le chronométrage. Pour effacer les temps intermédiaires, appuyez sur Réinitialiser. Minuteur Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Horloge → Minuteur. Définissez la durée, puis appuyez sur Début. Lorsque la durée du minuteur est écoulée, faites glisser votre doigt sur l’icône . Mémo Cette application permet de créer des mémos et de les organiser par catégorie. Depuis la liste des applications, appuyez sur Mémo. Créer un mémo Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos et saisissez votre mémo. Lorsque vous rédigez un mémo, utilisez les options suivantes : • : créer ou définir une catégorie. • : insérer des images. • : enregistrer un mémo vocal et l’insérer. Pour enregistrer le mémo, appuyez sur Sauveg. Pour modifier un mémo, appuyez sur le mémo, puis sur son contenu. Rechercher des mémos Appuyez sur dans la liste des mémos, puis saisissez un mot-clé à rechercher dans les mémos. Applications et fonctions utiles 65 Radio Écouter la radio FM Appuyez sur Radio depuis la liste des applications. Avant d'utiliser cette application, vous devez brancher un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office d’antenne radio. Lorsque vous démarrez la radio FM pour la première fois, elle recherche et enregistre automatiquement les stations disponibles. Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur . Sélectionnez la station radio à écouter dans la liste, puis appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM. Afficher la liste des stations favorites. Accéder à des options supplémentaires. Allumer ou éteindre la radio FM. Régler le volume. Ajouter la station de radio en cours d’écoute à la liste des favoris. Régler précisément la fréquence. Afficher la liste des stations disponibles. Enregistrer un morceau depuis la radio FM. Entrer manuellement la fréquence radio. Rechercher manuellement les stations de radio disponibles. Rechercher des stations radio Appuyez sur Radio depuis la liste des applications. Appuyez sur → Analyser, puis sélectionnez une option de balayage. L’appareil recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations de radio FM disponibles. Sélectionnez la station radio à écouter dans la liste, puis appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM. Applications et fonctions utiles
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/layout.gif){kind=icon}
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/text.gif){kind=icon}
Samsung-GALAXY-S4-Air-View-Tutoriel-Video
Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Air Gesture - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung- GALAXY S4 - Lecteur optique - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung - GALAXY S4 - Smart Scroll - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung GALAXY S4 - ChatOn - Tutoriel - Video
Samsung GALAXY S4 - S Translator - Tutoriel - Video
